Uttarakhand Vision 2030

Department of Planning
Uttarakhand
Government Government of Uttarakhand
UTTARAKHAND
UTTARAKHAND Vision 2030

Uttarakhand was created in the year 2000 as a
Vision 2030
state to give voice to the aspirations of the
people in the hills. After achieving high growth
rate particularly in the recent years, it looks
ahead towards sustained development in the
future. Based on the Sustainable Development
Goals (SDGs) framed by the United Nations, this
document Uttarakhand: Vision 2030 lays out the
future roadmap for the state of Uttarakhand. It
outlines the vision for the SDGs and sets out
periodic targets appropriate for the state up till
2030 along with a strategy to achieve them. The
overall Vision 2030 for the state is to transform the
Uttarakhand economy into a prosperous, healthy
state such that the people are educated and
gainfully employed in an equitable society, synergy
is enhanced between the environment and the
inhabitants, and that the development process is
sustainable and inclusive.
Uttarakhand
Vision 2030
Uttarakhand
Vision 2030
Government of Uttarakhand
Department of Planning
Government of Uttarakhand
www.ihdindia.org
Prepared by:
INSTITUTE FOR HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Plot No. 84, Functional Industrial Estate (FIE), Patparganj
Delhi- 110092; Phone: +91-11-2215-9148/49;
Mobile: +91-987-117-7540
Email:- mail@ihdindia.org; Website: www.ihdindia.org
© 2018
Copyright: Department of Planning, Government of Uttarakhand
Printed at: Chauhan Offsets

Cover and page design: Mrityunjay Chatterjee
ISBN No: 978-81-88315-59-8

ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY
Contents
Message from the Chief Minister of Uttarakhand ix
Foreword by Chief Secretary x
Preface by the Secretary, Department of Planning xi
Acknowledgement xii
The Report Team xiii
Abbreviations xiv
List of Tables, Figures and Boxes xxi
Executive Summary 1
Chapter 1: Introduction 25
An Overview of the Uttarakhand Economy 27
Enablers in the Uttarakhand Economy 28
Challenges for the Uttarakhand Economy 30
Approach to Vision 2030 32
Chapter 2: Sustainable Livelihoods 39

Part 1 41
Vision and Strategy for Sustainable Livelihoods 42
Hill Agriculture / Horticulture 42
Tourism Sector 46
Other avenues for generating Sustainable Livelihoods 51
Part 2 53
SDG 1: End Poverty in All Its Forms Everywhere 53
SDG 2: End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition 63
and promote sustainable agriculture
SDG 8: Promote Sustained, Inclusive and Sustainable Economic 81
Growth, Full and Productive Employment and Decent Work for All
SDG 9: Build Resilient Infrastructure, Promote Inclusive and 97
Sustainable Industrialization and Foster Innovation
Appendix 2.1.1: Vision for Targets under SDG 1 110
Appendix 2.1.2: Targets and Indicators for SDG 1 110
Appendix 2.1.3: Schemes for SDG 1 112
Appendix 2.2.3: Schemes for Targets under SDG 2 115
UTTARAKHAND: VISION 2030
Appendix 2.3.1: Vision for Targets Under SDG 8 116

Appendix 2.4.2: Targets and indicators for SDG 9 121
Appendix 2.4.4: IT Perspective of Government of Uttarakhand 122
for Vision 2030
Appendix 2.4.5: Vision for Uttarakhand Space Application Centre, 124
Department of Science and Technology
Chapter 3: Human Development 127

SDG 3: Ensurehealthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages 132
SDG 4: Ensure Inclusive and Equitable Quality Education and 144
Promote Life long Learning Opportunities for All
SDG 6: Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and 154
sanitation for all
Appendix 3.1.4: Vision for Ayurvedic, Unani Services and Homeopathy 164
Appendix 3.3.3: Schemes Related to SDG 6 170
Chapter 4: Social Development 171

SDG 5: Achieve Gender Equality and Empower All Women 173
and Girls
SDG 10: Reduce Inequality within and Among Countries 181
SDG 16: Promote Peaceful and Inclusive Societies for 189
Sustainable Development, Provide Access to Justice to All and
Build Effective, Accountable and Inclusive Institutions at All Levels
Appendix 4.1.3: Schemes related to SDG 5 200
vi
CONTENTS

Appendix 4.3.2: Targets and Indicators related to SDG 16 204
Appendix 4.3.4: List of Services Currently Available on the Digital Seva Portal 205
Chapter 5: Environmental Sustainability 207

SDG 7: Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and 209
modern energy for all
SDG 11: Make Cities and Human Settlements Inclusive, Safe, 219
Resilient and Sustainable
SDG 12: Ensure Sustainable Consumption and Production Patterns 235
SDG 13: Take Urgent Action to Combat Climate Change and its Impacts 241
SDG 15: Protect, Restore and Promote Sustainable Use of Terrestrial 251
Ecosystems, Sustainably Manage Forests, Combat Desertification,
and Halt and Reverse Land Degradation and Halt Biodiversity Loss
Appendix 5.3.2: Targets and Indicators related to SDG 12 263
Chapter 6: Resource Mobilisation for Attaining Vision 2030 271

Appendix 6.1: Financial Resources Required for Various Sectors 286
during 2017-2030
Annexures 293
References 341
vii
UTTARAKHAND VISION 2030
x
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The Institute for Human Development (IHD) would like to express its immense gratitude to the
Government of Uttarakhand for awarding the preparation of the document Uttarakhand: Vision 2030 to
the Institute. The preparation of this document involved considerable work in which a number of per-
sons were involved.
A number of scholars at IHD have worked in this important endeavour. Dr. Tanuka Endow led the
work as its Principal Author and Editor. Dr. Balwant Mehta, Professor Sarthi Acharya, Professor Dev
Nathan, Professor Shipra Maitra and Dr. Suparna Pal contributed towards the preparation of background
papers. Additional contributions to various themes and chapters were made by Ms. Amrita Datta,
Professor I.C. Awasthi and Dr. Akhilesh Sharma. Professor Sarthi Acharya and Dr. Balwant Mehta also
contributed to consultation meetings with the Government of Uttarakhand. Mr. Ramesh Joshi helped
coordinate with various departments of the Government of Uttarakhand.
The IHD Team received all the needed support from the Government of Uttarakhand in preparing
the report. We are very grateful to Shri Utpal Kumar Singh, Chief Secretary, Government of Uttarakhand
for his support and encouragement. We are also grateful to the then Chief Secretary of Uttarakhand, Shri
S. Ramaswamy, for inaugurating the first Consultative Workshop on 14 December 2016, which helped
refine the scope and thrust of this exercise. After that a series of discussion meetings and workshops were
held in which senior officials from various departments of the Government of Uttarakhand participated
and their insights and suggestions contributed in preparation of the report. Apart from meetings, the
officials of the Uttarakhand Government gave valuable insights in a number of departmental discussions
held separately.
We would like to mention a few names in particular who actively contributed to this exercise. We are
thankful to the Department of Planning for its support by way of providing data and advice as well as
coordinating with other departments. Dr. Ranjit Kumar Sinha, Secretary (IC), Department of Planning
gave his active guidance and support. We also received valuable support from Dr. U.K. Panwar,
Shri Amit Singh Negi and Shri B.S. Manral, former Principal Secretary, Secretary, and Additional
Secretary, respectively, of the Department of Planning. Dr. Manoj Pant, Chief Coordinating Officer of
the Department of Planning, not only helped in coordination but also gave advice and support at every
stage of preparing the document.
The layout and production of the report required many efforts. Shri. Siddharth Dhote put
considerable effort in making appropriate infographics for the various sections and chapters of the
report. Ms. Priyanka Tyagi, as Production Manager, led and coordinated the different processes of
production. Thanks are also due to Banyan Infomedia Pvt. Ltd. for contributing to design of infographic plates.
Shri. Mrityunjay Chatterjee very ably designed the text and graphics for the report. We deeply appreciate
the help of Ms. Anupma Mehta for copy editing the text.
We are indeed very happy that the efforts in preparing and producing this report have been
successful. IHD feels privileged to be part of this important exercise undertaken by the Government of
Uttarakhand.
14 May, 2018 Alakh N. Sharma

Director
Institute for Human Development
Delhi
THE REPORT TEAM
IHD Team
Overall Guidance and Advice Background Chapter Contributors

Alakh N. Sharma Sarthi Acharya
Balwant Mehta
Principal Author, Coordinator and Editor
Tanuka Endow Shipra Maitra
Dev Nathan
Co-coordinator
Suparna Pal
Balwant Mehta
Other Theme Contributors

Production Manager
Priyanka Tyagi I.C. Awasthi
Amrita Datta
Info graphics
Akhilesh Sharma
Siddharth Dhote
Support and Advisory Team at Department of Planning
Dr. Ranjit Sinha Dr. Manoj Kumar Pant

Secretary (IC) Chief Coordinating Officer
Shri Ashish Joshi Shri K.K. Pant

Additional Secretary Additional Research Officer
ABBREVIATIONS

ANC Antenatal Care
ANM Auxiliary Nurse Midwife
APL Above Poverty Line
APMC Act Agriculture Produce Market Committee Act
ASHA Accredited Social Health Activist
AWD Alternate Wetting and Drying
AYUSH Ayurveda Yoga Unani Siddha Homoeopathy
BFD Best Finger Detection
BIP Block Irrigation Plan
BPL Below Poverty Line
BSUP Basic Service for the Urban Poor
CAD Computer Aided Design
CAF Compensatory Afforestation Fund
CAGR Compound Annual Growth Rate
CAP Centre for Aromatic Plants
CAPP Community Awareness and Participatory Programme
CAs Certification Agencies
CCC Course on Computer Concepts
CCTNS Crime and Criminal Tracking Network and Systems
CDM Clean Development Mission
CEDAW Convention on Elimination of all Kinds of Discrimination against Women
CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp
CII Confederation of Indian Industry
CIP Concessional Industrial Package
CIPHET Central Institute of Post Harvest Engineering and Technology
CLF City Level Federation
CNG Compressed Natural Gas
COP Conference of Parties
CSA Climate Smart Agriculture
CSC Cargo Services Center
CSCs Common Service Centers
DAY Deendayal AntyodayaYojana
DAY-NULM Deen Dayal AntyodayaYojana National Urban Livelihood Mission
DBTL Direct Benefit Transfer of LPG or Pradhan Mantri LPG subsidy Pahal Yojana
DDUGJY Deen Dayal Upadhyaya Gram Jyoti Yojana
DDU-GKY Deen Dayal Upadhyay Grameen Kaushalya Yojana
DEICs District Early Intervention Centers
DIP District Irrigation Plan
DIPP The Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion
DLIS Disbursement Linked Indicators
ABBREVIATIONS
DMs District Magistrates

DOTS Directly Observed Treatment, Short-Course
EDI Entrepreneurship Development Institute
EDP Entrepreneurship Development Programme
ESDM Electronics System Design and Manufacturing
ESTP Employment through Skill Training and Placement
FAO Food and Agriculture Organization
FIG Farmers Interest Group
FPC Farmer Producer Companies
FPO Farmers Producers Organization
FPS Fair Price Shops
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GHG Greenhouse Gas
GSDP Gross State Domestic Product
GST Goods and Services Tax
HDPE High Density Polyethylene
HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus
HMNEH Horticulture Mission for North-East and Himalayan States
HRDI Herbal Research and Development Institute
HRVC Hazard Risk Vulnerability and Capacity
HYV High Yielding Variety
ICIMOD International Centre for Integrated Mountain Development
ICMR Indian Council of Medical Research
ICT Information and Communication Technology
IEC Information Education and Communication
IFA Iron Folic Acid
IFAD International Fund for Agricultural Development
IIES Integrated Industrial Estates
ILSP Integrated Livelihood Support Project
IMR Infant Mortality Rate
INDCs Intended Nationally Determined Contributions
INDP India’s Nationally Determined Plan
INM Integrated Nutrient Management
IPCC Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
IPM Integrated Pest Management
IPMU Investment Programme Management Unit
IRCTC Indian Railway Catering and Tourism Corporation
IRRI International Rice Research Institute
IRS Incident Response System
IT Information Technology
ITES Information Technology Enabled Services
ITI Industrial Training Institute
JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency
xv
JNNSM Jawaharlal Nehru National Solar Mission

JNNURM Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission
KMC Kangaroo Mother Care
LBW Low Birth Weight
LDPE Low Density Polyethylene
LED Light Emitting Diode
LLDPE Linear Low Density Polyethylene
LLINs Long Lasting Insectidal Nets
LPCD Litres Per Capita Daily
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MCP Mother and Child Protection
MDDA Mussorie-Dehradun Development Authority
MDGs Millennium Development Goals
MDM Mid Day Meal
MEIT Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology
MGNREGA Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act
MIS Management Information System
MIS Market Intervention Scheme
MMP Mission Mode Project
MMR Maternal Mortality Ratio
MNRE Ministry of New and Renewable Energy
MSDP Multi Sector Development Programme
MSME Micro Small and Medium Enterprises
MSP Minimum Support Price
MT Metric Ton
NAS National Achievement Survey
NBSUs Net Backup Support Utility
NCD Non Communicable Diseases
NeGP National e-Governance Plan
NER Net Enrolment Ratio
NFHS National Family Health Survey
NFSM National Food Security Mission
NGOs Non Governmental Organizations
NHAI National Highways Authority of India
NHM National Horticulture Mission
NIELIT National Institute of Electronics and Information Technology
NMSA National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture
NPCDCS National Programme for Prevention and Control of Cancer, Diabetes,
Cardiovascular Disease and Stroke
NRC Nutrition Rehabilitation Centres
NRLM National Rural Livelihood Mission
NSDM National Skill Development Mission
NSS National Service Scheme
xvi
ABBREVIATIONS
NSSO National Sample Survey Organization

NTFP Non-Timber Forest Product
NTP National Tuberculosis Programme
O &M Operation and Maintenance
OECD Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development
OPD Out Patient Department
OSC One Stop Centre
PAN Permanent Account Number
PDS Public Distribution System
PET Polyethylene Terephthalate
PHCs Primary Health Centres
PIL Public Interest Litigation
PIO Public Information Officer
PMAY Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana
PMGSY Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana
PMKSY Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchai Yojana
PNC Prenatal Care
PP Polypropylene
PPH Post Partum Haemorrhage
PPMS Programme Performance Monitoring System
PPP Public Private Partnership
PRIs Panchayati Raj Institutions
PTCUL Power Transmission Corporation of Uttarakhand Limited
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
PWD Public Works Department
RAD Rainfed Area Development
RAY Rajiv Gandhi Awas Yojana
RDT Rapid Diagnostic Tests
REC Renewable Energy Certificate
RGGVY Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana
RKVY Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojana
RNTCP Revised National Tuberculosis Control Programme
RPO Renewable Purchase Obligation
RTI Right to Information
RTS Act Right to Service Act
SAARC South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation
SAPCC State Action Plan for Climate Change
SBM Swachh Bharat Mission
SC Scheduled Caste
SDG Sustainable Development Goal
SDIS Skill Development Initiative Scheme
SDM Sub-Divisional Magistrate
SDP State Domestic Product
xvii
SECC Socio Economic Caste Census

SeMT State e-Mission Team
SHG Self Help Group
SHP Small Hydro Power
SIIDCUL State Infrastructure & Industrial Development Corporation Uttarakhand Limited
SIMO Skill India Mission Operation
SIP State Irrigation Plan
SJSRY Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana
SLAS State Level Achievement Surveys
SLL Special and Local Laws
SMAM Sub-Mission on Agricultural Mechanization
SMART Simple Monitored Accountable Responsive and Transparent
SMEs Small and Medium Sized Enterprises
SMID Social Mobilization and Institution Development
SMSP Sub-Mission on Seed and Planting
SNCUs Special New Born Care Unit
SOPs Standard Operating Procedures
SRI Systems of Rice Intensification
SRR Seed Replacement Rate
ST Scheduled Tribe
STPs Skill Training Providers
SUH Shelter for Urban Homeless
SWAN State Wide Area Network
SWAp Sector Wide Approach
TB Tuberculosis
TCPD Town and Country Planning Department
TFR Total Fertility Rate
TPP Twenty Point Programme
U5MR Under 5 Mortality Rate
UAPCC Uttarakhand Action Plan for Climate Change
UERC Uttarakhand Electricity Regulatory Commission
UHUDA Uttarakhand Housing and Urban Development Authority
UIDAI Unique Identification Authority of India
UJVNL Uttarakhand Jal Vidyut Nigam Limited
UKH Uttarakhand
UKSDM Uttarakhand Skill Development Mission
ULBs Urban Local Bodies
ULIPH Uttarakhand Livelihoods Improvement Project for the Himalayas
UN United Nations
UNCCD United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification
UNDP United Nations Development Programme
UNFCCC United Framework Convention on Climate Change
REDD Reducing Emissions from Deforestation and Forest Degradation
xviii
ABBREVIATIONS
UNWTO United Nations World Tourism Organization

UOCB Uttarakhand Organic Commodity Board
UPCL Uttarakhand Power Corporation Limited
UPS Usual Principal Status
UREDA Uttarakhand Renewable Energy Development Agency
URTS Act Uttarakhand Right to Service Act
URTSC Uttarakhand Right to Service Commission
USCRC Uttarakhand Science Research and Education Centre
USTDC Uttarakhand Seeds and Terai Development Corporation
UTIITSL UTI Infrastructure Technology and Services Limited
UUSDA Uttarakhand Urban Sector Development Agency
UUSDIP Uttarakhand Urban Sector Development Investment Programmme
VCSGPSY Veer Chandra Singh Garhwali Paryatan Swarozgar Yojana
VIP Village Irrigation Plan
VRA Village Revenue Assistant
VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal
VTP Vocational Training Provider
WAPCOS Water and Power Consultancy Services
WHO World Health Organization
xix
Tables, Figures, Boxes
Tables
1.1 Gross State Domestic Product 2011–12 to 2017–18 (at constant 2011–12 prices) 28
1.2 Sectoral Shares (%) in Gross Value Added of Uttarakhand at Current Prices 29
1.3 Selected Statistics for Uttarakhand and All-India 32
1.4 The Focus Areas for Attaining Vision 2030 35
2.1 Tourist Arrivals in 2015 and the State’s Rank as a Tourist Destination 49
2.2 Vision 2030 for MGNREGA and Housing Schemes 56
2.3 Physical Achievements (No.) and Expenditure (Rs. lakh) under Major Pension Schemes in 59
Uttarakhand (2015–16)
2.4 Achievements and Targets (No.) for Major Pension Schemes in Uttarakhand 60
2.5 Land Utilisation (% of Total Reporting Area) Pattern in Uttarakhand State (2014–15) 66
2.6 Dichotomy of Agriculture in Uttarakhand 67
2.7 Activities Taken Up under Schemes/Programmes Operating in the Horticulture Sector 72
2.8 Vision for the Aromatic Plants Sector (Year-wise Target) 73
2.9 Vision 2030 for the Animal Husbandry Sector 74
2.10 Sectoral Indicators for Vision 2030 for the MSME Sector 104
2.11 Sectoral Indicators for Vision 2030 for the Heavy Industries 105
2.12 Potential Areas of Space Applications 109
3.1 Child Health Indicators for Uttarakhand and All-India 131
3.2 Baseline Infectious Diseases 132
3.3 Vision 2030 for Infectious Diseases 133
3.4 Existing Availability of Health Personnel in Uttarakhand 137
3.5 Vision for the Availability of Health Services in Uttarakhand 138
3.6 Vision for the Education Sector 144
3.7 State Ranking among 26 States as per NSSO Survey (2015) on Sanitation 155
3.8 Slipped Back Habitations in Uttarakhand 159
4.1 Selected Statistics for Demographics, Women’s Literacy and Work in Uttarakhand 176
4.2 District-wise Estimates of Price-Adjusted Poverty Lines: Uttarakhand 2011-12 (Rs.) (at state- 185
level prices)
4.3 Share of Households (%) with ‘Good’ Condition Houses in Uttarakhand (Census 2011) 185
4.4 Share of Households (%) Getting Tap Water from Treated Sources in Uttarakhand (Census 186
2011)
4.5 Crime Rate (per 100,000 population) of IPC Crimes During 2015 192
5.1 Availability Mix of Energy from Firm Sources in FY 15 (in MW) 213
5.2 Renewable Energy Capacity in Uttarakhand (MW) 214
5.3 Changing Shares (%) of Components of Renewable Energy as Proposed in Vision 2030 215
5.4 Household Coverage of Basic Services in Major Cities in Uttarakhand 225
5.5 Norms for Green Space and Parks 227
5.6 Targets and Achievements for Construction of Dwelling Units 2015-16 232
5.7 Post-harvest Losses for Select Products 238
TABLES, FIGURES, BOXES
5.8 Strategies to Attain Emission-Related Targets 246

5.9 Strategies for Reducing Vulnerability and Increasing Adaptive Capacity 248
6.1 Revenue and Capital Expenditure in Uttarakhand during 2011-12 to 2015-16 274
6.2 Distribution of Total Budgetary Receipts during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh) 276
6.3 Distribution of Total Budgetary Expenditure during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh) 277
6.4 Share of Budget Expenditures on Major Heads during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh) 278
6.5 Trend of Budgetary Surplus (+)/Deficit (-) during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh) 280
6.6 Proportion of Borrowed Funds Spent on Capital Outlay 281
6.7 Non-Utilisation of Grants under Selected Components (Percentage) 282
6.8 Financial Management Indicators for the State during 2011-12 to 2015-16 283
6.9 Funds Likely to be Available under the Budget Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh) 283
6.10 Funds Required under Various Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh) 284
Figures
1.1 Per Capita Income Uttarkhand and India 27

1.2 Growth (%) in GDP (at constant 2011-12 prices) over the Previous Year for Uttarakhand 28
and India
1.3 Sectoral Shares (%) in GVA Uttarakhand (at current prices) 30
1.4 Sectoral Shares (%) in GVA Uttarakhand (at constant 2011-12 prices) 30
1.5 Sector-wise Year-on-Year Growth Rate (%) in GSDP at Constant 2011-12 Prices 31
1.6 Framework of Uttarakhand Vision 2030 33
2.1 Strategy for Creating Sustainable Livelihoods for Uttarakhand 42
2.2 Aromatic Crops Selected for Cultivation 44
2.3 Tourist Arrivals in 2015 and the State’s Rank as a Tourist Destination 49
2.4 Deprivation Criteria Used in Socio-economic Caste Census 55
2.5 Strategy to Eliminate Extreme Poverty in Rural Uttarakhand 57
2.6 National Urban Livelihoods Mission for Alleviating Urban Poverty 58
2.7 Expenditure (Rs lakh) under Major Pension Schemes in Uttarakhand (2015-16) 59
2.8 Selected Indicators for Malnutrition in Uttarakhand 65
2.9 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Agriculture and Allied Sectors for Uttarakhand 69
2.10 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Horticulture including Medicinal and Aromatic 73
Plant
2.11 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Animal Husbandry Sector in Uttarakhand 75
2.12 Structure of the Economy with Sectoral Shares in GSDP (%) , 2015-16 83
2.13 Share of Agriculture, Manufacturing & Construction in GSDP (%), 2015-16 83
2.14 Shares of Manufacturing, Construction & Trade, Hotel etc in GSDP (%) , 2011-12 85
2.15 Employment Status for Uttarakhand and India, 2011-12 86
2.16 Employment Status for Uttarakhand, 2005 and 2012 86
2.17 Tourist Arrivals in Uttarakhand (millions) 92
2.18 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Tourism Sector in Uttarakhand 94
2.19 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Road Transport in Uttarakhand 100
2.20 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Mobile and Internet Connectivity in Uttarakhand 100
xxi
2.21 IT Initiatives in Uttarakhand 102

3.1 Vision 2030 for selected Indicators for Maternal and Child Health in Uttarakhand 131
3.2 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Infectious Diseases 134
3.3 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Reproductive Health Care in Uttarakhand 136
3.4 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Availability of Health Services in Uttarakhand 137
3.5 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Primary Education in Uttarakhand 146
3.6 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Upper Primary Education for Uttarakhand 146
3.7 Vision 2030 for Learning Performance at the End of Primary Level (Class 5) for 147
Uttarakhand
3.8 Vision 2030 for Learning Performance at the End of Lower Secondary Level (Class 8) for 147
Uttarakhand
3.9 Vision 2030 for Skill Capacity (000) in Uttarakhand 148
3.10 Vision2030 for Number of Polytechnics in Uttarakhand 148
3.11 Vision 2030 for Reaching Water Supply to All Habitations 154
3.12 Reduce, Reuse, Recycle: the Life-cycle approach to Waste 156
4.1 Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Women’s Empowerments 180
4.2 District-wise Per Capita Income (2013-14) in Uttarakhand 184
4.3 Major Schemes for Promoting Inclusion in Uttarakhand 187
4.4 Total Cognizable IPC Crimes in Uttarakhand (2015) (Registered Crimes) 192
4.5 Major Crimes Against Women in Uttarakhand (2015)(IPC Registered Crimes) 193
5.1 Vision for Renewable Energy in Uttarakhand 214
5.2 Priority Areas for Urban Development 221
5.3 Strategies for Reducing Green House Gas Emmission in Uttarakhand 244
5.4 Selected Indicators for Vision 2030 for Life on Land 253
5.5 Selected Indicators for Conservation of Mountain Eco-Systems and Bio-Diversity in 255
Uttarakhand
6.1 Sectoral share (%) in Gross Value Added in Uttarakhand (at current prices) 274
6.2 Distribution of Total Budgetary Receipts 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh) 277
6.3 Distribution of Budgetary Expenditure during 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh) 278
6.4 Budgetary Surplus Defesit during 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh) 281
6.5 Funds Required under Various Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh) 285
xxii
TABLES, FIGURES, BOXES
Boxes
1.1 Evolution of the Concept of Sustainable Development 34

2.1 Sikkim’s Journey Towards Becoming an Organic State 46
2.2 Best Environment Management Practices (BEMP) 47
2.3 Hungry for Finland! The Finnish Experience in Culinary Tourism 50
2.4 Vision for Agriculture and Allied Sectors in Uttarakhand 68
2.5 Vision and Strategy for Doubling Farmers’ Income in Agriculture by 2022 70
2.6 Vision and Strategy for Doubling Income in the Horticulture Sector 72
2.7 Potential for the Use of Herbal and Medicinal Plants 75
2.8 One Village One Farm: Supporting Sustainable Livelihoods for Mountain Communities of 78
Uttarakhand
2.9 Important Pre-conditions for Realising the Full Potential of Domestic and International 92
Tourism in Uttarakhand
2.10 Home Stay: Village Ways—Connecting Villages with the World 93
2.11 Best Practices in Tourism 95
2.12 The Uttarakhand Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprise Policy, 2015 107
3.1 Best Practices for Maternal and Child Health 132
3.2 AYUSH (Ayurveda, Yoga and Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha and Homeopathy) and NCDs 135
3.3 Some Best Practices for Augmenting Water Supply in Uttarakhand 154
3.4 Singapore Model of Recycling Sewage to Produce Drinking Water 156
4.1 Giving Identity to Women – International Conventions 175
4.2 Constitutional Privileges for Women 178
4.3 Some Proposed Initiatives by the Uttarakhand Police 196
5.1 Mussourie – Dehradun Development Authority Financial Resources Required (Rs. Lakhs) 220
5.2 Coverage of Slum Households by Low Cost Housing Programme 234
5.3 Sectoral Agenda for Climate Action 250
xxiii
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1
PB
Uttarakhand was created in the year 2000 as a new ablers in favour of the state, including: (i) high
state to give voice to the aspirations of the people economic growth and per capita income, (ii) good
in the hills. After achieving high growth rate of social and human development indicators (such
above 7 percent for four out of the last five years, as sex ratio and educational attainment), (iii) low
it looks ahead towards sustained development in poverty at just 11 percent (2011-12) with very little
the future. The Vision 2030 report lays out the fu- rural–urban disparity, (iv) absence of stark hunger
ture roadmap for the state of Uttarakhand, based problems, and (v) the fact that the state is, by and
on the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) large, peaceful. However, one of the issues of con-
model framed by the United Nations. A new glob- cern in the state is the child sex ratio, which is dis-
al development compact was reached in September turbingly low.
2015 in the form of 17 SDGs and enshrined in the Economic Growth: The state has achieved high an-
2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development duly nual rate of growth (at constant prices) of GSDP
adopted at the United Nations by 193 Member States. at close to 7 per cent for most years, since 2011-12,
The Sustainable Development Agenda has become except in 2014-15 (Figure E1). Recently the growth
the centre of a renewed development framework rate has dipped slightly to 6.77 percent. Per capita
for countries of the world following the Millennium income in the state (at current prices) for 2017-18
Development Goals, which ended in 2015. (advance estimates) is Rs. 1,77,356, which far ex-
The Vision document for Uttarakhand outlines ceeds the national average of Rs. 1,12,764. (Figure
the vision for the SDGs and the targets/indicators E2).
as applicable for the state for the coming years till The state economy is characterised by a high
2030 and indicates the strategy to achieve the same. share of the secondary sector at around half of the
A set of indicators suitable for the state have been Gross Value Added of the state at current prices,
developed for the targets under the individual followed by the share of the tertiary sector at 38.41
SDGs, which can be monitored over time. per cent, and lastly that of the primary sector at a
Uttarakhand Today meagre 11.19 per cent. During the period 2011-12 to
Several positive factors have been acting as en- 2016-17, the tertiary sector in the state maintained
Figure E1: Year-on year Growth (%) in Figure E2: Per capita income in Uttarakhand and
GSDP (at constant 2011-12 prices) for India (at current prices) for 2017-18 (advance
Uttarakhand estimates)
a growth rate of above 6.5 per cent. The secondary percent at the primary level and 96.76 percent at the
sector, too, exhibited healthy growth during this pe- upper primary level. However, NER at the secondary
riod (Figures E3 and E4). level is much lower at just 51.28 percent.
Poverty: The poverty rate in Uttarakhand is low at Health: The current (2012-13) Maternal Mortality
11.26 per cent (2011-12), much below the all-India Ratio (MMR) in Uttarakhand is 165 per 100,000 live
poverty level of 21.92 per cent for the same year, and births compared to 167 at the national level (2011-
there is little rural–urban disparity in poverty rates. 13). In 2015-16, both Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) (40
Hunger: Uttarakhand has no overt problem of hun- per 1000 live births) and Under Five Mortality Rate
ger in the state. The Antyodaya households and (U5MR) (47 per 1000 live births) in the state were
erstwhile Below the Poverty Line (BPL) households lower than the corresponding national averages. In-
together account for around a quarter of the benefi- cidence of Non-communicable disease is an emerg-
ciaries. ing area requiring attention.
Education: The access to schooling is good, especially The Challenges

at the primary level. The Net Enrolment Ratio (NER) Malnutrition and anaemia: Chronic malnutrition
is 89.18 percent at the primary level and 71 percent at among children below the age of five years, is high,
the upper primary level. School completion rate is 100 as seen from stunting and wasting, affecting, on an
Figure E3: Sectoral Shares in Gross Value Added (current prices) in Uttarakhand
Figure E4: Sector-wise Year-on-year Growth Rate (%) in GSDP (at

constant 2011-12 prices)
4
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
average, 33.5 per cent, and 19.5 per cent, respective- being covered by forests. The State has not been
ly, of the children in this age group. A little over a receiving ‘Green Bonus’ to maintain forest cover,
quarter of the under-five children are underweight although the state is providing huge mountain eco-
for their age. system services to the entire country.
Nearly 60 per cent of 6–59 months old children are Health: There is severe shortage of health person-
anaemic. The incidence of anaemia amongst wom- nel, especially in the hills, for doctors, surgeons,
en of reproductive age is also high, at 45.2 percent. etc. at PHCs and CHCs.
Unemployment and under-employment: The Education: At present the biggest challenge for the
rate of unemployment among the labour force of state is to improve the quality of education. The
the working age was 4.3 per cent in the year 2012. state faces a disadvantage in the fact that cost of
This rate was higher among females (7.3 per cent) education delivery in hills is higher than in plains,
compared to males (3.1 per cent). The rate of youth leading to higher than national average cost. Voca-
unemployment rate is much higher than that of tional streams also suffer from inadequate budget.
the overall unemployment at 14.3 per cent. The
unemployment rate is even higher (17.2 per cent)
among youth who have been educated up to the Vision 2030 Framework for Uttarakhand
secondary and above levels. Around a quarter of The Report is framed with the background of im-
the youth in the state are not in education, training, plementation of the 17 Sustainable Development
or employment. Goals. These milestones have the terminal year in
Migration and hills-plains disparity: During the 2030. The framework envisages people at the cen-
last decade, high economic growth has been ac- tre of the development process (Figure E5). Fifteen
companied with heavy outmigration of males from SDGs are categorized into four groups, each of
the state, with an increasing divide between the which contributes towards enhancing the develop-
hills and plains in several outcomes, which is also ment process for the people of Uttarakhand. The
manifested in the nature and pattern of migration four categories are: Sustainable Livelihoods, Hu-
in the hill and plain regions of the state. Between man Development, Social Development and Envi-
2000 and 2011, the rate of growth of population of ronmental Sustainability. SDG 14 relating to ‘Life
the hill districts, at 0.70 per cent, was substantially Below Water’ was considered not applicable for
lower than that of the plain districts, at 2.8 per cent the state. SDG 17 refers to ‘Strengthen the Means of
(census 2011). The Census also reveals an absolute Implementation and Revitalize the Global Partner-
decline in the populations of two hill districts, viz., ship for Sustainable Development’ and is largely
Almora and Pauri Garhwal. applicable at the country level. The aspect of do-
mestic resource mobilization has been discussed in
Environment: The state is extremely vulnerable to the final chapter.
climate-related hazards such as water shortage and
also excess monsoonal precipitations leading to se-
vere floods. There is also glacier melting and gla- Vision 2030 and the Focus Areas
cier burst, etc., along with water and air pollution
The Vision 2030 for the state, keeping in mind the
in rural as well as urban areas. Although the state
implementation of the SDGs, is the following:
does have a State Action Plan for Climate Change,
there is little integration of climate change mea- Transform the Uttarakhand economy into
sures into state polices as yet. a prosperous, healthy state such that the
people are educated and gainfully employed in an
Infrastructure: The state suffers due to poor con-
equitable society, synergy between the
nectivity of villages with cities as well as withering
environment and the inhabitants is enhanced,
of the hill economy due to industrialisation and ur-
and the development process is sustainable
banisation. There is a need to build an infrastruc-
and inclusive.
ture base in an environment-friendly manner, and
balance it with the vulnerable mountain economy. This will need creation of sustainable livelihoods
Limited land is available for developing industry for the people of the state as well as enhance-
and infrastructure due to 70 per cent of the land ment of human and social development, in a way
5
Figure E5: Framework of Uttarakhand Vision 2030
that conserves natural resources, protects the on horticulture, including aromatic and medici-
environment and such that no-one is left behind. nal plants, for improving productivity and creat-
ing livelihood, along with promotion of state-wide
tourism, both carried out on a Mission Mode, will
Strategies for Attaining Vision 2030 help the state in generating the necessary livelihood
1. Creating Sustainable Livelihoods options. The Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises
In Uttarakhand, the poverty is low, but (MSME) is a cross-cutting sector which will link up
there is concern about generating livelihood for to the growth-driver sectors to help generate fur-
people in the hills, who tend to get by-passed by ther employment downstream. Simultaneous efforts
the growth process. The strategy to provide sus- to develop renewable energy in the form of small
tainable livelihoods to all people of Uttarakhand, hydro-power and expansion of Information Tech-
in the hills and in plains will rely primarily on two nology to all parts of the state economy will make
growth-driver sectors (Figure E6). the growth plan sustainable and make its fundamen-
tals stronger.
Transforming hill agriculture with emphasis
6
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Table E1: The Focus Areas Identified for Attaining Vision 2030
Focus Areas Aim for 2030

• Maintain/accelerate the present high growth regime
Sustainable and
1. • The gains from development must close the hills-plains gap; therefore create sustainable
inclusive growth
livelihoods in the hills
Majority of the people in the state are dependent on agriculture, and thus
Reduce migration • transform agriculture through diversification towards horticulture, aromatic and
2. by transforming medicinal plants, animal husbandry, etc. to make agriculture profitable and retain people
agriculture in the hills by giving additional employment opportunities
• Connect farmers to the market by creating infrastructure
Reduce migration by
Create employment opportunities in hills; also in the tourism sector, forest sector (non-
3. providing livelihood
timber forest products).
in hills
Improve connectivity Improve access in a hilly state by better connectivity

4. in a sustainable • Physical infrastructure such as roads, railways, air, etc. to be strengthened and expanded
manner • Mobile/internet connectivity to be expanded to even the remotest areas
Urban development sector must anticipate and

Plan ahead for
• Prepare for increasing influx of people
5. sustainable
• Greater requirement of public services, water requirement
urbanization
• Greater need for management of waste water as well as solid waste.
Enhance human • Provide quality education in schools

6.
development • Improve access to doctors and health facilities for all, especially in the hills
Improve capability of Provide suitable skill training and vocational education to all youth, including women, in
7.
human resources order to facilitate access to gainful employment
Empower
Empower all the marginalized segments of the population, and especially empower women
8. marginalized
by eliminating gender disparity and tackling crimes against women and girls.
segments
Enhance • Reduce the use of fossil fuel
9. environmental • Opt for renewable sources of energy
sustainability
Growth Drivers
Focus on sectors • Horticulture/hill agriculture along with aromatic plants
10. identified as Growth • Medicinal Plants with link to AYUSH
drivers and enablers • Tourism
Enablers: MSME, IT Sector, Small Hydro-power
7
A. Horticulture Sector basic inventory of land resources, especially in the

The broad vision is to double the farmers’ income context that to increase the area under horticulture
for agriculture sector, including horticulture, by crop, 3.6 lakh hectare culturable fallow land will
2022. Here income from both on-farm and non-farm be targeted. Other strategies would include map-
activities are included. The area under horticultur- ping plant hardiness zones in the state, whereby
al products will be expanded and productivity im- farmers can determine which plants are most like-
proved. The processing capacity of horticulture pro- ly to thrive in extreme climates, especially in view
duce will be enhanced from 7.5 percent to 15 percent of the climatic changes that are taking place. In
of the total horticulture production by 2030. crop-specific clusters, there would be need to as-
sess requirement of inputs such as fertilizers and
The strategy for doubling the farmers’ income the necessary augmentation of supply planned in
includes efforts for improving productivity in hor- a phased manner.
ticulture and increasing diversification by adopt-
ing an integrated approach towards farming. For Provision of agricultural extension services is
the former, adoption of Clusters approach as per essential for reducing post-harvest losses and fa-
agro-climatic condition for scale economies, use cilities for cleaning/grading, drying, storage, ex-
of high-tech horticulture and precision farming traction, milling, fortification, packaging, trans-
technique (good quality seed with fertilizer, elite portation and handling of the produce at the farm
planting material with improved root stocks, high level or in nearby locations are needed to be set up
density plantation, micro-irrigation and mulching, wherever deficient. This is also important for link-
etc), enhancing production through rejuvenation age with the MSMEs for accessing the final market
of old and senile orchards, promotion of high val- for the value added product.
ue horticulture crop (such as off-season vegetables, Simultaneously, there is a need to train farmers
spices, medicinal and aromatic plants), formation in modern technology and equipment to commer-
of Farmers Interest Groups/Farmers Production cialise their business and produce for project wise
Organization, etc. and convergence of ongoing tasks/programmes. Their training can be linked to
schemes being implemented by various Depart- existing agricultural universities.
ments are appropriate strategies.
Organic farming, whereby use of chemical fer- Medicinal and aromatic plants (MAP)
tilizers harmful for soil, are replaced by natural fer- This sector is a focus area for the state in the future
tilizers, will be promoted. The area under organic and has enormous export potential. The vision is
farming will be expanded to 250 thousand hectares to expand the production of aromatic plants from
by 2030 and third party certification processes for 625 Ha area under cultivation at present to 16900
exports will be accelerated. Ha by 2030, while the number of farmers engaged
Comprehensive baseline studies for the avail- in production of aromatic plants will increase from
able water and soil should be conducted, to get a 2000 to 68600.
Figure E6: Strategy for Creating Sustainable Livelihoods for Uttarakhand
8
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The strategies for aromatic plants sector in- taking stock of the existing strengths and weak-
clude: Promotion of annual aromatic crops by nesses, as well as detailed planning for the devel-
dovetailing with the MGNREGS and it is import- opment of the new segment of tourist markets can
ant to conduct a baseline survey. Cluster approach be the strategy. There should be a plan to position
will be adopted and village level Farmers’ Groups ‘Brand Uttarakhand’ in the domestic and interna-
made to develop aroma entrepreneurs where each tional market. The medium term should see the re-
aroma cluster will have a distillation unit within a alisation and execution of the detailed plans made
radius of 5-6 km to optimise transport costs, and in the short term, along with improvement in the
will establish SMEs for villagers thereby promot- existing facilities. The brand of the state should be
ing socio-economic growth of rural families. The publicised and marketed to more countries. The
cultivators would need marketing support and the long-term strategy would involve further expan-
state must also develop institutional support for sion depending on the success in the medium term.
undertaking R&D on MAP species. In terms of identifying tourist destinations,
Department of Ayurveda, Yoga and Naturop- the attraction of the state as a pilgrimage site is al-
athy, Unani, Siddha and Homoeopathy (AYUSH) ready well-established, but there is still a great deal
engages in tapping the potential of several aromat- of scope to promote the state as a destination for
ic and medicinal plants found in the mountains of spiritual purposes, yoga, and wellness, alongside
Uttarakhand. Out of the herbal output in the state, as a destination for trekking, mountaineering, riv-
around 60-70 percent herbs are being used at preser-rafting, and such adventurous activities. Rural
ent. There is much scope for employment genera- tourism and eco-tourism can be encouraged as has
tion if processing centres for herbs are set up. Ut- been done in other countries and in other states of
tarakhand has the potential of promoting medical India, and to achieve this, the needs for infrastruc-
tourism using medicinal herbs, along the lines of ture and connectivity, skill training, accreditation
other states such as Kerala, with promotion of proof dhabas/restaurants, and service providers have
cesses such as ‘Panchakarma’. This type of tour- to be met. Thereafter, tourist destinations in the
ism efforts, along with yoga and wellness centres, upper reaches of the state can also be developed,
under the stewardship of AYUSH, could generate providing employment opportunities to the local
employment in the hills. youth.
Theme-based circuits that have the potential to
B. Tourism be showcased as world class tourism products can
be developed in consultation with the stakehold-
This sector is accepted as a growth driver for inclu- ers. The state is considering development of spiri-
sive social economic progress through its forward tual and religious theme-based circuits for tourism.
and backward linkages, and the ability to create Under the Swadesh Darshan scheme of central
employment in the economy. The vision is to de- government, Uttarakhand is a site for Eco tourism.
velop Uttarakhand as a comprehensive, world Other themes may involve treks/hikes/tours to
class tourism destination by realising the untapped view famous Himalayan peaks, or treks along the
potential of sustainable tourism, through the de- course of the Ganga river, or places of culinary in-
sign of innovative tourism products that build on terest, or villages where communities maintain tra-
the inherent strengths of the state as a natural des- ditional lifestyles that tourists may find interesting.
tination which can cater to all categories of tourists.
Homestays in rural areas and in serviced apart-
The aim is to make the state one of the top ments in urban areas, which supplement tourist
10 tourism destination states of the coun- accommodation, can be linked to the theme-based
try by 2020, up from its present rank of 12, circuits for planned growth. The government can
to acquire a place among the top 5 destina- promote cleanliness and beautification of the con-
tion states by 2024, and finally to attain a cerned villages and locales for better tourist attrac-
position among the top 3 destination states tion. A framework for classifying infrastructur-
by 2030. al gaps can be developed to identify the existing
For the initial three-year period till 2020, bottlenecks so as to unlock the potential of these
9
Figure E7: Strategy for Creating Sustainable Livelihoods for Tourism in Uttarakhand
circuits. An integrated approach for planning these several major departments should be considered,
circuits, along with a comprehensive area devel- especially for big projects.
opment approach to ensure the availability all the
requisite facilities in those circuits, is essential.
C. Other Avenues for Generating
There is a plan to develop thirteen new destina-
Sustainable Livelihoods
tions in thirteen districts of the state based on vari-
ous themes like adventure, leisure, rural, spiritual, The scope for linking the cross-cutting MSME sector
and wellness in the long term. to the growth-driver sectors, especially horticulture,
and thereby generating further employment, has
Success of tourism initiatives depend just not
been mentioned. The MSME sector envisages mas-
on tourism department, but on synergy between
sive expansion in the future, which would increase
tourism and a host of other departments of the
employment from the present number of 2.58 lakh
government. As a tourist arrives in Uttarakhand,
people to 8.5 lakh people by the year 2030. The fo-
the tourism experience starts at the airport, rail-
cus will be especially on the micro sector, which has
way station, bus terminus, or in the car travel s/he
a tremendous potential to provide employment at
undertakes to reach her destination. The tourist’s
the mass level at minimum capital investment. This
experience actually starts even before that with
sector also plans to provide a marketing platform
access to information about tourist destinations
to the constituent segments such as cottage, khadi,
and the ease of connectivity of the state with other
handloom and handicraft producers, and to boost
states in India and with the rest of the world. The
entrepreneurship among potential businesswomen.
experience continues with the comfort of stay in
The employment generation from the large indus-
hotels, etc., the culinary experience, the ease of ac-
tries sector is envisaged to increase from 1.69 lakh at
cess to popular tourist spots, safety, the diversity of
present to 4.44 lakh people by 2030.
tourist attraction and the functioning of the same,
internet availability/connectivity, and above all, Information Technology is an enabling sector
the warm and friendly behaviour of the local peo- that provides the under-pinning of smooth connec-
ple which can make a stay memorable. Evident- tivity throughout the state in various departments,
ly, numerous departments such as PWD, road businesses and homes, thereby improving produc-
and rail transport, aviation, water and sanitation, tivity and efficiency across sectors. Given the high
electricity, urban development, hospitality, IT, Di- literacy rate of 78.82 per cent in the state, employ-
saster management and many other departments ment opportunities for educated youth can be gen-
need synergy with the tourist department to create erated by encouraging ICT, ITES and electronics
a complete tourist experience. Here a strategy of manufacturing units to establish their enterprises in
deploying project-specific committees which span Uttarakhand.
10
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Skilling youth in the state is a key strategy for between the education and health sectors. Proper
tackling youth unemployment. The Mahila Mangal monitoring of School Health Programme (includ-
Dal and the Yuva Mangal Dal, at the village level, ing Health Cards of students) is necessary.
shall also be motivated through workshops to cre- Malnutrition and anaemia: Establishment of Nu-
ate self-help groups (SHGs) and to undertake the trition Resource Centres for nutrition counselling
required skill upgradation or training so that they and treatment, observing ‘Vajan and Poshan Di-
can benefit from the various employment genera- was’ for growth monitoring of young children,
tion schemes of the different government depart- promoting hygienic habits such as correct hand
ments. Uttarakhand Skill Development Mission is washing practices, nail cutting, etc. and providing
important in this context. Some youngsters will be nutritional food through AWCs are some of the
trained by ex-Army personnel at the block level strategies for attaining 2030 vision. Under-nour-
to facilitate their entry into the Army. Reform and ished persons can be tracked via the AWCs. State
diversification in agriculture, and especially more government initiative URJA is designed for mal-
land ownership for women will help raise their nourished children and this dietary supplement is
work participation. Jal Vidyut Nigam undertakes made with locally available food.
projects in various parts of the state and can link
the employment of local youths to these projects. Here, too, convergence is the key because anae-
mia/malnutrition are not just health conditions
The employment department registers unem- but are also impacted by factors such as lack of safe
ployed youth, who would be provided appropri- drinking water, hygiene and sanitation (toilets),
ate skill upgradation and training, so that they can switching over to usage of polished rice and ab-
benefit from various self-employment schemes. sence of leafy vegetables in meals etc. Hence, in the
Job fairs will be organized regularly at the district long run, over and above iron supplements, what
level to facilitate the placement of these youths in is needed is promotion of nutrient-rich local food,
various private sector enterprises. The department consumption of greens & leafy vegetables, use of
shall conduct career counselling in all parts of the toilets, availability of safe drinking water and con-
state through psychometric or aptitude tests to vergence of efforts of departments of Agriculture,
help students choose their careers as per their skills Drinking Water and Sanitation, Ministry of Health
and ability. and Family Welfare, Department of AYUSH, etc.
Communicable and non-communicable diseases:
2. Enhancing Human Development Increasing awareness and adoption of preventive
measures to combat HIV/AIDS, expansion of test-
ing facilities and facility for providing Anti-Ret-
Health rovial Drugs for HIV positive people will help in
Mother and child healthcare: There is need to pro- tackling communicable diseases. The strategy for
mote institutional deliveries, training of ASHA non-communicable diseases involves establishment
Workers/Dayees, tracking of pregnant women of District Wellness Centre in all hospitals for early
and regular check-up, for which technology such detection, treatment and referral of NCDs, use of al-
as mobile apps or software can be used. Effective ternative medicines such as ayurveda, yoga, home-
implementation of two major schemes Pradhan opathy, naturopathy, unani, Siddha etc. (AYUSH),
Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Yojana, and Integrated and aiming for Universal Health Coverage. Overall,
Child Development Services (ICDS) is important in order to augment financial resources, conver-
in this context. For improving Ante Natal Care, gence of schemes need to be explored.
Post Natal Care and institutional delivery, the state Shortage of medical personnel: To tackle the short-
should focus on strengthening the health facilities age of doctors in the state, five medical colleges
in terms of HR, infrastructure and equipment etc. are being established, and the nursing capability
Physical infrastructure including Blood Banks and will be augmented by five new nursing colleges as
Trauma Centres need special mention. well as one nursing college at the medical college,
Considering that human development is a Haldwani. Three General Nursing and Midwifery
continuum in a person’s life, there are overlaps schools are also being established. In the existing
11
medical colleges, the in-take capacity is being in- order to give youth in hill areas the opportunities,
creased. Vocational institutes can be set up in hill districts
and technology-enabled education encouraged.
Education Financial allocation: Cost of education delivery

in hills is higher than in plains and leads to a cost
Pre-primary level: This can be made a tier of school- of service delivery in Education sector in the state
ing to ensure smooth transition into primary lev- that is much higher than the national average. To
el. In the existing set-up, each Anganwadi Centre redress this imbalance, more finance should be
must be provided with pre-school kit, curriculum provided for education sector in this hill state.
and the capability of Anganwadi Workers must be
enhanced.
Improving education quality: Education qual- 3. Improving Social Development
ity will be monitored with the help of frequent
quarterly standardized assessment and the re- Gender Empowerment
sults will be displayed on a portal. SMART class-
es have been successfully piloted in many schools The survival of the girl child must be ensured, fol-
and can be scaled. To improve educational qual- lowing which measures must be taken by the gov-
ity, Rajiv Gandhi Navodaya Vidyalayas have ernment and the society so that she is empowered
been set up in every district and can be scaled. and not subjected to violence and discrimination.
To achieve this, an important strategy is to spread
Teaching: The primary school will have the option awareness among the community and among
of one teacher per class on the lines of model schools pregnant women about declining child sex ratio
and at least one room per class at elementary level. and schemes such as Beti Bachao, Beti Padhao. The
Constitution of a Teacher Recruitment Board will be birth of a girl child can be celebrated at the Pancha-
undertaken to ensure zero vacancy in schools which yat level to highlight value of the girl child.
will create pool of candidates through merit cum ap-
titude test. Improvement in regularity in schooling Special awareness programmes can be conduct-
and teacher attendance can be aided by a stronger ed for pregnant women who have registered for
monitoring mechanism as well as recruitment of second or third pregnancy. Similarly, organizing
Head Teachers where absent. Use of Biometric ma- regular meetings with adolescent girls to sensitize
chines has been started for attendance in 200 schools. them regarding pre-natal sex determination linked
There is a proposed innovative measure whereby to female foeticide, can help in girl child survival.
teacher training with 4 year integrated teacher train- The strategy should be to effectively implement ex-
ing cum graduation course will be started. isting schemes to end discrimination against wom-
en, and especially enforcement of the Pre-Concep-
Infrastructure: To universalise secondary education and Pre-Natal Diagnostic Techniques Act.
tion, there is an urgent need to provide access to
unserved habitations by opening new schools or To combat domestic violence against women, a
upgrading existing junior high schools. The op- toll-free number 181, operating 24x7 will be used as
tion solar energy, a renewable source, can be ex- Women’s Helpline to provide them emergency ser-
plored for electrification in schools. In higher vices and information for assistance in case of need.
education, there is need to establish multi-facul- Increasing women’s work participation will
ty government colleges up to PG level. Physical enhance their empowerment. Recognition of wom-
infrastructure planning needs to be done before en’s positive contribution to agriculture can help in
opening a college for admission. E-learning op- this, and extension of all the benefits that govern-
tion for higher education can be used to reach ment schemes offer to small and marginal farmers
the hitherto unreached and those in remote areas. should be extended to women as well.
Technical and vocational education: Vocation- Reducing Inequality
al education has been proposed in 120 secondary In Uttarakhand, the disparity between hills and
schools. The option of starting vocational educa- plains is huge in terms of development, income,
tion at the middle school level can be explored. In livelihood, access to health and education, etc. Ed-
12
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
ucation and employment opportunities to youth, must be promoted, especially in hills by creating
even in the remote hilly villages, are needed to stem water storage from snow in artificial structures,
the unabated migration of working age males. The such as done in Ladakh. There is also the experience
various strategies for creating sustainable liveli- of Singapore in converting waste-water into pure,
hoods in the hills whereby people in the hills can clean water in a cost-efficient and eco-friendly way.
benefit, have been discussed. Provision of quality Water thus reused can be used for industrial pur-
health and education facilities, along with doctors, poses, and can even be used for drinking purposes.
in the hill districts are also crucial for retaining peo- The Urban Local Bodies can use this model for recy-
ple, as is building good infrastructure to improve cling waste water.
connectivity with the plains. In rapidly expanding peri-urban areas, wa-
To close gaps between rich-poor and between ter supply will be augmented through pump-
mainstream and marginalized sections, there must ing schemes based on ground water (tube well),
be dedicated resources for under-privileged seg- sub-surface water (infiltration well/infiltration gal-
ments of the population such as Scheduled Castes/ lery), surface source (river and rivulet), and gravity
Scheduled Tribes and Muslims in the state, and re- schemes with sources such as rivulet and springs.
view of existing schemes in place for them. At pres- To meet challenges for sanitation, the strategy
ent there are schemes such as Multi Sectoral De- includes raising public awareness about the need
velopment Programme that address issues for the for maintaining cleanliness, and inculcating the
marginalized segments of population in a holistic habit of using toilets. Uttarakhand state has been
manner, while there are major social protection declared Open Defecation Free. Effective imple-
schemes for the vulnerable segments of the pop- mentation of the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan and to
ulation such as pensions for Old Age, for widows, bring management of solid waste in a phased man-
the disabled, etc. ner to all villages is also an important part of the
It is also important that the pace of economic strategy, as is the effective functioning of commit-
growth in the state be sustained and returns from tees related to health, sanitation and nutrition.
growth must find its way to the poorer sections of Waste management is a very important area, es-
the population at an accelerated pace. Slum inhab- pecially for growing cities and towns. Industrializa-
itants lag behind the rest of the urban citizens, and tion or increased service sector activity for boosting
improvement in Slum housing and sanitation in growth must use modern, clean technologies; scien-
slums in terms of access to drainage needs to be in tific waste disposal; waste re-cycle; regular environ-
focus. mental audits, etc. Taxes could be imposed (polluter
For public service provisioning, there are ini- pay taxes) to compensate for the pollution and the
tiatives such as Right to Services Act, e-Gover- amount so recovered used to address environmen-
nance programmes, etc., which give consumers the tal damages.
right to these services. Such technology-dependent To make agriculture cleaner, the strategy is to
service provisioning provided in a rights-based lower carbon emission from livestock, lower inor-
framework can mitigate inequality to a great ex- ganic fertiliser/pesticide use, and increase bio-fer-
tent, since technology does not differentiate be- tilizer-use. Improved governance could bring about
tween consumers. less consumption of wood and timber; much of the
waste generated can be recycled, which would also
4. Attaining Environmental Sustainability create employment as well as renewable energy.
Addressing pollution in cities can be tackled
by setting targets for reducing air pollution from
Water and Sanitation, Air and Water Pollution vehicular and industrial sources, and also by
Water shortage is a severe challenge in the state and stoppage of unlawful construction activities that
the main strategy to meet this would be to develop pollutes rivers and other water sources. For the
groundwater and surface water use schemes with former, a movement away from fossil-fuel based
an incentive or tariff system to discourage users vehicles towards electric or CNG based vehicles
from over extracting water. Conservation of water will help. Overall, a shift in favour of renewable
13
sources of energy such as small hydro-power, solar Resource Mobilization for

power, energy produced from waste, etc. will re- Attaining Vision 2030
duce the share of harmful gases in the atmosphere Uttarakhand has performed well in the area of fis-
which lead to warming. cal management. With high growth in the GSDP
Green House Gas emissions and per capita income, the economic potential of
When the source of emission is rice and livestock the state is promising. Low revenue deficit as well
production, the strategy would involve a change as fiscal deficit indicate good fiscal management
to system of rice intensification and modification without the pressure of high inflation and an in-
of livestock raising methods. In order to to reduce creasing loan burden. Sound financial records pave
emission from cooking, solid biomass fuel must the way for more loans and grants, if desired.
be replaced with LPG and provide incentives for Sectoral allocation of resources has remained stable
LPG use. Eliminating emission from public trans- though the gap between targets and achievements
port can be assisted by adopting electric or CNG is not the same in every sector. The areas wherein
vehicles for public transport. Opting for clean en- these gaps are large need to be identified and re-
ergy from renewable sources will reduce emission sources allocated accordingly, so that the state can
of harmful GHG considerably and this can be done progress towards the attainment of SDGs in a time-
by power generation as well as by substitution of bound man¬ner. The social sectors should receive
existing lighting and heating equipment with LED more resources for raising the standard of human
and solar sources. development
A good track record of loan repayment is very im-
Improving forest cover, land management and arresting portant for resource mobilisation through external
land degradation assistance. However, the state should be more pru-
dent in generating internal financial resources. A
Converting part of open forest to moderate dense very low proportion of tax revenue to the GSDP
forest and part of moderately dense forest to dense indicates that the tax base needs to be widened
forest is an important component of the strategy. and an increase in tax rates also may be considered
Involving women more in land management strat- with increasing per capita income. Very low cost
egizing is another option. Watershed management of tax collection indicates efficient tax administra-
programmes in villages that are upstream of hydro tion. The scope of increase in both direct and indi-
electricity generation plants can be utilized to re- rect taxes needs to be explored.
duce land degradation.
It is imperative to analyse the nature of suspense
and miscellaneous accounts and reduce its impact
Disaster Response on both revenue receipts and expenditure. The sav-
Hazard, Risk, Vulnerability and Capacity (HRVC) ings from this head can be utilised more effectively.
analysis, preparedness, proper land-use, monitor- Prudent financial management demands that loans
ing and warning systems for disaster management must be utilized totally for creating capital assets.
are the main planks of the strategy. State Disaster A clear and time-bound cash flow analysis is need-
Management Plan is being revised annually, and ed for resource generation on a sustainable basis.
there is a long-term strategy for improvement in While the major financial mobilisation should not
‘Technical Assistance and Capacity Building’ for be a problem for the state, it should tap all the Cen-
disaster risk management. The components include tral as well as external funds to augment its own
Disaster Risk Management, River Morphology resources for achieving the SDGs in a time-bound
Study, establishment of a Decision Support System, manner.
strengthening of hydro-meteorological network and
Early Warning System, etc.
14
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Economic
15

Economic

Environmental
16
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Environmental

Social
17

Social
18
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Social
19
Uttarakhand 2030 - Indicators

Economic
20
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Environmental
21

Social
22
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Social
23
25
The Context air quality, and crop pollination, among others.
Uttarakhand, the 27th state of India, was formed The cultural services comprise the benefits arising
after bifurcation of the hill region including Ha- from tourism, recreation, and the aesthetic experi-
ridwar and Udham Singh Nagar from the state of ence offered by the state.
Uttar Pradesh, on 9th November 2000. The state
is divided into two broad regions—Garhwal and An Overview of the Uttarakhand Economy
Kumaon. These two regions share a common ge-
ography, culture, language, and tradition, and The state economy has made healthy progress
had united against the problems of economic since its inception and in the recent period be-
backwardness, marginalisation and lack of a clear tween 2011-12 and 20167-18, has maintained a
political identity faced by the people here. The high annual rate of growth (at constant prices)
birth of Uttarakhand in 2000 was thus the out- of GSDP at around 7 per cent, with only a slight
come of the combined struggle of the people of dip in 2014–15 (see Table 1.1 and Figure 1.2). The
Garhwal and Kumaon.1 CAGR for this period is 7.1 percent. Very recently
there has been a slight tapering off of the growth
The population of Uttarakhand is 10.086 rate. While the state had outpaced the national
million, out of which 70.37 percent reside in ru- average growth rate in the early years after 2011-
ral areas and 30.50 in urban areas. The state has 12, later it has moved in tandem with the average
13 districts, 49 sub-divisions, 95 development GDP growth at the national level.2 The per capita
blocks, 16,793 census villages out of which 15,745 income in the state (at current prices) for 2017–18
villages (including forest settlements) are inhabit- (advance estimates) is Rs. 1,77,356, which is much
ed, and the remaining 1048 are un-inhabited. Ut- higher than the corresponding national average of
tarakhand is primarily a mountainous state, as the Rs. 1,12,764 (Figure 1.1).3
plains constitute only about 10 per cent of its total
geographical area. Out of thirteen districts, only The state economy is characterised by a high
Haridwar, Udham Singh Nagar, and some parts share of the secondary sector at around half of the
of Dehradun and Nainital districts are located in Gross Value Added of the state at current prices
the plains. (Table 1.2). This is followed by the share of the
tertiary sector at 38.41 per cent for the 2016–17
The topography in Uttarakhand ranges from Provisional Estimates, while the primary sector
foothills and plains to higher snow-clad moun- accounts for a meagre 11.19 per cent at present.
tains, thus including almost all major climatic However, the tertiary sector has been gaining in
zones conducive to agro-horticulture. The state is share over the last six years, mainly at the cost
part of the central Himalayas and most of its north-
ern area comprises high ranges and glaciers while Figure 1.1: Per Capita Income Uttarkhand
its lower reaches are covered by dense forests. and India (2017-18)
The numerous glaciers in the state provide peren-
nial water to the downstream rivers including the
mighty Ganga and Yamuna, which provide water
to large parts of the country. Mountains thus play
pivotal roles in the delivery of ecosystem services
for sustaining the well-being of both people living
in the mountains systems as well as in the plains.
These services include the provision of food, wa-
ter, wood, fibre and fuel, as well as regulation ser-
vices such as climate regulation, flood regulation
and drought control, regulation of the water and
1. Annual Plan 2013-14, State Planning Commission, Government of Uttarakhand.

2. Accessed at http://des.uk.gov.in/files/Aarthik_Sarveshan_-_Single_Pgs_All.pdf on April 14, 2018.
3. Ibid.
Table 1.1: Gross State Domestic Product 2011–12 to 2017–18

(at constant 2011–12 prices)
Item 2011–12 2012–13 2013–14 2014–15 2015–16PE 2016–17QE 2017-18AE
Gross State
Domestic Prod- 1,15,328 1,23,710 1,34,182 1,41,278 1,51,894 1,62,451 173444
uct (Rs, crore)
Growth in GSDP
over the previ- 7.27 8.47 5.29 7.52 6.95 6.77
ous year (%)
Source: Government of Uttarakhand
Note: QE: Quick Estimates, PE: Provisional Estimates, AE: Advance Estimates
Figure 1.2: Growth (%) in GDP (at constant 2011-12 prices)

over the Previous Year for Uttarakhand and India

Note: QE: Quick Estimates, PE: Provisional Estimates. AE: Advance Estimates
of the primary sector, while the secondary sector The tertiary sector maintained a growth rate of
has maintained a high share, though at a slight- above 6.5 per cent over this period. Even in 2014–
ly lower level of 50.4 per cent in 2016–17 (PE) as 15, when, following the 2013 natural calamity in
compared to 52.13 per cent in 2011–12 (see also Uttarakhand, the other two sectors slumped, and
Figure 1.3). The manufacturing sector has a size- the primary sector actually experienced negative
able share of 39.36 per cent. growth rate, the tertiary sector still recorded a
The sectoral shares (%) in Gross Value Add- growth of 10.7 per cent. The secondary sector too
ed are shown for current prices in Figure 1.3 and exhibited healthy growth throughout the reference
for constant prices in Figure 1.4. The figures show period, with the exception of 2014–15.
that the primary sector was affected relatively
more than the other sectors by the inflationary ef- Enablers in the Uttarakhand
fects over the last few years. Economy
The steadily eroding share of the primary In the light of the above discussion and Table 1.3
sector, which has agriculture as its main compo- presented below, it can be said that Uttarakhand
nent, and the relative gain of the tertiary sector, state has several positives that act as enablers in
are reflected in Figure 1.5, which shows the year- its favour, including: (i) high economic growth
on-year percentage rates of growth for the three and per capita income, (ii) good social and human
major sectors for the period 2011–12 to 2016–17.
28
INTRODUCTION
Table 1.2: Sectoral Shares (%) in Gross Value Added of Uttarakhand (at current prices)
S. No. Item 2011–12 2012–13 2013–14 2014–15 2015–16QE 2016–17PE
Agriculture, forestry
1. 12.28 12.42 11.32 10.71 10.09 9.70
and fishing
1.1 Crops 7.05 7.29 6.09 5.73 5.24 4.93
1.2 Livestock 2.66 2.54 2.52 2.66 2.75 2.73
1.3 Forestry and logging 2.54 2.56 2.67 2.28 2.07 2.02
Fishing and
1.4 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
aquaculture
Mining and
2. 1.72 1.66 2.54 1.57 1.44 1.49
quarrying
Primary 14.00 14.08 13.86 12.28 11.53 11.19
3. Manufacturing 40.29 41.07 39.00 39.04 39.60 39.36

Electricity, gas, water
4. supply and other 3.67 3.36 2.69 2.87 3.21 3.33
utility services
5. Construction 8.16 7.57 8.91 8.62 8.19 7.71
Secondary 52.13 52.01 50.59 50.52 50.99 50.40
Industry 53.84 53.67 53.14 52.10 52.44 51.89

Transport, storage,
communication and
6. 6.39 6.56 6.70 7.09 7.33 7.32
services related to
broadcasting
6.1 Railways 0.13 0.13 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.17
Transport by means
6.2 2.02 2.11 2.07 2.05 1.93 1.93
other than railways
6.3 Storage 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00
Communication and
6.4 services related to 4.23 4.31 4.50 4.88 5.23 5.22
broadcasting
Trade, repair, hotels
7. 11.01 11.38 11.57 11.88 11.98 12.36
and restaurants
8. Financial services 2.71 2.59 2.57 2.67 2.74 2.74
Real estate, owner-
9. ship of dwelling and 5.44 5.42 5.30 5.41 5.30 5.34
professional services
Public
10. 3.73 2.55 3.47 4.05 4.05 4.02
administration
11. Other services 4.60 5.41 5.93 6.09 6.07 6.64
Tertiary 33.88 33.91 35.54 37.19 37.47 38.41

TOTAL GSVA at
12. 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
basic prices
Note: QE: Quick Estimates, PE: Provisional Estimates.
29
development indicators (such as sex ratio and ed- in the state featuring stark disparity between the
ucational attainment), (iii) low rate of poverty at hills and the plains, paucity of gainful employment
just 11 per cent (as of 2011–12) with very little ru- and of infrastructure for access to health and edu-
ral–urban difference, (iv) absence of stark hunger cation in the hills, coupled with severe problems
problems, and (v) the fact that it is, by and large, a of environmental degradation. The environmental
peaceful state. However, its low child sex ratio is sustainability is being compromised in the form of
an exception in this context. increasing drought, landslides, soil erosion, glacial
melt, deforestation, and so on. Meanwhile, the state
Many of the hill districts have higher child
is also affected by other issues related to infrastruc-
sex ratios, of above 900, but the districts of Pithor-
ture gaps, poor access to potable water, solid waste
agarh (816) and Champawat (873) have particu-
disposal problems, and social evils like the falling
larly low child sex ratios. On an average, the hill
child sex ratio in the cities, and the prevalence of
districts have a higher child sex ratio (893) as com-
crime against women in the cities.
pared to the districts in the plains (887).
One of the repercussions of these issues is that
Challenges for the Uttarakhand Economy
people are rapidly migrating from the hills to the
Despite these positives, Uttarakhand continues to cities, which are consequently getting increasing-
face challenges such as the lack of inclusive growth ly congested.
Figure 1.3: Sectoral Shares (%) in GVA Uttarakhand (at current prices)
Figure 1.4: Sectoral Shares (%) in GVA Uttarakhand (at constant 2011-12 prices)
30
INTRODUCTION
Figure 1.5: Sector-wise Year-on-year Growth Rate (%) in GSDP

(at constant 2011-12 prices)
Migration Farming remains the primary source of in-

During the last decade, the devel- come in the hill areas, and with the phenomenon
opment trajectory of the state has of de-population in the villages, the farms are be-
been characterised by high econom- coming fallow, and incidences of wild animals
ic growth, accompanied with heavy outmigration attacking and destroying crops are becoming a
of males from the state. Historically, migration has common menace. Ancestral farmlands have been
been a way of life in this region, but the incidence abandoned, and young people no longer want to
of migration has increased in recent years. There is pursue agriculture as a profession. The availabili-
evidence of an increasing divide between the hills ty of limited options outside of agriculture forces
and plains in several outcomes, which is also man- people to leave the rural areas, and acts as a push
ifested in the nature and pattern of migration in the factor for of out-migration from the state. There is
hill and plain regions of the state. Between the year thus a general disenchantment with farming, and
2000 and 2011, the rate of growth of population of young people aspire to do urban office jobs.
the hill districts, at 0.70 per cent, was substantially A major part of the migration from these hill
lower than that of the plain districts, at 2.8 per cent districts is for the longer term and aimed at se-
(Census of India, 2011). The Census reveals anoth- curing regular and salaried jobs in the cities even
er trend—an absolute decline in the populations of though these are low-paying jobs, available most-
two hill districts, viz., Almora and Pauri Garhwal. ly in factories and restaurants. There is also sub-
Furthermore, the decline in population in these stantial migration for education. Interestingly,
districts has been greater in the smaller villages the level of female migration for education is quite
(Mamgain and Reddy, 2016) than others. There is high. There is a caste pattern in permanent migra-
mounting evidence of depopulation of the villag- tion too; while the upper castes are better able to
es in the remote hill areas where farms have been permanently move to the urban areas, the Sched-
abandoned and empty homes are visible. These uled Castes (SCs) are compelled to stay back in
are termed as ‘ghost villages’. At the same time, the villages mainly due to lower incomes. The SCs
paradoxically, Uttarakhand also receives labour also migrate less on account of their low education-
migrants from other states, particularly those from al levels, lack of awareness, and social networks
eastern India. The state is also a popular destina- (Mamgain and Reddy, 2016).
tion for migrants from the neighbouring country of
Nepal and many Nepali migrants work on farms
abandoned by the local population (Bruslé, 2008).
31
Table 1.3: Selected Statistics for Uttarakhand and All-India

Indicator Year Total Male Female
Literacy rate (%), Uttarakhand 2011 78.80 87.40 70.00
Literacy rate (%), India 2011 74.04 82.14 65.46
Literacy rate (%) for SCs, Uttarakhand 2011 74.41 84.34 64.05
Sex ratio (females/000 males) Uttara-
2011 963
khand
Sex ratio (females/’000 males), India 2011 940
Child sex ratio, Uttarakhand 2011 890
Child sex ratio, India 2011 919
Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics, Government of Uttarakhand and Census 2011.
Approach to Vision 2030 The framework for the Vision document for
With both forces of opportunities and constraints Uttarakhand envisages people at the centre of the
at play in the state of Uttarakhand, the state is development process (Figure 1.6). Fifteen SDGs
poised at the crossroads for further development have been categorised into four groups,5 each of
in the future. Uttarakhand had been created as a which contributes towards enhancing the devel-
state to give voice to the aspirations of the peo- opment process for the people of Uttarakhand.
ple in the hills, whose dreams and aspirations These four categories are:
were not always captured in the mainstream dis- 1. Sustainable Livelihoods, comprising SDG
course on development. Seventeen years have 1 (No poverty and sustainable agriculture),
passed since the creation of the state, and it is SDG 2 (Zero hunger), SDG 8 (Decent work
time to take stock regarding where it has reached and economic growth), and SDG 9 (Industry,
and what destination it is heading towards. It is innovation and infrastructure).
thus crucial to devise strategies for the optimal 2. Human Development, comprising SDG 3
exploitation of the challenges and opportunities (Good health and well-being), SDG 4 (Quality
facing the state. education), and SDG 6 (Clean water and sani-
The Vision document for the state has been tation).
framed in the background of implementation of 3. Social Development, comprising SDG 5 (Gen-
the 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), der equality), SDG 10 (Reducing inequalities),
enshrined in the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable De- and SDG 16 (Peace, justice and strong institu-
velopment adopted at the United Nations by the tions).
193 Member States, which represent a new global
development compact. Encompassing the three 4. Environmental Sustainability, comprising SDG
core dimensions of economic, social, and environ- 7 (Affordable and clean energy), SDG 11 (Sus-
mental development, the Agenda has become the tainable cities and communities), SDG 12 (Re-
centre of a renewed development framework for sponsible consumption and production), SDG 13
countries of the world. The SDGs offer a unique (Climate action), and SDG 15 (Life on land).
transformative opportunity to close development The progress of SDGs impacts the people and
gaps and provide a life of dignity and sustainable the planet and, as has been built into the SDG frame-
prosperity4 (see Box 1.1 for the emergence of the work of the UN, there is a lot of synergy among the
concept of sustainable development). goals. Most of these are inter-dependent.
4. Kumar et. al. (2016).

5. SDG 14 relating to ‘Life Below Water’ was considered not applicable for the state. SDG 17 refers to ‘Strengthen the Means of Implementation and
Revitalise the Global Partnership for Sustainable Development’, and is largely applicable at the country level. The aspect pertaining to domestic resource
mobilisation has been discussed in Chapter 7.
32
INTRODUCTION
Figure 1.6: Framework of Uttarakhand Vision 2030
Chapters 2, 3, 4 and 5 contain detailed discus- In the chapters 2, 3, 4 and 5 appendices accom-
sions for each of the categories of Sustainable Liveli- pany each Sustainable Development Goal under
hoods, Human Development, Social Development, discussion. These appendices contain a list of vi-
and Environmental Sustainability. The individual sion for the targets under the Goal, followed by
SDGs are discussed along with the targets laid down baseline values as well as values for vision 2030
by the UN and indicators, which were devised as for indicators under each target, and lastly a list
appropriate for the state for each target. The base- of existing schemes.
line values for the indicators, along with the Vision A consolidated set of annexures 1 to 15 contain
for 2030, for the short term (2019–20) targets, and details of all the SDGs discussed and their targets,
for the medium term (2023–24) targets are also dis- along with values for the indicators for the base-
cussed. The existing challenges for achieving the Vi- line, for the short term (2019–20) , medium term
sion for 2030, and the strategies are discussed at the (2023–24) and for vision 2030 6.
end of discussion of each SDG. Chapter 6, discusses
the resource mobilisation required for attaining the The present chapter ends with a glimpse into
Vision 2030 for Uttarakhand. the overall vision for the state as it looks ahead
and plans for 2030. The Vision 2030 for the state is:
6. Some indicators for which values are currently not available, have also been mentioned in the Annexure, in view of the fact that statistical methods can
be improved in the future for collecting such important information. This is particularly applicable for climate change related indicators.
33
Box 1.1: Evolution of the Concept of Sustainable Development

The concept of sustainable development emerged at Rio 2012, the UN Conference on Sustainable
Development, which led to a set of Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Originally the thinking
on sustainable development goes back to 1972 with the UN Conference on Human Environment
at Stockholm and the publication of ‘Limits to Growth’. Some takeaways from this conference are:
“— The natural resources of the earth including the air, water, land, flora and fauna….must be guarded
for the benefit of the present and future generations.
—The capacity of the earth to produce vital renewable resources must be maintained, and wher-
ever practicable, restored or improved.
—The non-renewable resources of the earth must be employed in such a way as to guard against their
future exhaustion.”
With the concept of sustainable development, the planet that we live in and the environment are
integrated in the very concept of development. Thus, there is need for social sustainability, which
translates into inclusive development for the people; there should be economic sustainability, which
translates into increased prosperity; and there should be environmental sustainability, implying
that the development process should take care of the planet. Overall, human beings should aim to
live within the bio-physical limits of their eco-system, which would lead to sustainable consump-
tion and production. We also need to foster peaceful and just societies, and implement the agenda
for sustainable development through a global partnership. The elements underlying the 17 SDGs
are thus captured in the five P’s: People, Prosperity, Peace, Partnership, and Planet.
Transform the Uttarakhand economy into will make the growth plan sustainable and make
a prosperous, healthy state such that the its fundamentals stronger.
people are educated and gainfully employed in an The overall aim would be to double the
equitable society, synergy between the agricultural productivity and income of
environment and the inhabitants is enhanced, small-scale food producers. Diversifica-
and the development process is sustainable tion away from mainstream agriculture
and inclusive. would be the primary strategy for the state. The
Overall, the state needs to focus on some themat- area under organic farming (environmentally sus-
ic areas and aim for improvement in order to attain tainable) will be increased and there will be a shift
the Vision 2030. These are presented in Table 1.4. away from crops which have low productivity
The main growth drivers in the economy have to crops with a high value in the market, and the
been identified as: Hill agriculture with emphasis seed replacement rate will be enhanced. The focus
on horticulture, including aromatic and medici- will be on horticulture, including food processing,
nal plants (promoted by AYUSH), and Tourism, with expansion in this sphere envisaged over the
in order to improve productivity and create sus- fifteen years. Efforts will also be made to market
tainable livelihood, especially for the people in aromatic/medicinal plants and promote tradition-
the higher reaches of the state. Also the Micro, al ayurvedic practices for medical tourism. Such
Small and Medium Enterprises (MSME) sector transformation of the agricultural landscape will
is cross-cutting across all these sectors via the benefit the hill producers greatly and would be ex-
potential for employment generation and is expected to reduce migration. The agriculture sector
tremely important in the growth strategy of the needs infrastructural support for completing the
state. Simultaneous efforts to develop two other supply chain in terms of storage, transportation,
sectors, namely, renewable energy in the form of handling, and marketing to the final consumers.
Small Hydro-power and expansion of Informa- There is also need for providing price support.
tion Technology to all parts of the state economy
34
INTRODUCTION
Table 1.4: The Focus Areas for Attaining Vision 2030

Focus Areas Aims for 2030
• Maintain/accelerate the present high-growth regime

Sustainable and • The gains from development must close the gap between the hills and
1.
inclusive growth plains, which needs the creation of sustainable
livelihoods in the hills
More than 50 per cent of the people in the state are dependent on agriculture,
which necessitates:
• Transforming agriculture through diversification towards horticulture, ar-
Reduce migration by
omatic plants, and animal husbandry, to make agriculture profitable and
2. transforming
retain people in the hills by giving them additional employment opportu-
agriculture
nities; and
• Connecting farmers to the market by creating
infrastructure
Reduce migration by There is need for creating employment opportunities in the hills in the tour-
3. providing livelihood ism and forest sectors (for non-timber forest
in the hills products).
Access in a hilly state can be improved through better

connectivity by taking care of the following:
Improve connectiv-
• Physical infrastructure such as roads, railways, and air, to be strengthened
4. ity in a sustainable
and expanded
manner
• Mobile/Internet connectivity to be expanded to even the
remotest areas
The urban development sector must anticipate and prepare for:
Plan ahead for sustain- • The increasing influx of people;
5.
able urbanization • Greater requirement of public services and water; and Greater need for
the management of waste water as well as solid waste.
• Provide quality education in schools; and
Enhance human devel-
6. • Improve access to doctors and health facilities for all,
opment
especially in the hills.
Improve capability of Provide suitable skill training and vocational education to all youth, including
7.
human resources women, in order to facilitate access to gainful employment.
Empower all the marginalised segments of the population, and especially
Empower the margin-
8. empower women, by eliminating gender disparity and tackling crimes against
alised segments
women and girls.
Enhance environmen- • Reduce the use of fossil fuels.
9.
tal sustainability • Opt for renewable sources of energy.
Growth Drivers
• Hill agriculture, with focus on horticulture, including aromatic and me-
Focus on sectors dicinal plants
10. identified as growth
• Tourism
drivers and enablers
Enablers
• MSME, Small Hydro-power (up to 25 MW capacity), IT
35
capital investment and high utilization of local re-

AYUSH engages in tapping the poten- sources. At present this sector provides employ-
tial of several aromatic and medicinal ment to around 2.58 lakh people in the state. This
plants found in the mountains of Uttara- sector is thus a major provider of employment in
khand. The cultivation of such herbs and plants the state and promotes inclusive industrializa-
is being undertaken by various agencies such tion. The Department of MSME in Uttarakhand
as Forest Department, the Herbal Research and is providing livelihood in Handloom, Handicraft,
Development Institute (HRDI) Centre for Aromat- Khadi & Village industries sector. Employment
ic Plants, and the Bhesaj Vikas Sangh, among oth- generation from many of the growth driver sec-
ers. The available information indicates that culti- tors are expected to be via MSME.
vation of medicinal and aromatic plants is around
4000 ha. There is a lot of potential for growth once The Vision 2030 of the Uttarakhand
processing centres for the herbs are set up in the government is ‘Deployment of green
state. power in Uttarakhand for empowerment, secu-
rity, affordability and equity.’ Uttarakhand as
Tourism has an unlimited potential a state has a great potential for the clean option
in the state, given its majestic natural of hydro-power and the smaller and environ-
beauty and resources, but this poten- ment-friendly hydel projects offer renewable
tial must be tapped fully. The vision is to make sources of energy. The burning of fossil fuel helps
the state one of the top tourism destinations in In- contain emission and consequently air and water
dia, in a sustainable way. The strategy would be pollution. Electricity is a key component for any
to develop the less popular destinations alongside form of development in a modern economy and
the more popular ones, in the interest of sustain- using ‘green’ power would help the state grow in
ing the fragile mountain environment. Popularis- a sustainable manner. The broad goals for 2030
ing homestays would directly benefit the families are: (i) sourcing 15 per cent of the energy demand
in the hills, while the development of adventure from renewable sources; and (ii) saving up to 25
tourism and ecotourism will generate employ- per cent of energy consumption. The state gov-
ment for local youth. Entrepreneurs and service ernment aims to increase the share of renewable
providers will be provided the necessary skill energy consumption from around 3 per cent at
training and accreditation. present to 15 per cent. In keeping with the Indi-
an Government’s commitment to source at least
Optimising the exploitation of the potential 40 per cent of its energy requirements from re-
for tourism needs meticulous planning, branding, newable sources, the state government of Uttara-
and capacity-building at all levels. The building khand also aims to save an additional 25 per cent
of both infrastructure as well as physical and In- of energy consumption by 2030.
ternet connectivity is critical for ensuring that the
average tourist has a pleasant experience in the
state. The success of tourism also entails the set- The IT sector has consolidated its
ting aside of substantial dedicated funds along strengths in the state by digitising many
with close inter-departmental coordination since of the public services, especially by
it is crucially dependent on many sectors such as provision through the Common Service Centres
water, sanitation, electricity, and the Public Works (CSCs) under the e-governance programme. It has
Department, among others. also established convenient Wi-fi services for the
promotion of tourism in the state, and is expand-
ing mobile and Internet connectivity throughout
MSME sector is the nursery of entrepre- the state, among its other achievements. Apart
neurship and has enormous potential from fulfilling its role as an enabling sector for the
for generating employment with low
36
INTRODUCTION
state, there is also a potential to make electron- Above all, the respect for nature,
ics a growth engine for the state and to establish environment and the planet con-
Uttarakhand as the most preferred destination stitutes an inherent aspect of the
for investment in the Electronics System Design vision based on the seventeen SDGs. The moun-
and Manufacturing (ESDM) industry. The IT de- tain economy is especially fragile and the entire
partment aims to set up education and IT hubs in populace in the state, and even the people in oth-
the state, and can greatly help in deploying higher states are dependent on many of the mountain
ly valuable disaster warning systems. It also has eco-services provided by Uttarakhand, in the form
scope for employment generation, since given the of water and wood, among others. Development
fairly high literacy rate of 78.82 per cent, the ed- in the mountains must take place in a manner
ucated unemployed can find employment oppor- such that GHG emissions are eliminated, by in-
tunities in the ICT, ITES, and electronics manufac- stance opting for LPG or electricity as the primary
turing enterprises. cooking fuel rather than wood; reducing meth-
ane emission from rice cultivation by gradually
shifting from rice to fruit cultivation in part of the
Since the entire economy requires con- present area covered under rice, and eliminating
nectivity for attaining growth in the com- GHG emissions from public transport by adopt-
ing years, the state must focus on expanding it ing CNG or electric energy. The other strategies
road network and boosting Internet connectivity. for environmental sustainability would be to in-
In this context, it is imperative to consider prepar- crease carbon absorptive capacity by increasing
ing an enhanced budget for building roads and the land under forests, to reduce the severely de-
subsequently maintaining them efficiently in the graded watersheds, and to halt biodiversity loss
mountainous regions. caused by a depletion of the habitat.
Enhancing human development by im- Finally, many central government and state
proving the quality of education, expand- government schemes are in operation through-
ing access to higher education, and providing out the state, providing important safety nets to
youth with technical and vocational skills are also the poor and the marginalised, the elderly and
important objectives of Vision 2030, as is the criti- widows, among others, while also helping in
cality of reducing the Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) promoting inclusive growth in areas of human
and Maternal Mortality Rate (MMR), tackling development such as education and health. The
non-communicable diseases, plugging the short- achievement of these goals necessitates a sys-
ages of doctors, and improving health facilities. tematic review of the efficacy of the schemes,
Meeting the social objectives such as empowering monitoring of progress and the need, if any, for
women, reducing crime rates and violence, and convergence, and/or expansion, in the coming fif-
providing social protection for the elderly, wid- teen-year period, which will help decide whether
ows, and the disadvantaged segments of the soci- such interventions are adequate for attaining the
ety in order to ensure that no one is left behind is Vision 2030.
also an integral part of the vision for the state.
37
SUSTAINABLE LIVELIHOODS
39
The approach to sustainable development rests the same year, and the state exhibits very little ru-
on the three important pillars of social, economic, ral–urban differential in poverty rates.
and environmental sustainability. These roughly Hunger: Uttarakhand has no overt problem of
translate into people, prosperity, and the planet. hunger in the state. The Antyodaya households
The other important pillars include peace and and erstwhile Below the Poverty Line (BPL)
partnership. The discussion on Sustainable Live- households together account for around a quarter
lihoods encompasses the following goals: SDG 1 of the beneficiaries.
(No extreme poverty), SDG 2 (Zero Hunger), SDG
8 (Decent work and growth), and SDG 9 (Resilient Malnutrition and anaemia: There is considerable
infrastructure and Sustainable Industry). chronic malnutrition among children below the
age of five years, manifested in the form of stunt-
The sustainable livelihoods approach is pri- ing and wasting, affecting, on an average, 33.5per
marily focused on livelihoods for poor people, cent, and 19.5 per cent, respectively, of the chil-
especially in rural areas, and underscores sustain- dren in this age group in the state. A little over a
ability of the same since otherwise the poverty re- quarter of the children under the age of five are
duction will not be lasting 1. underweight for their age. However, the inci-
In Uttarakhand, the poverty is low, but there dence of stunting and prevalence of underweight
is concern about generating livelihood for peo- children have declined since 2005–06, the third
ple in the hills, who tend to get by-passed by the round of NFHS.
growth process. All four goals discussed in the Nearly 60 per cent of the children in the age
present chapter are important from the point of group of 6–59 months in Uttarakhand are anae-
view of basic sustenance of the people of the state mic, and this high level of anaemia has persisted
as well as in the context of progressing towards a since 2005–06. The incidence of anaemia amongst
more prosperous and sustainable economic devel- women of reproductive age is also high, at 45.2
opment trajectory wherein everyone would have percent, though it has declined in the last decade.
access to gainful employment and livelihood.
Economic growth: The state economy has made
The chapter is divided into two parts. Part I healthy progress since the inception of the state
contains a brief discussion around issues related and recently, between 2011-12 and 2017-18, the
to sustainable livelihoods, the present status, vi- state maintained a high annual rate of growth (at
sion and the strategy pertaining to the two major constant prices) of GSDP at around 7 per cent for
growth-driver sectors around which the strategy most years.
for attaining the vision is focused.
Unemployment and under-employment: The
Part II contains detailed discussions of the rate of unemployment among the labour force of
component goals no. 1, 2, 8 and 9 in the SDG the working age was 4.3 per cent in 2012, going
framework containing targets/indicators towards up from 2.8 per cent in 2005. This rate was higher
a vision for sustainable livelihoods. among females (7.3 per cent) compared to males
(3.1 per cent). The rate of youth unemployment
PART I rate is much higher than that of the overall un-
employment at 14.3 per cent. The unemployment
Present Status of Selected Parameters in rate is even higher (17.2 per cent) among youth
Uttarakhand who have been educated up to the secondary
Poverty: The poverty rate in Uttarakhand with and above levels. Around a quarter of the youth
reference to the state poverty lines is low at 11.26 in the state are not in education, training, or em-
per cent (2011-12) 2. This level is much below the ployment.
all-India poverty Figureure of 21.92 per cent for
1. https://www.ifad.org/topic/resource/tags/sla/2179541 accessed on 7th February, 2018.

2. This is the latest year for which official estimates of poverty are available.
Figure. 2.1 Strategy for Creating Sustainable Livelihoods for Uttarakhand
Vision and Strategy for Sustainable Livelihoods The variance in climatic conditions of the re-
The vision is to provide sustainable livelihoods to gion makes it an ideal location for growing tem-
all people of Uttarakhand, in the hills and in plains, perate, sub-tropical, and tropical fruits that fetch
for youth and in older age-categories, for men and a high price in both domestic as well as interna-
women alike. The strategy to provide sustainable tional markets. Secondly, due to the suitability
livelihoods will rely on two growth-driver sectors of the climate, off-season and exotic vegetables,
(Figure. 2.1). First, transforming hill agriculture with that is, products which can fetch a high price in
emphasis on horticulture, including aromatic and the plains, can be grown in the hilly regions of
medicinal plants, to improve productivity and to cre- the state. Thirdly, the demand for such fruits and
ate livelihood, and second, promotion of state-wide vegetables is slated to grow in the coming years,
tourism, both carried out on a Mission Mode, will because with rising incomes, the composition of
help the state in generating the necessary livelihood the consumption basket of the average Indian tilts
options. The Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises towards such products.3 Thus, the horticulture
(MSME) sector will link to up to the growth-driver sector is strategically placed to act as a growth
sectors to help generate further employment down- driver in this hill economy. The main horticultur-
stream. Simultaneous efforts to develop renewable al products for the state are fruits, vegetables, po-
energy in the form of Small Hydro-power and ex- tatoes, spices, and flowers. There are around 650
pansion of Information Technology to all parts of the food processing units in the state, providing a link
state economy will make the growth plan sustain- to the MSME sector.
able and make its fundamentals stronger. Vision and strategy for horticulture
sector: The broad vision is to double the farmers’
income for agriculture sector, including horticul-
Hill Agriculture / Horticulture ture, by 2022. The area under horticultural prod-
Hill agriculture, comprising mainly horticulture, is ucts will be expanded and productivity improved.
a key sector for Uttarakhand. The yield from tra- The processing capacity of horticulture produce
ditional crops such as rice and wheat are low in will be enhanced from 7.5 percent to 15 percent of
the fragmented cultivated agricultural land in the the total horticulture production by 2030.
hilly terrain, leading to subsistence level farming. There should be comprehensive base line
Horticulture provides an avenue for a more remu- studies for the available water and soil, on the ba-
nerative form of cultivation and the natural climate sis of cultivated/non cultivated/ non irrigated land,
of the state is ideally suited for growing fruits and as well as on the climate, in terms of area-wise, clus-
vegetables.
3. See Annual Plan, 2013-14, State Planning Commission, Government of Uttarakhand, for further details.
42
ter-wise, horticulture/agriculture/herbal/aromatic (HMNEH), RKVY, the ‘per drop more crop’ com-
plants related policies with information on present ponent of the Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchayee
scenario and development. Research on forecasting Yojana (PMKSY), and some state/district sector
agriculture statistics related to soil mapping, water schemes. There are safety nets for the farmers by
quality testing, etc. with land-based and meteoro- way of the Market Intervention Scheme (MIS) for
logical data at Uttarakhand Space Application Cen- fruits like apples, malta and pears. Weather-based
tre (USAC) can be linked with the planning in agri- cop insurance schemes are implemented for ap-
culture sector in this context. ple, mango, litchi, peach, malta, potato, tomato,
ginger, French beans, and chilli crops.
Strategy for doubling income in the horticulture As mentioned, specific targets of the horticul-
sector ture sector for the coming fifteen years include
conducting detailed Farm level baseline survey
1. Adoption of Clusters approach as per agro-cli- for updating statistics. In order to increase the
matic condition for scale economies. There area under horticulture crop, 3.6 lakh hectare cul-
can be vegetables clusters, for which there turable fallow land will be targeted. Land use and
would be crop sequence throughout years on land cover mapping serve as a basic inventory of
the basis of elevation. Fruits clusters could be land resources and this can be carried out for the
formed in sub-tropical in valley area mid hills state using the application of Remote sensing and
or for temperate fruits in high hills, with in- GIS.
ter-cropping. Other clusters planned are for
potato, spices, flowers, etc. In the identified crop-specific clusters, all ar-
rangements for soil-testing, planting material, in-
2. Formation of Farmers Interest Groups/Farm- puts, formation of growers’ groups/federations
ers Production Organization, etc. and their training, marketing, etc. will be done.
3. Adoption of high tech horticulture and pre- There will be arrangement for accreditation of all
cision farming technique (good quality seed fruit plant nurseries.
with fertilizer, elite planting material with im- It is important to take advantage of the grow-
proved root stocks, high density plantation, ing export market for fruits and vegetables and
micro-irrigation and mulching, etc). thus need for concerted export promotion for
4. Enhancing production through rejuvenation these products. Another target is establishment
of old and senile orchards. of mini spices parks with the support of Spices
5. Promotion of high value horticulture crop Board.
like, off-season vegetables, spices, medicinal Other strategies can include mapping plant
and aromatic plants. hardiness zones in the state, whereby farmers can
6. Convergence of ongoing schemes being imple- determine which plants are most likely to thrive in
mented by various Departments in the same extreme climates, especially in view of the climatic
cluster such as convergence with Rashtriya changes that are taking place. In crop-specific clus-
Krishi Vikas Yojana (RKVY), MGNREGA and ters, there would also be need to assess requirement
watershed development programmes for the of inputs such as fertilizers and the necessary aug-
creation of water sources. mentation of supply planned in a phased manner.
Other strategies include offering a cultiva- Medicinal and aromatic plants (MAP): sector
tion cost subsidy to farmers and targeting culti- comprises a focus area for the state in the future.
vable waste land, promotion of tea cultivation, Aromatic plants and their products, including
initiating mushroom production while also re- essential oils such as Japanese mint oil, sandal
juvenating old low-performing plants, etc. The wood oil, Citronella oil, lemon grass oil, etc.
horticulture department is implementing various are becoming one of the most important export
schemes for attaining the SDG-related targets. The items from many developing countries of Asia.
centrally sponsored schemes include Horticulture In Uttarakhand, reportedly, 175 species of me-
Mission for North-Eastern and Himalayan Sates dicinal herbs are found. The ongoing migration in
43
Figure 2.2: Aromatic Crops Selected for a short-duration crop after paddy harvesting and
Cultivation cinnamon as an agro-forestry crop.
The vision is to expand the production of ar-
omatic plants substantially by 2030, from 625 Ha
area under cultivation at present to 16900 Ha by
2030, while farmers engaged in production of aro-
matic plants will increase from 2000 to 68600.
Some of the strategies to attain the vision are
the following:
• Promotion of annual aromatic crops by dove-
tailing with the MGNREGS;
• Conduction of a baseline survey;
• Formation of village level Farmers’ Groups to
develop aroma entrepreneurs;
• Each aroma cluster will have a distillation unit
within a radius of 5-6 km to optimise trans-
port costs. Aroma clusters should have at least
five farmers in a group and the cluster area
Source: Government of Uttarakhand should be at least 2.5 hectares. The main aim
the state has resulted in abandoned land, which of the cluster approach is to establish SMEs for
has suffered from soil erosion, depletion of nu- villagers and to promote the socio-economic
trients, growth of weeds like Lantana, etc. In this growth of rural families;
kind of adverse conditions, aromatic plants can • Building of the required infrastructure for this
be cultivated successfully. Such crops are usually sector;
safe from wild life and domestic animals, are easy
• Establishment of a high-tech nursery, aroma
to transport due to conversion of essential oils
processing centre, and perfumery, at Centre
into low volume, are easier to store, and above all
for Aromatic Plants (CAP), Selaqui;
these have a high demand in the market.
• Strengthening of CAP as an agri-aroma busi-
The export of essential oils holds promise since
ness incubator under RKVY;
dental care with consumption of essential oils and
its fractions such as menthol, eucalyptus, etc. and • Linking with skill development and start-up
flavours/fragrances are two important areas of programmes.
demand worldwide. Flavours and fragrances, • Marketing support for farmers would be pro-
are the two most important sectors covering vided as a shield against price fluctuations and
about 70 per cent within essential oil groups.4 poor marketing mechanisms. The minimum
Figure 2.1 lists the major crops selected for scale support prices for 13 cultivated and 9 Hima-
cultivation and extension in the farmers’ fields in layan minor essential oils have been fixed by
Uttarakhand following agronomic trials. The focus CAP. An ‘Aroma Bank’ of 50 quintal oil stor-
is on cultivating these as bonus crops to generate age capacity has been created for farmer’s pro-
additional income and maximum land utilisation duce in CAP. A revolving fund has also been
from the existing cropping pattern. Aromatic grass- created for the provision of MSPs.
es are being promoted as waste land crops in aban- • Building institutional support for undertaking
doned land, damask rose as a boundary crop in the R&D on MAP species for generation of eco-
apple, pea, rajma, potato and vegetable fields, Jap- nomically viable and environmental friendly
anese mint as an inter-crop in wheat, chamomile as technologies for sustainable quality production
4. Paroda et. al. (2014).
44
and creation of trained and skilled man power. manner. An important strategy for promoting
Sustained efforts are needed for inventorization sustainable agriculture is expanding area under
and distribution, threat categorization, conserva- organic farming by suitably identifying crops
tion biology, reproduction of rare, endangered for each agro-climatic zone, and utilising fallow
and threatened (RET) species of MAP, along land. Organic farming system avoids the use of
with R&D on Plant Genetic Resources (PGR) synthetic/chemical inputs (such as fertilizers,
management, crop improvement, crop produc- pesticides, etc.) and as far as possible rely upon
tion and post-harvest management, develop- crop rotations, crop residues, animal manures,
ing good agricultural practices (GAP) as well as off-farm organic waste, etc. and biological system
adopting organic farming 5. of nutrient mobilization and plant protection 6. In
Horticulture/hill agriculture includes non-tim- this context, soil health management is extremely
ber forest products which are promoted by AYUSH important. In addition, in the organic certification
(Department of Ayurveda, Yoga and Naturopathy, areas, third party certification is needed for any
Unani, Siddha and Homoeopathy). AYUSH engag- exports and concerted efforts needed in this con-
es in tapping the potential of several aromatic and text. There is also need for branding organic prod-
medicinal plants found in the mountains of Uttara- ucts from the state. The vision is to expand area
khand. Out of the herbal output in the state, around under organic farming from 35 thousand hectares
60-70 percent is herbs are being used at present. at present to 250 thousand hectares by 2030.
There is a lot of scope for employment generation Sikkim is a state which has shown the way for
if processing centres for herbs are set up. organic practices and in 2016 it became a one hun-
dred percent organic state (Box 2.1). The informa-
tion presented in the Box indicates the hand-hold-
Uttarakhand has potential of promoting ing done by the government to encourage organic
medical tourism using medicinal herbs, farming in the state, and how it has discouraged
along the lines of other states such as the use of chemical fertilizers by reducing subsidy,
Kerala. There is scope for promoting and has carried out the project in a Mission mode.
processes such as ‘Panchakarma’, a way
of de-toxifying and rejuvenating the body using However, Uttarakhand, in its strategy of ex-
traditional methods, which are popular among pansion of area under organic farming, must also
foreign tourists, as well as, increasingly, among take into account the experience of Sikkim that has
Indian tourists. This type of tourism efforts, along not been so positive, such as crops being prone to
with yoga and wellness centres, under the stew- diseases and pest attacks, decline in production as
ardship of AYUSH, could also generate employ- farmers switch from chemical to bio-fertilisers, and
ment in the hills. non-remunerative prices. Thus the overall strategy
needs to include adequate supply of organic fer-
Not only can the horticulture sector, including tilisers and other inputs to farmers, training them
MAP sector, generate livelihood for farmers, there in controlling plant disease and pest attacks, etc.
is scope for employment whereby MSMEs con- For promoting sustainable practices in the agri-
nect with the orchards and distilleries for further culture sector, some guidelines are available from
downstream activities, and local youth find em- European Union, for Best Environmental Manage-
ployment in the yoga and wellness centres. There ment Practices (see Box 2.2)
is potential of further employment generation,
particularly in the hills, if synergy with tourism is Integrated farming: While diversifying beyond
developed to promote agro-tourism, or culinary traditional crops into horticulture, vegetable, live-
themes for tourist activities and tours. stock, poultry and fisheries, there is need to fix the
Minimum Support Prices (MSPs) of these prod-
Promotion of organic farming: The transformation ucts. In view of climatic changes as well as given
of agriculture must take place in a sustainable the divided hilly terrain, farmers would benefit
5. Ibid
6. http://agritech.tnau.ac.in/org_farm/orgfarm_introduction.html accessed on 27 January, 2018
45
Box 2.1 Sikkim’s Journey Towards Becoming an Organic State

The process of converting Sikkim into a 100 per cent organic state was fast-tracked in 2010 with the launch of the
Sikkim Organic Mission
2003 - Sikkim begins discouraging use of chemical fertilisers, reduces fertiliser subsidy by 10 per cent. The Sikkim
Organic Board is constituted.
2003-2009 - State adopts 396 villages as bio-villages to test organic inputs.
2006-2009 - About 8,000 ha of land is certified as organic. Eight units of vermi-culture hatcheries are established in
five state farms and three Krishi Vigyan Kendras.
2008-09 - Ginger processing unit is established at Birdang Farm, West Sikkim. Ginger is one of the four high-value
crops selected by Sikkim for its trade potential.
2010 - Sikkim Organic Mission is launched to fast-track conversion of Sikkim into a 100 per cent organic state
2010-11 - More than 18,234 ha of land is certified. Automated greenhouses are established for production of dis-
ease-free quality planting material.
2011-12 - 19,216 ha land is certified.
2012-13 - 19,188 ha land is certified. Òrganic farming’ is included in school curriculum
2015 - Entire agricultural area in the state is converted to `certified organic’.
2016 - Sikkim is formally declared a `100 per cent organic’ state.
Source: http://www.downtoearth.org.in/news/organic-trial-57517, accessed on 27 January, 2018
by adopting an integrated approach to farming Act, for permitting the direct marketing of hor-
comprising integrated nutrient management, ticultural produce; and capability enhancement
weed management, and watershed management. of staff/farmers/entrepreneurs through inten-
The integration system, wherein the output of sive extension programmes. Arrangements for
one system is used as an input for another, would small-medium industries are to be established for
particularly benefit small and marginal farmers. horticulture, agriculture, herbal, aromatic, honey
Livestock and poultry constitute potential areas production by the farmers to promote a multifac-
for diversification. eted approach.
Reducing post-harvest losses: To attain the full po- Increasing knowledge and awareness among
tential of hill agriculture/horticulture as a vehicle farmers: Training farmers in modern technology
for creating sustainable livelihoods, there needs to and equipment to commercialise their business
be a well-defined plan for provision of agricultural and produce for project wise tasks/programmes
extension services such as facilities for cleaning/ can pay rich dividend. The trained farmers can re-
grading, drying, storage, extraction, milling, for- ceive the title Master Trainer, along with a stipend
tification, packaging, transportation and handling and be given the responsibility for the plants/
of the produce at the farm level or in nearby loca- crops. Regular interaction between students at
tions. The infrastructure will be for the entire sup- Agricultural universities and farmers will pro-
ply chain including collection, grading, packing vide required updation of knowledge. In order to
centre, cold storage, CA storage, pre-cooling units, acquaint the farmers better with available govern-
Refrigerating vans, and ripening chambers. ment policies/incentives, an IT-trained helper can
Grading centres for the Production and Col- be appointed at the Block level, to provide neces-
lection of crops and fruits, should be established, sary information.
along with MOU with the customers, in relation
with the national/international department, Tourism Sector
needs to be done so that the farmers get the cor-
rect price for their produce. There is also need Tourism can have a great positive impact on the
to link market infrastructure with reforms in the host economy by increasing its income, generating
APMC (Agriculture Produce Market Committee) employment for the local population, spurring the
government to invest in infrastructure creation, and
46
Box 2.2 Best Environment Management Practices (BEMP)

Environmental management is important for sustainability in agricultural sector because
(i) Ammonia emissions arise from storage and application of manure and fertilizers; (ii) use of artificial fertilizers
lead to GHG emissions and (iii) there is Eutrophication of surface waters, i.e. agriculture accounts for much of the
nitrogen entering rivers and lakes.
Recent research in European Union provides some guidance for Best Practices to reduce environmental impacts in
agriculture, comprising Practical guidance, Environmental performance indicators and Benchmarks of excellence.
An illustration for BEMP ON FERTILIZER MANAGEMENT.
Practical guidance: Environmental performance Benchmarks of excellence

1. How to produce a nutrient man- indicators
1. The fertiliser nutrients applied
agement plan 1. Field nutrient surplus (kg/ha/ do not exceed the amount required
2. Selection of lower impact fertiliz- year) (the amount of applied nu- to achieve the ‘economic optimum’
ers trient not ending up in harvests or crop yield
animal products)
3. Precise application of nutrients 2. Field nutrient surplus or nutrient
2. Nitrogen use efficiency (%) (an use efficiency are estimated for ni-
indication of the level of uptake of trogen, phosphorus and potassium
nitrogen) for individual fields
Overview of the Agriculture BEMPs

1. Sustainable farm and land management - Resource-efficient food production - Land management to provide
other ecosystem services - Engagement with consumers to encourage sustainable consumption
2. Soil quality management - Assess soil conditions - Maintain/improve soil organic matter - Maintain soil struc-
ture - Soil drainage
3. Nutrient management - Field nutrient budgeting - Crop rotations - Precise nutrient application - Selecting low-
er impact fertilisers
4. Soil preparation and crop planning - Crop rotations and cover/catch crops - Minimising soil preparation (till-
age) - Low impact tillage operations
5. Grass and grazing management - Maintaining productive grassland - Maintaining biodiverse grassland - Effi-
cient silage production
6. Animal husbandry - Achieve high feed conversion and N use efficiency - Green procurement of feed - Herd
health and profile management
7. Manure management - Efficient housing - Appropriate slurry storage - Anaerobic digestion - Efficient slurry
application
8. Irrigation - Minimising irrigation demand - Irrigation management / scheduling - Controlled irrigation tech-
niques
9. Crop protection - Dynamic crop protection management - Crop protection products selection
10. Protected horticulture - Energy management and renewables - Water management - Waste management
Source: https://ec.europa.eu/jrc/sites/jrcsh/files/IntroductionAndOverview_BEMP_Agriculture.pdf
47
generally giving a boost to local sales and demand manner so that it can be counted among the top
for the goods and services providers. This sector is national and international tourist destinations in
accepted as a growth driver for inclusive social eco- the coming years.
nomic progress through its forward and backward For the initial three-year period till 2020, tak-
linkages, and the ability to create employment in the ing stock of the existing strengths and weakness-
economy. The high employment potential is reflect- es, as well as detailed planning for the develop-
ed in the estimated Figureure of creation of around ment of the new segment of tourist markets can
90 jobs per Rs. 10 lakhs of investment. 7 There is be the strategy. There should be a plan to position
scope for more employment generation opportuni- ‘Brand Uttarakhand’ in the domestic and interna-
ties in accommodation projects, food-oriented proj- tional market. The medium term should see the re-
ects, and amusement parks and water sports. alisation and execution of the detailed plans made
Uttarakhand, known as ‘Dev Bhoomi’ or the in the short term, along with improvement in the
Abode of the Gods, due to its natural endowment existing facilities. The brand of the state should be
of snow-capped mountains, rivers, forests, and publicised and marketed to more and more coun-
glaciers, as well as its renowned religious tourist tries, as a larger number of potential tourists be-
destinations such as ‘Char Dham’, is a popular come aware of the attractiveness of Uttarakhand
tourist destination in India. However, it is yet to as a tourist destination. The long-term strategy
fulfil its enormous potential as a growth driver for would involve further expansion depending on
the Uttarakhand economy. the success in the medium term.
Present status: With 29 million tourist arrivals in The attraction of the state as a pilgrimage site
2015, Uttarakhand is ranked ahead of Himach- is already well-established, but there is still a great
al Pradesh as a tourist destination for domestic deal of scope to promote the state as a destination
tourists, but still accounts for just 2 per cent of the for spiritual purposes, yoga, and wellness, also as
all-India tourist arrivals (Table 2.1 Figure 2.3) and a destination for trekking, mountaineering, riv-
. As regards foreign tourists, the development of er-rafting, and such adventurous activities. Rural
this sector in Uttarakhand lags considerably be- tourism and eco-tourism can be encouraged as has
hind other states. been done in other countries and in other states of
Vision and Strategy: The vision is to develop Uttara- India (see Box 2.3 for the Finnish experience of pro-
khand as a comprehensive, world class tourism moting food-based tourism), provided the needs
destination by realising the untapped potential of for infrastructure and connectivity, skill training,
sustainable tourism, through the design of inno- accreditation of dhabas/restaurants, and service
vative tourism products that build on the inherent providers are met. Thereafter, tourist destinations
strengths of the state as a natural destination which in the upper reaches of the state can also be devel-
can cater to all categories of tourists. oped, providing employment opportunities to the
local youth.
The aim is to make the state one of the top 10
tourism destination states of the country by 2020, For rural tourism, in particular, Himachal
up from its present rank of 12, to acquire a place Pradesh with its scheme ‘Har Gaon ki Kahani’
among the top 5 destination states by 2024, and has shown an exemplary way for how villages
finally to attain a position among the top 3 desti- can become an attractive tourist destination. Un-
nation states by 2030. der this scheme, the Panchayats of any village/
districts can send anecdotes about the history and
To attain this vision, the strategy for the state background of the concerned locale to the office
would involve the need to brand and position the of Deputy Commissioner or concerned District
experience of holidaying in the state in a planned
7. Annual Report 2015-16, Ministry of Tourism, Government of India
48
Table 2.1 Tourist Arrivals in 2015 and the State’s Rank as a Tourist Destination
Tourist Arrivals in 2015
Rank in 2015
(million)
Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign
Uttarakhand 29 0.1 12 20
Uttarakhand share (%) in

2.0 0.4
all-India
Himachal Pradesh 17 0.4 17 12
Himachal Pradesh share

1.2 1.7
(%) in all-India
All-India 1432 23
Source: Uttarakhand State government.
Tourism development Center. 8 The individual locals, tourists can visit villages to witness boat
culture, customs, rituals for festivals/marriag- carnivals and races 9.
es and traditional tales were expected to attract Rajasthan provides a good example of how en-
tourists to experience their way of life and would tire villages are being developed as tourist destina-
give a boost to employment in the rural areas of tions to provide additional sources of employment
Himachal Pradesh as visits by tourists increased. and income to residents, whether it be through op-
Figure. 2.3 Tourist Arrivals in 2015 and the State’s Rank as a Tourist Destination
Source: Uttarakhand State government.
All the prevailing stories are compiled in a book erating homestays or rural tourist activities such as
which is published and disseminated world-wide village visits and sale of wares 10. Guests stay with
for drawing in more tourists to the state. a family and experience the culture of the local vil-
In Kerala, tours to Kovalam villages, for ex- lage. The tourists thus have an opportunity to expe-
ample, can introduce tourists to coir manufactur- rience simple rustic lifestyle from close quarters and
ing, coconut leaf weaving, and fish markets. In see the traditional values at work.
Wayanad one can meet, and greet oldest tribes, Theme-based circuits that have potential to be
which are barely untouched by civilization. Apart showcased as world class tourism products can be
from watching traditional activities like fishing by developed in consultation with the stakeholders.
8. Source: http://nestandwingsholidays.com/blog/har-gaon-ki-kahani-a-feather-in-the-crown-of-himachal-tourism/ accessed on 30 January 2018.

9. Source: https://www.tourmyindia.com/states/kerala/village-tourism.html accessed on 30 January, 2018.
10. Source: https://www.tripsavvy.com/rural-rajasthan-culture-aangan-homestays-1539654 accessed on 30 January, 2018.
49
Box 2.3 Hungry for Finland! The Finnish Experience in Culinary Tourism
Food and eating are essential elements of the tourism product that involve powerful experiences.
Finland’s First Food Tourism Strategy 2015–2020 was launched and financed by the Ministry of Agriculture and
Forestry together with ‘Visit Finland’ in 2015. The work on the Food Tourism Strategy was coordinated by Haa-
ga-Helia University of Applied Sciences.
The key issues in developing food tourism are:
1. Taste of place: Associating a flavour to Finnish origins and the Finnish way of life.
2. Pure pleasure: Pure Finnish food involves Europe’s purest ingredients, clean water and air, aromas and flavonoids
created by Arctic light conditions, organic and local food and very high standards in food processing, all of which
contribute to healthy food, including special dietary needs.
3. Cool and creative Finland: An internationally renowned culinary phenomenon.
Strategic Actions
The primary action in promoting Finnish food tourism is the development of spearhead products, strategic part-
nerships and communication, as well as measures and designated actors for each of these. The measures listed in
the strategy aimed at promoting appealing, high-quality Finnish products to international and domestic tourists.
Finnish tourism operators were involved in the strategy discussions.
Source: http://p2bhaaga.fi/sites/p2bhaaga.fi/files/Gastronomy_report_RUOKA%26MATKA.pdf
The state is actively considering development of for planning these circuits, along with a compre-
spiritual and religious theme based circuits for hensive area development approach to ensure the
tourism11. Under the Swadesh Darshan scheme of availability all the requisite facilities in those cir-
central government, Uttarakhand is a site for Eco cuits, is also essential. There is a plan to develop
tourism comprising ‘Integrated Development of thirteen new destinations in thirteen districts of the
Eco-Tourism, Adventure Sports, Associated Tour- state based on various themes like adventure, lei-
ism related Infrastructure for Development of Teh- sure, rural, spiritual, and wellness in the long term.
ri Lake & Surroundings as New Destination-Dis- Success of tourism initiatives depend just not on
trict Tehri, Uttarakhand’ 12. Other themes may tourism department, but on synergy between tour-
involve treks/hikes/tours to view famous Hima- ism and a host of other departments of the govern-
layan peaks, or treks along the course of the Gan- ment. As a tourist arrives in Uttarakhand, the tour-
ga river, or places of culinary interest, or villages ism experience starts at the airport, railway station,
where communities maintain traditional lifestyles bus terminus, or in the car travel she undertakes to
that tourists may find interesting. reach her destination. The tourist’s experience actu-
Homestays in rural areas and in serviced ally starts even before that with access to informa-
apartments in urban areas can supplement tour- tion about tourist destinations and the ease of con-
ist accommodation. These can be linked to the nectivity of the state with other states in India and
theme-based circuits for planned growth and the with the rest of the world. The experience continues
government can plan to promote cleanliness and with the comfort of stay in hotels, etc., the culinary
beautification of the concerned villages and locales experience, the ease of access to popular tourist
for better tourist attraction. A framework for clas- spots, safety, the diversity of tourist attraction and
sifying infrastructural gaps can be developed to the functioning of the same, internet availability/
identify the existing bottlenecks so as to unlock the connectivity, and above all, the warm and friendly
potential of these circuits. An integrated approach behaviour of the local people which can make a stay
11. https://mediaindia.eu/indian-travel-trade/uttarakhand-to-develop-spiritual-tourism-circuits/ accessed on 2 February, 2018.

12. http://pib.nic.in/newsite/PrintRelease.aspx?relid=137206 accessed on 2 February, 2018.
50
memorable. Evidently, numerous departments such electronics manufacturing units to establish their
as PWD, road and rail transport, aviation, water enterprises in Uttarakhand.
and sanitation, electricity, urban development, hos- The Department of Rural Development focus-
pitality, IT, Disaster management and many other es on generation of self-employment and employ-
departments need synergy with the tourist department opportunities through skill training, and as-
ment to create a complete tourist experience. Here set creation via self-help groups (SHGs), among
a strategy of deploying project-specific committees others, through implementation of schemes such
which span several major departments should be as the National Rural Livelihood Mission (NRLM).
considered, especially for big projects.
Skilling youth in the state is a key strategy for
tacking youth unemployment. The Mahila Mangal
Other Avenues for Generating Sustainable Dal and The Yuva Mangal Dal, at the village level,
Livelihoods: shall also be motivated through workshops to cre-
The scope for linking the MSME sector to the ate self-help groups (SHGs) and to undertake the
growth-driver sectors, especially horticulture, required skill upgradation or training so that they
and thereby generating further employment, can benefit from the various employment genera-
has been mentioned. The MSME sector envisag- tion schemes of the different government depart-
es massive expansion in the future, which would ments. Uttarakhand Skill Development Mission is
increase employment from the present number important in this context. Some youngsters will be
of 2.58 lakh people to 8.5 lakh people by the year trained by ex-Army personnel at the block level to
2030. The focus will be especially on the micro sec- facilitate their entry into the Army. Reform and di-
tor, which has a tremendous potential to provide versification in agriculture, and, especially, more
employment at the mass level at minimum capi- land ownership for women, will help to raise their
tal investment. This sector also plans to provide work participation. Jal Vidyut Nigam undertakes
a marketing platform to the constituent segments projects in various parts of the state and can link
such as cottage, khadi, handloom and handicraft the employment of local youths to these projects.
producers, and to boost entrepreneurship among The employment department registers unem-
potential businesswomen. The employment gen- ployed youth, who would be provided appropri-
eration from the Large industries sector is envis- ate skill upgradation and training, so that they can
aged to increase from 1.69 lakh at present to 4.44 benefit from various self-employment schemes.
lakh people by 2030. Job fairs will be organized regularly at the district
Information Technology is an enabling sector level to facilitate the placement of these youths
that provides the under-pinning of smooth con- in various private sector enterprises. The depart-
nectivity throughout the state in various department shall conduct career counselling in all parts
ments, businesses and homes, thereby improving of the state through psychometric or aptitude tests
productivity and efficiency across sectors. Given to help students choose their careers as per their
the high literacy rate of 78.82 per cent in the state, skills and ability. In parallel, capacity building of
employment opportunities for educated youth concerned departments should also take place.
can be generated by encouraging ICT, ITES and
51
52
PART II their financial inclusion is ensured.

SECTION 2.1 The vision for targets of Goal No. 1 are pre-
sented in Appendix 2.1.1, followed by values for
SDG 1 End Poverty in All Its Forms
indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix
Everywhere
2.1.2, and Appendix 2.1.3 contains the schemes
The Sustainable Development Goal No.1 is di- applicable for Goal no. 1. Annexure 1 contains
rectly related to the economic and social pillars of the detailed information regarding indicators for
sustainability, though as in the case of the other Goal no. 1 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), me-
SDGs, it is also linked to the other pillars. Every dium term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
citizen on this planet should be able to enjoy free-
In the present section, Target numbers 1.1 to
dom from poverty in all its dimensions, and this is
1.4 all largely relate to rural and urban develop-
the basic issue addressed under Goal No. 1.
ment. Among these, Targets 1.1 and 1.2, which
Traditionally, economic growth has been the directly relate to poverty, will be discussed to-
primary instrument for tackling poverty. How- gether, while Targets 1.3 and 1.4, which relate to
ever, this has been based on the assumption social protection and inclusion, will be discussed
that the fruits of growth would trickle down together. Target 1.5, dealing with the resilience
to the poor and rich alike. Yet recent experi- of the vulnerable and poor to climate-related ex-
ence has shown that the benefits of economic treme events will be discussed separately.
growth have often tended to bypass vast sec-
tions of the poor, especially in the developing
countries, leading to increasing inequali- Target 1.1 Eradicating extreme poverty
ties and disparities between the rich and Baseline for Uttarakhand
the poor. Following efforts to address
The UN had specified extreme poverty as applicable
this serious issue, the provision of social
to those living below an income of 1.25$ daily. In
protection has expanded around the globe in the
the context of Uttarakhand, the concept of depriva-
form of cash transfers, meals for school children,
tion is being used as a proxy. In order to assess the
and targeted food assistance, as well as social in-
deprivation of the people, a Socio-Economic Caste
surance and labour market programmes, includ-
Census (SECC) was conducted in rural and urban
ing old-age pensions, disability pensions, unem-
households in India in 2011. Some results for the ru-
ployment insurance, skills training, and wage
ral census are already in the public domain. Based
subsidies, among others.
on SECC data households are ranked and catego-
Uttarakhand, with a high per capita income, is rised on the basis of socio-economic status using
better placed than many other states in the country automatic exclusion criteria, automatic inclusion
with respect to income poverty. However, it is wide- criteria, and deprivation criteria. The automatic ex-
ly accepted that poverty is multi-dimensional in clusion criteria are based on income/assets while
nature, and it is worthwhile to explore the other as- those automatically included are the poorest of the
pects of poverty and deprivation in the state, such poor. The remaining households are ranked on the
as access to basic services, as well as its resilience to basis of the following seven deprivation factors
withstand shocks and natural disasters, which can (Figure 2.4):
rapidly push even non-poor people into poverty.
Using the above criteria, the total number
The vision for 2030 for Goal No. 1 for the state of deprived rural households suffering from at
of Uttarakhand is: least one deprivation at present is 4,29,888. Two
By 2030, all deprived families in rural and ur- districts in the plains, that is, Haridwar and Ud-
ban areas are empowered enough to lift them- ham Singh Nagar, have the highest number of de-
selves out of poverty, all poor and vulnerable prived households.13
people are covered with social protection and
13. The SECC data for the urban households have not yet been released and hence the corresponding values for the urban indicator cannot be estimated.
53
The poverty and vulnerability of the poor in The first strand of this strategy aims to elimi-
urban areas, including urban street vendors, is nate extreme poverty by reducing the number of
sought to be reduced by enabling them to acquire deprived population to zero by 2030. In order to
skills which would help them access gainful em- attain this from the baseline level of 4,29,888 de-
ployment. In the absence of estimates for the ur- prived households in 2016–17, the number would
ban poor, the indicator for extreme poverty used be reduced by 20 per cent in the short term, to
is the number of homeless households, for which bring down the total number of deprived house-
the baseline level is estimated to be 21,930. The holds to 3,43,911 by 2019-20. In the medium term,
National Urban Livelihood Mission addresses the the aim would be to achieve a further reduction of
problems of homeless families and provides them 40 per cent to bring down the number reduces to
with them shelters equipped with the essential 1,71,955 by 2023–24. The remaining 40 per cent of
services. Existing schemes such as the Mahatma the deprived households would be brought above
Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee the extreme deprivation level by 2030. The second
Act (MGNREGA), which are operational in the strand of the strategy would entail the provision
rural areas of the state, are critical in providing of schemes to ensure social protection of the poor
the necessary safety net that prevents the vulnera- and the vulnerable.
ble sections from falling into extreme poverty (see With the increasing urbanisation, the number
Appendix 2.1.3 for schemes). of urban poor is likely to increase in the coming
years. The urban poor are being targeted on the
Target 1.2 Reducing the number of poor people basis of the following three kinds of vulnerabil-
ities: occupational vulnerability (pertaining to
Baseline for Uttarakhand livelihoods and dependence on the informal sec-
The indicators for this target show that the pover- tor), residential vulnerability (concerning shelter/
ty rate with reference to the state poverty lines is housing and basic services), and social vulnera-
11.26 per cent 14 (2011-12), much below the all-In- bility (covering health, education, social security,
dia poverty Figureure of 21.92 per cent for the and inclusion, among other things). The issue of
same year, and the state exhibits very little rural– social vulnerability is being addressed by various
urban differential in poverty rates. departments/ministries, while the issues of occu-
pational and residential vulnerability are being
addressed by the Central Ministry of Housing
Vision 2030 for Targets 1.1 and 1.2 and Urban Poverty Alleviation.
The vision of the Department of Rural Develop- The vision propounded by the Deen Dayal
ment, Uttarakhand, is that, in order to empower Antyodaya Yojana-National Urban Livelihood
the families identified as deprived, earnings of at Mission (DAY-NULM) is to reduce the poverty
least $1.25 daily will be created for each member of and vulnerability of the urban poor households
those families. The planks for creating such earn- by enabling them to access gainful self-employ-
ings would be generation of self-employment and ment and skilled wage employment opportuni-
employment opportunities through skill training, ties, resulting in an appreciable improvement in
and asset creation via self-help groups (SHGs), their livelihoods on a sustainable basis, through
among others, through implementation of schemes the building of strong grass-root level institutions
such as the National Rural Livelihood Mission for the poor. Under this scheme, urban street ven-
(NRLM), MGNREGA, the Integrated Livelihood dors would be helped to access suitable space,
Support Project (ILSP) under International Fund institutional credit, social security, and skills for
for Agricultural Development (IFAD), and the Bio- accessing emerging market opportunities. Anoth-
gas Programme. This strategy thus largely depends er objective of the 2030 vision is to provide 21,930
on the creation of employment, which can also be homeless households with shelters equipped with
provided by other departments such as horticul- services in a phased manner so that their number
ture, tourism, industry, etc.
14. 2011-12 Planning Commission estimates based on the Tendulkar methodology for poverty estimation.
54
Figure 2.4: Deprivation Criteria Used in Socio-economic Caste Census
No adult member in
Households with one household between the
or less room, kutcha ages of 18 and 59 years Female-headed household
walls and kutcha roof with no adult male mem-
ber between the ages of
16-59 years
Landless households
Deprivation Criteria Households with differ-
deriving a major part
of their income from ently-abled members with
manual labour no other able-bodied adult
Households with no member
SC/ST households
literate adult above the
age of 25 years
Source: Based on information provided in secc.guv.in/
is gradually brought down to 18,853 by 2019–20, Strategy for Targets 1.1 and 1.2
further down to 3077 by 2023–24, and finally to The Rural Sector: The Department of Rural Devel-
zero by 2029–30. The Pradhan Mantri Awas Yo- opment has planned to adopt a holistic approach
jana (PMAY—Housing for All), Shelter for Urban to eliminate extreme poverty in the state. The gov-
Homeless (SUH), and other such schemes also ernment has devised a policy comprising 10 sutras
operate to address the problems of those without or points which, if addressed, would mitigate the
shelter and homes. multidimensional poverty faced by the poor. These
As regards Target 1.2, the proportion of people sutras aim to improve income/consumption by tar-
below the state poverty line is sought to be reduced geting and providing the poor and deprived with
from 11.26 per cent in the baseline to at least half, the necessary skills/livelihoods, while also im-
that is, 5.63 per cent, by 2030. Since the proportions proving their access to health and education, water
of people below the poverty line in both rural and and sanitation, housing, and finance, enhancing
urban areas in Uttarakhand are comparable, the social protection and strengthening the commu-
issue of mitigation of poverty for both will be ad- nity. The ten aspects of the holistic approach that
dressed with equal priority. needs to be adopted to combat poverty are present-
ed in Figure 2.5.
Challenges for Targets 1.1 and 1.2 Under the NRLM, hitherto 33,240 households
have been organised into 4133 SHGs. The broad
Migration from the Hills: Migration vision and strategy for lifting people out of pov-
from the hills to the plains and to des- erty by empowering them would be as follows:
tinations outside the state is a major
challenge, which is resulting in empty villages and • In the short term, that is, between 2016–17
in large swathes of land remaining uncultivated/ and 2019–20, some 7800 beneficiaries would
fallow in the hills. Able people are more likely to be self-employed. Around 85,978 beneficia-
migrate but sometimes others also leave, who lat- ries would receive skill training out of whom
er cannot fit themselves into the new environment. at least 70 percent will be placed for employ-
They need skilling to be able to adjust to the new en- ment. These 85,978 households would be or-
vironment and such schemes are being implement- ganised into 8597 SHGs.
ed by the Rural Development Department. • In the mid term, that is, between 2020–21
and 2023–24, 15,600 beneficiaries would be
self-employed. A total of 1,71,955 people
would benefit from skill training, out of whom
55
Table 2.2: Vision 2030 for MGNREGA and Housing Schemes

2016–17 2019–20 2023–24 2029–30
MGNREGA (number of
180 570 830 1395
man-days created)
21,930
All people
PMAY (housing for homeless, belonging to
families with no rooms, 1 or 2 8120 this deprivation
kutcha rooms) category to be
provided hous-
ing by 2022
Rajya Hrin Saha Anudan 44,072 houses

Grameen Awas Yojana (State built from 2000 6492 8656 12,984
loan for building houses) till August 2016
Source: Government of Uttarakhand.
at least 70 percent will be ensured placements; times. In the subsequent time periods, the project-
and a total of 17,196 SHGs would be formed to ed man-days will increase by 1.5 and 1.6 times,
include 1,71,955 households. respectively.
• In the long term, that is, between 2024–25 Under the NRLM, a central scheme, the modus
and 2029–30, another 15,600 beneficiaries operandi is the formation of SHGs for women and
would be self-employed. A total of 1,71,955 then to inculcate savings behaviour in SHG mem-
people would benefit from skill training, out bers, followed by encouragement of inter-lend-
of whom at least 70 per cent will be offered ing. Next, the SHG members receive revolving
placement; and a total of 17,196 SHGs would funds from the government. After 12–24 meet-
be formed to include 1,71,955 households. ings, the micro-credit plans made by these SHG
The focus on livelihood will be supplemented members are supported by project staff. Then the
by social protection schemes. There are universal Government of India gives Rs. 1.1 lakh per SHG
programmes such as MGNREGA, while the major (subject to a criterion of a minimum size 5 in the
central scheme NRLM targets the deprived sections hills and 10 in the plains, and with a maximum
among the women beneficiaries. Some other tar- limit of 15). After six months, every individual or
geted schemes include the Integrated Livelihoods group delineates(s) plans for creating assets, such
Support Programme (ILSP), which is a poverty alle- as buying cows, or building an atta chakki, among
viation programme operating in Uttarakhand.15 The other things, and the state government provides a
MGNREGA scheme, on the other hand, is open-end- further subsidy of 3 per cent.
ed, that is, there are no eligibility criteria for benefi- There have also been initiatives for skill
ciaries falling under it. For implementing the PMAY development for wages and for self-employ-
in the rural areas, the SECC data are being used for ment through the DDU-GKY. This is a part of
selecting the beneficiaries or the deprived. In addi- the NRLM and is tasked with the dual objec-
tion, state-conducted surveys are also sometimes tives of adding diversity to the incomes of ru-
used. Table 2.2 depicts the vision for MGNREGA ral poor families and catering to the career as-
and the housing sector. pirations of the rural youth. The DDU-GKY is
The biggest thrust for MGNREGA would be uniquely focused on rural youth between the
in the immediate three-year period, by increasing ages of 15 and 35 years from poor families. As
the targeted man-days by a little more than three a part of the Skill India campaign, it plays an
instrumental role in supporting the social and
15. ILSP is a poverty alleviation programme being implemented in Uttarakhand in 41 blocks of 11 hill districts (Almora, Bageshwar, Chamoli, Tehri, Uttar-
kashi, Rudrapryag, Dehradun, Pauri, Champawat, Pithoragarh, and Nanital) (Source: https://ilsp.in/).
56
Figure 2.5: Strategy to Eliminate Extreme Poverty in Rural Uttarakhand
Source: Based on information provided by Government of Uttarakhand
economic programmes of the government like and developing community institutions, as well
‘Make in India’, and ‘Digital India’. 16 as by investing in their capacity to take livelihood
The Government of Uttarakhand is imple- decisions, and providing support services and
menting the Uttarakhand Livelihoods Improve- linkages.
ment Project for the Himalayas (ULIPH), with The project is covering 959 villages of 17 de-
financial support from IFAD. The project is man- velopment blocks in 5 districts of Uttarakhand,
aged by the Uttarakhand Gramya Vikas Samiti wherein approximately 40 percent of the total
(UGVS).The primary objective of the project is to population in each selected block is covered. The
improve the livelihood of vulnerable groups in project has formed 3962 community-based or-
a sustainable manner through the promotion of ganisations including SHGs, Van Panchayats and
improved livelihood opportunities and strength- Federations.17
ening of local institutions that relate to livelihood The central scheme of National Biogas and Ma-
development. The approach is to provide oppor- nure Management Programme provides for setting
tunities for better livelihoods by utilising SHGs
16. Source: http://ddugky.gov.in/content/about-us-0

17. Source: https://ugvs.org/uliph.html
57
up of Family Type Biogas Plants mainly for rural panelment of independent Certification Agen-
and semi-urban/households. 18 Such biogas plants cies (CAs) and a Placement (of a minimum of 50
generate biogas from organic substances such as per cent of the candidates) and/or linkages for
cattle-dung, and other bio-degradable materials self-employment ventures. Thus, an asset will
such as biomass from farms, gardens, kitchens and be provided to the urban poor in the form of
night soil wastes. The fuel thus obtained is clean and skills for sustainable livelihood and alleviation
can be used for lighting and cooking, with the latter of urban poverty.
usage leading to savings on the cost incurred on Liq- (iii)
Self-employment Programme: Under the
uefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) cylinders. In addition, scheme, individual and group enterprises are
the digested slurry from biogas plants is used as en- to be promoted and linked with banks for fi-
riched bio-manure to supplement the use of chem- nancial support, and there is also provision of
ical fertilisers. Setting up bio-gas plants improves interest subsidy on loans for individual enter-
sanitation in villages, and most importantly, biogas prises (up to a maximum amount of Rs. 2 lakhs)
plants help in reducing the causes of climate change. and for group enterprises (up to a maximum
Alleviating Poverty in the Urban Sector: The amount of Rs. 10 lakhs). The individual and
DAY-NULM is the main scheme aimed at lifting group enterprises will get subsidised loans and
the poor out of poverty in the urban areas. This SHGs will be linked with banks for loans.
scheme has the following six main components: (iv) Capacity building and training: Technical
(i) Social Mobilisation and Institution Develop- support will be provided at the national, state
ment (SMID), which envisages the develop- and city levels.
ment of a three-tier structure for the socio-eco- (v) Support to urban street vendors: A city-wide
nomic upliftment of the poor, comprising SHG street vendor survey will be carried out with
(Self Help Group), ALF (Area Level Federation) a view to identify vendors, vendor zones, and
and CLF (City Level Federation) (see Figure existing practices, and ID cards will be issued
Figure 2.6: National Urban Livelihoods Mission for Alleviating Urban Poverty
Represents SHGs and gives them adequate
voice across various levels, eg. ULBs, state
Govts, banks, etc.
Association of SHGs for bank linkage, Revolving fund

bargaining Rs.50,000
Community Mobilisation for thrift, Revolving fund

empowerment Rs.10,000
Source: http://nulm.gov.in/PDF/Reg_Workshop_pdf/NULM_Launch_Presentation.pdf
2.6); to the vendors by the urban local body (ULB).

(ii) Employment through Skill Training and Place- There are plans for vendor market develop-
ment (ESTP) (Utthan): The primary features of ment, skill development, and financial inclu-
ESTP are that it entails imparting of training sion, as well as social security convergence.
as per the needs of the market, and stipulates (vi) Scheme of shelters for the urban homeless: For
the empanelment of Skill Training Providers every urban population segment of one lakh,
(STPs). It also posits that there will also be em- there will be permanent 24x7 all-weather com-
18. Source: http://mnre.gov.in/schemes/decentralized-systems/schems-2/
58
munity shelters, with each shelter equipped to Target 1.4: Right to economic resources
cater to 50–100 persons. A minimum space of including land, property and financial s
5 square meters or 50 sq. feet will be provided ervices
per person. Linkages with social security and Baseline for Uttarakhand
other entitlements will also be ensured.
Target 1.4 will be assessed primarily by financial
inclusion in the form of the number of Jan Dhan
Target 1.3: Coverage of social protection Yojana accounts opened till date. The baseline
Baseline for Uttarakhand value is 21,70,693.
There are many pension schemes, including cen- Vision 2030 for Targets 1.3 and 1.4
tral schemes, in Uttarakhand, such as Old Age Target 1.3 entails extending social protection for
Pension, Widow Pension, Disability Pension, and vulnerable people. The state has plans for expand-
Farmers’ Pension, among others, which provide ing the outreach of the main pension plans from
a security net for the vulnerable segments of the the baseline levels to those in 2030, as delineated
society. Details of the baseline physical achieve- in table 2.5.
ments and financial expenditure for the major As regards Target 1.4, the baseline financial in-
pension schemes for the year 2015–16 are given in clusion, as reflected in the number of Jan Dhan Ac-
Table 2.3 and Figure. 2.7. counts opened in the state, will be increased over
The largest outreach is for the Old Age Pen- the coming fifteen-year period in order to ensure
sion scheme, which has 4,25,000 beneficiaries. that all unreached households are covered by 2030.
Other schemes for the vulnerable segments of the Strategy for Target 1.4
society include those that provide financial assis-
tance for the marriage of daughters in poor SC The Panchayati Raj Department has a major role
families and for daughters of homeless widows. to play in ensuring that all people, particularly the
Table 2.3: Physical Achievements (No.) and Expenditure

(Rs. lakh) under Major Pension Schemes in Uttarakhand (2015–16)
Scheme Physical Achievement (No.) Total Expenditure (Rs. lakh)
Old Age Pension 4,25,962 35,342.75
Widow Pension 1,39,381 12,302.23
Disability Pension 64,921 5796.09
Farmer Pension 19,469 1429.28
Figure 2.7 Expenditure (Rs lakh) under Major Pension Schemes in Uttarakhand (2015-16)
59
Table 2.4: Achievements and Targets (No.) for Major Pension Schemes in Uttarakhand
Scheme Baseline Achievement (No.) Target 2030 (No.)
Old Age Pension 4,25,962 5,55,000

Widow Pension 1,39,381 1,80,000
Disability Pension 64,921 80,000
Farmer Pension 19,469 25,000
poor and the vulnerable, get equal rights to eco- concerned. The baseline value of the number of
nomic resources and finance, as well as access to fully/partially damaged houses is 806/2440 and
basic services, among other things. The department there was a loss of 1464 animals, including both
aims to adopt the following strategy to effectively small and big ones.
address this target: Vision 2030 for Target 1.5
• Effective implementation of the flagship pro- Uttarakhand as a mountain economy faces more
grammes of the Panchayati Raj department such natural disasters such as landslides, floods and
as NRLM and MGNERGA, among others. earthquakes than most other states in India. Hence,
• Proper identification and prioritisation of el- Target 1.5 is extremely important for this state.
igible candidates and beneficiaries for all the Overall, the vision is to minimise the loss of lives
plans/programmes, subsidies, and social pro- and property arising from people’s vulnerability
tection schemes. to climate-related extreme events and other envi-
• Provision of basic services relating to drink- ronmental shocks, and to improve their resilience
ing water, sanitation, waste management, and to vulnerability against such events. Specifically,
other such facilities for all citizens with the it is aimed at that the number of deaths has to be
help of the 14th Finance Commission. brought to zero by 2030, and attempts have to be
• Establishment of a system of managing public made to contain the damage to houses and loss of
property/resources with the help of rural em- animals in a staggered way.
ployment based on resource-mapping.
• Determination of local development goals, Challenges for Target 1.5
public interaction and garnering of resources Poor response and preparedness for disaster man-
for the elimination of poverty. agement: There have been reports underscoring
the weakness in disaster management observed
during the 2013 disaster, particularly the response
Target 1.5: Build the resilience of the and preparedness components. 19
poor and vulnerable to climate-relat-
ed extreme events and environmental Strategy for Target 1.5
shocks and disasters. The strategy needed for tackling the natural ca-
Baseline for Uttarakhand lamities that occur relatively frequently in moun-
tain states such as Uttarakhand are: conduction
The vulnerability to climate-related events is cap- of a Hazard, Risk, Vulnerability and Capacity
tured by the indicators of loss of lives, injuries (HRVC) analysis; augmenting preparedness to
due to natural disasters, and also by the number deal with disasters; ensuring proper land-use;
of houses fully/partially damaged, and the loss and installing monitoring and warning systems.
of animals from natural disasters. Although the Further, all disaster management plans should be
loss of lives numbered 126 for the baseline, it was stringently followed and executed.
225 in 2013, and the number of missing that year
had been a massive 4021, as there was a major > The State government has prepared a State Di-
natural disaster in Uttarakhand during the year saster Management Plan, which is being revised
19. Uttarakhand Disaster 2013, National Institute of Disaster Management, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India.
60
every year. Given that in times of disaster, co-or- • Establishment of a Decision Support System
dination between various departments such as (DSS): This involves the setting up of a DSS for
Public works, Police, Health, Water, Power, Ir- assimilating and analysing information from
rigation, Agriculture and Animal Husbandry is multiple sources in an integrated geo-spatial
crucial for the effectiveness of the disaster man- system that will display information and pro-
agement programme, the corresponding disaster vide access in a user-friendly manner.
management plans are also being prepared at the • Slope Stabilisation Study: This will entail
department levels. Standard Operating Proce- learning about slope stabilisation from among
dures (SOPs) for different types of disasters are the existing successful techniques and introduce
being prepared for different relevant departments appropriate technology in the state. The study
and duties are being assigned to specific person- will help minimise the impact of landslides on
nel. Provision of battery-operated chargers can be infrastructure and protect habitations from the
made in the disaster-prone areas to facilitate open overflow of rivers by treating and stabilising ac-
communication among all stakeholders when di- tive and prone slopes along river training works.
saster strikes. • Strengthening of the Uttarakhand State
> Mock drills and exercises are being carried out Disaster Management Authority: This will
as a part of the Incident Response System (IRS) involve institutional strengthening and en-
along with imparting of training for search and hancement of facilities, and training pro-
rescue operations to police personnel, fire-Figure- grammes, among other things.
hters, and homeguards, among all security per- • Strengthening of a Hydro-Meteorological Net-
sonnel. It is also being ensured that SMS services work and Early Warning System (EWS): This
are put in place and used efficiently for timely will review the existing hydro-meteorological
dissemination of weather-related information to capabilities at the state and national levels and
warn communities about impending disasters. will develop a relevant modernisation plan.
> The Uttarakhand Government has a long-term Similarly, the existing EWS will be reviewed to
strategy with detailed outlines for improvement identify gaps and help establish a robust and
fail-safe EWS in the state.
in ‘Technical Assistance and Capacity Building’
for disaster risk management. The various com- • Seismic Assessment of Public Buildings in
ponents of this strategy are as follows: Uttarakhand: This will entail assessment of
seismic vulnerability on the basis of the struc-
• Disaster Risk Assessment: This will pro-
tural information of buildings through rapid
vide technical assistance to institutions to visual screening, and identification of seis-
enable them to plan, setup and implement a mic-deficient buildings for prioritising the
multi-hazard risk assessment of the state. A structural strengthening of such buildings.
Digital Disaster Risk Database will be devel-
oped, comprising information about major di- • Strengthening Emergency Response Capaci-
sasters such as earthquakes, landslides, floods, ty: This will focus on strengthening the capacity
flash floods, and industrial hazards. of the State Disaster Response Force, including
fire services personnel and other key response
• River Morphology Study: This will support agencies through the use of better search and
the study of the morphology of key rivers rescue equipment and enhanced training.
impacted by disasters, along with identifica-
> Apart from the plans of the State Disaster Man-
tion of critical protective infrastructure that is
agement Authority, the Civil Aviation department
needed to strengthen river banks. It has also
has also launched initiatives for improving pre-
been proposed to develop an Uttarakhand paredness to meet disasters since Uttarakhand is
River Information Management System (UR- a mountainous state with many remote locations.
MIS) to assist in decision-making and URMIS Construction and upgradation of helipads/he-
is likely to provide a better anticipation as liports along with associated facilities for disas-
well as control of response of rivers and catch- ter preparedness have been proposed for 60 such
ment areas to any catastrophic event, and help helipads/heliports, and No Objection Certificates
to ensure timely corrective action. (NOCs) have already been obtained for 51 of these.
61
62
SECTION 2.2 Target 2.2: By 2030, end all forms of malnutrition

SDG 2 End hunger, Achieve Food Security and Baseline for Uttarakhand
Improved Nutrition and Promote Sustainable Uttarakhand has no overt problem of hunger
Agriculture. though considerable malnutrition is prevalent in
Some of the reasons for slow progress in elimi- the state. There is an active Public Distribution
nating hunger globally have been natural and System (PDS) comprising around 9000 Fair Price
human-induced disasters or political instability, Shop outlets. The National Food Security Mis-
with increased vulnerability and food insecurity. sion accounts for 60 per cent of the foodgrain sup-
Thus persistent hunger is associated not only with ply through PDS while the remaining 40 per cent
food availability, but also with access to food. 20 comes from the state food scheme. The Antyodaya
households and erstwhile Below the Poverty Line
In Uttarakhand, the agriculture sector contrib-
(BPL) households together account for around a
utes just around 10 per cent to the GSDP. However,
quarter of the beneficiaries.
in a state where over 70 per cent of the inhabitants
are rural, the same sector employs more than 50 Malnutrition among children is widely prev-
per cent of the workers and provides livelihood alent in India and Uttarakhand is no exception.
security to a major proportion of the rural popu- There is considerable chronic malnutrition among
lation. Thus, agricultural progress continues to be children below the age of five years, which is man-
crucially important for not only food security but ifested in the form of stunting and wasting, affect-
also for the overall development of the state. ing, on an average, 33.5 per cent, and 19.5 per cent,
respectively, of the children in this age group in the
state. In this context, the rural indicators are higher
The Vision for the state for Goal No. 2 is: than the urban, according to the latest NFHS data
By 2030, access to foodgrains is substantially for 4th round in 2015-16. A little over a quarter of the
improved such that no citizen in Uttarakhand children under the age of five are underweight for
is hungry or malnourished, and agriculture is their age. However, the incidence of stunting and
transformed with the help of the expansion of prevalence of underweight children have declined
irrigation, crop diversification, productivity since 2005–06, the third round of NFHS.
enhancement, and organic farming practices. Moderate Acute Malnutrition (MAM) and
The vision for targets of Goal No. 2 are pre- Severe Acute Malnutrition (SAM) are widely ac-
sented in Appendix 2.2.1, followed by values for cepted as indicators of malnutrition. SAM refers
indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix to severe wasting and is a dangerous form of mal-
2.2.2, and Appendix 2.2.3 contains the schemes nutrition, which can turn fatal if left untreated. 21
applicable for Goal no. 2. Annexure 2 contains The state has 1677 children (aged less than three
the detailed information regarding indicators for years) in the SAM category and 25,281 children
Goal no. 2 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), me- (aged less than three years) in the MAM category.
dium term (2023-24) and vision 2030. Anaemia is a manifestation of under-nutrition
In the present section, Target 2.2 deals with and poor dietary intake of iron. Nearly 60 per cent
aim of eliminating malnutrition. This will be dis- of the children in the age group of 6–59 months
cussed first. The targets 2.1, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5 are all in Uttarakhand are anaemic, and this high level
related directly to the agriculture and allied sec- of anaemia has persisted since 2005–06. Howev-
tors and will be discussed together. er, it may be noted that the causes of nutritional
anaemia among children include iron loss due to
parasite load (for example, malaria, and presence
of intestinal worms) as well as poor environmen-
tal sanitation, consumption of unsafe drinking
20 https://sustainabledevelopment.un.org/sdg2
21. http://actioncontrelafaim.ca/what-is-acute-malnutrition/types-of-acute-malnutrition/ accessed on October 2, 2017.
63
water, and inadequate personal hygiene, and not tackle malnutrition and anaemia effectively.
just dietary deficiency. 22 Thus, the attainment of Strategy for Target 2.2
Target 2.2 is also dependent on the attainment of
SDG No. 6 and its concomitant targets. The inci- The strategy of the state government is to mitigate/
dence of anaemia amongst women of reproduc- eliminate the challenges outlined above and also
tive age is also high, at 45.2 percent, though it to expand production to meet the targets for 2030.
has declined in the last decade. Uttarakhand has A mountainous state such as Uttarakhand needs
recently turned to local produce such as mandua a concerted investment in infrastructure develop-
and kala bhat to boost nutrition among kids and ment for promoting agriculture. This includes all
pregnant women. aspects of improving irrigation, power, rural roads,
and Information and Communication Technology
Vision 2030 for Target 2.2 (ICT) infrastructure. A focus on these areas would
The state aims to tackle the challenges of malnu- improve productivity and widen the much-need-
trition by adopting a gradual approach over the ed market access, as well as improve post-harvest
fifteen-year period till 2030. The number of mal- storage and processing. Agriculture should also be
nourished children will be reduced by 30 per cent made profitable for farmers, by weeding out in-
and the number of severely malnourished chil- termediaries and protecting farmers from market
dren will be reduced by 25 per cent by 2019-20. price fluctuations.
The corresponding targeted reductions for the Anaemia/malnutrition are not just health con-
next four-year period till 2023–24 are 40 per cent ditions but are also impacted by factors such as lack
for malnourished children and 35 per cent for se- of safe drinking water, hygiene and sanitation (toi-
verely malnourished children. The targets for the lets), switching over to usage of polished rice and
final time period till 2029–30 are to reduce the absence of leafy vegetables in meals etc. 23 Hence,
number of malnourished children by 60 per cent in the long run, over and above iron supplements,
and the number of severely malnourished chil- what is needed is promotion of nutrient-rich local
dren by 50 per cent. food, consumption of greens & leafy vegetables, use
The objectives for reducing anaemia are: re- of toilets, availability of safe drinking water and con-
ducing the baseline levels of anaemia among vergence of efforts of departments of Agriculture,
women of reproductive age from the baseline Drinking Water and Sanitation, Ministry of Health
levels of around 45per cent to successively 40 per and Family Welfare, Department of AYUSH, etc.
cent by 2019–20, to 30 per cent by 2023–24, and The specific strategies proposed for attaining the
to 15 per cent by 2029–30. For children aged 6–59 vision for Target 2.2 are as follows:
months, the baseline levels are higher, at around
60 per cent, and these are sought to be reduced For reducing malnutrition:
successively to 50 per cent by 2019–20, to 40 per • Establishment of Nutrition Resource Centres
cent by 2023–24, and to 20 per cent by 2029–30. (NRCs) in all 13 districts for nutritional coun-
Challenges for Target 2.2 selling and treatment;
• Promotion of schemes through Information,
-The remote hilly areas lack approach roads, Education and Communication (IEC) activities;
godowns and proper weighing devices, all of • Observing ‘Vajan and Poshan Diwas’ monthly
which adversely affect the access to food for the for growth monitoring of children who are less
people in such regions. than 3 years of age—the focus is on identifica-
- The post-harvest losses are large, especially for tion of SAM and MAM children;
fruits and vegetables, and they need to be cur- • Early detection and management, especially of
tailed. stunted children with respect to endocrinologi-
- There is a need for convergence of schemes to cal disorders;
22. Guidelines for Control of Iron Deficiency Anaemia, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, accessed at http://www.pbnrhm.org/docs/iron_plus_guide-
lines.pdf on April 27, 2017.
23. https://tribal.nic.in/DivisionsFiles/sg/DraftBackgroundNoteonconvergence.pdf accessed on 6th February, 2018.
64
Figure 2.8: Selected Indicators for Malnutrition in Uttarakhand
• Counselling of parents for ensuring nutri- • Distribution of Albendazole tablets to girls

tion under the Village Health Nutrition Day aged 15–19 years twice a year;
(VHND) and promoting hygienic habits such • Distribution of iron and folic acid tablets to
as correct hand washing practices, and nail cut- pregnant women;
ting;
• Providing nutritional food through the angan- • Promotion of schemes regarding nutrition and
wadis—the state government initiative Upyog prevention of anaemia through IEC activities;
Rojana Jaruri Hai—Abhi Se (URJA) is specifi- • Early detection and treatment of anaemia of
cally designed for malnourished children, and girls aged 15–19 years by school health teams
this dietary supplement is made with locally and screening of school children up to the
available food; and ninth standard for detecting thalassemia and
• Increasing the availability of safe drinking wa- anaemia;
ter and access to toilets at anganwadi centres • Ensuring 100 per cent institutional delivery by
(AWCs). the year 2030 and a minimum stay of 48 hours
at a health facility for pregnant women after
For reducing anaemia among women of reproduc- delivery;
tive age: • Disbursement of free medicines, food, and
• Strengthening anaemia tracking and timely re- blood (if needed) to all pregnant women at
ferral for proper management; government health facilities; and
• Forging partnerships with development part- • Provision of financial aid to BPL pregnant
ners, medical colleges and professional bodies women for ensuring adequate nutrition.
to support intervention for addressing repro- For reducing anaemia among children aged 6-59
ductive child health challenges; months:
• Promoting antenatal screening of all pregnant • Increasing the number of facilities for new-
women; born children—at present four Special New
• Counselling of anaemic women of reproduc- Born Care Units (SNCUs), and 29 Net Back-
tive age under VHND and for maintaining up Support Utility (NBSUs) are operational
menstrual hygiene; in the state; by the year 2017–18, nine SNCUs
and 41 NBSUs will be operational; and by the
• Distribution of Iron Folic Acid (IFA) tablets of year 2020–21, SNCUs in all the 13 districts
blue colour to girls aged 15–19 years; and NBSUs in all the high case load facilities
65
(Community Health Centres) will be functional; is limited. In addition, the irrigated area comprises
• Increasing the incidence of institutional deliv- just 45 per cent of the net area sown. 24
ery and focusing on starting breastfeeding for What is more, the irrigation is mainly in the plains,
the infant within one hour of birth and ensur- with the hills that are largely rain-fed accounting
ing exclusive breastfeeding; for just around 13 per cent of the irrigation. How-
• Establishing Kangaroo Mother Care (KMC) ever, the state is well ahead of the national aver-
units for Low Birth Weight (LBW) infants; age in terms of cropping intensity. The present
foodgrain production per hectare is 18,43,785 mt.
• Ensuring early detection and treatment of 30
identified diseases under the age group of 5 Vision 2030 for Target 2.1
years under the RBSK programme; In order to improve access to foodgrains, the state
• Augmenting the number of District Early In- intends to increase the food collection from the
tervention Centres (DEICs) –at present, four present 101 million tonnes to 150 million tonnes
DEICs are operational, but by year 2030, DEICs per year, by 2030. It also aims to reach foodgrain
will be functional in all the 13 districts of the to all parts of the state effectively, including the
state; remote hilly areas. The per hectare foodgrain pro-
duction will be increased from 18.43.785 mt to
• Promotion of schemes through IEC activities;
20,76,303 mt.
• Strengthening the Child Death Review Mecha-
nism; and
• Promoting distribution of IFA syrup to chil- Target 2.3: Doubling agricultural productivity
dren aged 6–59 months. and incomes of small-scale food producers
Target 2.4: Ensuring sustainable food produc-
tion systems
Target 2.1: End hunger and ensure access to food
for all by 2030 Target 2.5: Maintaining genetic diversity of
seeds, cultivated plants, farmed and domesticat-
Baseline for Uttarakhand ed animals etc.
The availability of essential foodgrains in the state is Baseline for Uttarakhand
considered first for looking at the food security sit-
uation. The pattern of land use in this mountainous Targets 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5, all deal with the agricul-
state shows that the net area sown in Uttarakhand ture and allied sectors. Crops and livestock are
is much lower as compared to the corresponding important components of the integrated agricul-
all-India average due to its huge forest area and dif- ture system in the state and are an essential means
ficult terrain (Table 2.5). Although forests constitute for ending hunger, achieving food security, and
a positive component in terms of the environment, improving nutrition. Fishing is also part of the
the scope for foodgrain supply in the forested areas agriculture and allied activities, and contributes
Table 2.5: Land Utilisation (% of Total Reporting Area) Pattern in Uttarakhand State (2014–15)
Uttarakhand All India
Forest 63 23
Non-agricultural use 7.5 8
Barren 3.8 6
Permanent pasture and other grazing lands 3.2 3
Culturable waste 5.3 4
Total fallow 2.4 8
Net area sown 11.7 46
Cropping intensity (%) 156.65 139
24. Data not shown in the table.
66
towards food security and nutrition. in Uttarakhand provide it with a competitive

Agriculture in the hills in Uttarakhand is not a edge over other states in terms of the cultivation
very productive activity due to several reasons of off-season vegetables, temperate fruits, aromat-
including the fragmentation of land resulting in ic rice, medicinal and aromatic plants, as well as
a predominance of marginal and sub-marginal for organic farming.
landholdings. Other reasons are low irrigation, The fact that the hill areas are largely rain-fed
low productivity, lack of outreach to bigger mar- leads to low productivity. The agricultural land
kets, and price fluctuations. Overall, the area un- under foodgrains presently stands at 900,000
der agriculture has been on the decline. On the hectares. The seed distribution Figureures for rice
other hand, lack of livelihood opportunities, and and wheat for the baseline are 18,464 quintals and
lack of access to good educational institutions 1,20,337 quintals, respectively.
and health facilities, among other reasons, have Climate change impact: Apart from natural calam-
prompted an exodus from the hills to the plains, ities such as floods and landslides, which occur
thus irreversibly changing the hill economy. The with relatively more frequency in a mountainous
dichotomy of agriculture in the state can be as- state, Uttarakhand has been suffering increasing-
sessed from Table 2.6. ly from drought conditions. It faced 16 drought
Major products: Uttarakhand is self-sufficient in years (including five severe ones) during the
the production of cereals and millets, and is sur- long period 1964–2000, and further, there were
plus in terms of vegetable production, and the 7 droughts years (including three severe ones)
opening up of export opportunities. Sugarcane, during the subsequent nine years alone. These
wheat, rice, and potato are the main agricultural calamities have had an adverse impact on the be-
outputs of the state. Among the crops, the main haviour of crops and pollinators and led to the
field crops are wheat, paddy, maize, ragi, millet, emergence of some new diseases and insects, and
lentil, and soybean while cole crops, cucurbits, new races of pathogens. Crop insurance is thus
capsicum, tomato, radish, pea, French bean, po- an important instrument to protect farmers’ inter-
tato, and onions are the main vegetables grown. ests, and at present 3,75,000 farmers accounting
In the hills, the major crops grown include wheat, for an area coverage of 85,790 hectares have been
paddy, mandua, ramdana, and potato, whereas covered under insurance.
in the plains, the major crops are wheat, paddy, The crop production system in the state is
pulses, and sugarcane. based on agriculture, production of vegetables,
Bio-diversity in the state is reflected in over horticulture, and the agroforestry/agri-horti-sil-
175 rare species of aromatic and medicinal plants. vi-pastoral system. Next we discuss the overall
In addition, the diverse agro-climatic conditions agricultural situation for the state, followed by
Table 2.6: Dichotomy of Agriculture in Uttarakhand
Agriculture in the Plains Agriculture in the Hills
Characterised by commercial farming Characterised by subsistent farming
Mono cropping is common Mixed cropping is prevalent
Consolidated holdings Scattered and fragmented holdings
Irrigated area of around 90 per cent Irrigated area of around 13 per cent
Seed replacement rate: 20-25 per cent Seed replacement rate: 4-5 per cent
Use of chemical fertilisers: 150-200 kg/ha/
Use of chemical fertilisers: 5-7 kg/ha/year
year
Productivity
Productivity of main crops Rice—13 q/ha
Rice—23 q/ha Wheat – 12 q/ha
Wheat—33 q/ha Ragi—13 q/ha
Sawan—13 q/ha
Source: Annual Plan 2013-14, State Planning Commission, Government of Uttarakhand.
67
the baseline status, vision and strategy for some The targeted seed distribution for rice will grow
important segments such as horticulture, animal by 36.5 per cent, 24.8 per cent, and 10 per cent, re-
husbandry and fishery. spectively between the given time-lines, in order
Vision 2030 for Targets 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5 to meet the targeted plans for rice production. The
seed distribution for wheat is slated to see a very
The overall vision of the agriculture and allied slight increase over the 15-year period, since the
sectors, is delineated in Box No. 2.6. targeted production has already been met.
Target 2.3 pertains to doubling agricultural pro- The farmers’ interests will be protected by ex-
ductivity and income of small-scale food produc- panding crop insurance through an increase in
ers by 2030. The state has the vision of achieving the number of farmers covered under crop insur-
this through the adoption of an integrated ap- ance by nearly 1.5 times by 2030, and a threefold
proach to agriculture, efficient nutrient manage- increase in the area covered under crop insurance
ment, and diversification. by 2030, a as compared to the present coverage.
The above measures would need to be attained The vision for Target 2.4 aims to ensure sus-
in the backdrop of a declining share of land under tainable food production systems and sustainable
agriculture, which can be attributed to industri- agriculture practices by bringing more area un-
alisation in the plains, and to large-scale outmi- der irrigation, and by strengthening the irrigation
gration in the hills. Irrigation, and other measures channels. Usually organic farming is viewed as the
like the use of high yield seeds needs scaling up main form of sustainable agriculture, as the use of
in order to double land productivity. The follow- organic farming practices facilitates the produc-
ing two-pronged strategy must be adopted to in- tion of chemical-free and environmentally friendly
crease farmers’ income (see also Box No. 2.5): agro products. The large agro-climatic variations
(i) Increase agricultural output through various in Uttarakhand provide an advantage to the state,
measures including the reduction of input enabling it to produce off-season vegetables and
costs, mechanisation, soil testing, use of High fruits that have a high market value. For organic
Yielding Variety (HYV) seeds, and seed re- farming, emphasis is laid on constructing organ-
placement; ic manure structures, soil testing and distribution
(ii) Maintain and increase sustainability by increas- of Soil Health Cards, bio-fertilisers and bio-pes-
ing the percentage share of organic farming. ticides to farmers in organic farming clusters. As
of 2014–15, the area under organic certification
Box 2.4 Vision for Agriculture and Allied Sectors in Uttarakhand

• To establish Uttarakhand as a Seed state
• To establish Uttarakhand as an Organic state
• To commercialise the cultivation of conventional/local crops
• To promote the judicious use of pesticides/fertilisers
• To expand irrigations facilities
• To lay more emphasis on an integrated approach to agriculture
• To diversify beyond food crops to horticulture, vegetable production, livstock, poultry and fisheries
• To develop a market for agricultural produce
• To promote post-harvest technology and storage
• To increase the focus on extension and awareness programmes
• To ensure land consolidation
• To facilitate the convergence of all agricultural departmental schemes; and
• To invite participation from the private sector, NGOs and volunteer organisations
68
Figure 2.9: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Agriculture and Allied Sectors for Uttarakhand
was around 35,000 hectares, which is anticipated Horticulture:

to have risen to 50,000 hectares in 2016–17. The Baseline for Uttarakhand
target for 2030 is to raise this to 2,50,000 hectares.
The use of bio-fertilisers in agricultural produc- Uttarakhand is a leading fruit cultivating state of
tion will gradually be increased from the present India and is ranked No. 1 in production of Pears,
level of 0.3 kg/hectare to 0.6 kg/hectares by 2030. Peaches and Plums. It is also ranked No. 2 in the
production of Walnuts and No. 3 in Apple culti-
The farmers’ interests will be protected by ex- vation amongst all Indian states (2015-2016) 25.
panding crop insurance which will be achieved by
increasing the number of farmers covered under Hill agriculture, comprising mainly horticul-
crop insurance by nearly 1.5 times by 2030, and ture, is a very important sector for the state. The
increasing the area covered under crop insurance yields from traditional crops being low in the
by three times by 2030, as compared to the present fragmented cultivated agricultural land in the
situation. hilly terrain, horticulture provides an avenue for
a more remunerative form of cultivation and the
The state plans to promote millets as a prior- natural climate of the state is ideally suited for
ity product, which is already produced in 60 per growing fruits and vegetables. The main horticul-
cent of the cropped area and has a good market tural products for the state are fruits, vegetables,
value. The use of certified seeds and adoption of potatoes, spices, and flowers. The land productiv-
a cluster approach for millet farming would ben- ity for the first four products at present are 3.83,
efit the farmers by eliminating middlemen. Tying 9.13, 16.14, and 6.38 metric tonnes per hectare, re-
up production to supply for the Mid-day Meal spectively. The area under flower production at
Schemes and Anganwadis is also expected to give present stands at 1400 hectares.
it a boost. Other areas that need attention in the
long term strategy include an increase in mech- The horticulture department exports products
anisation in agriculture to reduce women’s ex- worth Rs. 100 crore annually, which include pri-
cessive work burden, and the need for setting up vate exports facilitated by the Government. The
farm machinery banks and government mandis. products exported include mushroom, basmati rice
(organic), frozen peas, basil, thyme, culinary herbs,
25. http://foodprocessingindia.co.in/state-profile/uttarakhand/?id=6&stateid=756&name=UTTARAKHAND accessed on 30 January, 2018.
69
Box 2.5: Vision and Strategy for Doubling Farmers’ Income in Agriculture by 2022
1. Agriculture-based system including foodgrains, oilseeds, pulses, millets, aromatic and medicinal plants,
commercial crops, etc;
2. Horticulture-based system including fruits and vegetables;
3. Dairy-based system including milch animals, poultry, sheep and goat-rearing;
4. Fishery-based system; and
5. Silvo-pastoral-based system.
Thus, the strategy shall consist of interventions that will aim at tapping the potential of all the above sectors for
maximising the income from the ‘farm’. The growth trends over the last decade indicate that higher growth can
come from horticulture, dairy, livestock and fishery, as compared to field crops. However, field crops also have a
growth potential in respect of many crop categories and high-yielding varieties.
The possible drivers of income growth for farmers could be:
1. Increase in crop productivity using quality seed, seed treatment, integrated nutrient and pest management,
selecting appropriate cropping pattern and crops in accordance with the agro-climatic zone, increasing crop
intensity by adopting inter-cropping;
2. Reduction in the cost of cultivation by reducing the use of purchased inputs, adopting organic agriculture,
integrated nutrient and pest management, proper soil health monitoring and adoption of a farming system
approach for better by-product management.
3. Strengthening the assured source of irrigation facilities—data reveals that proper irrigation may double pro-
ductivity and also enhance nutrient efficiency;
4. Diversification of farm activities towards high value crops and enterprises by adopting a farming system ap-
proach—national level data reveals that shifting to high-value crops can quadruple income from the same
piece of land, and that adopting a farming system approach enhances complementary relations among farm
enterprises promoting efficient land use;
5. Improvement in the terms of trade for agriculture;
6. Promotion of mechanisation in agriculture, facilitated either by providing agriculture equipment on subsidy or
through a custom hiring centre/farm mechanisation centres;
7. Promotion of organic agriculture, bringing more area under certification and providing growers a better mar-
ket price of organic produce;
8. Improvement in access to credit covering small and marginal farmers, tenant farmers and landless cultivators;
9. Stabilisation of income and risk management through crop insurance and other such measures;
10. Reduction in post-harvest losses and provision of post-harvest facilities to farmers—this may include setting
up warehouses, and cold storage, food processing, and other value addition facilities;
11. Shifting of cultivators from farming to non-farm occupations like poultry rearing, fishery production, bee-keep-
ing, mulberry production, aromatic and medicinal plants, dairy business, and value addition of various prod-
ucts; and
12. Better price realisation for farmers through competitive markets, value chains and improved linkages between
the field and the end-user.
13. Technology upgradation in agriculture.
14. Climate change resilience and sustainable Agriculture.
70
honey, some flowers, which are deemed exports Comprehensive base line studies for the avail-
and baby corn, and sweet corn, among others. able water and soil should be conducted, to get a
There are around 650 food processing units in the basic inventory of land resources, especially in the
state, which are mostly located in districts in the context that to increase the area under horticulture
plains like Udham Singh Nagar and Haridwar. crop, 3.6 lakh hectare culturable fallow land will
There are 49 training and training/processing cen- be targeted. Other strategies would include map-
tres in the districts where farmers/producers are ping plant hardiness zones in the state, whereby
given hands-on training, though these are primar- farmers can determine which plants are most like-
ily home-based skill development efforts, and are ly to thrive in extreme climates, especially in view
not undertaken on a commercial scale. The State of the climatic changes that are taking place. In
Food Processing Mission has been active since crop-specific clusters, there would be need to as-
2016, and provides subsidy for this activity, with sess requirement of inputs such as fertilizers and
higher rates for the hilly regions. The Rural Infra- the necessary augmentation of supply planned in
structure Development Fund is also available for a phased manner.
container/storage/refrigerating vans. A weather-based crop insurance scheme has
Vision and strategy for horticulture already been implemented for a variety of fruits
The Vision 2030 is to ensure sustainable and for providing a necessary safety net to the culti-
holistic development of horticulture sector by vators. Aromatic and medicinal plants comprise a
adopting area based cluster approach towards focus area for the state in the future.
developing regionally differentiated crops, which Present Status of aromatic crops
are agro-climatically most suited for the region/ Growing aromatic crops is increasingly being
area for enhancing production and productivity viewed as a viable option for improving the ben-
of various horticulture crops. There will also be efits from agricultural operations. Land in many
focus on adoption of improved and appropriate hill districts has suffered from soil erosion, deple-
technologies for ensuring quality, including ge- tion of nutrients, and growth of weeds like lan-
netic upgradation of all horticulture crops. tana. In such adverse conditions, aromatic plants
The main thrust is for doubling farmers’ income can be cultivated successfully. Such crops are also
by 2022 by improving productivity through the usually safe from attacks by wild life and domes-
adoption of modern techniques, rejuvenation of se- tic animals, are easy to transport due to the con-
nile orchards, promotion of high-value crops, and version of essential oils into low volume, are eas-
most importantly, the adoption of a cluster-based ier to store, and above all, have a high demand in
approach in order to take advantage of scale econ- the market.
omies (see Box No. 2.6). Around 7.5 per cent of the At present the aromatic plant sector in Uttara-
fruits and vegetables are currently being processed. khand is in a fledgling state and the area under
The target is to increase the share of processed fruits cultivation is just 625 hectares with the involve-
and vegetables to 15 per cent by 2030. ment of 2000 farmers. The production of essential
Strategies to increase the area under horticul- oils/herbs is 221 tonnes, distillation of aromatic
ture by 2030 include offering a cultivation cost herbs is being done for 1500 tonnes, and there is
subsidy to farmers and targeting cultivable waste employment generation for approximately 3000
land, but the availability of seeds is a constraint in people. The major crops selected for scale cultiva-
fruit cultivation. Since the proliferation of insects tion and extension in the farmers’ fields following
and pests has led to a decline in the production of agronomic trials had been presented in Table 2.1.
citrus fruits, efforts are being made to restore the
original production levels. There are also plans The Centre for Aromatic Plants (CAP) in Selaqui
to promote tea cultivation. The area productivity is providing support services to farmers for exten-
pertaining to the cultivation of spices, fruits, and sion purposes, given that aromatic crop cultivation,
flowers are also slated for expansion and plans are processing and marketing are technical and com-
afoot to initiate mushroom production while also mercial activities that need a scientific approach as
rejuvenating old low-performing plants. well as a good business plan for attaining success
71
Box 2.6: Vision and Strategy for Doubling Income in the Horticulture Sector
1. Adoption of high tech horticulture and precision farming technique(good quality seed with fertilizer, elite
planting material with improved root stocks, high density plantation, micro-irrigation and mulching, etc).
2. Enhancing production through rejuvenation of old and senile orchards.
3. Promotion of high value horticulture crop like, off-season vegetables, spices, medicinal and aromatic plants.
4. Adoption of Clusters approach as per agro-climatic condition for scale economies. There can be vegetables clus-
ters, for which there would be crop sequence throughout years on the basis of elevation. Fruits clusters could be
formed in sub-tropical in valley area mid hills or for temperate fruits in high hills, with inter-cropping. Other
clusters planned are for potato, spices, flowers, etc.
5. Formation of Farmers Interest Groups/Farmers Production Organization, etc.
6. Convergence of ongoing schemes being implemented by various Departments in the same cluster.
Table 2.7: Activities Taken Up under Schemes/Programmes Operating in the

Horticulture Sector
1. Establishment of a nursery for production of quality planting material
2. Bringing more area under horticulture crops by providing a 50% subsidy provision
3. Rejuvenating old and senile orchards by giving 100% subsidy to farmers
4. Fencing of orchards—provision of 75% subsidy to farmers
5. Promotion of bee-keeping and pollination—provision of subsidy up to 50%
6. Promotion of mushroom production—provision of subsidy up to 40-50%
Promotion of protected cultivation by providing to farmers
-- 80% subsidy of cost of construction of Green House up to 1000 sq. m.
7.
-- 50% subsidy on Shade Net House, Anti Hail Net
-- on 5 year old poly-houses, 75% subsidy for change of polythene
8. Promotion of organic farming by giving 75% subsidy to farmers for Vermi Compost Units
9. Promotion of horticulture mechanization by giving 50-90% subsidy to farmers for reducing drudgery
10. Creation of water sources (tanks/ponds/tube-wells/bore wells) for irrigation by giving 50% subsidy
Development of Infrastructure for Post-Harvest Management and Processing by providing 33-35%

11.
subsidy to farmers/entrepreneurs
12. Skill development of farmers and officials by conducting training programmes
13. Promotion of micro irrigation (drip and sprinklers) by providing up to 45-60% subsidy
on the ground. The services comprise agro-technol- Vision 2030 Aromatic plants
ogies, crop demonstrations, awareness and train- The vision is to expand the production of
ing, incentives to farmers, quality planting materi- aromatic plants substantially by 2030, from the pres-
al, buy-back of aromatic produce, development of ent cultivated area of 625 ha area to 16,900 ha by
a network of field distillation units, quality assess- 2030. The specific targets are presented in Table 2.8.
ment of produce, and marketing, among others.
72
Table 2.8: Vision for the Aromatic Plants Sector (year-wise target)
Baseline 2016-17 2019-20 2023-24 2030
Area under cultivation (ha) 625 2400 7000 16,900

No. of farmers 2000 9000 24,500 68,600
Production of essential oil/herbs
221 1050 3650 11,050
(tonnes)
Distillation of aromatic herbs
1500 9000 34,000 1,04,000
(tonnes)
Employment generation (no.) 3000 12,000 29,500 84,500

CAP has submitted a five-year working plan distillation units under the RKVY scheme;
for cultivation under MGNREGS to the Rural De- • Building of the required infrastructure for this
velopment Department of the state government. sector;
Some specific targets for till 2030 would include
the following: • Establishment of a high-tech nursery, aroma
processing centre, and perfumery, at CAP,
• Promotion of annual aromatic crops by dove- Selaqui;
tailing with the MGNREGS;
• Strengthening of CAP as an agri-aroma busi-
• Conduction of a baseline survey; ness incubator under RKVY; and
• Formation of village level farmers’ groups to • Linking with skill development and start-up
develop aroma entrepreneurs; programmes.
• Support of aroma clusters by providing field
Figure 2.10: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for

Horticulture including Medicinal and Aromatic Plants
73
There is also a need to build institutional sup- the packaged milk segment, milk producers are
port for undertaking R&D on MAP species for currently not getting the price they deserve. As re-
generation of economically viable and envi- gards the other departments in animal husbandry,
ronmental friendly technologies for sustainable the present levels of output are 3907,00,000 eggs,
quality production and creation of trained and 5,13,000kg of wool, and 276,00,000 kg of meat.
skilled man power. Sustained efforts are needed Vision: The vision for the dairy sector is that by
for inventorization and distribution, threat cate-
2030, all working district level milk unions should
gorization, conservation biology, reproduction of
become profitable in their respective operations.
rare, endangered and threatened (RET) species
The physical targets for the production of milk
of MAP, along with R&D on Plant Genetic Re-
have been set at 20,06,000, 25,32,000, and 35,92,000
sources (PGR) management, crop improvement,
mt for the years 2020, 2024, and 2030, respectively
crop production and post-harvest management,
(Table 2.9). The other targets include automation
developing good agricultural practices (GAP) as
of viable village level milk co-operative societ-
well as adopting organic farming 26.
ies, farmer-wise testing of milk, direct payment
Horticulture/hill agriculture includes to farmers’ bank accounts, and self-sufficiency in
non-timber forest products such as herbal prod- milk procurement and sale.
ucts [promoted by the Department of Ayurve-
The medium-term strategy focuses on value
da, Yoga and Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha and
addition to milk products, market promotion to
Homoeopathy (AYUSH)]. AYUSH engages in
improve market share, increase in automation,
tapping the potential of several aromatic and me-
establishment of milk analysers, and adoption of
dicinal plants found in the mountains of Uttara-
measures to increase the per cattle milk produc-
khand. The cultivation of such herbs and plants
tion.
is being undertaken by various agencies such as
the Forest Department, Herbal Research and De- The production targets for eggs are 4719,00,000,
velopment Research Institute (HRDI) Centre for 5312,00,000 and 634300,000 for the years 2020,
Aromatic Plants, and the Bhesaj Vikas Sangh, 2024, and 2030, respectively. The corresponding
among others. AYUSH has recently also set up a targets for the production of wool are 6,01,000,
panel to find the mythical sanjeevani herb that is 6,25,000, and 7,07,000 kg, respectively, while those
believed to have the potential to cure any disease, for meat are 308,00,000, 333,00,000, and 375,00,000
according to media reports. The available infor- kg for the years 2020, 2024, and 2030, respectively
mation indicates that the cultivation of medicinal (Table 2.9).For the animal husbandry department,
and aromatic plants covers around 4000 hectares the government has also made efforts for artificial
of land in the state. insemination, fodder availability, dairy, and vacci-
Table 2.9 Vision 2030 for the Animal Husbandry Sector
Production 2016–17 2019–20 2023–24 2029–30
Milk (thousand metric
1656 2006 2532 3592
tonne)
Egg (lakh) 3907 4719 5312 6343
Wool (thousand kg) 513 601 625 707
Meat (lakh kg) 276 308 333 375
Animal Husbandry: Livestock is an integral part of

nation. The other initiatives taken by the govern-
farming in almost all places. Fishery and floricul-
ment include the development of a cattle zone, and
ture are also parts of production systems in certain
setting up of an Agriculture University and man-
areas. Uttarakhand state stands at the eighth posi-
dis for marketing.
tion in India in terms of milk production, with the
present level of output in dairy being 16,56,000 Fisheries: Fishing and aquaculture, while consti-
metric tonnes of milk. Due to lack of control on tuting an integral part of the agriculture and allied
26. Ibid
74
Box 2.7: Potential for the Use of Herbal and Medicinal Plants
Uttarakhand has a climate that is very suitable for the production of different types of herbs and aromatic plants.
Out of the herbal output in the state, around 60-70 per cent is presently that of herbs. The Centre for Medicinal
Plants gives the nursery of medicinal plants to farmers and the output from this goes to the Bheshaj Centre in each
district. But very little processing is done to this output, which is in the raw form. There is a lot of scope for employ-
ment generation if processing centres for these herbs are set up.
Regarding medicinal plants, the state has the potential of promoting medical tourism along the lines of other states
such as Kerala. There are already eight centres for ayurvedic medicines which are integrated in the hospitals. The
hospitals have an OPD for ayurvedic treatment. There are plans for upgradation and the creation of 38 new centres.
There is also scope for promoting processes such as ‘Panchakarma’, a way of de-toxifying and rejuvenating the
body using traditional methods, which are popular among foreign tourists, as well as, increasingly, among Indian
tourists. Such tourism efforts, along with the promotion of yoga and wellness centres, under the stewardship of
AYUSH, could also generate employment in the hills.
sector, comprise a very small share in this sector. will also be expanded through the promotion of
At present, 3833 tons of fish and 400 million fish mobile fish outlet eco-tourism and the associated
seeds are produced in the state annually. How- expansion of angling activities.
ever, this sector has the potential for generating In terms of physical targets, the aim is to achieve
employment and income, especially among the a production of around 10,000 thousand metric
poor and backward classes, in view of the abun- tonnes of fish, and a targeted output of 240 tonnes
dant natural resources in the state in the form of for trout. The annual production target for fish seed
2686 km of river, 20,075 hectares of reservoirs, as is around 20 crore. There is also a proposal to pro-
well as many natural lakes and ponds. vide a subsidy of 50 percent subsidy for feed and
Vision: The vision for this department is that all other inputs to boost private sector participation.
the water sources need to be utilized for fish pro- In addition, the provision of insurance schemes
duction as well as for the conservation of fish and and other forms of financial assistance is being pro-
promotion of fishing activity. In particular, there posed for the backward fishing communities.
will be a focus on trout farming, including the con- Target 2.5 of Goal no. 2 is concerned with main-
struction of trout reservoirs and hatcheries. The taining the genetic diversity of seeds, cultivated
availability of fish seeds of high quality and the plants, farmed and domesticated animals and
right size will be enhanced and a brood bank will their related wild species, including through di-
be developed. Cage culture will be introduced in versified plant and seed banks. In the context of
ponds for fishermen in the private sector in order Uttarakhand, this target has a great significance
to raise productivity. The distribution network in view of the limited availability of land for ag-
Figure 2.11: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Animal Husbandry Sector in Uttarakhand
75
riculture. Further, since cultivable land contin- destroy crops.

ues to shrink owing to the increased intensity • Climate change, especially manifested through
of non-productive utilisation, it is essential to the increasing frequency of droughts, has ad-
increase the productivity per unit area to keep versely affected the behaviour of both crops
pace with the requirement of food for the ever-in- and pollinators, bringing in its wake new dis-
creasing population. Thus, ensuring the adequate eases, insects, and races of pathogens.
availability of high-quality seeds is of paramount
importance. Uttarakhand state had addressed this • There is a 35 per cent shortage of fodder. Crop
issue as far back as 1969 by launching the Terai residues are either burnt or sent to paper mills.
Development Corporation (TDC) project. Prior to Burning of these residues adds to pollution, es-
this, the work of seed production was being ac- pecially in the Terai region. On the other hand,
complished by the seed production department of traditional crop-cutting, which is mostly done
the G.B. Pant University of Agriculture and Tech- in the hills, does not leave any residue. Agri-
nology. This organisation has since been named culture in the hills also faces the problems of a
as the Uttarakhand Seeds and Terai Development low Seed Replacement Rate (SRR) and the lack
Corporation Ltd. (USTDC). of availability of quality seeds in the hills.
The vision for Target 2.5 is to attain the long-term • There is inadequate infrastructure for setting
objective of a 15 per cent annual average growth up soil testing laboratories and computers, and
rate by the seed bank at USTDC. marketing, post-harvesting technology and
storage represent problem in the hills.
USTDC aims to accelerate farm production and
productivity per unit, thereby improving the so- • There is low cropping intensity in the state.
cio-economic status of the rural areas. Its other • Farmers are getting adversely affected by price
objectives include ensuring the adequate, timely fluctuations. Farmers engaged in horticulture
and cost-effective availability of quality seeds in activities have been adversely affected by fluc-
its marketing territories, liaising and associating tuations in market prices despite the imple-
with research organisations of repute for promot- mentation of the Market Intervention Scheme
ing the production of scientifically proven high (MIS) by the government.
yielding seed varieties and arranging through se- Strategy for Target 2.1
lected growers at suitable locations the production
of foundation seeds and certified seeds, as required The specific strategies proposed to be adopted by
from season to season. The seed bank at USTDC the state to attain Vision 2030 for Target 2.1 are as
has the long-term of objective of attaining an aver- follows:
age growth rate of 15 per cent per annum. • Storage will be improved by modernising the
Challenges for Targets 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, and 2.4 godowns and equipping them with electronic
devices, and new godowns of a large capacity
• Agricultural land availability is declining in the (5000 mt) will be built in the plains. In order to
plains due to rampant industrialisation, and in effectively reach the foodgrains in the far-flung
hills, due to the rise in out-migration. areas of the state, godowns and approach roads
• Agricultural land in the hills is very fragment- will be built in remote hilly locations. Currently,
ed and the plots are small and scattered. The Fair Price Shop (FPS) outlets in the hilly areas, in
size of the average landholding ranges from particular, lack access to proper weighing devic-
0.81 ha in the hills to 1.06 ha in the plains. es, which will be rectified.
Around 73.6 per cent of the holdings are mar- • In order to arrest the post-harvest losses of
ginal. Further, 17.24 per cent of the operational horticultural and non-horticultural produce,
holdings are small and operate on an area of there is need to develop infrastructure facili-
less than 2 hectares. This makes it difficult to ties for storage, including cold storage, logis-
avail of scale economies, which, in turn, makes tics and cold chain handling, transportation,
crop husbandry an unviable occupation. processing, packaging and distribution, and
• There is a need to control wild animals as they to provide integrated cold chain and preser-
76
vation infrastructure facilities from the farm and medicinal value such as mandua, sanwa,
gate to the consumer or from the production amaranthus, bhatt, and rajma, by providing a
site to the market. In this context, the Ministry production bonus to farmers after constituting
of Food Processing Industries is implementing Figures; and (iii) increase the SRR to meet na-
the scheme of Cold Chain, Value Addition and tional targets.
Preservation Infrastructure, which is primarily
driven by the private sector. Here, financial as- • To develop Uttarakhand as an organic state:
sistance @ 75per cent of the total cost of plant For sustainable agriculture, area under organ-
and machinery and technical civil works is giv- ic farming can be expanded by suitably iden-
en for the North-East region and difficult areas tifying crops for each agro-climatic zone, and
(this category includes Uttarakhand). utilising fallow land. In this context, soil health
Strategy for Targets 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 management is extremely important. The soil
in the hilly areas is shallow and coarse. Besides,
The broad strategy will focus on the provision of the use of organic manure (mixed with oak and
quality inputs, laying an emphasis on mechanisa- chir pine leaves) increases the acidity of the
tion of agriculture, cluster-based farming, 100 per soil. In the plains, the use of heavy chemicals
cent seed treatment, increasing the hybrid seed has led to decreasing humus content in the soil.
area, expansion of irrigation, promotion of modern Thus, there should be judicious use of pesti-
techniques of agriculture, reduction of post-har- cides and fertilisers. In addition, in the organic
vest losses, and adoption of the Integrated Nutri- certification areas, third party certification is
ent Management (INM) and Integrated Pest Man- needed for any exports and concerted efforts
agement (IPM) approaches to enable utilisation of need to be taken in this area. There is also need
fallow land for increasing production. The detailed for branding organic products from the state.
strategies for achieving these targets are as follows: Aromatic and medicinal plant cultivation rep-
• To achieve self-sufficiency in pulses and oil- resents a potential area for diversification.
seeds: This can be attained by bridging the de- • To diversify beyond traditional crops into
mand–supply gap through the use of cultiva- horticulture, vegetable, livestock, poultry
ble fallow and current fallow land, as well as and fisheries: Agricultural diversification in
by focusing on farming in accordance with the the hilly regions can be achieved by promot-
cluster-based cropping system. Schemes with ing horticulture through the adoption of lo-
a cluster approach (a cluster is about 10 hect- cation-specific technologies. Simultaneously,
ares in size) involve Farmers’ Interest Groups there is need to fix the Minimum Support Pric-
(Figures), which are able to exploit the scale- es (MSPs) of these products. In view of climat-
up resulting from clustering. Instead of leaving ic changes, farmers would benefit by adopting
farmers to deal with matters individually, the an integrated approach to farming comprising
government does the registration for the Fig- integrated nutrient management, weed man-
ures and facilitates link-ups of the supply chain agement, and watershed management. The
with other schemes like the Mid-Day Meal integration system, wherein the output of one
Scheme (MDMS), as also access to hospitals system is used as an input for another, would
and other services. The Government also pro- particularly benefit small and marginal farm-
vides subsidy, and in the case of finger millets, ers. Livestock and poultry constitute the other
a bonus. potential areas for diversification (See Box 2.8
• To establish Uttarakhand as a seed state: The for ‘One Village One Farm’ experience in Ut-
state government would need to: (i) promote tarakhand).
local nutritive crops through the distribution • To commercialise the cultivation of conven-
of seeds at a 75 percent subsidy, which would tional/local crops: The main conventional crops
enhance the Seed Replacement Rate (SRR); (ii) of Uttarakhand are soybean (black), horse gram,
promote locally growing crops with nutritional rajma, chaulai, finger millet, and sanwa. In or-
77
der to commercialise these crops, emphasis is • To expand irrigation facilities for promoting
laid on ensuring the availability of seeds, and rainfed agriculture: More than 50 per cent of
dissemination of new techniques to increase the the cultivated land in the State is rain-fed. The
acreage under such crops. Farmers are also be- adoption of a watershed approach and various
ing encouraged to engage in contract/cooperate soil and water conservation measures, includ-
farming through the development of post-har- ing the construction of water harvesting struc-
vest techniques and marketing facilities. tures, activities for prevention of soil erosion,
• To reduce post-harvest losses: The strategy for forestation terracing, and land development
achieving this objective would be to provide are necessary for achieving efficient develop-
facilities for cleaning/grading, drying, storage, ment of rain-fed agriculture in the state. The
extraction, milling, fortification, packaging, Centrally sponsored Pradhan Mantri Krishi
transportation and handling of the produce at Sinchai Yojana (PMKSY) scheme is being im-
the farm level or in nearby locations. The crop plemented in the state since 2015–16, and pres-
in the field can be protected from wild animals ently, the Village Irrigation Plan (VIP), Block
with the help of fences. Irrigation Plan (BIP), District Irrigation Plan
(DIP) are being developed under this scheme.
• To reduce the workload/burden of women Further, the State Irrigation Plan (SIP) is being
in agriculture: Promoting farm mechanisation prepared on the basis of the DIP.
would not only improve the efficiency of field
operations and ensure the effective application • To increase cropping intensity: The net sown
of agricultural inputs, but would also have the area in the state accounts for only 12.59 per cent
direct impact of reducing the work burden of of the geographical area, and out of this area, 58
women in the hilly areas. Small and easy-to- per cent of the area was sown more than once
use implements would be more suitable for the during 2013–14. This cropping intensity is low
hilly regions and a system of hiring out imple- in comparison to the agriculturally developed
ments can be sued. Subsidies are already being regions like Punjab and Haryana, and needs to
provided in central schemes for the purchase be increased.
of power tillers, power weeders, threshers, and • To develop an agriculture market: There is
water lifting pumps, among other such equip- need for a network for local crops as well as
ment, in the state. medicinal and aromatic plants for connect-
Box 2.8 One Village One Farm: Supporting Sustainable Livelihoods for Mountain Communities
of Uttarakhand
The story of ‘Gauri’, a Self Help Group, started in Gaurikot, a small village situated 9 km from Paudi, the head-quar-
ters of Garhwal. Migration is a harsh reality for the people of the hills, and this prompted some women of this vil-
lage to form a group on June 1, 2013. Soon eighteen women became members and with the help of this SHG, they
vowed to cultivate the fallow land near the village.
The Integrated Community Development Programme (ICDP) under the co-operative department encouraged them
to opt for an integrated farming approach, where off-season vegetables, broiler poultry, fishery, horticulture, etc.
are all pursued under an integrated approach.
To begin with, there were challenges of land consolidation, arranging capital, etc. The initial cultivation started on 4
acres of fallow land, which has become entirely productive now. The women also received a co-operative loan of Rs
5 lakh. Overall, Gauri SHG has not only made fallow land productive, but has also made such integrated farming
into a profitable venture, encouraging people in other villages to replicate such efforts.
78
ing the market with the producers. Moreover, • To ensure the convergence of all agricultural
farmers often do not getting remunerative pric- departmental schemes: The various centrally
es. The new agriculture policy came into force sponsored schemes being implemented in the
after the government approved the passage of state include the National Food Security Mis-
the new APMC Act, which seeks to promote sion (NFSM), National Mission for Sustainable
private players in the agriculture sector and al- Agriculture (NMSA), Rashtriya Krishi Vikas
lows for the setting up of private mandis. Yojana (RKVY), Sub-mission on Agricultur-
• To increase focus on extension and awareness al Mechanisation (SMAM) and Sub-mission
programme: It is imperative to ensure the dis- on Seed and Planting (SMSP),and state sector
semination of useful and modern practical in- schemes such as the Agricultural Develop-
formation relating to agriculture, including ment Programme in SC/ST-dominated villag-
improved seeds, fertilisers, implements, pes- es, and district plan, among others. While sub-
ticides, improved cultural practices, dairying, sidies on different inputs are being provided
poultry, nutrition, and weather watch, and as per the guidelines of the scheme, various
to obtain feedback about the latest scientif- agricultural implements are also being distrib-
ic technologies from the end-user. Various uted to the farmers at subsidised rates as per
methods like networking with individual and the Government of India’s guidelines. Apart
group contacts, and establishing mass contacts, from the subsidy given by the Central Govern-
through means like demonstration, exhibition, ment, the state government too has hiked the
campaigns, use of media like radio and televi- subsidy patterns for various agricultural im-
sion, visit programmes, visual aids, micro-com- plements by up to 90 per cent in areas affected
puters, and e-mail may also be considered for by natural calamities, and by up to 80 per cent
facilitating the transfer of technologies. in the other areas of the hilly region. Thus, the
subsidy provided by the Government of India
• To consolidate land: Land consolidation, has been integrated with the subsidy given by
achieved in accordance with the existing laws, the state government, and in this way, the in-
can help in achieving increased agricultural tegration of subsidy will be considered for the
production and productivity. The promotion seed component.
of contract farming may be another solution
under the small and marginal farming system. • To invite participation of the private sector,
Realising the importance of land consolida- NGOs, and volunteer organisations: There is
tion, the Uttarakhand government is working need to seek the participation of the private
on preparing a separate land consolidation sector and Non-Governmental Organisations
policy for the hill districts while the remain- (NGOs), among others, for developing hill va-
ing two districts comprising the plains will rieties, providing information technology, pro-
continue to be governed by the Uttar Pradesh moting agri-clinic and agri-business contract
policy (1953) adopted by Uttarakhand. farming, imparting extensions training, and en-
abling post-harvest and marketing operations.
79
80
SECTION 2.3 Targets 8.1 and 8.2 relate to economic growth

SDG 8: Promote Sustained, Inclusive and Sustain- and are discussed first. This is followed by a dis-
cussion of Targets 8.3, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.8, all of
able Economic Growth, Full and Productive Em-
which relate to employment. Target 8.9 relates to
ployment and Decent Work for All
employment in the tourism sector, in particular,
and is discussed separately. In order to understand
It is argued that high economic growth helps in gen- the patterns and trends of the targets pertaining to
erating more revenue and investment, and in financ- the state’s economy, the Gross Domestic Product
ing critical public welfare schemes.27 This results in (GDP)30 and Gross State Domestic Product (GSD-
inclusiveness with an equitable distribution of in- P)31 data at 2011–12 prices and at 2004–05 prices
come across various groups and regions. In this pro- have been used. The employment and unemploy-
cess, the economy also generates additional jobs to ment analysis is based on National Sample Survey
provide employment opportunities to unemployed data for 2004-05 and 2011-12, and uses the usual
youth and other new entrants in the labour market. principal status (UPS).
However, in order to be productive and decent, these
jobs should be well-paid and regular, offering social
Target 8.1 Sustain per capita economic growth
security benefits and better employment conditions,
among other benefits 28 to contribute to the growth Baseline for Uttarakhand
of the economy. According to past literature and re- Gross State Domestic Product
cent surveys, there have been reports of large-scale
As discussed in Chapter 1, the state economy has
outmigration by the local population in search of
made healthy progress since its inception. Between
livelihood both within and outside the state.29 In this
2011-12 and 2017-18, the GSDP (at constant prices)
context, Goal No. 8 is important for sustainable de-
grew at a CAGR of 7.1 per cent. This has broad-
velopment in mountainous states like Uttarakhand.
ly been in tandem with the average GDP growth
The overall vision for Goal No. 8 for 2030 for the at the national level. Earlier, economic growth in
state of Uttarakhand is as follows: the state was high (15.4 per cent) during the period
By 2030, the Uttarakhand economy will 2005-10 and slowed down to 8.9 per cent during
continue to grow at a high rate in an the period 2011-15.
environmentally sustainable manner, and Per Capita GSDP
all men and women from all walks of life,
The per capita income in the state (at current pric-
including the disabled and those from disad-
es) for 2017–18 (advance estimates) is Rs. 1,77,356,
vantaged families, will be able to access decent
which is much higher than the corresponding na-
employment.
tional average of Rs. 1,12,764. 32 The real per capita
The vision for targets of Goal No. 8 are present- income of the state increased from Rs. 1,13,000 in
ed in Appendix 2.3.1, followed by values for indi- 2011-12 to 1,40,405 in 2017-18 at 2011-12 prices.
cators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 2.3.2,
Income contribution of the poorest
and Appendix 2.3.3 contains the schemes applica-
ble for Goal no. 8. Annexure 8 contains the detailed The result of high economic growth is reflected in
information regarding indicators for Goal no. 8 for the lower incidence of poverty, which fell by al-
baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023- most three times from 32.7 per cent in 2004-05 to 11
24) and vision 2030. per cent in 2011-12. However, the important ques-
27. Growth building jobs and prosperity in developing countries, DFID (2010) accessed from http://www.oecd.org/derec/unitedkingdom/40700982.pdf
28. Economic growth, employment and poverty reduction, Katy Hull (2009), report on ‘Promoting Pro-Poor Growth: Employment’, OECD
29. Around 25 per cent people out-migrate from their native places for employment (14.8 per cent) and trade/business activities (10.5 per cent), Migration
Population Survey, 2011-12, Uttarakhand, Directorate of Economic and Statistics, UK.
30. CSO, Government of India, 2017.
31. Directorate of Economic and Statistics, UK, 2017.
32. Ibid.
81
tions to be addressed are: Is this faster growth is 51.2 per cent in 2015-16, whereas the contribution
inclusive or not? What is its impact on inequality of the tertiary sector increased from 34 per cent
in terms of reducing or widening the gap between to 37.2 per cent during the same period. Hence,
the rich and the poor? These questions can be ana- in the long term, an economic structural shift has
lysed on the basis of the distribution of income as taken place from the primary to both the second-
the share of the bottom household (in the 20 per ary and tertiary sectors, with the growth graph
cent quintile) in the total expenditure from nation- veering more towards the tertiary sector every
al sample survey of 2004-5 and 2011-12. The data year since 2011-12.
show that poorest households (in the bottom 20 Growth of the Agricultural Sector
per cent quintile) accounted for only 9.7 per cent of
the total consumption in 2012, which has increased The agriculture sector plays an important role in
marginally by 0.4 percentage points from 2005 on- the state economy. About 70 per cent of the state’s
wards. This indicates that the benefit of the high population lives in rural areas, and 52 per cent of
growth rate attained by the state during the last the total workers in the state were engaged in agri-
decade has not percolated down to the poorest in culture for livelihood in 2011 (Population Census,
terms of improving their income levels. 2011). Inclusive growth cannot be achieved by
keeping the agriculture and allied sectors in iso-
lation. It is also argued that the poverty-reducing
Target 8.2 Achieving higher levels of economic impact of agricultural growth is twice that of the
productivity other sectors (World Bank, 2008). However, this
Baseline for Uttarakhand sector contributes only around 10 per cent to the
state economy, with its annual average growth be-
Economic Structure ing just 1.4 per annum during the period 2011-12
The change in economic structure from a rela- to 2017-18. The prevalence of small and fragment-
tively low productive farm sector to high-value ed landholdings is adversely affecting crop pro-
or productive non-farm sectors is an important ductivity. The contribution of the livestock, and
indicator of economic development. This pro- forestry and logging segments has, on the other
cess of structural transformation can be seen in hand, been almost stable though growing at high-
the respective shares of the three broad sectoral er average annual growth rates of 4.6 per cent and
classifications of the economy, namely the pri- 2.4 per cent, respectively, during the same period.
mary, secondary and tertiary sectors. According Growth of the Non-Farm Sectors
to the earlier classification (used before 2011-12),
the highest contribution to the economy in 2014- The high economic growth of the state has been
15 was made by the tertiary sector (49.1 per cent), attributed to the high growth of the non-farm
followed by the secondary sector (36.5 per cent), sub-sectors such as labour-intensive manufactur-
and the lowest by the primary sector (14.4 per ing and construction from the secondary sector
cent). However, according to the new classifica- and trade, hotel and transport, and communi-
tion brought into force from 2011-12 onwards, the cation from tertiary. The backward and forward
economic structure of the state shows a different linkages of these sub-sectors have also helped
pattern, with the secondary sector dominating in in the growth of the other non-farm sectors. The
the state, whereas at the all-India level, the ser- contribution of manufacturing (38.3 per cent) in
vices sector contributes the most to the economy. the state economy is almost twice as compared to
In 2015-16, the contribution of the secondary sec- that in most other states and the all-India Figure
tor to the state economy was the highest (51.2 per (17.5 per cent) in 2015-16, which was fluctuating
cent), followed by that of the tertiary sector (37.2 around 38 per cent for the economy as a whole
per cent) and the primary sector (11.5 per cent) (Figure. 2.13). The average annual growth rate of
(Figure. 2.12). The contribution of primary sector manufacturing during the period 2011-12 to 2017-
has also declined following the new classifica- 18 was 7.3 per cent, which fluctuated greatly over
tion, from 14 per cent in 2011-12 to 11.5 per cent the years.
in 2015-16. The share of the secondary sector de- The contribution of construction, on the other
clined marginally from 52 per cent in 2011-12 to hand, has been rising continuously, from 8.1 per
82
Figure 2.12: Structure of the Economy with Sectoral Shares in GSDP (%) , 2015-16
Source: CSO, Government of India, 2017
cent in 2011-12 to 9.3 per cent in 2015-16, which is cent per annum. The state has achieved this rate of
also higher than the corresponding all-India Fig- growth in GSDP during the period 2011-12 to 2017-
ure (8.5 per cent). The annual average growth rate 18, although the growth has been fluctuating. The
of the construction sector was 7.7 per cent during vision of the state is to maintain a growth rate of 7.1
the period 2011-12 to 2017-18. In the services sec- per cent annually till 2030, since this is the average
tor, the sub-sector of trade, hotels and restaurants growth rate achieved as mentioned. With this rate of
contributes the most (11.3 per cent) to the state growth the GSDP (at 2011-12 prices) is expected to
economy, and propels growth because Uttara- reach Rs 3,67,607 crore by 2030. Increasing the share
khand is a popular tourist destination. This is fol- of the bottom quintile in the total consumption of the
lowed by the contribution of the transport, stor- population will help in bridging the gap between the
age and communication sub-sector (7.4 per cent) rich and the poor, thereby reducing inequality and
to the economy. facilitating equitable distribution of income or inclu-
Vision 2030 for Targets 8.1 and 8.2 siveness across the society.
The target set by the UN at the country level is to For attaining Target 8.2, there is a need to en-
maintain an annual growth rate of at least 7 per hance overall agricultural growth, for which the
Figure 2.13: Share of Agriculture, Manufacturing & Construction in GSDP (%), 2015-16
83
contributions of agriculture and the allied sectors, needs to ensure the proper implementation and
including horticulture and animal husbandry, need monitoring of all the schemes in order to meet the
to grow at par with the corresponding growth rates stipulated targets. In addition, the government
in Himachal Pradesh. The targeted annual average needs to revisit some of the challenges mentioned
growth rate of the agricultural sector needs to be above. The following strategies, with assistance
more than 1.4 per cent by 2030. As discussed, the from these schemes will help achieve the SDG tar-
high economic growth of the state is attributed to gets set till 2030.
the high growth of the non-farm sub-sectors such The Industrial Policy for the Hill Areas of the
as the labour-intensive manufacturing and con- State has almost remained ineffective in attract-
struction sectors. The construction sector has been ing investment and thus needs to be re-examined.
achieving 7.7 percent annual growth rate, and the The real policy challenge is to create an environ-
vision for 2030 is to maintain this high growth rate ment-friendly micro and small enterprises sector
till 2030. As regards the manufacturing sector, the in the hilly region. In particular, it is imperative
target is to focus more on high-value manufactur- to create an industry-friendly environment for at-
ing in order to augment the growth rate to more tracting new investment and linking locally based
than 7.3 per cent by 2030. industries with the local market. In this context, the
Challenges for Targets 8.1 and 8.2 ‘MSME Policy 2015, ‘Mega Industrial and Invest-
Disparity between the Hills and the Plains: ment Policy 2015’ and ‘Start-up Policy 2016’ could
provide a supportive regulatory environment for
There is a huge regional disparity between the boosting employment. The Mukhya Mantri Gram
districts in the hills and the plains, with around 90 Swarozgar Yojana for industries based in the ru-
per cent of the population in the former residing ral areas with investment worth Rs. 4-5 lakh has
in rural areas and being predominately engaged also been introduced to encourage employment,
in low productive agriculture-related activities. particularly for rural women entrepreneurs. Fur-
This is a matter of great concern as it has been ther, the government introduced a New Policy for
manifested in the form of under-employment Women Entrepreneurs and set up the Women En-
and disguised unemployment. The districts in the trepreneurs Park in 2016. However, the MSMEs
plains in Haridwar, Udham Singh Nagar, some need to be equipped with the relevant skills and
parts of Nainital and Dehradun contribute around knowledge to be able to produce goods for both
65-70 per cent to the state economy. The per capita the domestic and export markets. The MSMEs
income of the districts in the hills is significantly also need to be provided support in the form of
less than that in the districts in the plains. Effective market linkages and appropriate finan-
Industrialisation is Limited to the Plains: cial assistance. This will help in achieving sus-
Although a majority of the people in the state are tainable growth of the manufacturing sector and
engaged in agriculture for their livelihood, this providing productive employment to the youth.
sector contributes only around one-tenth to the There ongoing and proposed diversification
economy, especially due to the sluggish growth in agriculture (discussed in detail in Part I) need
of the crop sector in the recent past. Most enter- market linkages with well-connected roads for
prises are located in the plains in the state. Even realizing the full potential. The government also
the Integrated Hill Industrial Development Policy needs to provide comprehensive insurance of
has hardly been able to attract any industry or in- crops, to take steps to protect the crops from wild-
vestment to the hill areas. life, to establish market linkages, and to ensure
Strategies for Attaining Vision 2030 for Targets access to financial institutions using ICT while
8.1 and 8.2 building partnerships with the private sector and
the academic community for enhancing crop pro-
A number of central and state government ductivity to achieve the targets. The experience of
schemes have been operative in the state to pro- Himachal Pradesh is worth emulating in this re-
vide productive assets and employment opportu- gard for promoting the development of horticul-
nities to the people, as listed with each of the tar- ture. These steps will help in achieving a higher
gets in the Appendix 2.3.3. The state government growth rate of agriculture and the allied sectors,
84
reduce employment and under-employment, and ry sector. The share of the secondary sector (10.8
enhance the women’s work participation rate in percentage points) in the state economy increased
the state. more than that of the tertiary sector (6.9 percent-
age points) during the period 2004-05 to 2011-12.
The rise in the share of the secondary sector’s em-
Target 8.3: Promote development-oriented pol- ployment has been attributed to the construction
icies to support decent job creation, entrepre- (13.7 per cent) and manufacturing (10.2 per cent)
neurship, and growth of micro-, small- and me- sub-sectors (Figure. 2.14). However, the share
dium-sized enterprises of manufacturing in employment is almost one-
Baseline for Uttarakhand fourth of its contribution in the economy, which is
The structural transformation in any economy is less than the corresponding all- India Figure (12.8
successful if changes in the structure of the income per cent).
are accompanied by corresponding changes in the The manufacturing sector has not been able to
structure of employment. In this context, the ad- provide enough employment opportunities for the
ditional jobs created in the secondary and tertiary state’s labour force. On the other hand, the contri-
sectors should be productive and decent.33 Entre- bution of the construction sector in the total employ-
preneurship, creativity and innovation can also ment of the state is higher than that at the all-India
generate productive and formal employment. level, and this sector has also been providing higher
Non-farm Employment employment than its share in the economy. This has
been possible due to the rise in construction activi-
The national sample survey data show that 43.8 ties in infrastructural buildings, road constructions,
cent of the total principal workers were still in- and public programmes such as MGNREGS, all of
volved in low productive agriculture or the farm which have contributed to an increase in employ-
sector in 2011-12. Faster movement of workers ment in the construction sector. Employment in the
from the farm to non-farm sectors was observed service sector has also increased, with two sub-sec-
during the period 2004-05 to 2011-12, which in- tors, viz. trade, hotels and restaurants and transport,
creased from 38.5 per cent in 2004-05 to 56.2 per storage and communication contributing more to
cent in 2011-12. In the non-farm sector, 24.7 per the economy than the others. In particular, activities
cent of the total workers were involved in the sec- in the trade, hotels and restaurants sub-sector have
ondary sector and 31.6 per cent were in the tertia- been contributing to a rise in employment more than
Figure 2.14: Shares of Manufacturing, Construction & Trade, Hotel etc in GSDP (%) , 2011-12
33. Decent work involves opportunities for work that are productive and deliver a fair income, security at the workplace and social protection, better prospects
for personal development, social integration and freedom for people to express their views (ILO, 2015).
85
Figure 2.15: Employment Status for Uttarakhand and India, 2011-12
Source: National Sample Survey, 2011-12
the all-India Figure, with tourism being one of the casual employment, even though incomes from
growth engines of the state. certain self-employed activities are low and even
The MSME sector has a huge potential to cre- uncertain, whereas in the case of casual work,
ate employment for the unemployed youth in the both the duration of employment and income are
state. This is evident from the fact that 53,000 MS- uncertain.
MEs generated employment for 2.5 lakh people in In Uttarakhand, self- employment dominates
the state in 2016-17. (65.7 per cent of the total employment), followed
Regular Employment by regular and casual employment (Figure. 2.15).
The self-employment in the state was significantly
One of the important dimensions for measuring higher than all-India and casual employment less
decent, productive or high-quality employment than half of all-India in 2011-12.
is the employment status of the workforce. In the
NSS, employment status is categorised as regu- The share of self-employment fell by 6.1 per-
lar employment, which is considered to be bet- centage points during the period 2005-12, while
ter quality work due to its more secure nature the share of regular workers increased by al-
and regular terms of payment. This is followed most 4.4 points and that of casual employment
by self-employment and casual employment. went up by 1.7 points during the same period
Self-employment is considered to be better than (Figure. 2.16). It may be noted that a large part
of the self-employed workforce, particular-
Figure 2.16: Employment Status for Uttarakhand, 2005 and 2012
Source: National Sample Survey, 2011-12
86
ly in the agriculture and allied sectors may be The women’s work participation rate for the
either under-employed in engaged in low working age group (15-59 years) was 26.3 per cent
productive farm activities or involved in some in 2012 and declined from 39.8 per cent in 2005.
other non-farm activities generating low earnings. The work participation rate of women is almost
one-third that of men (73.1 per cent), with the
Target 8.5: By 2030, achieve full and productive women being more deprived of employment op-
employment and decent work portunities in the hilly areas. Rise in the incidence
of migration in the hilly areas has compelled more
Baseline for Uttarakhand and more women in these families to do all sorts
The status of full employment in the state can of jobs; within the family and outside. Thus, the
be assessed from information on the unemploy- women end up bearing the burden of both house-
ment rate of the labour force. Various measures hold chores and outside work such as farm activ-
of unemployment are provided by national level ities, fetching of water and wood, and caring for
surveys. Unemployment by the usual principal animals, among others. The latest time use survey
or main status of any individual during the last of the state government reveals enormous drudg-
365 days is used to assess the level of unemploy- ery of work borne by women in the hilly areas, as
ment prevalent in the state. This applies for both they have to work for about 12-14 hours per day
males and females of the working age group (15- to sustain their families.
59 years) and youth (15-29 years), who enter the The involvement of women in non-farm activ-
labour market in search of gainful or productive ities was low, at 18.5 per cent, as compared to that
employment. In addition, it is also important to of men, at 72.4 per cent, in 2012. As mentioned
assess the level of under-employment to identify earlier, women are still largely involved in agri-
the hidden unemployment in the state. culture and other non-productive activities due to
Unemployment and Under-employment (15-59 years) the non-availability of jobs in the non-farm sec-
The rate of unemployment among the labour tors.
force of the working age was 4.3 per cent in 2012, In addition, the wage rates of both male and
going up from 2.8 per cent in 2005. This rate was female workers, both in regular work and casual
seen to be higher among females (7.3 per cent) work, also show that their average earnings/wag-
as compared to males (3.1 per cent) in the state. es per day that are lower than their male coun-
These Figures show that enough jobs are not be- terparts. In 2011-12, the daily average earnings/
ing created to provide employment opportunities wages of females engaged in both regular work
for the state’s growing labour force. The other im- (female, Rs. 420 and male Rs. 453) and casual
portant issue that needs to be addressed is that of work (female, Rs. 128 and male Rs. 177) were was
under-employment, particularly in the hill region less than those of males.
of the state, where more people are still engaged Target 8.6: By 2020, reduce the proportion of
in farm-related activities and are thus seek addi- youth not in employment, education or training
tional employment opportunities.
Baseline for Uttarakhand
These Figures are also endorsed by the fact
that labour productivity (GSDP per worker) in Youth (15-29 years) Unemployment and Under-
the non-agriculture (Rs. 5,20,881) and manufac- employment
turing (Rs. 1,310,968) sectors was 3.5 times and 14 The rate of youth unemployment rate is substan-
times higher, respectively, than that in the agri- tially higher than that of the overall open un-
culture sector (Rs. 93,439) in 2011-12, whereas the employment in the state, as the unemployment
agriculture and manufacturing sectors accounted among youth was more than double (14.3 per
for employment of 43.8 per cent and 10.2 per cent, cent) of the corresponding all-India Figure (7.6 per
respectively, of the total employment during the cent) in 2012, going up from 6.0 percentage points
same period. since 2005. The unemployment rate is even higher
Women Workers in Total and Non-agricultural Em- (17.2 per cent) among youth who have been edu-
ployment (15-59 years) cated up to the secondary and above levels in the
87
state. Micro level studies have also highlighted Target 8.8: Protect labour rights and promote
that this high unemployment rate among youth is safe and secure working environments
responsible for the high rate of outmigration from Baseline for Uttarakhand
the state (Bora, 1996; Awasthi, 2012). Again, the
under-employment rate among youth, at 7.1 per A large number of informal and migrant workers
cent, was also relatively higher than that of others within the state, comprising both men and wom-
in 2012. en, are engaged in low-paid and insecure jobs.
They are not provided any social security benefit
Youth Not in Education, Training or Employment or a suitable working environment. An estima-
Youth in the state are acquiring neither education tion of latest migration report says that around 85
nor training, and nor are in employment, need to per cent of the migrants are engaged in whatev-
be guided since otherwise they might be misled er jobs are available and only a few of them have
towards involvement in criminal activities or oth- switched to better quality jobs.
er forms of violence. Although the share of such Vision 2030 for Targets 8.3, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.8
youth declined from one-third (32.9 per cent) in
2005 to almost one-fourth (24 per cent) in 2012, the The vision for Target 8.3 is that the percentage
fact that a large proportion of the youth in the state share of the workforce in non-agriculture would
are not engaged in either education or any produc- be increased beyond the baseline value of 56 per
tive activity poses a serious socio-economic prob- cent (see Appendix 2.3.2 and the Annexure 8 or
lem for the state. the details of the indicator values under each tar-
get). The share of regular and formal employment
In this context, the conduction of sports and vo- is expected to increase in the coming years. The
cational training programmes by the Youth Wel- number of MSME units is also likely to increase
fare Department of Uttarakhand assumes impor- to 1,70,000 with the concomitant employment in-
tance. This department has been conceived to act as creasing to 8,50,000 by 2030.
a platform for youth empowerment programmes
and to equip the local youth with the skills to find The vision for Target 8.5 is that the unem-
new opportunities globally. The development of ployment and under-employment rates would be
sports infrastructural facilities in the rural areas, reduced from the baseline levels and the share of
too, has been going on apace with the objective of women workers in the total employment and in
identifying hidden talent in such areas and giving non-farm employment would be enhanced. The vi-
them a chance to participate at the district, state sion for Target 8.6 is that the youth unemployment
and national level sports competitions. In 2015-16, and under-employment rates would be reduced
the state won 38 medals at the national level Rural from the baseline levels and that the share of youth
Sports Competition. The number of youth trained who are currently not involved in education, train-
in vocational trades by the Youth Welfare Depart- ing or employment would be brought down from
ment as of 2015-16 is 429. the baseline levels of 24 per cent and the number
of youth trained in vocational trades by the Youth
Another wing of the Prantiya Rakshak Dal Welfare Department would will increase to 5600 by
trains volunteers with the objective of strengthen- 2030. The vision related to Target 8.7 is that child
ing their self-confidence, self-reliance, and disci- labour would will be fully eliminated.
pline, and promoting communal harmony as well
as helping the police in maintaining peace and Challenges for Targets 8.3, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.8
security, thereby raising a strong group of volun- Not enough job creation in manufacturing:
teers. There are almost 8500 Prantiya Rakshak Dal The contribution of the manufacturing sector to
volunteers, who are paid Rs. 400/day. the economy is around 42 per cent but it is able to
generate only 10 per cent of the total employment.
Target 8.7: End child labour This is due to the high concentration of large man-
ufacturing units in only some of the districts in
Baseline for Uttarakhand the plains. Even the latest economic census of 2015
The child labour in the state is almost negligible also shows that about 62 per cent of the enterpris-
and just around 1 per cent in 2012. es are concentrated in the districts in the plains.
88
Bias in credit flow: Strategy for attaining Vision 2030 for Targets 8.3,
The persistent bias in credit flow for the priority 8.5, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.8
sectors is yet another area of concern, wherein the There is a relatively high rate of unemployment
banking sector prefers to finance only the devel- among the higher educated youth in the state,
oped districts and is hesitant to take risks in the hilly who can be potential employees for the knowl-
districts. Consequently, the gap in development be- edge-based IT industry. The government should
tween the hills and plains is bound to widen. encourage IT and IT-enabled services firms in the
Inadequate employment opportunities in the hills: state to expand their communication networks by
providing them better infrastructure, more electric-
Although the advent of MGNREGS has provided ity, and comparatively cheap land. This will help in
wage employment to people from the rural and creating decent jobs for highly educated youth, re-
hilly areas, it has not been able to create enough sulting in a reduction in their high unemployment
employment to be able to allow them to move out rate. The Skill Development Mission and Skill Hub
from agriculture to other sectors of the economy. for skilling and employment of youth can help in
The average employment per household under generating the soft skills required.
MGNREGS during the last six years was below 40
(about 38 days). This is minuscule in view of the Women should be given more rights such as
existing situation of under-employment and un- land ownership, particularly in the hilly and rural
employment in the rural and hilly areas of the state. areas, as without ownership of land, they suffer
from disadvantages terms of securing credit, en-
The state has also not been able to exploit the tering into contracts, or undertaking other activ-
advantages offered by its lucrative sectors such as ities of agricultural management. Women have
tourism and Information Communication Technol- equal entitlement to ancestral land as per the Hin-
ogy (ICT) for its large number of educated unem- du succession law, but this remains largely unim-
ployed youth. plemented. Encouraging women’s ownership of
The self-employment programmes imple- land is a key measure that could improve and en-
mented in the state such as the National Rural courage women’s entrepreneurship and promote
Livelihood Mission or the Aajivika Mission have their participation in productive activities.
had no visible impact in enterprise development. Most of the women in the hilly areas are en-
The growth in the number of private enterprises gaged in various domestic and household-relat-
was very low (at around 5 per cent) in the hilly ed activities, which are not accounted for in eco-
districts during the period 2005-2013, whereas it nomic activities. Hence, the strategy should be to
was much higher at 53 per cent in the districts in motivate them to take up training or skill upgra-
the plains. The other self-employment programme dation from the concerned department to enable
initiated by the state government for promoting them to engage in gainful employment. Various
employment in the tourism sector, viz., the VCSG self-employment schemes are run by different de-
Self Employment Scheme in Tourism, has also partments in the state. Attempts need to be made
managed to provide employment to barely 1100 to make them aware of these programmes and to
people during the last six years. impart training and skills to them, so that they can
High rate of youth unemployment: benefit from such schemes.
There is a huge incidence of youth unemployment, The Mahila Mangal Dal and The Yuva Man-
particularly among the high-educated youth, com- gal Dal, at the village level, shall also be motivat-
pelling them to out-migrate or remain unemployed ed through workshops to create self-help groups
due to the unavailability of proper jobs for them in (SHGs) and to undertake the required skill upgra-
the state. dation or training so that they can benefit from
Low female work force participation: the various employment generation schemes of
the different government departments. Some
There is also a very low female work participation youngsters will be trained by ex-Army personnel
rate in the state, with the women mostly spending at the block level to facilitate their entry into the
their time in unproductive activities. Army.
89
The government needs to ensure the pro- people. The department plans to organise such
tection of labour rights and promotion of a safe job fairs regularly, with a target of at least 696 job
and secure working environment for all workers fairs in the year to provide employment to about
through proper monitoring and implementation 14,000 unemployed youth.
of the existing norms. A huge number of youth are currently neither
The share of the self-employed is significant- working nor acquiring any training or education.
ly high in the state, at 65.7 per cent of the total These youth need proper skills and vocational
workforce. Most of these are women, engaged in training to get gainful employment to be able to
low-productive agriculture and low-earning al- contribute to the economy. Apart from skill de-
lied activities. The state government should en- velopment, effective public-private or industry
deavour to encourage youths to move from the partnership is also necessary for imparting train-
existing subsistence cereal-based production in ing to them and generating gainful employment
agriculture to market-linked enterprises. For this, for them.
the government needs to link these youths to var- The Department of Youth Welfare is taking
ious agro-based schemes run by the government care of various aspects of student welfare like
departments. The departments of MSME, rural student counselling, training, NSS, government
development, and tourism, among others, are and non-government sponsored youth projects,
running various employment generation schemes. financial aid and scholarships, healthcare, games
The employment department has devised the fol- and sports, and cultural activities, among oth-
lowing strategies for generating employment, er things. A national integration programme is
particularly among the unemployed youth. being conducted to promote a sense of national,
(i) The employment department avers that they cultural and emotional oneness among the youth.
are registering unemployed youth, who would be The Central government is supporting youth ex-
asked to identify their areas of interest wherein change programmes and adventure programmes
they would like to acquire skill upgradation and comprising trekking, climbing, and water sports,
training. Accordingly, their details would be for- among others. Under a Career Guidance Pro-
warded to the concerned departments so that they gramme, the Youth Welfare and PRD Department
can benefit from the self-employment schemes run has proposed to establish career guidance centres
by these departments. (ii) The department shall or- along with each district office. The department
ganise job fairs at the district level at regular inter- also plans to establish a state level training cen-
vals to facilitate the placement of these youths in tre and to conduct regular training and vocational
various private sector enterprises. (iii) The depart- programmes in collaboration with the National
ment shall conduct career counselling through psy- Open School, Uttarakhand Open University and
chometric or aptitude tests to help students choose Indira Gandhi National Open University (IG-
their careers as per their skills and abilities. (iv) NOU), among others.
These career counselling sessions shall also be con- The level of literacy and enrolment in higher
ducted in the far-flung areas of the state through education in the state is higher than the nation-
outreach activities. al average but this has not been transformed into
For employment in formal sector jobs, apart employment opportunities as these youth lack
from encouraging private services and industries, technical/professional skills that are essential to
the state government has devised the following get linked with the requirements of the job mar-
strategies: (1) The state government is striving ket. Due to the lack of the required skills in accor-
to fill up the posts that are lying vacant across dance with their aptitude, these youth fail to opti-
various departments. This shall provide regular mise their as a result of which they end up in low
employment to the people of the state. (ii) The productive jobs, leading to under-employment.
department of employment has been organising The department plans to link these unemployed
job fairs in different districts of the state. In 2016- or under-employed youth with placement-linked
17, the department organised 106 job fairs that skill training run by the Uttarakhand Skill Devel-
provided job opportunities to 2773 unemployed opment Mission. The youth registering with the
90
employment exchange shall be asked to specify ing Uttarakhand a get-away for official weekend
their areas of interest in which they wish to make meetings and events would increase manifold if it
their careers and accordingly their names shall be has good Internet and mobile connectivity. There
forwarded for training to the skill mission. is also a need to dedicate sufficient resources to
The names of these people shall also be for- the development of tourism in the state. At pres-
warded to various departments running employ- ent, the expenditure on tourism as a percentage
ment/self- employment schemes to enable them to share of the expenditure on all sectors is just 0.146
enter the job market in the areas of their interest. per cent, according to a recent survey, giving the
state sixth rank, as compared to the top-ranking
state Sikkim, which spends 2.8 per cent of the en-
Target 8.9 By 2030, devise and implement tire state expenditure on tourism.35 The state also
policies to promote sustainable tourism has a relatively poor 15th rank in terms of effective
Baseline for Uttarakhand34 marketing.
The number of tourist arrivals to Uttarakhand in- Pilgrimage is a driving factor of tourism in
creased from 16 million in 2005 to 31 million in the state, as the main purpose of visiting the state
2010. It dipped slightly afterwards, but the nat- for 44.2 per cent of the domestic tourist visits is
ural disaster of floods and landslides that struck pilgrimage/religious while holiday/sight-seeing
the state in 2013 took its toll and tourist arrivals accounts for 43.6 per cent of the tourist visits, ac-
plunged to 20 million in that year. However, in cording to a snap survey conducted by the Unit-
2015, there was a recovery to 30 million arrivals, ed Nations World Tourism Organization (UN-
almost touching the level attained in 2010. While WTO).36 Tourists visiting the state for a holiday
the state is ranked ahead of Himachal Pradesh as are attracted by its natural beauty and trekking
a tourist destination for domestic tourists, it still opportunities. The inflow of tourists is from the
accounts for just 2 per cent of the all-India tour- states of Delhi, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal, Pun-
ist arrivals and has a long way to go to become jab, Uttarakhand, Haryana, Gujarat, Rajasthan,
the most visited destination (See Table 2.2). As and Maharashtra in that order, and the most pop-
regards foreign tourists, the development of this ular destinations for domestic tourists are Harid-
sector in Uttarakhand is lagging considerably war, Rishikesh, Nainital, Badarinath, Kedarnath,
behind the other states despite the even greater Gangotri, Uttarkashi, Mussoorie, Yamunotri, Al-
scope of improve its share in the state. mora, Ranikhet, and Dehradun.
In order to provide the necessary fillip to tour- In the case of foreign tourists, on the other
ism, the state needs to acquire many attributes, as hand, the reason for holiday/sight-seeing account-
identified by the 2008 Tourism Master Plan for the ed for the bulk (58 per cent) of the foreign tourist
state (see Box No. 2.12). Some of these include im- visits, while 21.9 per cent of the visits were found
provements in accessibility, connectivity within to be for health/yoga and about 19.4 per cent for
the state, predictability of transport time, quality pilgrimage/religious functions. Foreign tourists
of accommodation, food, education and training mostly come from the United States of America,
of tourism sector workers, and sanitation, among Israel, Australia, Italy, Germany, and Nepal, and
other things. Today’s average tourist accords very the destinations popular with them are Rishikesh,
high importance to Internet/mobile connectivity Haridwar, Gangotri, Uttarkashi, Kedarnath, Badri-
at the tourist destination, which should be added nath, Auli, Nainital, and Gaumukh.
to this list of desirable areas of improvement. In
fact, over and above the typical tourist on a per-
sonal holiday or pilgrimage, the scope for mak-
34. The tourism sector has been discussed in detail in Part I.

35. HVS State Ranking Survey 2015, available at http://www.hospitalitynet.org/file/152005708.pdf, accessed on April 15, 2017.
36. Available at http://www.uttarakhandtourism.gov.in/inviting-suggestions-uttarakhand-tourism-draft-policy-2016.pdf , accessed on March 24, 2017.
91
Figure 2.17: Tourist Arrivals in Uttarakhand (millions)
Box 2.9: Important Pre-conditions for Realising the Full Potential of Domestic and International
Tourism in Uttarakhand
The state needs to bring about an improvement in the following areas to optimise its potential for domestic and
international tourism:
> Accessibility by air, road and rail to Uttarakhand from other parts of India and abroad
> Connectivity within the state by air, road and rail where applicable
> Predictability in terms of both transportation time and what can be expected from the different tourism destina-
tions and products
> Selection and quality of accommodation facilities, food and beverage, entertainment and general service level for
all standards and types of outlets
> Education and training of public and private tourism industry workers and entrepreneurs of all sectors and rank
at central, state and local community level
> Marketing and information material and interpretation at tourism locations
> Local community understanding of and participation in tourism and awareness of what it entails in terms of
opportunities and threats.
> Urban and rural infrastructure, environmental services and utilities operation and management
> Basic sanitation, urban management and design quality in major towns, some of which could perform useful
gateway functions
> Simplification of the institutional framework for tourism administration and operation among others to foster
greater cooperation between all stakeholders in the tourism industry.
> Public–private cooperation and partnership in the state within all sectors of the tourism system.
Source: 2008 Tourism Master Plan, Uttarakhand
Vision 2030 for Target 8.9 manner so that it can be counted among the top
To develop Uttarakhand as a comprehen- national and international tourist destinations
sive, world class tourism destination by in the coming fifteen years. The action plan is to
realising the untapped potential of sustainable make the state among the top 10 tourism destina-
tourism, through the design of innovative tourism tion states of the country by 2020, up from its pres-
products that build on the inherent strengths of ent rank of 12. The aim is to reach a place among
the state as a natural destination catering to the top 5 destination states by 2024, and finally to
all categories of tourists. reach among the top 3 destination states by 2030.
Uttarakhand needs to brand and position the The vision is to promote adventure tourism,
experience of holidaying in the state in a planned eco-tourism, and rural tourism in a big way in the
92
state, and to protect the most frequented tourist terrain. The cost of building infrastructure also
destinations, which are already over-exploited increases due to the topography, thereby adding
to make them sustainable tourist destinations. to the challenge. The recent calamity in 2013 has
The attraction of the state as a pilgrimage site is set the state back in terms of infrastructure and
already well-established, but there is still a great connectivity.
deal of scope to promote the state as a destination Disaster-prone Areas: The state has a geograph-
for spiritual purposes, yoga, and wellness, also as ically fragile mountain economy, which, while
a destination for trekking, mountaineering, riv- accounting for its unique features and attraction,
er-rafting, and such adventurous activities. also makes it extremely prone to natural disasters
Rural tourism and eco-tourism can be encour- such as cloud-bursts, landslides, and flash floods,
aged as has been done in other states, provided which pose grave challenges for any type of con-
the needs for infrastructure and connectivity, skill struction, including road construction. Unfor-
training, accreditation of dhabas/restaurants, and tunately, as a result of unplanned development,
service providers are met. Thereafter, tourist des- many tourist facilities have been built in disas-
tinations in the upper reaches of the state can also ter-prone high-risk areas, such as hotels along the
be developed, providing employment opportuni- banks of the river Ganga in Rishikesh.
ties to the local youth (see Box no. 2.10 and 2.11). Inadequate Accommodation Facilities: Presently, the
These aspects have been incorporated in the indi- availability of branded rooms in Uttarakhand is
cators developed for the Target 8.9, and have been just 2.41 rooms per 100 sq. km., which needs to be
presented in the Annexure 8, with baseline values augmented. 37 A particular problem here is with
as well as values for the interim timelines of 2019- regard to a huge floating tourist population as
20, 2023-24, and the final timeline of 2030. Appen- well as the high density of the footfall of tourists,
dix 2.3.2 presents a snapshot of the targets/indi- especially religious tourists, during particular
cators for the baseline and 2030 and Figure 2.18 festivals. The pressure on the demand for hotels
presents the status for selected indicators. and other accommodation can witness a sudden
Challenges for Target 8.9 spike, which is why adequate plans must be im-
Connectivity: The need for robust physical infra- plemented to develop and upgrade tourist facili-
structure, and, increasingly, an effective telecom ties in the popular destinations such as Mussoorie
and cellular infrastructure, for tourism develop- and Nainital, among other destinations.
ment cannot be over-emphasised. For the tourism Planning Needed to Combat Unplanned Growth in
sector, all avenues of infrastructure and transport, Religious Tourism: As discussed earlier, pilgrim-
including road, rail and air, are important. This is age is the main driver of domestic tourism for
one area wherein Uttarakhand does indeed have a destinations such as Char Dham and Haridwar.
considerable distance to cover, in view of its hilly The excessive tourist footfall in the state has had
Box 2.10 Home Stay: Village Ways—Connecting Villages with the World
Home stay is one of the means by which the problem of migration can be addressed. ‘Village Ways’ is an organisa-
tion which is trying to make home-stays popular in Uttarakhand. The Home Stay venture of Village Ways started
in Binsar in Almora district.
In the holiday experience offered by Village Ways, small village guest-houses are offered for the tourists, rather
than the villagers’ homes. The hosts come to the guest-houses from their own homes and return at night. This gives
the tourists more independence , while not disturbing the regular family life of the village communities.
This award-winning organisation offers holiday experiences combining nature walk, culture and discovery of the
village life. Such initiatives go a long way towards providing sustainable livelihoods for the locals and help to stem
migration.
37. HVS State Ranking Survey 2015, available at http://www.hospitalitynet.org/file/152005708.pdf, accessed on April 15, 2017.
93
Figure 2.18: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Tourism Sector in Uttarakhand
an adverse impact on the maintenance of cleanli- Departmental Co-ordination: Tourism efforts in

ness of the sites, and the conditions of these sites a state can be truly successful only when sever-
has also been worsening. An added challenge is al departments such as those of Tourism, Urban
that many of the tourist visits are of short dura- Development, Road Transport and Highways,
tions, and do not generate enough revenue for Railways, Power, Water and Sanitation, and PWD,
the state. all operate in tandem with each other. Several ini-
Environmental Sustainability: Unplanned devel- tiatives of the tourism department may not bring
opment of tourism in the state has struck at the the expected results if there are bottlenecks in any
very heart of the fragile mountain ecosystem of of the departments mentioned, and in others not
the state, which lies in the most active seismic mentioned here.
zone. Parts of Uttarakhand fall in seismic zone-5. Need for Dedicated Finance and Land Availability: If
In addition, the increased volume of solid waste, tourism in the state is to be catapulted to world
including untreated waste water resulting from class standards, it must have the necessary finan-
tourism and related activities, often gets dumped cial investment. The share of tourism (presently at
in the Ganga, adding to the pollution of the river, only about 1.5 per cent) in the total budget expen-
which is the lifeline of not only Uttarakhand but diture of the state government is very low, which
of the entire Gangetic plains area. needs urgent attention38. The revenue generated
by the department would be grossly inadequate
38. Uttarakhand socio-economic mirror, September, 2016 page 13
94
Box 2.11: Best Practices in Tourism
Himachal Pradesh Sikkim Meghalaya Kerala
Rural Tourism: Success-

Community-based
ful promotion of villages Organic and Cleanest Inter-state Co-ordina-
Tourism: The state
through the ‘Har Gaon State: Sikkim became tion: The state govern-
government is promot-
ki Kahani’ scheme, the first fully Organic ment has promoted
ing community tourism
which attracts through State in 2016. It was also Regional Tourism
since land tenure is tilt-
local tales, folklores and adjudged as the cleanest Circuit with effective
ed towards the commu-
anecdotes, and provides state by the Ministry of co-operation from other
nity with very little land
tourists an authentic Tourism. Southern States.
held by the government.
rustic experience.
Eco-tourism: Sikkim is
the first state to frame
an eco-tourism policy
Responsible Tourism:
based on the GSTC cri- Institution Funding: The
Institution Funding: The government has
teria. The major projects state has been able to at- formulated Responsible
The state has received being implemented tract funding from JICA Tourism Classification
direct foreign assistance include the Sikkim Bio- for infrastructure. for registration of hotels
from ADB diversity Conservation
and resorts in line with
and Forest Management
GSTC criteria
project, and Sikkim
Himalayan Homestay
Programme.
Eco-tourism: Eco-tourism: The state

Adventure Tourism:
The eco-tourism policy, forest department has
This is being promoted
2016, has been formulat- taken community-based
through a collaboration Adventure tourism:
ed, which aims to attract eco-tourism initiatives
with the Indian Moun- The state has formulat-
at least 10 per cent of and effective forest
taineering Federation ed safety and security
all tourists visiting by management through
for trekking, mountain- guidelines for adventure
2030. The forest depart- the involvement of trib-
eering and other adven- tourism.
ment of the state acts as al people who are em-
ture activities around
a nodal department for ployed as tourist guides
Mt. Kanchenjunga.
promoting eco-tourism. and forest watchers.
for the purpose of overhauling tourism in the eering tourism as well as spiritual/yoga/well-
state in a big way. In a similar context, given that ness tourism destinations alongside the more
70 per cent of the land in Uttarakhand is under frequented destinations or hotspots. This will
forest cover, scarce land needs to be released for be a sustainable approach, since the hotspots
the department to build tourist hotels/accommo- already have considerable footfalls and are
dation, restaurants, restrooms, parking and enter- over-exploited, rendering the surrounding en-
tainment facilities, to name a few. vironment even more susceptible to damage.
It would be necessary to ascertain that tourist
visits in these areas do not exceed the existing
Strategy for attaining Vison 2030 for Target 8.9 carrying capacity. The focus on developing
• The state will follow the broad strategy of the less explored and less frequented destina-
developing the rural tourism, sustainable tion implies a reduced risk of environmental
tourism destinations and trekking/mountain- damage and by generating greater aware-
95
ness regarding sustainability, better planning proach to ensure the availability all required
can be done for the development of tourism facilities in those circuits, is also essential.
in such destinations, with close coordination • Regarding the specific challenges faced by the
and planning with disaster management de- state, state-level co-ordination is required to
partment for assessment of risks. improve inter-state connectivity. Homestays
• The strategy for the initial three-year period in rural areas and serviced apartments in ur-
till 2020 should be that of taking stock of the ban areas can be the means for supplementing
existing strengths and weaknesses, as well as tourist accommodation, over and above the
detailed planning for the development of a development/upgradation of facilities. Tour-
new segment of tourist markets in the medi- ist flows in popular religious destinations can
um and long terms. Work should be initiated be managed through real-time online regis-
for short duration projects too, and the exist- tration and the provision of safe facilities for
ing infrastructure and connectivity should be tourists. Simultaneously, a strategy for pro-
maintained and consolidated. At the same moting nature-based tourism can be adopted
time, there should be a plan to position ‘Brand to encourage tourists to disperse throughout
Uttarakhand’ in the domestic and internation- the state, aided by the creation of wayside
al markets. amenities.
The medium term should see the realisation • The inter-departmental co-ordination chal-
and execution of detailed plans made in the lenges can be met by the creation of proj-
short term, along with an improvement in ect-specific committees comprising members
the existing facilities. The brand of the state from all the concerned departments such as
should be publicised and marketed to a larg- water and sanitation, PWD, urban develop-
er number of countries, as more potential ment, IT, etc. Better planning can be done for
tourists become aware of the attractiveness the development of tourism in hill destina-
of Uttarakhand as a tourist destination. The tions, with close coordination and planning
long-term strategy would involve further ex- with the disaster management department for
pansion depending on the success achieved in the assessment of risks.
the medium term. • For generating financial resources, the state
• Theme-based circuits that have potential to government can explore multi- and bilateral
be showcased as world class tourism prod- funding agencies such as JICA, ADB, and the
ucts can be developed in consultation with World Bank, over and above resources from
the stakeholders (Annual Report of Ministry the Central/state governments.
of Tourism, 2015-16). Here, it will be neces- • There is a plan to develop thirteen new des-
sary to ensure that the development of theme- tinations in thirteen districts of the state
based circuits adheres to the sustainability based on various themes like adventure, lei-
and carrying capacities of the destinations. A sure, rural, spiritual, and wellness in the long
framework for classifying infrastructural gaps term. Schemes like Pt. Deen Dayal Upadhyay
can be developed to identify the existing bot- Samekit Gramin Paryatan Vikas Yojana will
tlenecks so that the potential of these circuits be implemented with the participation of the
can be unlocked. The adoption of an integrat- concerned departments for providing self-em-
ed approach for planning these circuits, along ployment and for preventing and/or reducing
with a comprehensive area development ap- immigration from the hilly areas.
96
SECTION 2.4 The vision for Goal No. 9 for the state of Uttara-
SDG 9: Build Resilient Infrastructure, Promote khand is as follows:
Inclusive and Sustainable Industrialization and By 2030, safe, reliable and modern transport
Foster Innovation will be available for all citizens of the state
and an environmentally sustainable process
of industrialisation will be attained such that
A robust physical infrastructure is the bedrock resources are fully utilised and the maximum
of an industrialised economy and is an essen- possible employment is generated.
tial requirement for the mountainous state of
The vision for targets of Goal No. 9 are pre-
Uttarakhand. Industrialisation drives the
growth process in an economy and leads to
employment opportunities that are critical for
2.4.2, and Appendix 2.4.3 contains the schemes
economic growth, particularly for develop-
applicable for Goal no. 9. Annexure 9 contains
ing countries. Innovation is imperative for the
the detailed information regarding indicators for
enhancement of technological capabilities and
Goal no. 9 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), me-
building of skills and expertise.
dium term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
The progress of industrialisation is captured
In the present section, the targets for Goal No. 9
by the share of manufacturing in value added in
have been discussed by focusing on Target 9.1, fol-
terms of GDP, and this share has increased only
lowed by a discussion around Targets 9.2 and 9.3.
marginally for developing countries over the pe-
riod 2005-15, from 19 per cent to 21 per cent. This
structural shift has implications for jobs in devel- Target 9.1 Developing resilient infrastructure
oping countries, and the small-scale industries and equitable access for all
sector can help in much-needed job creation in
such countries while providing a thrust to greater
inclusion in an industrialised economy. Ensuring accessibility to a state from outside as
well as connectivity within it by road/rail/air
Uttarakhand is highly vulnerable to periodic
links is of paramount importance for optimising
natural disasters like floods, earthquakes, land-
the potential of industrialisation and tourism
slides, torrential rainfall, and snowstorms and thus
promotion in the state. Providing connectivity
would benefit greatly from improved infrastruc-
via all-weather roads (along with bridges) would
ture. Access to various services such as healthcare
also play a major role in marketing the agricultur-
and education in the remote hilly reaches of the
al produce as well as in developing the far-flung
state is adversely affected by the lack of a sturdy
areas in the mountains. In view of its mountain-
and resilient network of road–rail air linkages.
ous terrain, Uttarakhand is largely dependent on
These geographical hurdles also constrain the ex-
roads for transportation, with minimal presence
pansion of employment opportunities. Building
of air and rail links. The vision for road expansion
and maintaining infrastructural facilities in terrain
in the state will be closely linked with the strategy
that is undulating and exposed to the vagaries of
for industrialisation, especially since it would aim
nature is an expensive proposition. This also has
to provide adequate and efficient connectivity to
adverse implications for tourism development,
all the demand drivers, including tourism, indus-
which is one of the main growth planks for Uttara-
tries, agriculture, and urban centres.
khand economy.
Uttarakhand has expanded its road network
Consequently, industrialisation in the state is
significantly since its inception in 2000. In 2012-
largely confined to the plains, with the hilly areas
13, the state had 580.41 km of road for a popula-
being bypassed by this growth due to their hostile
tion of one lakh as compared to the corresponding
topography. In this backdrop, small-scale indus-
national average of 354.54 km. However, in terms
tries signify an avenue for providing employment
of the length of roads per 1000 sq. km of area, at
to those excluded from the benefits of large-scale
1107.81 km, it is lower than the national average
industrialisation.
of 1317.90 km. This is because nearly 70 per cent
97
98
of the state is covered by forests and therein lies work, improving road safety, and ensuring regu-
the main constraint to the expansion of infrastruc- larity and punctuality of the transport system.
ture in this mountainous state. The unplanned ex- The state also has a limited railway network,
pansion of infrastructure, including that of road which caters only to the districts lying mainly in
networks, can wreak havoc on the fragile moun- the plains, that is, Udham Singh Nagar, Haridwar
tain environment. Experts claim that the devastat- and the plains of Dehradun and Nainital districts.
ing natural calamity in 2013 had much to do with Even if there is an improvement in the road and
the unchecked construction in the state, including rail networks in the state in future, there is still
the construction of roads, flyovers and other in- need for a high-capacity reliable air transport sys-
frastructure. The floods of 2013 destroyed a large tem to meet the rising demand for access to im-
part of the roads in the state. Currently, the length portant international and domestic markets for the
of pucca roads in the state is 322.93 km per pop- state’s entrepreneurs. There are two proposed in-
ulation of one lakh, and around 67 per cent of the ternational (Jolly Grant and Pantnagar) and three
villages have access to all-weather roads. domestic (Chinyalisaur, Gauchar and Naini Saini)
While there is 55 per cent mobile connectivity airports in the state, which are already located at
in the villages, 10 per cent of the Gram Panchayats suitable locations throughout Uttarakhand, and
(as a percentage of the total number of villages) when commissioned, these will improve access
are connected by Internet. The number of wire- and connectivity throughout the state.
less and Internet subscribers in the state as of May Mobile and Internet connectivity will be great-
2016, according to data provided by the TRAI, ly enhanced in the coming 15-year period, with
including the numbers for Uttar Pradesh (West), the share of villages having mobile connectivity
were 152,222,711 and 37,040,000 respectively.39 increasing from a baseline of 55 per cent to 70 per
Vision 2030 for Target 9.1 cent by 2019-20, and 100 per cent by 2023-24 (Figure
The vision is to provide a safe, reliable and sus- 2.20). By 2030, the government proposes to provide
tainable road and rail transportation system for all a mobile network even along the state highways.
citizens of the state. By 2030 length of pucca roads Internet connectivity will be expanded to all the
per lakh population will reach 461.29 km. All vil- Gram Panchayats in a phased manner, covering 30
lages will have access to all-weather roads by 2030 per cent of them by 2019-20, 70 per cent by 2023-24,
(Figure 2.19). The transport infrastructure must be and 100 per cent by 2030.
made resilient for this purpose and also be mod- Challenges for Target 9.1
ernised. Loss of life due to road accidents and pol- Poor Connectivity of Villages in the Hills with the Cities
lution from vehicles are to be minimised. By 2030,
all villages and uncovered areas along state high- Urbanisation is a rising phenomenon globally as
ways will have mobile connectivity and all Gram well as in India and Uttarakhand is no exception.
Panchayats will be connected by Internet. Industrialisation and urbanisation usually go
hand in hand, and the services sector has also in-
As discussed in the baseline section for Target creasingly been providing the impetus for growth
9.1, the state has achieved progress in infrastruc- and employment that accompany urbanisation. In
ture development but has still not been able to the mountainous regions of Uttarakhand, howev-
create an efficient transport system. A large part er, rising urbanisation has led to massive out-mi-
of this is due to the difficult mountainous terrain, gration from the hills towards the plains within
which includes disaster-prone areas and entails the state, as also migration outside the state. This
unpredictability of the weather conditions. How- has literally converted many villages into ‘ghost
ever, other problems like poor traffic manage- villages’ with most of the villagers having left
ment in the villages and towns have also affected their erstwhile homes in the hills. Thus, the in-
the pace of economic growth in the state. In gen- herent contradiction in the development graph of
eral, the long-term vision for road infrastructure Uttarakhand is that though it needs industriali-
would include expanding the road transport net-
39. Source: https://www.slideshare.net/IBEFIndia/Uttarakhand-state-report-december-2016 accessed on April 24, 2017.
99
Figure 2.19: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Road transport in Uttarakhand

Figure 2.20: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Mobile and Internet Connectivity
in Uttarakhand
sation to meet the aspirations of the people, and network with the vulnerabilities of a mountain-
to provide them jobs and ensure their prosperity, ous region. This is not an easy task, given the
yet this very industrialization and the concomi- fact that 70 per cent of the land in Uttarakhand
tant urbanisation are causing a withering of the is covered by forests, which limits the availability
hill economy through migration. of land both for developing infrastructure as well
One way of dealing with this crisis is to pro- as for setting up industrial units. The state does
vide local livelihood options in the hills, along not receive any ‘Green Bonus’ for maintaining its
with the provision of a sustainable physical and forest cover, which provides precious mountain
social ecosystem in the hills to prevent migration. ecosystem services for the rest of the country, and
In this context, the tourism sector offers a huge for balancing the process of infrastructure cre-
potential for economic growth and employment ation and industrialization with conservation of
generation. The other options entail increasing the environment.
connectivity between the villages and towns as Paucity of Funds
well as creating opportunities for self-employ- The undulating terrain, coupled with low popu-
ment among the local population. lation density makes road-building in the state a
A related challenge for the state is to build a highly expensive exercise, especially in the hilly
solid infrastructural base to support industriali- region. The state government also does not have
sation. In order to build this in a sustainable and access to an adequate budget for expanding the
environment-friendly manner, a hilly state must road networks in the villages. The shortage of
balance the requirements of a road–rail–air link funds is also constraining plans to build bus ter-
100
minuses in the cities of Haldwani and Bageshwar, also a rise in consumption as well as production
among others. demand. This, in turn, will boost the growth of the
Strategy for Target 9.1 rest of the economy, promote direct employment
Augmenting the Transport Infrastructure generation for the educated and skilled workers,
and lead to the generation of secondary/indirect
The plan for augmentation of the transport employment in the services sector.40
infrastructure in the state includes the following
measures: Present Status of IT sector
• Rural areas must be connected with cities by The state of Uttarakhand is an ideal location for
a good road transport system for ensuring IT sector. This is because the ambient temperature
their all-round development, and for boosting in the state is suitable for setting up data centres
tourism in the state. The railway network too since 40-50 per cent of the cost in these units goes
needs to be extended as far as the topography into maintaining a suitable temperature. Secondly,
of the region permits. some urban centres in the state such as Dehradun
are already functioning as knowledge and educa-
• At present, the city transport system exists tion hubs and would be ideally suited for supply-
only in Dehradun but it is proposed to expand ing educated and skilled human resources to meet
it to other cities in the state including Harid- the requirement of the IT sector as it develops.
war, Haldwani, Hrishikesh, Roorkee, Kashi-
pur, Rudrapur, Almora and Pithoragarh. The IT sector in Uttarakhand has already
undertaken various initiatives, as detailed below.
• It is recommended to invite experts to explore
different viable options for expanding the rail- • Wi-Fi services would be provided for citizens
ways network beyond the plains. in the state. The pilots for this service have
been undertaken in Nainital and Mussoorie,
• There are proposals for setting up automated in particular, for supporting tourism.
testing tracks for testing drivers in various de-
partments and for setting up automated test- • Common Service Centres (CSCs) have been
ing lanes for computerised examination centres set up in all the 13 districts of the state under
for vehicles. The use of simulators for testing a state-wide rollout of the e-District project, in
drivers as well as the overall strengthening of order to provide government services to the
the transportation system comprise important people electronically. A total of 6950 function-
strategies for enhancing the transport infra- al CSCs have been registered in the state, out
structure in the state over the next 15 years. of which around 3900 are functional. Certifi-
Augmenting the Information Technology Sector cates relating to caste, birth, death, permanent
residence, income, and various types of pen-
Information Technology (IT) and IT-enabled ser- sions, are also available through CSCs.
vices (ITES) can facilitate growth through the re-
duction of transaction costs and the consequent • UIDAI has been implemented in all the 13 dis-
efficient use of resources. It can also play a role tricts in the state. Aadhar cards have been made
by fostering productivity gains or the speedy de- for all those above the age of 18 years (the num-
livery of services. The effective use of IT in pub- ber of cards issued is 72,88,675) and enrolment
lic administration would make it Simple, Moni- for those in the age group of 0-5 years is under
tored, Accountable, Responsive and Transparent progress, with 65 per cent coverage achieved so
(SMART). far as well as for those in the age group of 5-18
years, with 83 per cent coverage achieved in this
The IT industry has a significant impact on de- category. In all, 98 per cent of the total population
velopment and is expected to generate not only has been covered for issuance of Aadhaar cards.
direct employment and huge indirect employ-
ment through inter-sectoral linkages and the gen- • Many government departments have benefit-
eration of demand impulses in the economy but ed extensively from IT initiatives(Figure 2.21).
40. This section relies on Joshi, S. (2009), and on ‘Technology Vision-2020: IT in Services’ by S. Biswas and G. Srikanth, accessed at http://tifac.org.in/
index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=779:technology-vision-2020-it-in-services&catid=121:general&Itemid=1381 on April 10, 2017.
101
Figure 2.21: IT Initiatives in Uttarakhand

The election, employment, and
revenue departments are using The commercial tax department has
IT for registration,etc. started offering online facilities for
e-Registration, e-Payment, e-Return,
e-Refund, e-Forms, e-Trip sheet and
e-Transit pass for dealers.
The existing functional State Wide
Area Network (SWAN) is being used
by the state treasuries, and e-Challan Major Government
has been initiated for making govern- Departments in Uttara-
ment payments online.
khand benefitting from
IT initiatives Water and electricity bills are be-
ing paid online, and bookings are
being made online at the transport
department.
The police department is on track with its
Crime and Criminal Tracking Network
and Systems (CCTNS) project, which The ICDS has set up a ‘Mother and Child
facilitates crime control and the tracking Tracking System’ that benefits children
of criminals. and mothers equally. It helps to monitor
and track the health of both and provides
information about the vaccinations to be
administered timely.
The IT sector has the Vision to use Information manufacturing, including semiconductor design,
and Communication Technology & Electronics as a high-tech manufacturing, electronic components,
vehicle for economic development of Uttarakhand and electronic system design for consumer elec-
with all round inclusive growth to create a vibrant tronic products, telecom products and equipment,
society with high quality of life. The broadly defined and IT systems and hardware. The electronics
goals for the sector are as follows: industry is reported to be the largest and fastest
1. Make the state of Uttarakhand a fully digi- growing manufacturing industry in the world.
tised and networked society where informa- Some specific targets and strategies for the IT sec-
tion flow and access across all sections of the tor are presented in Appendix 2.4.4.
society would be enabled through effective The key stakeholders in the state include not
ICT infrastructure that would propel the eco- only the IT department but also many other de-
nomic growth of the state. partments of the state including the police depart-
2. Given the fairly high literacy rate of 78.82 per ment, industry representatives from associations,
cent (higher than the national average) in the institutes/universities offering higher education
state, the Government aims to reduce unem- and the technical education department and cit-
ployment by encouraging ICT, ITES and elec- izens of the state.
tronics manufacturing units to establish their Challenges for the IT sector
enterprises in Uttarakhand. The IT initiative in Uttarakhand faces the
3. To establish Uttarakhand as the most pre- following challenges:
ferred destination for investment in the Elec- • A major challenge for expanding the IT and
tronics System Design and Manufacturing communication activity is that high-tech ca-
(ESDM) industry. bles/wires (optical fibre lines) laid for con-
There is a need to set up and enhance electron- necting villages can be disrupted easily be-
ics manufacturing units within the state under the cause of the activity for laying cables/pipes,
umbrella of the “Make in India” initiative of the by the National Highways Authority of India
Government of India. This would reduce the cost (NHAI), and for piped gas, among other facil-
of various components that are currently being ities.
procured ex-import. The electronics hardware in- • CSC 2.0 was started in April 2015 by the Gov-
dustry consists of electronic systems design and ernment of India’s telecom department and
102
MEIT. However, 3000 out of around 8000 al Package (CIP) with the provision of fiscal in-
Gram Panchayats, mostly in the hills, still do centives to industrial units, and subsequently the
not have access to 3G and other connectivity. Industrial Development Policy for Hills in 2008
• Five districts in the state have borders with (amended in 2011).
Nepal and China, and are thus located in stra- However, till date, industrial activity has been
tegic zones, yet these places have no connec- concentrated in the plains and has not spread
tivity. throughout the state. The key industries in Ut-
• While Internet protocol version 6 (IBP6) is slat- tarakhand are agro-based industries and food
ed to be used in the state, it is not clear wheth- processing, ICT, floriculture, horticulture, phar-
er and to what extent smart the grid and smart maceuticals and biotechnology, hydropower,
meters will be IPB6-compliant. engineering and allied industries, and fast mov-
ing consumer goods. Many Agri Export Zones
Strategies for the IT sector (AEZ) have already been declared under the AEZ
The following broad strategies can be used to deal scheme of the Central Government, which mainly
with the challenges confronting the IT industry: include the cultivation of litchi, floriculture and
• The disruption in communication due to the horticultural herbs, medicinal plants and basmati
simultaneous laying of pipes and other in- rice. Mega food parks in Haridwar and Udham
frastructure by various departments can be Singh Nagar are expected to generate direct and
tackled by the use of a common duct through indirect employment for approximately 30,000
which all cables run, as well as with co-ordi- and 2,90,000 people, respectively, by 2018. In ad-
nation between various departments to ensure dition, food processing units, cold storage units,
that the activity is suitably planned. and food parks are being planned. The key play-
ers to set up ventures in the engineering and allied
• The Government of India can provide VSAT industries in the state include Tata Motors, and
services to connect the hilly areas in the state. Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited, among others.41
• The power department needs to be apprised Recently, the Uttarakhand government has
regarding the IPB6 compatibility to ensure greatly improved its rank among the states in the
that the issue is addressed. Ease of Doing Business index, moving up from the
Target 9.2 Promote inclusive and sustainable in- 23rd position in 2015 to the 9th position in 2016.
dustrialisation The Department of Industrial Policy and Promo-
Baseline for Uttarakhand tion (DIPP), Ministry of Commerce and Industry,
in partnership with the World Bank, conducted
The industrial sector, comprising manufacturing, an assessment of the implementation of busi-
construction and water, gas and electricity, has a ness reforms by states, which studies the extent
major share in the GDP (at constant prices) of the to which various states have implemented DIPP’s
state. Its share is around 49.14 per cent, according 340-point Business Reform Action Plan (BRAP)
to the 2013-14 provisional estimates, and 48.36 per for States/UTs covering the period July 1, 2015 to
cent, according to the 2014-15 quick estimates (Eco- June 30, 2016.
nomic Survey, 2015-16). Manufacturing is the main
component of the sector, accounting for a share of
around 36-37 per cent of the GSDP. Construction Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises
also accounts for a sizeable share around 8 per cent. The MSME sector plays a crucial role in
The state government is committed to mak- the economic and social development of
ing industry a vehicle for the sustainable devel- the state as this sector is the nursery of
opment of the state. Earlier, the government was entrepreneurship. This sector also has a high po-
providing provided a boost to industry in the tential of providing livelihoods with low capital
state by implementing the Concessional Industri- investment and high utilisation of local resourc-
41. Source: https://www.slideshare.net/IBEFIndia/Uttarakhand-state-report-december-2016, accessed on April 24, Accessed on 24 April 2017.
103
es. Prior to the formation of the state in 2000, just them to become self-employed.
38,500 thousand people derived their livelihood It is estimated that the development objectives
from this sector, which had an investment of of the sector will be met in the next fifteen years, ac-
Rs. 700.29 crore. At present, this investment has cording to the state’s plan including the number of
grown to Rs. 10,960 crore and the sector provides units to be established, the amount of capital to be
employment to around 2.58 lakh people. This sec- invested, and employment generation planned in
tor is thus a major provider of employment in the this sector, as presented in Table 2.10.
state and promotes inclusive industrialisation.
Thus, the state government envisages massive
The Department of MSME in Uttarakhand is expansion in the sector, which would increase
providing livelihoods in the Handloom, Hand- employment successively from the present num-
icraft, Khadi and Village industries sector by ber of 2.58 lakh people to 3.2 lakh people by 2019-
implementing various schemes like the MSME 20, to 4.6 lakh by 2023-24, and finally to a massive
Policy 2015, PMEGP, the Chief Minister Swaro- 8.5 lakh people by the year 2030.
jgar Yojana, and Rural MSME Haat, as well as by
organising various marketing events. This sector
also provides assistance to the local weavers and Large Industries
artisans for participation in national and interna-
tional marketing events/fairs.
The mandate for promoting industrial
Vision 2030 for MSME development in the State of Uttarakhand through
To create a sustainable and equitable system in the the building and managing of world-class in-
MSME sector, which can maximise the utilisation of tegrated infrastructure to attract industries from
resources and widen the areas of operation to make Ut- India and abroad lies with the State Infrastructure
tarakhand’s growth inclusive sustainable and employ- and Industrial Development Corporation of Uttara-
ment-oriented. khand Limited (SIIDCUL), which is thus responsi-
Development Targets for the MSME Sector: ble for developing industrial estates in Uttarakhand.
This organisation also facilitates the setting up of in-
(a) To promote the MSME sector in the entire dustrial units in accordance with the comprehensive
state with a special focus on the hilly regions policy framework of the state. At present, there are
for promoting a self-sustaining economic 1828 industries in the state with a capital investment
model. of Rs. 21,826 crore, and employing 1,68,718 people.
(b) To focus specially on the micro sector, The state government has formulated the
which has a tremendous potential to provide Mega Textile Park Policy 2014 and the Mega In-
employment at the mass level at minimum dustrial and Investment Policy 2015 to attract and
capital investment. facilitate investments in Uttarakhand. The former
(c) To provide a marketing platform to the is valid up to March 2021. It has a state capital
state’s MSMEs, cottage, khadi, handloom and subsidy up to a maximum limit of Rs. 30,00,000
handicraft producers of the state. and an interest subsidy of 7 per cent, along with
(d) To boost entrepreneurship among poten- the provision of 100 per cent VAT concession to
tial businesswomen and offer them financial the textile industries on raw material, packaging,
support through the banking system to enable and finished products. There is also full rebate in
Table 2.10: Sectoral Indicators for Vision 2030 for the MSME Sector
Target to be achieved by
Indicators Current Status
2019-20 2023-24 2029-30
No. of MSME units established 53,000 68,000 94,000 1,70,000
Capital Investment (in Rs. crore) 10,960 14,000 19,400 36,000
No. of Employment generation 2,58,000 3,20,000 4,60,000 8,50,000
104
Table 2.11: Sectoral Indicators for Vision 2030 for the Heavy Industries
Target to be Achieved by
Indicators Current Status
2019-20 2023-24 2029-30
No. of industrial unit established 1828 1998 2618 4510
Capital Investment (in Rs. crore) 21,826 23,155 30,351 53,769
No. of Employment generation 1,68,718 1,84,363 2,48,438 4,44,123
electricity duty for the initial period of 7 years, investors’ facilitation and in promoting Ease
stamp duty on purchase of land for textile units, of Doing Business in the state.
and on CST to textile industries on the sale of fin- (c) To develop country-specific enclaves for for-
ished goods. Further, there is a 75 per cent rebate eign nations including China, Japan, South
in the Mandi tax for textile units. Korea, Thailand, and the US.
The Mega Industrial and Investment Policy (d) To develop newly acquired Integrated Indus-
2015 is valid till March 2020. Under this policy, trial Areas such as Khurpia and Nepa as hubs
land is available at nominal rates with a subsidy for high-potential industries.
of up to 30 per cent, and there is a state capital
subsidy up to a maximum of Rs. 30,00,000, along The anticipated growth of the industrial sector as
with an interest subsidy of 7 per cent. The other envisaged by SIIDCUL, is outlined in Table 2.11.
features of this policy are as follows: 100 per cent The above estimates indicate that the number
rebate on electricity duty for 5 years, 50 per cent of industries in the state is slated to grow from the
rebate on stamp duty, concession in land registra- current Figureure of 1828 to 4510 by 2029-30. This
tion fee, as well as 75 per cent rebate on Mandi tax will enhance employment generation progressive-
and VAT exemption up to 50 per cent. ly from 1.69 lakh at present to 1.84 lakh people by
Vision 2030: To develop world class Industrial 2019-20, 2.48 lakh by 2023-24, and 4.44 lakh people
Estates with state-of-the-art facilities in order to by the year 2029-30. Thus, employment generation
boost investment in the industrial sector, and also from the development of large industries in the state
to promote industrial production and productivi- is expected to be around half of that envisaged for
ty through systematic facilitation and implemen- the MSMEs.
tation of investor-friendly policies. Challenges for Target 9.2
Development Targets for the Sector: Limited Impact of the Special Industrial Package on
Local Employment
(a) To develop sector-specific parks in order to
attract investment in the emerging areas of A study on the impact evaluation of the package
the state’s economy such as textiles, plastics, meant for the special category states of Jammu &
electronics/ESDM, food processing, and solar Kashmir, Uttarakhand, and Himachal Pradesh
energy, thereby generating employment op- shows that almost 50 per cent of the organisations
portunities in these sectors. reported difficulty in finding local employees.
The condition of ensuring at least minimum em-
(b) To upgrade the existing industrial and ancil-
ployment to the bona fide residents in the special
lary infrastructure as per the environmental
category states is often violated by industries.42
norms—SIIDCUL (the Industries Depart-
ment) is working towards upgrading the ex- Strategy for Target 9.2
isting CETPs in the Haridwar and Pantnagar Inclusive industrialisation
Industrial Estates with Zero Liquid Discharge
• The firms may sponsor skill development cen-
Facility under the Modified Industrial Infra-
tres or some students through fellowships in
structure Upgradation Scheme (MIIUS). SIID-
the technical institutes and get them trained
CUL has also been playing a prominent role in
according to their requirement, in order to
42. Study submitted by Stellar Society (Trivenee School of Excellence Research Institute) to the Planning Commission, Accessed at http://planningcom-
mission.nic.in/reports/sereport/ser/ser_pack0511.pdf on April 23, 2017.
105
boost local employment. This necessitates Challenges for Target 9.3

greater interface between industry and skill The Small and Medium Industries (SMEs) are
development institutes. Current and future usually more credit-constrained than other seg-
skill gaps in the state also need to be identified ments of the economy because of the inherent risk
as they should ideally be used as the basis for of lending to SMEs, financial sector policy distor-
developing training initiatives. The industri- tions, and information asymmetries, such as the
al package should thus also include a budget lack of audited financial statements (Malhotra, et
aimed at developing skill levels among the la- a., 2007).
bour force.43
• Providing good quality pre-investment and
post-investment services to investors is im- Strategy for Target 9.3
portant for ensuring the effectiveness of the The fiscal incentives and concessions offered un-
industrialisation initiatives. der the new policy for MSMEs will include: a cap-
Sustainable industrialisation ital subsidy in the form of Investment Promotion
Assistance, interest subsidy, reimbursement of
• The organic sector-based food processing in- VAT, concession on stamp duty, reimbursement
dustries should be a thrust area for promoting of electricity bills, and special state transport sub-
sustainable industrial development practices sidy.
as well as for optimally utilising the natural
resources of the state.
Target 9.5 Enhance scientific research and en-
courage innovation
Target 9.3 Increase access of small-
scale industrial and other enterprises to It is important for any nation aiming for prog-
financial services ress to promote scientific research and harness its
available resources efficiently and in a sustainable
Baseline for Uttarakhand manner. Despite being a young state, Uttarakhand
As discussed in the section above, the MSME sector has not lagged behind others in this respect, and
already has an investment to the tune of Rs. 10,960 has embarked on major research initiatives in two
crore. Usually small units find it difficult to access areas in particular: bio-technology and space ap-
credit and identify lack of access to financial services plication. These two areas together account for a
as one of the key constraints to growth and invest- major share the budget of the state’s Science and
ment (Malhotra, et al., 2007). However, a new indus- Technology Department at present.
trial policy for the MSME sector being implemented
since 2015 makes it easier for these units to access
funds. The policy also promotes inclusive, green Bio-technology
and sustainable growth, as well as manufacturing Baseline for Uttarakhand
activities by linking the provision of incentives to Recognising that bio-technology is a rap-
location in the hilly areas, to non-polluting manu- idly growing field of applied science with applica-
facturing industries falling in the green and orange tion in the entire spectrum of human life, the state
categories, vocational training, and horticulture, set up the Uttarakhand Council for Bio-technolo-
among other things (see Box No. 2.12). gy (UCB) in 2014. In view of the need to preserve its
Vision 2030 for Target 9.3 fragile but unique ecosystems, environment and rich
The vision to would be to substantially improve biodiversity, the state is expected to greatly benefit
the access of small-scale industrial and other en- from in research in biotechnology. The areas which
are likely to be impacted by these applications and
terprises to affordable credit by 2030.
innovations and research comprise diverse fields
such as agriculture, floriculture and horticulture,
medicinal and aromatic plants, the forestry sector,
43. Ibid.
106
Box 2.12: The Uttarakhand Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprise Policy, 2015
This policy aims to promote investment in the MSME sector by providing incentives towards this end. The policy
aims to utilise local resources, to generate employment opportunities and promote self-employment, and to boost
skill development among the youth.
The state has been divided into four categories, viz., A, B, C and D for the provision of incentives and subsidy.
The following activities have been identified under the manufacturing/services sector, which are eligible for fiscal
incentives:
• Non-polluting manufacturing enterprises in the green and orange categories.
• Thrust sector industries/activities as notified under the Special Industrial Package.
• Activities which have been granted the status of industry by the state government, viz. poultry farming
and tourism activities.
• Following activities included in the Special Industrial Package announced for the North-Eastern states:
- Hotel, adventure and vocational sports, rope-way.
- Nursing home with health and medical facilities.
-Vocational Training Institute, viz. Hotel Management, Catering and Food Craft, Entrepreneurship Development
Training, Nursing and Paramedical, Civil Aviation related Training, Fashion Designing and Skill Development
Training.
• Biotechnology.
• Protected agriculture and horticulture, and cold storage activities.
• Petrol–diesel pumping station/gas godown.
soil fertility management, microbial products, tra- kiwi fruit, orchid, guava, and tamarillo, devel-
ditional fermented foods and beverages, vaccine oped through tissue culture in selected villages,
production, animal health including reproduction which would be developed as bio-villages.
and nutrition, aquaculture, and human health and
2. The Council has also prepared a bio-mosquito
welfare including the promotion of balanced nutri-
repellent using herbs found locally in Uttara-
tion, in addition to gene pool conservation and util-
isation, issues related to Intellectual Property Rights khand.
(IPR) and a cleaner environment.44 3. It is providing training to around 100 research-
One of the major concerns of the UCB is to cre- ers/scientists in the Dehradun bioinformatics
ate awareness regarding biotechnology packages laboratory.
for income generation and better health care in both 4. It is imparting training both to PhD as well as
urban and rural areas. It also aims to disseminate lower level students.
the use of biotechnological processes and tools for
5. It has started hydroponic/aquaponic-based
creating new avenues of employment in rural ar-
eas, particularly for women and the weaker sections farming, which involves a technique of growing
of the society. The Council is also slated to impart plants without soil, using mineral nutrient solu-
training and organise demonstrations in various ar- tions in a water solvent.
eas such as wasteland utilisation, vermiculture and 6. The Council’s activities are designed to focus on
vermicomposting, mushroom cultivation, floricul- the development of Navagraha and Nakshatra
ture, biofertiliser use, aqua farming, applications of Vatikas in order to protect the bio-diversity of
medicinal and aromatic plants including cultivation the state.
of natural dye plants, and bioenergy, for improving
the socio-economic status and standard of living of 7. The Council is conducting research to examine
people in the state. The initiatives that have already water quality and plans to build a laboratory for
been taken up by the Council are detailed below. this purpose at the state level.
1. In 2016-17, the Council distributed plants for
44. http://ucb.uk.gov.in/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/Booklet.pdf and http://ucb.uk.gov.in/ accessed on September 21, 2017.
107
Vision for bio-technology sector Strategy for bio-technology sector

The vision for the UCB is to: Following are the priority areas for the way forward
Deploy, use, utilise and leverage biotechnology in the bio-technology sector:
as an effective tool for catalysing the acceler- • Accelerating efforts for the establishment of
ated economic growth of Uttarakhand by sub- more biotech parks/centres.
stantially harnessing and converting its bio- • Establishment of advanced centres for various
wealth into economic wealth. activities in the spheres of molecular diagnos-
The main objectives of the UCB are to: tics, bioprospecting-cum-analytical, nano-bio-
technology, bioinformatics, tissue culture,
• Upgrade and provide infrastructural support
nano-toxicity, fingerprinting, structural and mo-
for its own R&D and to other institutions to gen-
lecular biology, biomedical and bioengineering,
erate skilled human resources in biotechnology
in addition to the conduction of these activities
and nano-biotechnology.
at the Centre of Excellence in Mountain Biology
• Intensify R&D work in the potential areas of (CEMB) at Haldi.
biotechnology and its interventions, including
in agriculture, horticulture, animal husbandry, The CEMB is expected to provide much-needed
and human healthcare. biotechnology and nano-technology based R&D
support and leadership, which is highly relevant
• Map the rich biodiversity of the state, including for Uttarakhand and its mountainous region, and
landraces and lesser known crops, and create to develop methods for the commercial utilisation,
an exhaustive/extensive database to facilitate conservation, and protection of rich bio-resources.
ex-situ and in-situ conservation, and scientific In this context, the Centre plans to recruit scientists,
management, and to prevent the reckless ex- staff, and PhD scholars for planned operations at its
ploitation of the state’s natural resources. eight laboratories in the state.
• Conserve and commercially exploit the bio-re- Following are some of the other strategies that need
sources of the state for sustainable development to be adopted for promoting growth of the biotech-
and economic upliftment. nology sector in Uttarakhand:
• Promote agro and organic farming and encour- • Establishing Model Bio-villages (utilising clean
age the cultivation (conservation) of medicinal and green technologies), including at least one
and aromatic plants/herbs through an intensive in each district.
training programme.
• Establishing Knowledge Cities, with provisions
• Promote pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals and for application of cutting edge technologies in
such other industries based on medicinal and all walks of human life. This would entail the
aromatic plants. setting up of state-of-the-art biotechnology lab-
• Attract entrepreneurs for setting up biotech- oratories/centres for Environmental Biotechnol-
nology-based industries in the state either in an ogy and Bioremediation, Industrial Biotech and
Industrial Estate mode or dispersed in smaller Bio-processing Engineering, Bioinformatics and
pockets throughout the state. Data Processing, Nano-biosciences, and Conser-
• Sensitise people and promote “clean and green” vation of Biodiversity
technologies for livelihood and environmental
protection.
Space Application
• Set up biotechnology park(s) and incubation
centres in the state. Baseline for Space Application
Challenges for bio-technology sector The Uttarakhand Space Application Centre (USAC)
is the nodal agency in Uttarakhand state for under-
The biotechnology sector is a fledgling sector in taking space-technology related activities and has
Uttarakhand, and the challenges it faces in ensur- the mandate to employ space technology for the
ing the implementation of various plans and pro- benefit of the state and its people. It was constituted
grammes will come to the fore in a few years’ time. as an autonomous organisation in 2005, under the
Department of Science and Technology, Govern-
ment of Uttarakhand. The prime objective of USAC
108
is to explore and deploy geospatial technology for sensing and satellite communications.
the development of the state.45 • Carry out surveys for the monitoring and as-
The main areas of space application include are nat- sessment of the entire gamut of natural resourc-
ural resource management, water resource manage- es sectors using space technology.
ment, glacier studies, environmental monitoring, • Carry out spatial temporal surveys to moni-
land use and urban planning, disaster mitigation, tor changing land use patterns, environmental
web-based school information systems, and health changes, irrigation systems, forest resource and
information systems, among others. Some of the crop disease surveillance using space technology.
notable programmes that USAC has been imple-
• Develop an efficient data acquisition and re-
menting on an ongoing basis are the State Natural
trieval system and to act as a repository of data
Resource Management System (SNRMS), Forecast-
on various natural resources of the state.
ing Agriculture using Space, the Agrometeorol-
ogy and Land-based Observations (FASAL) pro- Vision for Space Application
gramme, Coordinated Programme on Horticulture The Vision for the Uttarakhand Space Application
Assessment and Management using geoinformatics Centre is to expand its research activities in various
(CHAMAN), and the Development of national for- areas such as agriculture forecasting, water quality
est fire danger rating, among others. The existence mapping, GIS-based monitoring for cities, mapping
Table 2.12: Potential Areas of Space Applications

SDGs Present Status
Forecasting agriculture statistics with Land-based and Meteorological Data
2 Zero Hunger
(FASAL)
Clean Water and
6 Water quality mapping in 13 districts of Uttarakhand
Sanitation
Industry, Innovation and
9 GIS-based city information system for Kotdwara city (e-Kotdwara)
Infrastructure
Training and capacity programme at the school level under the theme Science of
Sustainable Cities and
11 Survival (SOS) at the district level, initially for the districts of Chamoli and
Communities
Pithoragarh
1) Mapping and monitoring snow and glaciers in the Alakhnanda, Bhagirathi and
Yamuna basins
13 Climate Action
2) Automatic snow and grain size mapping of the
Dundi glacier using hyperspectral remote sensing
Assessment of alpine meadows for medicinal and aromatic plants, NTFPs/RET
and development of web-based information system, [this would also address
15 Life on Land SDGs 12 and 13]
Detailed vegetation resource maps (species level) and change studies at the district
level [this would also address SDGs 12 and 13]
of diverse areas of space application implies that and monitoring of snow/glaciers, and assessment
this sector can contribute to many SDGs. Table 2.13 of alpine meadows, over the years till 2030. The de-
contains a matrix highlighting the SDGs wherein tailed targets for the interim timelines of 2020 and
space application can contribute, including to the 2024, and the final target for 2030 are presented in
attainment of SDG 9, under which it is discussed. Appendix 2.4.5, and some appropriate indicators
The major objectives of the Uttarakhand Space Ap- under overall Target 9.5 are shown in Appendix
plication Centre are to: 2.4.2.
• Undertake, promote, guide, coordinate and aid
research and development in the field of remote
45. http://www.u-sac.in/, Accessed on September 21, 2017.
109
Appendix 2.1.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 1: No Poverty
Targets for SDG 1 Vision 2030 for Targets
Extreme poverty will be eliminated by reducing the number

1.1 By 2030, eradicate extreme poverty for all people everywhere, cur- of deprived people to zero by 2030 with the twin support of
rently measured as people living on less than $1.25 a day. livelihood opportunities and social protection. No one in the
state will remain homeless by 2030.
1.2 By 2030, reduce at least by half the proportion of men, women and Reduce the proportion of people below the state poverty line
children of all ages living in poverty in all its dimensions, according to to 5.63 per cent, by 2030.
national definitions.
1.3 Implement nationally appropriate social protection systems and

Extend social protection with the help of pension and other
measures for all, including floors, and by 2030, achieve substantial
schemes to all poor and vulnerable people by 2030.
coverage of the poor and the vulnerable.
1.4 By 2030, ensure that all men and women, in particular the poor
and the vulnerable, have equal rights to economic resources, as well Achieve full financial inclusion by covering all the remaining
as access to basic services, ownership and control over land and other households in the state under the Jan Dhan Yojana till the
forms of property, inheritance, natural resources, appropriate new year 2030.
technology and financial services, including microfinance.
1.5 By 2030, build the resilience of the poor and those in vulnerable sit-
Minimise the loss of lives and property of people due to natu-
uations and reduce their exposure and vulnerability to climate-related
ral disasters and to improve their resilience while coping with
extreme events and other economic, social and environmental shocks
this vulnerability.
and disasters.
Appendix 2.1.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 1: No Poverty
Targets/Indicators for SDG 1 Baseline 2016–17 Vision 2030
Target 1.1: By 2030, eradicate extreme poverty for all people everywhere,
currently measured as people living on an income of less than $1.25 a day.
429888 0
1.1a Households (No.) that are deprived (SECC) (lakhs) rural
1.1b Population who are deprived (SECC) (lakhs) urban NA NA
1.1c No. of homeless households
1.1d Population below US $1.25 per day (PPP value) (%) 21,930 0
1.1e Per capita state domestic product (in Rs.) (at 2011-12 prices)
140405 217562
Target 1.2: By 2030, reduce at least by half the proportion of men, women
and children of all ages living in poverty in all its dimensions according to
national definitions.
Contd...
110
Appendix 2.1.2 Contd...
Targets/Indicators for SDG 1 Baseline 2016–17 Vision 2030

11.26
1.2a Population below state poverty line (%) 11.6
1.2b Population below state poverty line (lakhs)
1.2c No. of people (lakh) below poverty line (rural) 8.25 Reduce to at least 5.63%
1.2d % of people poverty line (rural) 11.62
1.2e No. of people (lakh) below poverty line (urban)
1.2.1f % of people poverty line (urban) 3.35
10.48
Target 1.3: Implement nationally appropriate social protection systems and

measures for all, including floors, and by2030, achieve substantialcoverage
of the poor and the vulnerable.
1.3b 1 Beneficiaries (no.) under Old age 4,25,962 5,55,000

pension scheme
1.3b 2 Beneficiaries (no.) under Widow 1,39,381 1,80,000

pension scheme
1.3b 3 Beneficiaries (no.) under Disability pension scheme 64,921 80,000
1.3b 4 Beneficiaries (no.) under Farmer

pension scheme 19,469 25,000
Target 1.4: By 2030, ensure that all men and women, in particular the poor
and the vulnerable, have equal rights to economic resources, as well as
access to basic services, ownership and control over land and other forms
of property inheritance, natural resources, appropriate new technology and
financial services, including microfinance.
Financial Services: Cover all unreached

1.4a Number of Jan Dhan Yojana accounts opened till February 2017 21,70,963 households
Target 1.5: By 2030, build the resilience of the poor and those invulnerable
situations and reduce their exposure and vulnerability to climate-related
extreme events and other economic, social and environmental shocks and
disasters
1.5a Houses fully damaged due to natural disaster (to be reconstructed, in

806 100
number)
1.5b Houses partially damaged due to natural disaster (to be reconstructed, in
2440 200
number)
1.5c Loss of lives from disasters (number) 126 0
1.5d Injuries due to natural disaster
100 0
(in number)
1.5e Loss of animals (big) due to natural disaster (in number) 394 50
1.5f Loss of animals (small) due to natural disaster (in number) 1070 100
1.5j Disaster warnings through SMS (% villages) Nil 100% by 2025
111
Appendix 2.1.3
Schemes for SDG1: No Poverty
Targets Centrally Sponsored Schemes/State Sector Direct Intervention Schemes
Target 1.1 Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Schemes

(MGNREGA)
Target 1.2 and 1.3 National Rural Livelihood Mission (NRLM) Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima
Yojana
National Urban Livelihood Mission (NULM)
Atal Pension Yojana
Jeevika Avsar Protsahan Yojana
(Living Opportunity Incentive
Scheme (for SCs and STs)
Target 1.4 Externally aided programmes Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana
Integrated Livelihood Support Programme (IFAD) Multi-sectoral Development Pro-
gramme for Minorities
Japan International Cooperation Agency–(JICA—UVSPP)
Self-employment scheme in
tourism
State sector Old Age Pension

Social Assistance Programme of the Social Welfare department Widow Pension
Disability Pension
Farmers’ Pension
Target 1.5 The programmes run at the Disaster Mitigation and Management Centre include mock exercises, search
and rescue programmes, earthquake-resistant building construction programme for masons and engineers,
awareness programmes for schools, and an IRS training programme.
Appendix 2.2.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 2: Zero Hunger
Improve access to foodgrains by increasing the food collection

2.1 By 2030, end hunger and ensure access by all people, in partic- from the present 101 million tonnes to 150 million tonnes per
ular the poor and people in vulnerable situations, including infants, year, by 2030, and by reaching foodgrains effectively to remote
to safe, nutritious and sufficient food all year round. hilly regions with better infrastructure. The per hectare produc-
tion of foodgrain is expected to increase from the baseline level
of 18,43,785 mt to 20,76,303 mt.
(i) Reduce the number of malnourished and severely malnour-

2.2 By 2030, end all forms of malnutrition, including achieving by ished children successively for the three timelines till 2029–30
2025 the internationally agreed targets on stunting and wasting and (ii) reduce the incidence of anaemia among women of
in children under five years of age, and address the nutritional reproductive age from the baseline level of around 45 per cent to
needs of adolescent girls, pregnant and lactating women, and older 15 per cent by 2029–30 and that for children aged 6–59 months
persons. old from a baseline level of around 60per cent to 20 per cent by
2029–30.
2.3 By 2030, double the agricultural productivity and the incomes

of small-scale food producers, particularly women, indigenous Double agricultural productivity and farmers’ income in the
peoples, family farmers, pastoralists and fishers, including through agriculture and allied sectors by 2030 through the adoption of an
secure and equal access to land, other productive resources and integrated approach to agriculture, efficient nutrient manage-
inputs, knowledge, financial services, markets, and opportunities ment and diversification.
for value addition and non-farm employment
Contd...
112
2.4 By 2030, ensure sustainable food production systems and imple-

ment resilient agricultural practices that increase productivity and Promote sustainable development by expanding irrigation,
production; that help maintain ecosystems; that strengthen capacity substantially increasing the share of land under organic farming,
for adaptation to climate change, extreme weather, drought, flood- and enhancing the use of bio-fertilisers, among other measures,
ing and other disasters; and that progressively improve land and by 2030.
soil quality
2.5 By 2020, maintain genetic diversity of seeds, cultivated plants,

farmed and domesticated animals and their related wild species,
including through soundly managed and diversified seed and plant
Attainment of the long-term objective of a 15 per cent annual
banks at the national, regional and international levels, and ensure
average growth rate by the seed bank at USTDC.
access to and fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from the
utilisation of genetic resources and associated traditional knowl-
edge as internationally agreed upon.
Appendix 2.2.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 2: Zero Hunger
Baseline Vision
Targets/indicators for SDG 2
2016–17 2030
Target 2.1
By 2030, end hunger and ensure access by all people, in particular the poor and people in
vulnerable situations, including infants, to safe, nutritious and sufficient food all year
round
2.1b Per hectare foodgrain production (mt) 18,43,785 20,76,303*

2.1c Percentage share of Antyodaya and BPL households in the total households (BPL replaced by
priority households) 24% 0
Target 2.2
By 2030, end all forms of malnutrition, including achieving, by 2025,the internationally agreed
targets on stunting and wasting in children under 5 years of age, and addressing the nutritional
needs of adolescent girls, pregnant and lactating women, and older persons
2.2a (i) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%) 26.60 <5
2.2a (Ii) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Urban) 25.60 <5
2.2a (iii) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Rural) 27.10 <5
2.2b (i) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) 33.50 <5
2.2b (ii) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Urban) 32.50 <5
2.2b (iii) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Rural) 34.00 <5
2.2c (i) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) 19.50 <5
2.2c (ii) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Urban) 18.60 <5
2.2c (iii) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Rural) 19.90 <5
2.2d (i) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age (15–49 years) (%) 45.20 <10
2.2d (ii) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age 15–49 years) (%) (U) 43.40 <10
2.2d (iii) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age (15–49 years) (%)(R) 46.20 <10
2.2e (i) Prevalence of anaemia among children (6-59 months) (%)
59.80 <5
Contd...
113
Target 2.3
By 2030, double the agricultural productivity and incomes of small-scale food producers,
in particular women, indigenous peoples, family farmers, pastoralists and fishers, including
through secure and equal access to land, other productive resources and inputs, knowledge,
financial services, markets and opportunities for value addition and non-farm employment
2.3aTargeted seed distribution rice (quintal) 18,464 34,490

2.3b Targeted seed distribution wheat (quintal) 1,20,337 1,22,000
2.3c Crop insured (farmers covered) 3,75,000 5,50,000
2.3d Crop insured (area covered) (hectare) 85,790 2,57,909
2.3e Land productivity for fruits (metric tonnes per hectare) 3.83 5.0
2.3f Land productivity for vegetables (metric tonnes per hectare) 9.13 10.0
2.3g Land productivity for potato (metric tonnes per hectare) 16.14 16.88
2.3h Land productivity for spices (metric tonnes per hectare) 6.38 8.4
2.3i Area under flower production (hectare) 1400 5000
2.3j Productivity(per hectare production of cereals ) 21.69 24.02

2.3k Productivity(per hectare production of pulses) 10.48 12.93
2.3l Productivity(per hectare production of millets) 16.17 17.39
Target 2.4
By 2030, ensure sustainable food production systems and implement resilient agricultural
practices that increase productivity and production; that help maintain the ecosystem; that
strengthen the capacity for adaptation to climate change, extreme weather, drought,
flooding and other disasters, and that progressively improve land and soil quality
2.4a Agricultural land (foodgrain) at the present level (’000 hectare) 900.197 911.49
2.4b Agriculture productivity (quintal per hectare) 20.48 22.78

2.4c Organic agriculture productivity (quintal per hectare) 16.03 20.0
2.4d Bio-fertilisers in agricultural production (kg/Ha) 0.3 0.6
2.4e Area under organic certification (thousand hectares) 35.0** 250
2.4f Land under horticulture (lakh hectare) 3.194 4.95
2.4g Soil testing status (per 1000 hectare) 79,678 8,82,284

2.4h Soil treatment (per 1000 hectare) 63.3 63.3
2.4i Number of soil cards distributed 4,59,917 59,32,225
2.4j Number of farmers adopting the soil test practice 4,59,917 59,32,225
Target 2.5
By 2020, maintain the genetic diversity of seeds, cultivated plants, and farmed and domesticated
animals and their related wild species, including through soundly managed and diversified seed
and plant banks at the national, regional and international levels, and ensure access to and fair
and equitable sharing of benefits arising from the
utilization of genetic resources and associated traditional knowledge, as internationally agreed
Seed bank
2.5a Establish a DNA bank for a variety of seeds Uttarakhand
2.5b Establish a DNA bank for a variety of animals Seeds and Terai
2.5c Establish a DNA bank for a variety of animal species Development
Corporation
(USTDC) has a
long-term objective
of achieving a 15 per
cent annual average
growth rate
*The figure is for 2014–15. This is slated to increase to 50,000hectares by 2015–16 and to 75,000hectares by 2015–16.
**The value is for 2014-15, as per State Government and this area is slated to increase successively to 50 thousand hectares in 2015-16 and to 75 thousand hectares by
2016-17.
114
Appendix 2.2.3
Schemes for Targets under SDG 2: Zero Hunger
Centrally Sponsored Schemes/

Direct Intervention Schemes
State Sector
1. Rainfed Area Development (RAD)

1. National Mission for Sustainable
2. Soil Health Management
Targets 2.1 Agriculture (NMSA)
--2.1 Soil Health Card
and 2.2
--2.2 Soil Health Component
--2.3 Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana
1. NFSM-Rice
2. National Food Security Mission 2. NFSM-Wheat
(NFSM) 3. NFSM-Coarse Cereals
4. NFSM-Pulses
5. NFSM-Sugarcane
3. National Mission on Oilseeds
Mini mission 1st on oilseeds
and Oilpalm
Target 2.4 National Mission on Agriculture 1. Sub-mission on agriculture extension
Extension and Technology 2. Sub-mission on seed and planting (material)
3. Sub-mission on agriculture mechanisation
1.Accelerated Irrigation Benefit Programme

2.PMKSY-‘Har Khet ko Pani’—creation of new water sources
through minor irrigation
Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchai
3.PMKSY-per drop more crop—promoting efficient water conveyance
Yojana (PMKSY)
and precision water application techniques
4.PMKSY watershed development—effective management of runoff
water and improved soil and moisture conservation activities
1.Integrated farming system based multipurpose water harvesting

projects
2.Promotion of organic farming and soil health management
3.Promotion of farm mechanisation
Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojana 4. Integrated project of agriculture and soil conservation and natural
Target 2.5
(RKVY) resource management
5.Protection of agricultural land and crops from wild animals in
Uttarakhand
6. Krishak Mahotsav in the rabi and kharif seasons for creating
awareness and extension purpose
115
Appendix 2.3.1
Vision for Targets Under SDG 8: Decent Work and Economic Growth
Target 8.1. Sustain per capita economic growth in accordance

Maintain a growth rate of above 5.9 per cent per. annum. The
with national circumstances and, in particular, at least 7 percent
share of consumption expenditure of the bottom quintile in the
gross domestic product growth per annum in the least developed
total consumption will be enhanced to above 9.7 per cent.
countries.
Increase the growth rate of the agriculture and allied sectors to

Target 8.2. Achieve higher levels of economic productivity
above 1.4 per cent per. annum. The construction sector needs to
through diversification, technological upgrading and innovation,
maintain 7.7 percent growth rate while the manufacturing sector
including through a focus on high-value-added and labour-inten-
is expected to achieve a growth rate of more than 7.3 per cent by
sive sectors.
2030.
Target 8.3. Promote development-oriented policies that support The share of the workforce in non-agriculture would be raised
productive activities, decent job creation, entrepreneurship, above the baseline value of 56 per cent, and that the shares of reg-
creativity and innovation, and encourage the formalization and ular and formal employment would increase by 2030. The number
growth of micro-, small- and medium-sized enterprises, including of MSME units and employment in MSME would increase to
through access to financial services. 1,70,000 and 8,50,000, respectively, by 2030.
Unemployment and under-employment rates would be reduced

Target 8.5. By 2030, achieve full and productive employment and to below 4.2 per cent and 5 per cent, respectively, by 2030. The
decent work for all women and men, including for young people women’s work participation rate is slated to increase beyond the
and persons with disabilities, and equal pay for work of equal baseline value of 26.8 per cent and the share of women workers in
value. non-farm activities would increase beyond the baseline value of
18.5 per cent by 2030.
Youth unemployment and under-employment rates would be

reduced from the baseline levels of 14.3 per cent and 7 per cent, re-
spectively, by 2030, and the share of youth not currently engaged
Target 8.6. By 2020, substantially reduce the proportion of youth
in education, training or employment would be brought down
not in employment, education or training.
from the baseline level of 24 per cent by 2020. The number of
youth trained in vocational trades by the Youth Welfare Depart-
ment would increase to 5600 by 2030.
Target 8.7. Take immediate and effective measures to secure the

prohibition and elimination of the worst forms of child labour, The already negligible incidence of child labour in the state will be
eradicate forced labour and, by 2025, end child labour in all its completely eliminated by 2030.
forms, including the recruitment and use of child soldiers.
Target 8.8. Protect labour rights and promote safe and secure
working environments for all workers, including migrant
workers, in particular women migrants, and those in precarious
employment.
To develop Uttarakhand as a comprehensive, world class tourism

Target 8.9. By 2030, devise and implement policies to promote destination by realising the untapped potential of sustainable
sustainable tourism that creates jobs and promotes local culture tourism, through the design of innovative tourism products that
and products. build on the inherent strengths of the state as a natural destination
catering to all categories of tourists.
Target 8.10. Strengthen the capacity of domestic financial institu-

tions to encourage and expand access to banking, insurance and
financial services for all.
116
Appendix 2.3.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 8: Decent Work and Economic Growth
Targets/Indicators Baseline Vision 2030
Target 8.1
173444 Rs cr (2017-18 advance
8.1a GSDP at 2011-12 prices (Rs crore) 367607 Rs cr
estimate)
8.1b: Per capita GDP growth (%) 7.1% annual average (2012-18) >7.1%
8.1c: Share of bottom quintile consumption in total consumption

9.7% in 2011-12 >9.7%
(%)
Target 8.2
1.4% annual average (2011-12 to

8.2a: Growth of the agricultural sector (%) >1.4%
2017-18)
8.2b: Growth of construction sector (%) Maintain the growth rate
2017-18)

8.2c: Growth of manufacturing sector (%) >7.3%
2017-18)
8.2d: Labour productivity in agriculture sector Rs. 93,439 (2011-12) > Rs. 93,439
8.2e: Labour productivity in non-agriculture sector Rs. 359,542 (2011-12) >Rs. 93,439
8.2f: Labour productivity in construction sector Rs. 198,343 > Rs. 198,343
Maintain
8.2g: Labour productivity in manufacturing sector Rs. 1,310,968
the productivity
Target 8.3
8.3a: Share (%) of workforce in non-agriculture 56% in 2011-12 >56%
8.3b: Share (%) of regular employment 19.9% in 2011-12 >19.9%
8.3c: Share (%) of formal employment 10.5% in 2011-12 >10.5%
8.3d: Share (%) of Regular Workers in (Public/Government Sector) 44.6% (2011-12)
8.3e: MSME (numbers) 53 thousand (2016-17)
8.3f: MSME (employment) 2.5 lakhs (2016-17)
Target 8.5
8.5a: Unemployment (15-59 years) (%) \ 4.2% in 2011-12 <4.2%
8.5b: Under-employment rate (15-59 years) (%) 5.0% in 2011-12 <5%
8.5c: Share (%) of women employment (15-59 years) in total 26.8% in 2011-12 >26.8%
8.5d: Share (%) of women workers (15-59 years) in non-farm 18.5 % in 2011-12 >18.5%
8.5 e: Share(%) of women workers in regular work (UPS) 12.8% in 2011-12 >12.8%
Target 8.6
8.6a: Youth unemployment (15-29 years) rate (%) 14.3% in 2011-12 <14.3%
Contd...
117
8.6b: Unemployment per cent for high educated youth (secondary

17.2% in 2011-12 <17.2 %
and above)
8.6c: Youth (15-29 years) underemployment rate (%) 7.0 % in 2011-12 <7%
8.6d: Share (%) of youth (15-29 years) not in education, training or

24% in 2011-12 <24%
employment.
8.6e: Number of youth trained in vocational trades (Youth Welfare 429 in

5600
and PRD Department) 2015-16
8.6f: Average daily earnings male (regular work) Rs 453/- in 2011-12 > Rs. 453/-
8.6g: Average daily earnings female(regular work) Rs 420/- in 2011-12 > Rs. 420/-
Target 8.7
8.7a: Incidence of child labour (%) 1.0% nil
Target 8.9
8.9a1: Tourist arrivals (lakh) in 2016 317.77
8.9a2: Tourist arrivals (domestic) (lakh) 316.69 3 times
8.9a3: Tourist arrivals (foreign) (lakh) 1.13 3 times
8.9b1: Increase in tourists to lesser known unexplored destinations 19% 33%
8.9b2: Religious tourist destinations (in % of existing tourist desti-

70 60
nations)
8.9 b3: Accommodation (Calculated on the basis of 65 per cent

154851 406575
occupancy)
8.9b4: Registration of hotels (under TT) (in % of existing hotels) 875 Nos. 100%
8.9b5: Registration of TA/TOs** (under TT) (in percentage of

172 Nos. 100%
existing hotels)
8.9c1: Accreditation (under SRT norms) for hotels (in percentage

0 25
of total number of hotels)
8.9c2: Accreditation (under SRT norms) for TA/TOs (in percent-

0 25
age of total number of hotels)
8.9c3: Accreditation (under SRT norms) for dhabas, eateries and

0 25
other tourism units (in percentage of total number of hotels)
8.9d1: Recognition of prior learners and other capacity develop-

ment measures for mountain and destination guides (Paryatan
0 20000
Mitra), bird watching guides, dhaba owners, porters, cooks,
waiters, drivers, etc.
8.9d2: Registration of new entrants for mountain and destination

guides (Paryatan Mitra), bird watching guides dhaba owners, 330 10000
porters, cooks, waiters, drivers, etc.
8.9d3: Registration of existing homestays (%) NA 100
8.9d4: Development of new homestays (no.) 256 5000
8.9e: No. of Gram Panchayats to be developed for rural tourism 73 500
Contd...
118
8.9f: Development of 13 new destinations in 13 districts 0 13
8.9g: Tourism development authority/destination management

2 25
committees
8.9h1: Infrastructure--Toilet complexes only (no. of seats) 192(1949) 445(3406)
8.9h2: Infrastructure-- Wayside amenities complexes 0 25
8.9h3: Infrastructure--Parking 4 50
8.9h4: Infrastructure—Solid and liquid waste management in

0 50
Tourist destination
8.9i: Development of trekking/mountaineering routes /mountain
32 200
trail biking or MTB) routes (new)
8.9j: Safety and security—Tourist tracking (% of total tourists) 0 100

Notes: ** TA is Travel Agent and TO stands for Tour Operator. All values for Target 8.9 from 8.9b1 onwards refer to the year 2019-20.
Appendix 2.3.3
Schemes for SDG 8: Decent Work and Economic Growth
Centrally Sponsored Schemes/state sector/Direct Intervention
Targets
Schemes
Target 8.1: Sustain per capita economic growth in accordance National Service Scheme (NSS)/ VCSG Self Employment
with national circumstances and, in particular, at least 7 per cent Scheme in Tourism/ National Rural Employment Guarantee
gross domestic product growth per annum in the least developed Schemes(MGNREGA)/National Rural &Urban Livelihood Mis-
countries sion
Skill Development Mission/ Jeevika Protsahan Yojana/National

Target 8.2: Achieve higher levels of economic productivity Mission on Sustainable Agriculture/Farmer Information Centre at
through diversification, technological upgrading and innovation, Block Level and Input stores at Nyay Panchayat Level/Promotion
including through a focus on high-value-added and labour-inten- of organic farming through UOCB/National Mission on Agricul-
sive sectors ture Extension and Technology/ National Horticulture Mission/
Organic Finger Millet production programmes
Target 8.3: Promote development-oriented policies that support

productive activities, decent job creation, entrepreneurship, Social Security for Unorganised Workers including Rashtriya
creativity and innovation, and encourage the formalisation and Swasthya Bima Yojana/ Self Helps Schemes/National Rural Em-
growth of micro-, small- and medium-sized enterprises, including ployment Guarantee Schemes(MGNREGA)
through access to financial services
Target 8.4: Improve progressively, through 2030, global resource

efficiency in consumption and production and endeavour to
decouple economic growth from environmental degradation, in
Shilpy Gram Yojana/ Self Help Group Scheme
accordance with the 10-year framework of programmes on sus-
tainable consumption and production, with developed countries
taking the lead
Target 8.5: By 2030, achieve full and productive employment and Integrated Industrial Development Policy for Hills/ Mahila Dairy
decent work for all women and men, including for young people Vikas/National Rural Employment Guarantee Schemes(MGNRE-
and persons with disabilities, and equal pay for work of equal GA)/National Rural &Urban Livelihood Mission/Mukhya Mantri
value Mahila Satat Ajeevika Yojana
Self Employment Schemes for Minorities/ Self Employment

Scheme In Tourism/Mukhya Mantri Shilp Vikas Yojana/Sup-
port from EDI (Entrepreneurship Dev. Institute)/ Mobile Career
Target 8.6: By 2020, substantially reduce the proportion of youth Consulting Unit.
not in employment, education or training
National Integration Programme, Youth Exchange Programme,
Adventure Programme, Career Guidance programme conducted
by Youth Welfare and PRD Department.
Contd...
119
Target 8.7:Take immediate and effective measures to secure the

prohibition and elimination of the worst forms of child labour, Kaushal Vridhi Yojana/ Establishment of Child Labour Care
eradicate forced labour and, by 2025, end child labour in all its Centre
forms, including the recruitment and use of child soldiers
Target 8.8: Protect labour rights and promote safe and secure
working environments for all workers, including migrant
Mobile Career Consulting Unit
workers, in particular women migrants, and those in precarious
employment
VCSG Self Employment Scheme in Tourism
Target 8.9: By 2030, devise and implement policies to promote
sustainable tourism that creates jobs and promotes local culture Pt. Deendayal Upadhyay Samekit Gramin Paryatan Vikas Yojana.
and products
Home Stay Registration Scheme.
Target 8.10: Strengthen the capacity of domestic financial institu-

tions to encourage and expand access to banking, insurance and -
financial services for all
Appendix 2.4.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 9: Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure

Target 9.1 The vision is to provide a safe, reliable and sustainable
Target 9.1 Develop quality, reliable, sustainable and resilient road and rail transportation system for all citizens of the state. The
infrastructure, including regional and trans-border infrastructure, transport infrastructure must be made resilient for this purpose
to support economic development and human well-being, with a and also be modernised. Loss of life due to road accidents and
focus on affordable and equitable access for all pollution from vehicles are to be minimised. By 2030, all villages
and uncovered areas along state highways will have mobile con-
nectivity and all Gram Panchayats will be connected by Internet.
The vision is to create a sustainable and equitable system in the

Target 9.2 Promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization
MSME sector, which can maximise the utilisation of resources and
and, by 2030, significantly raise industry’s share of employment
widen the areas of operation to make Uttarakhand’s growth inclu-
and gross domestic product, in line with national circumstances,
sive, sustainable, and employment-oriented. The large industries
and double its share in least developed countries
sector is also expected to boost employment generation.
Target 9.3 Increase the access of small-scale industrial and other

enterprises, in particular in developing countries, to financial ser- Substantially improve the access of small-scale industrial and
vices, including affordable credit, and their integration into value other enterprises to affordable credit by 2030.
chains and markets
Target 9.4 By 2030, upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries

to make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency
and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound technol-
ogies and industrial processes, with all countries taking action in
accordance with their respective capabilities
Deploy, use, utilise and leverage biotechnology as an effective tool

Target 9.5 Enhance scientific research, upgrade the technological for catalysing the accelerated economic growth of Uttarakhand
capabilities of industrial sectors in all countries, in particular by substantially harnessing and converting its bio-wealth into
developing countries, including, by 2030, encouraging innovation economic wealth. Research activities by Uttarakhand Space Appli-
and substantially increasing the number of research and devel- cation Centre is to expand in areas such as agriculture forecasting,
opment workers per 1 million people and public and private water quality mapping, GIS-based monitoring for cities, mapping
research and development spending and monitoring of snow/glaciers, and assessment of alpine mead-
ows, over the years till 2030
120
Appendix 2.4.2
Targets and indicators for SDG 9: Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
Target 9.1
Baseline Vision
Develop quality, reliable, sustainable and resilient infrastructure, including
regional and trans border infrastructure, to support economic development and 2016-17 2030
human well-being, with a focus on affordable and equitable access for all
9.1a Road length per lakh population (km) 322.93 461.29.
9.1b Access to all-weather roads (% villages) 67.665 100
9.1c Telephone connections by (incl WLL) BSNL only 168630
100% by 2024 and by
9.1d Mobile connectivity in villages (%) 55 2030, uncovered areas
along state highways
9.1e Internet connectivity to all Gram Panchayats (% of villages) 10 100
Target 9.2
Promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and, by 2030, significantly
raise industry’s share of employment and gross domestic product, in line with
national circumstances, and double its share in least developed countries
9.2a Industry share in GSDP (%) 48.36
9.2c Employment generation in the MSME sector (number) 258000 850000
9.2d Employment generation in large industry (number)** 168718 444123
9.3e Number of MSMEs 53000 170000

9.3f Capital investment in MSMEs (Rs crore) 10960 36000
9.3g Number of heavy industries** 1828 4510
9.3h Capital investment in large industries (Rs cr)** 21826 53769
Target 9.3
Increase the access of small-scale industrial and other enterprises, in particular
in developing countries, to financial services, including affordable credit, and
their integration into value chains and markets
9.3a Households (%) with bank accounts (lakh) 62.71
Target 9.4
By 2030, upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustain-
able, with increased resource-use efficiency and greater adoption of clean and
environmentally sound technologies and industrial processes, with all coun-
tries taking action in accordance with their respective capabilities
Target 9.5
Enhance scientific research, upgrade the technological capabilities of industrial
sectors in all countries, in particular developing countries, including, by 2030,
encouraging innovation and increasing the number of research and development
workers per 1 million people and public and private research and development
spending
9.5a Mapping of soil map by USAC NA 1:4k
9.5b Mapping of waste water sources and sewage by USAC in towns NA 60
9.5c GIS based city information system developed by USAC in towns 1 20
121
Appendix 2.4.3
Schemes for SDG 9: Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
Targets Centrally Sponsored Schemes/state sector Direct Intervention Schemes
1.National Handloom Development

SS
2. Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana (PMGSY)
1.Integrated Industrial Policy for Hills
2. Mera Gaon Meri Sadak Yojana
9.1 to 9.5 SS.
3. Mukhya Mantri Shilp Vikas Yojana
1.SIDCUL
4. Establishment of Hari Ram Tamta Shilp Unnayan
2.Udyog Mitra Sanshthan
3.EDI (Entrepreneurship Development Institute)
Appendix 2.4.4 IT Perspective of Government of Uttarakhand for Vision 2030
2016 2020 2025 2030 Remarks

Communication
Uncovered ar- Incentives to
1.Mobile connectivity across the state (% of
55 70 100 eas along state mobile service
villages)
highways providers
Incentives to
2.Internet connection to all GPs (% of villag-
10 30 70 100 internet service
es)
providers (ISP)
3.Permission to private ISPs to provide con- Private ISPs to create infrastruc-
yes yes
nectivity on leased line ture across the state
70% (high
4.Disaster warning through SMS (% of
Nil disaster-prone 100
villages)
areas)
5.Automated grievance redressal mechanism
Nil 40 40 100
for all departments (% of departments)
Digital Literacy
1.At least one digitally literate member in a
Nil 70 100
family (% of families)
2.Compulsory computer education-Second-
10 50 100
ary Schools (% of schools)
Infrastructure and Industries
Currently
1.Formulation of investor friendly ICT&E Valid up to 2025 (review every 3
Implemented New policy under cabinet
policy years)
approval
Invitation to
Co.s for setting
Finalization for
up proposal in
2.Setting up of IT and education hub at plan, approval Completion by Commercializa-
state. Address-
Kashipur and contract 2025 tion w.e.f 2025
ing the same
award
through IT poli-
cy rolled out
Invitation to
Co.s for setting
More areas
up proposal in
to be identi-
3.Setting up 3 EMCs in the state state. Address- 1xEMC 2xEMCs
fied based on
ing the same
success
through IT poli-
cy rolled out
Contd...
122
Invitation to
Co.s for setting
up proposal in
4.Corporate houses to set up Data Centre
state. Address- 1xDC 2-3xDCs 2-3xDCs
Clusters in hilly areas of state
ing the same
through IT poli-
cy rolled out
Establishment
of SDC,SSDG,
USSWAN and
State Portal
5.Boost to ICT&E industry in Government Based on success of setting up of industries and
formalization.
projects prevailing policy guidelines in vogue
Empowerment
of ITDA with
resources viz.
NIC, SeMT,
UIDAI,CSC.
6.Provisioning of G2C services through inter-
net and mobile applications (achievement in 18 40 70 100
% of services)
7.State departments to undergo GPRs and
automation of offices thereby resulting in 5 20 60 100
e-governance
8.Inter-departmental G2G services to be done
5 20 60 100
electronically
9.Cashless payment for all G2B and G2C
Nil 20 60 100
services (% of departments)
123
Appendix 2.4.5 Vision for Uttarakhand Space Application Centre, Department of Science and Technology
Baseline Targets for year 2020 Targets for year 2024 Targets for year 2030
Forecasting Agriculture Statis- District level land capability Village level land capability Mapping of changing pattern
tics with Landbased and Metro- map for all existing crops in map for all existing crops in in agriculture crops over the
logical Data (FASAL) Uttarakhand state. Uttarakhand state. period.
Pre-harvest Acreage and pro- Block level pre-harvest Acreage Village level pre-harvest Acre-
duction estimation for Wheat, and production estimation for age and production estimation
Rice, Sugarcane and pulses Wheat, Rice, Sugarcane and for Wheat, Rice, Sugarcane and
in 13 districts of Uttarakhand pulses in Uttarakhand state. pulses in Uttarakhand state.
state
Identification of suitable sites In suitable sites, monitoring
Mapping of existing Horticul- for Horticulture and Medicinal and management practices will
ture crops in Uttarakhand state. plants cultivation in Uttara- be suggested for Horticulture
khand state. and Medicinal plants in Uttara-
khand state.
Assessment of Run-off, Sedi-
Use of SWAT model for impact
mentation yield and nutrient Assessment of Run-off, Sedi-
of climate change on produc-
loss and their impact on crop mentation yield and nutrient
tion of Wheat and Rice crop in
yield and land adaptation loss and their impact on crop
Uttarakhand state.
across altitude gradient by yield and land adaptation
(Also addresses SDG 13) using SWAT model in 5 water- across altitudinal gradient by
Mapping of Irrigation system sheds of Uttarakhand state. using SWAT model in water-
in Uttarakhand state. sheds for Uttarakhand state.
Estimation of Irrigation crop
water demand in Uttarakhand Monitoring and Development
state. of management practices
Mapping of soil map at 1:50k in for agriculture and irrigated
Uttarakhand state. Mapping of soil map at 1:10k in
systems in hilly region of Ut-
Uttarakhand state.
tarakhand.
Creation of Digital maps of
Field based Geo-spatial map- Mapping of soil map at 1:4k in
traditional crops (Ramdana,
ping of Agriculture area at Uttarakhand state.
Mandua and Sanva etc.) in
1:10k scale using high resolu- Uttarakhand state. Site devel- Identification of suitable sites
tion satellite data in Uttara- opment and leading toward of Traditional crops in Uttara-
khand state. poverty alleviation khand state.
Agricultural field mapping at
Suitable site identification 1:4k using high resolution sat-
for cultivation and livelihood ellite data in Uttarakhand state.
generation. Change area assessment in
Agriculture area during last 50
years in Uttarakhand state.
10) Sustainable development
studies for formulation and im-
plementation toward poverty
alleviation
Water quality mapping in 13 1) Mapping of Pre and Post 1) Continuous mapping and 1) Continuous mapping and
districts of Uttarakhand water quality parameters Monitoring of water quality Monitoring and assessment of
water quality parameters using
2) Mapping of waste water 2) Town wise mapping of fifty
GIS
sources and sewage in 5 towns towns
2) Town wise mapping of 60
3) Identification of potential 3) Identification of potential
towns
agriculture irrigation zones in agriculture irrigation zones in
Uttarkashi and Pauri districts. eight districts of Uttarakhand 3) Assessment and water
recharge zone identification of
4.) Watershed prioritization us-
potential agriculture zones of
ing Morphometric techniques
Uttarakhand district
and identification of vulnerable
watershed 4) Development of GIS based
Watershed Monitoring Mech-
anism for sustainable develop-
ment of natural resources.
5) Mapping condition and
trends of streams and drainage
for vulnerable watershed and
identification of fast dwindling
rivers for rejuvenation
Contd...
124

GIS based city information GIS based city information GIS based city information GIS based city information
system for Kotdwara city system for Dehradun and Ha- system for 10 major cities of system for 20 cities/towns of
(e-Kotdwara) ridwar City Uttarakhand Uttarakhand
1) Mapping, inventorying 1) Impacts on livelihood and 1) Development Impacts on

change analysis and climate economic upliftment livelihood and economic up-
Training and capacity program
change studies liftment
at school level under the theme 2) Large scale mapping of ur-
SOS (Science of Survival) 2) To develop web based urban ban local bodies will be carried 2) Development of geospatial
at District level, initially for information system to make out for urban developmental database for various levels of
Chamoli and Pithoragarh easier use of the information to planning using advanced urban/rural planning and deci-
District) the users. DGPS instrument and very sion support to meet require-
high resolution satellite data. ments of urban/rural planning
3) Conducting training and
and management.
capacity program under the 3) Conducting training and
theme SOS (Science of Survival) capacity program under the 3) Conducting training and
at all 13 District level theme SOS (Science of Survival) capacity program under the
at city/town level theme SOS (Science of Survival)
at Block/village level
1) Mapping and monitoring 1) Snow cover mapping and 1) Continuous mapping and 1) Assessment and continuous
snow and glaciers in Alaknan- Glacier retreat studies monitoring snow and glaciers monitoring of snow and gla-
da, Bhagirathi and Yamuna in Alaknanda, Bhagirathi, Ya- ciers; retreat will be observed
2) Grain size mapping using
basin muna and Dhauliganga basins. in major glaciers in Alaknan-
NDSI and SAM methods
da, Bhagirathi, Yamuna and
2) Automatic snow and grain 2) Automatic snow and grain
3) Climate change studies for Dhauliganga basins; decadal
size mapping OF Dundi glacier size mapping of major glaciers
policy intervention analysis of snow cover
using Hyperspectral Remote of Uttarakhand Himalaya
sensing using Hyperspectral Remote 2) Assessment of Automatic
sensing snow and grain size of major
glaciers of Uttarakhand Hi-
3) Climate change studies
malaya using Hyperspectral
policy intervention and formu-
Remote sensing
lation
3) Climate change studies for
formulation and implementa-
tion
Assessment of alpine meadows 1) Assessment of alpine 1) Decadal assessment of Al- 1) Continuous monitoring of
for Medicinal and Aromatic meadows for Medicinal and pine meadows of the Uttara- Alpine meadows and identify
Plants, NTFPs/RET & develop- Aromatic Plants, NTFPs/RET khand state changes over the period
ment of web based information & development of web based
2) Geo-spatial vegetation 2) Monitoring and change
system, [Also address the SDG information system,
resource map (species level) at analysis of species at landscape
12, 13]
2) Development of Gram Gram Panchayat for Uttara- level.
Detailed vegetation resource Panchayat level geo-spatial re- khand state
3) Ecosystem services assess-
maps (species level) and source maps of for one district
3) Ecosystem services assessment of natural resources at
change studies at district level (Pithoragarh)
ment of natural resources at state level.
[Also address the SDG 12, 13]
3) Ecosystem Services assess- district level
4) Geospatial Biodiversity
ment in selected Natural Sacred
4) Geospatial vegetation assess- mapping assessment of all the
Sites (SNS).
ment of all the Protected Areas Protected Areas of Uttarakhand
4) Geospatial vegetation assess- of Uttarakhand
5) Development of species level
ment of 5 Protected Areas of
5) Development of species level natural resource management
Uttarakhand
natural (10 major tree species) system/plan by using high
5) Development of important resource management system/ resolution spatial data for the
natural resource management plan by using high resolution state
system/plan (Banj oak: (Quer- spatial data.
6) Mapping, inventorying of
cus sp.) for the Uttarakhand
6) Mapping, inventorying of forest resources including
state.
forest resources including NTFP and Medicinal plants for
6) Mapping, inventorying of NTFP and Medicinal plants for site suitability monitoring and
forest resources including site suitability monitoring and conservation and management
NTFP and Medicinal plants for conservation
7) To develop Land Resource
site suitability and monitoring
7) To generate and update Information System Geo-Portal
7) To generate Land resource Land Use/Land Cover, Waste- for easy access of information
mapping database of Land land, Land Degradation data- to the users.
Use/Land Cover, Wasteland, base at 1:4K scale for the entire
Land Degradation for the entire state using very high resolution
state of Uttarakhand at using satellite data.
latest date satellite data at
1:10K scale.
125
Contd...

1) Geospatial mapping (geo 1) Geospatial mapping (geo 1) Geospatial mapping (geo 1) Updation of public assets
tagging) of public assets (Infra- tagging) of public assets tagging) of public assets (Infra- and integration with the
structure, Government, Human (Infrastructure, Government, structure, Government, Human Central and State Government
and livestock and natural Human and livestock and nat- and livestock and natural schemes.
resources) and integration in ural resources) and integration resources) and integration in
2) Partnership with Universi-
Government schemes of Pithor- in Government schemes of 3 Government schemes at state
ties Technical Institutions, De-
agarh district (Pilot district). districts level.
partments to achieve the goal
2) Partnership with Univer- 2) Mapping, analysis and GIS and giving training to them to
sities Technical Institutions, preparation of target Partners. disseminate and spread knowl-
Departments to achieve the edge of Science and Technolo-
3) To bring the entire geospa-
goal and giving training to gy. Mapping, analysis and GIS
tial database of various layers
them to disseminate and preparation of target Partners.
in uniform scale, projections
spread knowledge of Science
and datum using satellite data, 3) To bring the entire geospa-
and Technology.
GPS/DGPS in GIS environ- tial database of various layers
3) Creation and management ment. To create Seamless data in uniform scale, projections
of digital geospatial temporal base for all districts of the State and datum using satellite data,
database at 1:50K and 1:10K for at 1:10K & 1: 4K scale of all the GPS/DGPS in GIS environ-
multi-thematic layers of Uttara- themes. ment. To create Seamless data
khand state i.e. Road, Settle- base for all districts of the State
4) Development & Publishing
ment, Drainage, Land Use/ at 1:10K & 1: 4K scale of all the
of Geospatial Service Portal
Land Cover, Wasteland, Land themes.
(Level 2 : Data Editing) for 8
Degradation, Wetland, Forest
themes i.e. Base Map, Constitu- 4) Development & Publishing
Type, Geology, Geomorpholo-
ency Map, Land Resource Map, of Geospatial Service Portal
gy, DEM, Slope, Aspect etc.
Tourism Map, Urban Infor- (Level 2 : Data Editing) for 8
4) Development & Publishing mation System, Village Map, themes i.e. Base Map, Constitu-
of Geospatial Service Portal Disaster Services, Char Dham ency Map, Land Resource Map,
(Level 1 : Visualization) for 8 Route Map. Tourism Map, Urban Infor-
themes – Base Map, Constitu- mation System, Village Map,
5) Year wise procurement &
ency Map, Land Resource Map, Disaster Services, Char Dham
management of new multi-res-
Tourism Map, Urban Infor- Route Map.
olution & temporal satellite
mation System, Village Map,
data. 5) Year wise procurement &
Disaster Services, Char Dham
Route Map.
5) Year wise procurement & data.
data.
126
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
127
128
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
The concept of human development was original- tion or elimination of communicable and non-
ly introduced in the 1990s to define development in communicable diseases as well as expansion of
terms of people’s capabilities and freedom to access healthcare services.
a wider range of choices that had been till then lim- The vision for targets of Goal No. 3 are present-
ited to economic development and its concomitant ed in Appendix 3.1.1, followed by values for indi-
choices. The three basic tenets of human develop- cators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 3.1.2,
ment were education, health, and income, indicat- and Appendix 3.1.3 contains the schemes applica-
ing that all of them were important for assessing a ble for Goal no. 3. Annexure 3 contains the detailed
nation’s progress in terms of human development. information regarding indicators for Goal no. 3 for
Later, many other aspects such as access to basic ser- baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023-
vices such as water, sanitation and housing, as well 24) and vision 2030.
as features related to gender, and inequality came
to be added to the human development indicators. In the present section, Targets 3.1 and 3.2 have
been discussed together, followed by the other tar-
SDG 3 concerns Good Health and Well-Being, gets that have been discussed individually. This is
SDG 4 concerns Quality Education, and SDG 6 followed by an analysis of the baseline situation,
concerns Clean Water and Sanitation. These three and an outline of the vision for 2030 for the state.
goals are considered together under the category The challenges and strategies for the health sector
‘Human Development’ for further discussion in have been discussed at the end.
the context of the state of Uttarakhand. The eco-
nomic growth aspect of human development has
been subsumed in many other goals such as SDG Reproductive, Maternal, New-born and Child
8, SDG 9 SDG 1 and SDG 2, in terms of access to Health
basic food, and remaining out of poverty, among A reduction in maternal and child mortality is
other indicators among the most important health goals of the Gov-
ernment of India. In order to achieve these goals,
SECTION 3.1 the Government of India has been devising differ-
ent action plans in the form of programmes under
SDG 3: Ensure Healthy Lives and the National Rural Health Mission (NRHM),which
Promote Well-Being for All at All Ages was initiated in 2005. In 2013, the Reproductive,
Ensuring the health and well-being of people at all Maternal, New-born, Child and Adolescent Health
ages lies at the heart of sustainable development. (RMNCH+A) approach was launched to address
Morbidity and mortality have an impact on well-be- the major causes of mortality among women and
ing at both the individual and community levels. An children as well as the delays in the accessing and
increase in the number of healthy years in the lives utilization of health care and services. SDG 3.7 per-
of its people strengthens the economic growth and tains to access to sexual and reproductive health-
prosperity of a nation. SDG 3 deals with the issues care services, including family planning.
that ensure a healthy life and promote well-being
for all. It addresses all the major health priorities,
including reproductive, maternal, and child health; Target 3.1 By 2030, reduce the maternal mortality
communicable, non-communicable, and environ- ratio to less than 70 per 100,000 live births
mental diseases; universal health coverage; and ac- Target 3.2 By 2030, end preventable deaths of
cess for all, to safe, effective, high-quality, and af- new-borns and children under 5 years of age,
fordable medicines and vaccines. and aim to reduce neonatal mortality and under-5
The Vision for Goal no. 3 for the state of Uttara- mortality
khand is as follows: Baseline for Uttarakhand
By 2030, good health and well-being will be At the national level, the Maternal Mortality Ra-
ensured for all citizens of the state by attain- tio (MMR) declined from 254 in 2005 to 167 per
ing robust child and maternal health, reduc-
129
130
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
1,00,000 live births1 in 2011-13. In Uttarakhand, Vision 2030 for Targets 3.1 and 3.2
the current MMR is 165 per 1,00,000 live births The vision for Target 3.1 is to reduce the maternal
(AHS, 2012–13).There is disparity between the two mortality ratio to less than 70 per 1,00,000 live births
divisions of Kumaon Headquarters and Garhwal gradually by 2030, down from the baseline level of
Headquarters, with the former recording a value of 165. The interim targets aimed at are 141 by 2019-20,
182 as compared to just 158 for the Garhwal region. and 94 by 2023-24, respectively.
Globally, 76 lakh children died in 2010 before The vision for Target 3.2 is to reduce the pre-
reaching their fifth birthdays and India accounts ventable deaths of new-borns and children under
for nearly 20 per cent of the world’s child deaths 5 years of age to 25 per 1000 live births. Given the
(MoHFW, 2013). Table 3.1 shows the levels of In- baseline levels of the total IMR at 40 (rural 39, urban
fant Mortality Rate (IMR) and the Under 5 Mortal- 44), the interim targets would be to reduce the total
ity Rate (U5MR) for Uttarakhand, and the all-India IMR to 36 (rural 36 and urban 39) by 2019-20, and to
levels for 2005-06 and 2015-16, along with rural–ur- attain a level of 29 (rural 29, urban 30) by 2023-24.
ban differences.
As regards the U5MR, the interim timelines have
Table 3.1 shows that Uttarakhand had better the following targets: from a baseline of 47 (rural 46,
health indicators than the national average, in urban 49), the U5MR will be reduced to 42 (rural 41,
terms of the IMR and U5MR for both years under
Figure 3.1: Vision 2030 for selected Indicators for Maternal and Child Health
in Uttarakhand
Table 3.1 Child Health Indicators for Uttarakhand and All-India

Uttarakhand All India
2005- 2005-
2015-16 2015-16
06 06
Total Rural Urban Total Total Rural Urban Total
IMR 42 39 44 40 57 46 29 41
U5MR 56 46 49 47 74 56 34 50
Source: National Family Health Surveys Rounds 3 and 4
consideration. In both cases, the levels of IMR and urban 43) by 2019-20, and to a level of 31 (rural 30,
U5MR declined over the intervening ten years be- urban 31) by 2023-24.
tween the two NFHS rounds, but the decline in IMR
in Uttarakhand was very marginal during this pe- The immunisation baseline is fairly high at
riod, which is a matter of concern. However, while nearly 80 percent in Uttarakhand, and the vision
the rural indicators in the state for 2015-16 are better is to increase the share of the fully immunised
than those for the urban ones, the opposite is true child population gradually to 85 per cent by 2019-
at the all-India level. Immunization is extremely 20, and to 95 per cent by 2023-24, and to cover
important for child survival and the baseline value more than 95 per cent by 2030.
for the indicator of the percentage share of fully im-
munised children is 79.6 per cent.
1. SRS for various years.
131
Infectious Diseases and Non-communicable Target 3.3 By 2030, end the epidemics of AIDS,
Diseases tuberculosis, malaria and neglected tropical
Target 3.3 By 2030, end the epidemics of AIDS, diseases and combat hepatitis, water-borne
tuberculosis, malaria and neglected tropical diseases and other communicable diseases
Box 3.1 Best Practices for Maternal and Child Health

Odisha’s Mamata scheme is a maternity benefit cash transfer scheme for pregnant and lactating women aged 19
years and above This scheme does not entail any income criterion for assessing eligibility of the beneficia-
ries. Implemented through the existing Integrated Child Development Services(ICDS) programme, the scheme
monitors the fulfilment of 20 verifiable conditions from the second trimester of pregnancy till the infant com-
pletes nine months of age, with the anganwadi workers and Auxiliary Nurse Mid-wives(ANMs) providing the
necessary services.
This scheme was introduced with the following aims:
• To provide partial wage loss compensation for pregnant and nursing mothers;
• To increase utilisation of mother and child healthcare services; and
• To improve mother and childcare practices.
This scheme uses the Mother and Child Protection (MCP) card as the main source of verification of the fulfilment of
conditions. The ANMs and anganwadi workers fill up some of the information in the card, as the entries in the
MCP card require the signatures of both. This card helps to track pregnant women for ante-natal and post-natal
care, the immunisation status of children, and their growth and nutritional status.
Source: Endow, et al., 2015.
Table 3.2 Baseline Infectious Diseases

Indicators Baseline status
The estimations of the Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) have regularly
been undertaken in India since 1998.According to the India HIV report (2015)
by the National AIDS Control Organization (NACO) and National Institute
of Medical Statistics (NIMS), the epidemic in India is overall declining, from
3.3aPrevalence of HIV and an estimated peak of 0.38per cent in 2001-03 through0.34per cent in 2007 and
AIDS across different types of 0.28per cent in 2012 to 0.26per cent in 2015. A similar pattern has been ob-
high-risk categories. served for both males and females at the national level. It shows decreasing
trends in HIV prevalence, but new HIV infections and AIDS-related deaths
persist at the national level. However, the dynamics and patterns of the ep-
idemic are not uniform across the country. In Uttarakhand, the current HIV
prevalence among the adults for the age group 15-49 years is 0.11 per cent.
India accounts for one-fourth of the global TB burdena. In 2015, the estimated
3.3bPrevalence of tuberculo- number of TB cases in India was 28 lakhs, and number of deaths due to TB
sis (TB) per 100,000 popula- was 4.8 lakhs, though both the incidence and the mortality related to TB have
tion declined over the years. At present, the incidence of TB in Uttarakhand is 147
per 1,00,000 population.
Over time, the burden of malaria has reduced significantly in the country as a
whole. In the last 10 years,the total number of malaria cases in the country de-
clined by 42 per centb. As per the National Framework for Malaria Elimination
3.3cConfirmed malaria cases
in India, 2016-2030,in Uttarakhand, the total number of malaria cases declined
(number)
from 2008 to 1171 between 2000 and 2014, while the number of Plasmodium
Falciparum(PF) cases, referring to cases of ‘cerbral malaria’ fell from 424 to 89,
and the number of malaria-related deaths during that period was zero.
132
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Leprosy is considered as a neglected tropical disease. India accounted for

58.85per cent of the global leprosy burden in 2013c. As compared to the all-In-
dia prevalence rate of 0.69 of leprosy, the prevalence rate for the state of
3.3d Registered prevalence Uttarakhand is 0.35 in 2014-15d. For the same year, the new disability case rate
rate (per 1,00,000 population) due to leprosy in the state was 1.01 per million population (as compared to the
for leprosy rate of 4.48 at national level). The number of child leprosy cases detected in
the UK in 2014-15 was 0.17 per 100000 population, whereasthe corresponding
all-India rate was 0.88. The child disability case rate in Uttarakhand was 0.01
per 1,00,000 population as compared to the rate of 0.019 at the national level.
3.3e Confirmed cases of Hep- At present in Uttarakhand, the confirmed cases of Hepatitis A and Hepatitis B
atitis A and Hepatitis B are 10,677 and 254, respectively.
3.3f Annual incidence of diar- In the state The annual incidence of diarrhoea in the state is 10.3 per 1000 pop-
rhoea (per 1000) ulation.
Source:
a
Annual TB report of India (2017).
b
National Framework for Malaria Elimination in India 2016-2030.
c
WHO (2013).
d
Monthly progress report for the year 2014-15.
Baseline for Uttarakhand coverage), Target 3.9 (reduction of mortality due to

As regards the diseases included under Target 3.3, environmental factors), and SDG 6 (improving wa-
dealing with hepatitis, water-borne diseases, and ter and sanitation).
other communicable diseases would also include Vision 2030 for Target 3.3
the challenges related to some aspects of infectious The Vision 2030 for infectious diseases is presented
disease control such as Target 3.8 (universal health in Table 3.3.
Table 3.3 Vision 2030 for Infectious Diseases

Indicators Baseline 2019-20 2023-24 Vision 2030
3.3aPrevalence of HIV and
AIDS across different types of 0.11 0.08 0.03 0
high-risk categories (%).
3.3bPrevalence of tuberculo- 118, 73, 29,
sis (TB) per 100,000 popula- 145
tion Reduction by 20% Reduction by 50% Reduction by 80%
3.3cConfirmed malaria cases Near to elimina-
914 500 Near to elimination
(number) tion
3.3d Registered prevalence
rate (per 100,000 population) 0.24 0.19 0.12 Near to elimination
for leprosy
3.3e1Confirmed cases of
10677 9609 8648 7783
Hepatitis A
3.3e2Confirmed cases of
254 229 206 185
Hepatitis B
3.3f Annual incidence of diar-
10.3 9.27 8.34 7.51
rhoea (per 1000)
Target 3.4 By 2030, reduce by one-third premature Baseline for Uttarakhand

mortality from non-communicable diseases and Target 3.4 includes targets for the reduction
promote mental health and well-being of non-communicable diseases (NCD)-related
133
Figure 3.2: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Infectious Diseases
mortality and promotion of mental health. Each estimates for the share of people with high blood
year, 16 million people die prematurely, that is, cholesterol is 13.9 per cent4 and for the share of
before the age of 70,from heart and lung diseases, people aged 15-69 years with high blood pressure
stroke, cancer, and diabetes.2 Reportedly one in is 26.8 per cent,5 in the state.
four Indians face the risk of death from an NCD Vision 2030 for Target 3.4
before they reach the age of 70. Further, depres-
sion and anxiety cause mental disorder, and at its The vision is to reduce mortality from NCDs to 16
worst, depression can also lead to suicide. per cent by 2030, with interim targets of 42 per cent
According to the Indian Council of Medical Re- by 2019-20, and 35 per cent by 2023-24.Mortality
search (ICMR) Survey (2008-09) in Uttarakhand, in from NCDs can also be reduced through prevention
the case of hypertension, 32 per cent of the respon- and treatment. The share of people with high cho-
dents suffering from the disease were normal, 49 lesterol levels will be successively brought down
per cent fell in the category of pre-hypertension, from the baseline value to 11per cent by 2019-20,
14 per cent were suffering from stage I hyperten- 8 per cent by 2023-24, and 4.5per cent by 2030. An-
sion, and only 5 per cent from stage-II hyperten- other indicator for this target is the percentage of
sion. The survey revealed that only 1.2 per cent people aged 15-69 years with high blood pressure
of the respondents were diabetic. In contrast, the in order to capture a commonly prevailing NCD.
survey for Prevention and Control of Cancer, Di- This share will be consecutively brought down to
abetes, Cardiovascular Disease and Stroke (NPC- 21per cent by 2019-20, 16 per cent by 2023-24, and
DCS) (2012) reported a prevalence of 5.7per cent 9 per cent by 2030. The government will aim to re-
for these diseases as compared to a national preva- duce the share of people with mental health prob-
lence of about 7 per cent. lems by 10 per cent, 15per cent, and 30 per cent, for
the three timelines, respectively.
The latest available estimate for the mortality
rate for the state attributable to various NCDs is It is also posited that Ayurvedic, Unani, home-
quite high, at around 48 per cent.3 The baseline opathy and such traditional modes of treatment
2. WHO Report (2015) on NCDs.

3. Provided by the state government based on GBD 2014 estimates.
4. Provided by the state government based on ICMR estimates.
5. Provided by the state government based on NFHS 2015-16 estimates.
134
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
can provide an effective alternative to the accepted Vision 2030 for Target 3.5
allopathic route of treating patients. This fledgling The vision for Target 3.5 is that the estimated
sector, which has an immense potential, is also number of hard drug users will be halved from the
developing rapidly in the state (see Box No. 3.2 and baseline level of 3000 to 1500 by 2030.
Appendix 3.1.4 for vision for AYUSH).
Target 3.6 By 2020, halve the number of deaths

Target 3.5 Strengthen the prevention and and injuries from road traffic accidents
treatment of substance abuse, including narcotic
drug abuse and harmful use of alcohol Baseline for Uttarakhand
Baseline for Uttarakhand As per data for the period January to October 2016,
the number of road accidents occurring in the state
The estimated number of hard drug users in Ut- was 1342, the number of deaths due to accidents was
tarakhand in 2007 was is around 3000.6 801, and the number of cases of injuries was 1497.
Box 3.2: AYUSH (Ayurveda, Yoga and Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha and Homeopathy) and NCDs
As the lifestyle of people, especially city dwellers, becomes more complex and ridden with stress, people are turn-
ing to alternative medicines such as ayurveda, yoga, homeopathy, naturopathy, unani, and so on. These systems
of medicine have proved to be highly useful for preventing and tackling NCDs such as diabetes, hypertension, ar-
thritis, and age-related disorders, among others. The Panchakarma therapy and Kshar-sutra are especially effective
treatment for diseases like piles and fistula. Yoga is now internationally renowned for guiding people to a healthy
way of living and consequently, the popularity and scope of practices like yoga and pranayamaare increasing daily.
Thus, the department of AYUSH is gaining increasing importance in maintaining good health and treating NCDs.
The following facilities and units are currently operative in the state with regard to the AYUSH system of medicine:
• 549 Ayurvedic and Unani dispensaries and 97 Homeopathic dispensaries;
• 8 upgraded Ayurvedic and 1 Homeopathic hospital;
• 38 Panchakarma units;
• One Ayurvedic University equipped with three campuses along with attached hospitals;
• One Ayurvedic Pharmacy each under the state government and the Central Government, producing high
quality Ayurvedic drugs using local herbal drugs. In addition, 247 Ayurvedic pharmacies are manufacturing
Ayurvedic and Unani drugs in the private sector.
• At present,there are 110 state homeopathic hospitals with 105 medical officers and 105 pharmacologists. There
are also 5 Reproductive Child Health (RCH) units and 4 skin disease clinics in the state.
The strengthening of AYUSH will not only help the state in attaining Goal No. 3, and in tackling NCDs, in partic-
ular, but will also have a positive impact on the attainment of other SDGs. For instance, it is expected to augment
the cultivation of medicinal herbs in the hills on a large scale, which will be bought by the Ayurvedic and Unani
pharmacies working both inside and outside the state. This will assist in boosting farmers’ income and reduce mi-
gration from the state.
The strengthening of AYUSH can also help promote tourism. Yoga and Panchkarma centres have been proposed
in the National AYUSH Mission document. This initiative, with co-operation from the tourism sector, can attract a
large number of tourists. Medical tourism can be further enhanced by developing centres such as AYUSH Grams,
Yoga Grams, and Wellness Centres, and the government can also opt for private sector participation in this sphere.
Local employment and income will get a boost through such initiatives.
Herbal drug cultivation is being promoted by a Herbal Research and Development Institute in Chamoli district.
Village clusters have been developed by this centrally aided institute for cultivating 6 medicinal herbs in 73 acres
of land. There is considerable scope for expansion of this activity.
6. Raman Development agency selected by NACO for Injection Drug Uses (IDUs), (2007) cited by the state government.
135
Vision 2030 for Target 3.6 number of institutional deliveries is an indicator of

The baseline (January-October 2016) levels of safe delivery and a precondition for ensuring the
accidents (1342), deaths due to accidents (801), and mother’s health and the birth of a healthy baby. In
injuries (1497), are to be gradually reduced to 671 Uttarakhand, the proportion of institutional births is
(accidents), 400 (deaths due to accidents), 748 (inju- around 69 per cent (NFHS-4, 2015-16), which is less
ries) by 2019-20, and thereafter to 336 (accidents), 200 than the national average of 79 per cent. The inci-
(deaths due to accidents), 370 (injuries), and eventu- dence of institutional births is lower in rural areas, at
ally to a low level of 168(accidents), 100 (deaths due 64 per cent than in urban areas, at 79 per cent.
to accidents), and 175 (injuries), respectively. Post-natal care (PNC) is critical for the survival
of the newborn and the mother. The coverage of
PNC, that is, mothers who received postnatal care
Target 3.7 By 2030, ensure universal access to sexu-
from a doctor/nurse/Lady Health Visitor (LHV)/
al and reproductive healthcare services, including
ANM/midwife/other health personnel within
for family planning, information and education
two days of delivery, is 55 per cent in Uttarakhand,
Baseline for Uttarakhand with the figure being 49 per cent for rural areas,
According to NFHS reports, the current use of fam- and 66 per cent for urban areas (NFHS-4, 2015-16).
ily planning methods in Uttarakhand among the Here, too, the corresponding coverage of Uttara-
currently married women in the age group of 15-49 khand is lower (62 per cent) than the national level.
years has decreased from 59.3 per cent in the year According to the NFHS-4 (2015-16) data, the
2005-06 to 53.4 per cent in the year 2015-16.With Total Fertility Rate (TFR) in Uttarakhand is 2.1,
reference to the use of any modern family planning with the rural and urban TFRs being 2.2 and 1.8,
method, the share has decreased from 55.5 per cent respectively.
to 49.3 per cent. In 2015-16, the difference was not
very significant between rural (49.8 per cent) and
Vision 2030 for Target 3.7
urban (48.4 per cent) areas with regard to the share
of currently married women using any modern The vision is as follows:
family planning method. 3.7a By 2030, increase the contraceptive prevalence
Antenatal care is important for monitoring the rate to 66 percent.
progress of foetal growth and maintaining the health 3.7b By 2030, increase the ANC coverage (at least 4
of the mother. Currently, the number of women visits) to 100 percent
accessing the complete antenatal package, that is, 3.7c By 2030, increase the institutional delivery to
mothers who had at least four antenatal care visits in 100 percent
Uttarakh and is quite low, at 31 per cent, with very
3.7d By 2030, increase the PNC coverage for
poor rural coverage (26 per cent) (NFHS-4, 2015-16).
Mothers to 100 percent
In contrast, the urban coverage is much higher, at 41
per cent. Institutional delivery reduces the risk for 3.7e In 2030, maintain the TFR at the current level,
both child and mother during delivery. Thus, the 2.1.
Figure 3.3: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Reproductive Health Care in Uttarakhand
136
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Table 3.4: Existing Availability of Health Personnel in Uttarakhand

Vacant as a Share of Sanc-
Cadre Sanctioned In Position Vacant
tioned Posts (%)
Allopathic Doctors at
147 65 82 55.78
PHC
Surgeon at CHC 83 6 77 92.77
OBG at CHC 79 7 72 91.00
Physician at CHC 79 5 74 93.67
Paediatrician at CHC 80 14 66 82.50
Total Specialists at
321 32 289 91.00
CHC
Figure 3.4: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Availability of Health Services in Uttarakhand
Target 3.8 Achieve universal health coverage, in- Vision 2030 for Target 3.8
cluding financial risk protection, access to quality The vision for the state health services is that
essential health-care services and access to safe, the gaps in availability of health personnel will
effective, quality and affordable essential medi- be sought to be filled in the coming years, for
cines and vaccines for all doctors and paramedicals, in particular (see Ta-
Baseline for Uttarakhand ble 3.5).
Health systems need to be strengthened as well as
adapted to meet the shifting health priorities as- Challenges for the Health Sector7
sociated with demographic and epidemiological • Health is not a stand-alone issue and there has
transitions, rapidly developing technologies, and to be coordination with other departments. For
changing public expectations. The existing avail- instance, there is a huge requirement of doc-
ability of health personnel in the Uttarakhand pub- tors for reducing the MMR, but the number of
lic health service is in an alarming state, as shown doctors and health personnel available is inad-
in Table 3.4. It shows that there is an acute shortage equate, especially in the hilly districts. Access
of 91 per cent of specialist doctors in Community in the hills is a major challenge and retention of
Health Centres (CHCs). doctors is even more of a hurdle.
7. Much of the material here has been obtained from an interview with the Secretary, Health Department and state government health officials.
137
Table 3.5: Vision for the Availability of Health Services in Uttarakhand

Health Personnel Base Line (2016) 2019-20 2023-24 2029-30
No. of doctors per lakh
14.19 23.58 27.15
population 13.91
(2% Increase) (5% Increase) (7% Increase)
(hills and plains)
No. of paramedicals per lakh population 39.34 40.50 41.27
38.57
(hills and plains) (2% Increase) (5% Increase) (7% Increase)
No. of hospitals beds per lakh population
1032 1270 1508 1750
(hills and plains)
No. of PHC per lakh
population 2.58 3.08 3.58 4.00
(hills and plains)
No. of maternity and child care centre per
18.97 21.47 23.97 26.50
lakh population ( hills and plains)
No. of other health centres per lakh popu-

3.44 5.62 7.80 10.00
lation (hills and plains)
Number of persons covered under health
24,28,275 29,40,000 31,98,542 35,38,978
insurance(R)
Number of persons covered under health
33,53,350 40,60,000 44,17,035 48,87,160
insurance(U)
Number of persons covered under health 84,26,138
57,81,625 70,00,000 76,15,577
insurance (T)
• As regards the IMR, there are some compli- Strategy for attaining the Vision 2030 for the Health
cated cases wherein complications often arise Sector
due to post-partum haemorrhage (PPH). This
Maternal and child health: Targets 3.1 and 3.2
needs specialised attention and may involve a
situation wherein the mother needs to stay in In order to combat the situation of maternal and
the hospital for at least two days. However, child death, presently two Centrally Sponsored
many of the patients are from a poor socio-eco- Schemes are functioning in Uttarakhand, viz.,
nomic background and cannot afford to stay in the Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Yojana
the hospital as that would entail foregoing their (PMSSY), and the Integrated Child Develop-
wage earnings. ment Services (ICDS). For achieving the targets by
• The level of public health expenditure in Ut- 2030, the state government has to work hand in
tarakhand is low, at less than 1 per cent of the hand with the Central Government to execute the
GSDP as compared to a requirement of around centrally sponsored schemes effectively. For improv-
3 per cent. Hills need more manpower and in- ing the ANC as well as PNC coverage and institutional
frastructure than the plain areas because there delivery, the state should focus on strengthening the
is a shortage of 75 per cent with regard to med- health facilities in terms of human resources, infra-
ical infrastructure in the hills as compared to an structure, and equipment, among other facilities.
overall corresponding figure of around 60 per In order to ensure safe delivery and reduce
cent for the state. There is also a severe short- delivery-related complications, there is a need to
age of doctors and lack of facilities for surgery
increase the number of delivery facility points that
though the shortage of other infrastructure in
can work round the clock, with a special focus on
terms of buildings and medicines, among other
the rural areas. The increase in awareness among
things, is not significant.
the public regarding various programmes also
• As regards public health facilities, there is in- entails a rise in the coverage of institutional deliv-
frastructural shortage of human resources, bed eries by ensuring a minimum stay of 48 hours for
strength, and the total number of facilities.
138
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
the new mother at a health facility. Post-natal care general population, especially the youth. There
should focus on the starting of breastfeeding with- should also be a focus on intervention for the use
in one hour of birth and exclusive breastfeeding up of preventive measures, especially for the high-risk
to the infant’s age of six months. population group. It is essential to augment the
According to NFHS reports, the current use available HIV test facilities to enable everyone to
of family planning methods among the currently access them easily, and for HIV-positive people, it
married women in the age group 15-49 years has is essential to increase facilities for the provision of
decreased by 6per cent over the years 2005-06 to Anti-Retrovial Drugs (ART).
2015-16. This is a very striking and unusual de- For reducing the incidence of TB, early diagno-
velopment. It is thus imperative for the State Gov- sis, including universal drug-susceptibility testing
ernment to properly monitor the existing family and systematic screening of contacts and high-risk
planning programmes in order to enhance the groups, is required. The state government should
use of family planning practices. One of the key take the initiative to increase preventive measures in-
strategies for controlling the TFR is to strengthen cluding vaccination. In India, the National Tubercu-
family planning services in the districts where the losis Programme (NTP) was initiated in 1962to com-
TFR exceeds the national average. In addition, the bat TB. This programme was revised in 1997 as the
use of contraceptives will be promoted in the ru- Revised National Tuberculosis Control Programme
ral areas. (RNTCP) that used the WHO-recommended DOTS
On the basis of the existing maternal and child (Directly Observed Treatment, Short-course Che-
mortality situation, in order to attain the targets of motherapy) strategy. As regards the coverage of the
Goal No. 3, the state needs to ensure the following programme, since its inception till December 2016,
by 2024: more than two crore patients have received treat-
ment and more than 35 lakh additional lives have
a. Decrease in the MMR from 165 to 94 per been saved. In March 2016, the RNTCP revised its
1,00,000 live births by 2024; technical and operational guidelines in terms of
b. Decrease in the U5MR from 47 to 31 per 1000 strategies for the treatment of TB. These TB control
live births by 2024; programmes are Centrally Sponsored Schemes and
c. Decrease in the IMR from 40 to 29 per 1000 live are being implemented at the state level through the
births by 2024; National Health Mission.
d. Increase in the current use of modern family The fight against malaria necessitates strength-
planning methods among the currently mar- ening of early detection and prompt treatment fa-
ried women in the age group 15-49 years from cilities up to the sub-central level. There is a need
49 per cent to 59 per cent by 2024; to enhance awareness and preventive measures
programmes. Monitoring of the existing malaria
e. Increase in the ANC coverage to 83 per cent by control programmes should also be prioritised.
2024; The malaria burden has been reduced with the
f. Increase in the coverage of institutional deliv- intervention of case management and vector con-
ery to 92 per cent by 2024; trol programmes, namely, Rapid Diagnostics Tests
g. Increase in the PNC coverage to 89 per cent by (RDT), Artemisinin- based Combination Therapy
2024; and (ACT), Long Lasting Insecticidal Nets (LLINs), and
effective monitoring and evaluation.
h. Maintenance of the TFR at the rate of 2.1 by
2024. For combating leprosy, initiatives need to be
taken on active case finding, focused leprosy cam-
The SDG targets are not independent from each paigns, and case findings in the hard-to-reach areas
other. In order to achieve the targets of SDG 3.1 to ensure early detection, and complete treatment
and 3.2, it is essential to focus on the SDG targets to cut the chain of transmission in community.
2.2 (on child nutrition), 6.1, and 6.2 (on safe drink-
In order to reduce the prevalence of Hepatitis,
ing water and sanitation).
the state government should focus on increasing
Communicable Diseases: Target 3.3 the vaccination outreach for both Hepatitis A and
For combating HIV/AIDS, the state government B. It also needs to initiate training programmesfor
should focus on increasing awareness among the promoting the practice of hand washing.
139
For combating diarrhoea, there is need to place among the targeted families that have hitherto
emphasis on the chlorination of drinking water in been left out of coverage of the scheme.
the diarrhoea-prone areas. Besides this, the state • Strengthening district hospitals and develop-
government needs to arrange workshops and training these as training hubs: A district hospital
ing programmes on preventive measures against is an essential component of the district health
diarrhoea in daily life. system, and is envisaged to function as a sec-
Non-communicable Diseases: Target 3.4 ondary level of healthcare which provides cu-
To reduce the burden of non-communicable rative, preventive, and promotional health ser-
diseases, there is need to focus on the establish- vices to the people. It is expected to have good
ment of District Wellness Centres in all hospitals linkages with the referral facilities below the
for achieving early detection, treatment and re- district levels, that is, Sub-divisional Hospitals
ferral of NCDs. The situation can also be tackled (SDHs), CHCs, and PHCs, as well as external
through mass screening and spreading aware- institutions run by NGOs and private volun-
ness about NCDs (including diabetes, hyperten- tary health organisations.
sion, oral cancer, breast cancer, and cervix cancer) At present, the district hospitals in Uttarakhand
through ASHAs for population aged above 30 offer only a limited range of services based
years may help to combat the situation. For im- around clinical service delivery, but many es-
plementing these, it is essential to strengthen all sential communicable and non-communicable
health facilities by providing human resources and diseases cannot be diagnosed and treated in
other infrastructural facilities to ensure early detec- these hospitals. The shortage of manpower, es-
tion and treatment. For promotion of mental health pecially specialists, is the most pressing prob-
and well-being in the community, there is need to lem faced by these hospitals.
generate awareness about mental illness and However, district hospitals can become the
augment treatment facilities for mental patients. focus units for strengthening the delivery of
Traffic-related Accidents/Deaths/Injuries: Target 3.5 healthcare as they have the requisite technical
The following measures are required to deal with resources in terms of laboratories and skills to
road accidents: diagnose disease outbreaks and to provide in-
puts for district level planning, data analysis
• Establishment of trauma centres in government and management, among other functions. A
hospitals district hospital can serve as a model for pro-
• People/NGOs/villagers residing near national viding high-quality care with respect to patient
highways to be trained in administering first amenities, patient safety, and hospital man-
aid to injured persons. agement practices. Once the services provided
• According to Central Motor Vehicle Act 1889, by these hospitals have been strengthened by
all drivers and cleaners of all heavy vehicles to addressing their needs in terms of the hiring
be trained in administering about first aid and specialists, infrastructural development, and
to make it mandatory for such vehicles to carry procurement of the requisite equipment, the
first aid boxes. hospitals can become preferred sites for both
‘in-service skill building’ and ‘pre-service ed-
• Establishment of model emergency care facili- ucational programmes’ such as nursing diplo-
ties in accident-prone areas. ma courses and paramedical courses, which
Universal Health Coverage: Target 3.8 focus on developing skilled service providers
• To achieve the target by 2030 it is essential to to serve within the same district.
fill the present shortage in human resources by
recruiting new doctors and paramedical staff in
public health services. New PHCs, sub-centers
and CHCs also need to be established to fill the
gaps and address shortage of facilities in pub-
lic health infrastructure. The coverage of health
insurance can be increased by enrolling those
140
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
SECTION 3.2 basic education to all children. The literacy rate in

the state, at 78.8 per cent, is higher than the corre-
sponding national average of 74.04 per cent. The
SDG 4: Ensure Inclusive and Equitable Quality per capita public expenditure on education is the
Education and Promote Lifelong Learning highest in the country at around Rs. 1 lakh.
Opportunities for All
Uttarakhand is generally considered to be an
education hub, with a proliferation of educational
Education is viewed worldwide as a key ingredi- institutions that have come up particularly in the
ent for achieving progress in human development. plains, including some of the premier institutes of
Yet as late as in 2013, the latest year for which education in the country, such as Indian Institute of
data are available, globally 59 million children of Technology (IIT) at Roorkee, and the Doon School.
primary-school age were out of school.8 Thus,
access related challenges for education still exist
Target 4.1 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys
alongside challenges of quality and equity. If learn-
complete free, equitable, and quality primary
ing achievement is measured in the early grades,
and secondary education leading to relevant and
it will help in identifying gaps and formulating
effective learning outcomes
appropriate remedial action plans. Even as comple-
tion rates have been rising at both the primary and Access to education has expanded considerably
secondary levels in countries around the world, as over time, leading to a Net Enrolment Ratio (NER)
in the case of the state of Uttarakhand as well, the of 89.18 per cent for primary and 71per cent for up-
above-mentioned challenges of access, inclusion, per primary levels (see Appendix 3.2.2 and Annex-
equity and quality, need to be addressed fully. ure 4). The school completion rate is 100per cent for
the primary level and is very high at 96.76per cent
at the upper primary levels, while the incidence of
The vision for Goal No. 4 for Uttarakhand is: transition from the primary to upper primary lev-
By 2030, all children and youth of els is as high as 94.25 per cent.
Uttarakhand, irrespective of their At present, the shortage of teachers is not a con-
socio-economic backgrounds, will straint as observed from the low student–teacher
benefit from quality education at all ratios (15.63 for the primary and 12.14 for the up-
levels, both general and technical, enabling per primary levels). Rather, the efficiency of run-
them to realise their full potential. ning schools for only a few children is more of a
The vision for targets of Goal No. 4 are present- challenge. There are 2000 schools in the state with
ed in Appendix 3.2.1, followed by values for indi- less than 10 students enrolled in them.
cators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 3.2.2, The quality of education is a matter of serious
and Appendix 3.2.3 contains the schemes applica- concern as can be seen from the learning scores of
ble for Goal no. 4. Annexure 4 contains the detailed students at the end of the primary and of those at
information regarding indicators for Goal no. 4 for the end of the lower secondary levels, especially
baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023- for mathematics. These are based on State Level
24) and vision 2030. Achievement Surveys (SLAS) along the lines of the
The education-related targets have been dis- National Achievement Survey (NAS),which shows
cussed together in this report, given that the issues that 50per cent of the districts exhibit performance
of access, and quality are somewhat similar across that is less than the national average.
different levels and types of education. Education for the girl child has been made free
Baseline for Uttarakhand up to the graduation level. The NER at the second-
ary level, at just 51.28 per cent, is much lower than
The state of Uttarakhand has consistently focused
that at the elementary stage, though the retention
on providing free, compulsory, and high-quality
rate is quite high at 87.35 per cent. The quality of
8. Source: https://sustainabledevelopment.un.org/sdg4
141
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
education imparted is a major challenge as indicat- tutes (ITI s). Thus, the availability of technically
ed by the relatively poor performance in a national trained persons in the state has increased. Usually
level assessment, especially for mathematics. polytechnics offer three-year generalised diploma
In a move designed to provide encouragement courses, which are now expanding out of the tradi-
to the education sector, the government has intro- tional engineering areas to electrical and electron-
duced Information and Communication Technol- ics, instrumentation, computer sciences, and IT,
ogy (ICT) in secondary education.9 However, the among others. The aim of polytechnic education is
aim of implementing ICT in 500 out of 625 schools to create a pool of skilled people who can provide
has not yet been achieved.10 The government is a link between engineers and technicians. Such
also implementing training and orientation pro- professionals are reportedly in great demand in
grammes for the teaching and administration staff the MSMEs. At present, there are 131 polytechnics,
serving these schools, in collaboration with Micro- 20,604 diploma seats, and 32 courses in the state
soft India. The objective of introduction of voca- while 34 polytechnics are operating in the back-
tional education in 80 schools has, however, not yet ward/rural areas of the state. Another indicator
been achieved.11 of the availability of technical and vocational skills
is the student–teacher ratio in technical education,
which currently stands at 20:1.
Target 4.2 By 2030, ensure that all girls and Given the serious shortage of doctors and oth-
boys have access to quality early childhood er medical staff in Uttarakhand, the state urgently
development, care and pre-primary education so needsa good medical education system. However,
that they are ready for primary education at the time of creation of the state in 2000, it lacked
The incidence of pre-school enrolment of 3-5 year medical colleges and nursing institutions. The state
olds in the hills and plains is quite encouraging, inherited 5 ANM (Auxiliary Nursing and Midwife-
at 98,911 and 1,00,183 respectively. However, the ry) Schools and 1 GNM (General Nursing and Mid-
enrolment figures per anganwadi enrolment show wifery) school at the time of creation. Subsequent-
that an anganwadi must run for only eight chil- ly, the Srinagar Medical College was established
dren, on an average in the hill districts, and for in 2008 and since 2010, the erstwhile Forest Trust
around 14 students in the plains. Medical College in Haldwani has been converted
Target 4.3 By 2030, ensure equal access for all into a fully Government-owned Medical College.
women and men to affordable and quality Both these colleges offer post- graduate medical
technical, vocational and tertiary education, in- education ending in the award of MD/MS degrees.
cluding university
The percentage share of women in diploma seats Target 4.5 By 2030, eliminate gender dispari-
has a baseline value of 30 per cent and the number ties in education and ensure equal access to all
of diploma seats for women in the state is 6200. levels of education and vocational training for the
vulnerable, including persons with disabilities,
indigenous peoples and children in vulnerable
Target 4.4 By 2030, substantially situations
increase the number of youth and The indicators for Target 4.5 point to a high level of
adults who have relevant skills, includ- gender parity in primary and secondary schools,
ing technical and vocational skills, for at 0.89 and 0.92, respectively. The baseline level for
employment, decent jobs and entrepreneurship higher education is the highest for the state at 0.94.
Uttarakhand has become a hub for technical and Girls’ education has been made free till the gradu-
vocational education with the setting up of many ation level, thereby providing a boost to the effort
new polytechnics and Industrial Training Insti- to bridge gender gaps.
9. Source: http://www.mapsofindia.com/uttarakhand/education/
10. Minutes of meeting held on April 28, 2016 conducted by the MoHRD, Government of India.
11. Ibid.
143
Target 4.6 By 2030, ensure that all youth and a in basic language and mathematics. The vision for
substantial proportion of adults, both men and the individual segments of the education sector is
women, achieve literacy and numeracy presented in Table 3.6.
The level of literacy among youth aged 15-29 By 2030, Uttarakhand will be an important hub
years in the state is high and has a baseline level for education and skill development in the coun-
(2011-12) of 94.8 per cent, while the literacy level try, boasting of educational institutions imparting
of young women aged 15-29 years is 93.6 per cent. education of high and consistent quality. Towards
There is a considerable gender gap of 17.4 per cent this end, at the foundation level, by 2030, the state
in adult literacy with the literacy levels for males aims to provide all children access to age-appropri-
and females being 87.4 per cent and 70 per cent, re- ate schooling till the upper primary level.
spectively, though the literacy level of 78.8 per cent Vision 2030 for Target 4.1
in Uttarakhand is higher than the national average
(as per the 2011 Census). The gender gap is rela- The vision is to attain 100 percent NER for both
tively higher in Tehri, Uttarkashi, Rudraprayag, primary and upper primary levels by 2030. The
Bageshwar, Almora, Champawat, and a few other state may well attain the target for primary en-
districts. The hill districts have a much higher lit- rolment before 2030, given its current high fig-
eracy of 81.8 per cent, on an average, as compared ure of 89.18 per cent, but for the upper primary
to the corresponding figure of 73.3 per cent in the level, a steeper ascent will be needed towards
plains. The efforts of the state for inclusion are re- the target from a baseline of 71 per cent. At the
flected in the fact that literacy levels for the SC (74.4 secondary level, the aim is to attain an NER of
per cent) and ST (73 per cent) communities are not 80 per cent by 2030 from a baseline of 51.28 per
very far behind the state literacy averages. Howev- cent, and attaining the jump of 14 percentage
er, ensuring parity in education among various so- points from 66 per cent in 2023-24 to 80 per cent
cio-religious groups is as yet an unfinished agenda. in 2029-30 is a challenge, requiring concerted ef-
Vision 2030 for Uttarakhand forts. The provision of free secondary education
for girls is a great boost for gender equity in this
By 2030, the state not only aims to provide free and context. The state is placed ahead of most other
equitable primary and secondary basic education, states in the area of higher education with a GER
but also intends to ensure that around 90-95 per of 33.1 per cent. It presently has 29 post-gradu-
cent children reach a minimum level of proficiency ate institutions and 72 universities.
Table 3.6: Vision for the Education Sector

Education Segment Vision 2030
By 2030 ensure that all girls and boys complete free, equitable and quality second-
Elementary and ary education
Secondary By 2030 eliminate gender disparities in education and ensure equal access to all
levels of education
To convert Uttarakhand into a model state which promotes a very high level of
educational attainments for its population, and arts, science and culture, ensures
every individual’s personal development to its full potential, and eradicates pov-
erty and unemployment through appropriate training in employable skills of all
Higher Education who need them
To create an ambience and infrastructure for the growth of centres of excellence in
education and research as well as in the application of science and technology for
development.
Impart qualitative, employment-oriented modern technical education in working,

Technical Education
and hands-on training mode to youth at low and affordable cost.
144
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
The quality of education has been mentioned Vision 2030 for Target 4.3
as a major challenge area for the state. Thus, the The state also aims to ensure equal access for all
learning outcome targets are somewhat more chal- women and men to affordable and quality as well
lenging than those for enrolment because learn- as inclusive technical, vocational and tertiary edu-
ing outcomes depend crucially on the quality of cation, including university education. The share
the learning–teaching process within the school, of women in diploma seats will increase from the
though other inputs such as infrastructural fa- baseline 30 per cent to 40 per cent by 2030, and the
cilities, the availability of a sufficient number of number of diploma seats for women will increase
teachers, and their competence and training, and from 6200 to 20,000 by 2030.The access for higher
the home backgrounds of pupils would also have education will also increase, as reflected in rise in
some impact. Schools in Uttarakhand are well- the GER from the baseline level of 33.9 up to 60 by
placed in terms of the provision of drinking water 2030. The student–teacher ratio in the fifteen-year
and sanitation, though there is a need to add ramp period is slated to improve from 142:1 to 20:1.
availability for disabled children as well as access Vision 2030 for Target 4.4
to computers and electricity, to some extent, as can
By 2030, the access of youth and adults to skills,
be seen from the data in the Annexure. The avail-
as well as their access to decent jobs and entre-
ability of trained teachers, on the other hand, can
preneurship, must be improved. The skills thus
be seen to be quite good.
acquired must promote sustainable development.
In the context of the targets for language and The state plans to train 6.5 lakh youth and to pro-
mathematics, those for mathematics at the lower vide employment via the Uttarakhand Skill Devel-
secondary level would need substantial improve- opment Mission (UKSDM), which was started in
ment between all the time lines. There may be a February 2013. The plans are to provide skill train-
need to revise the targets depending on the levels ing to 44,000 youth up to 2020, followed by training
achieved by 2019-20. The drop-out shares for the for 79,199 youth up to 2024, and finally, to impart
primary and upper primary levels certainly seem skill training to a total of 1,51,920 youth up to the
achievable, but at the secondary level, it may not year 2030.
be as easy to wipe out the drop-out share of 12.65 It is envisaged that the number of polytechnics
per cent soon. This is particularly so because, at will go up from the baseline figure of 131 to 200 by
this level, a number of barriers work against chil- 2030, and the number of polytechnics in backward/
dren preventing their continuation of studies, such rural areas will go up to 50. The problem of inade-
as the pressure to get married or join earning work, quacy in teaching is sought to be addressed by not
and pushing them into shouldering more and more only improving the student–teacher ratio to 10:1
home responsibilities, including household chores through the creation of new teaching posts, but also
and unpaid care. by aiming to improve pedagogy and introducing
However, given that the only reliable way to new teaching methodologies like ICT (for increas-
assess quality is the periodic objective assessment ing the computer/student ratio), interactive mode
of learning outcomes, a set of ‘learning outcomes’ teaching, and curriculum revision, among others.
There are plans to increase the provision of industri-
parameters that is being devised by the NCERT to
al visits from the present level of 2 per semester to 6
assess learning levels of Class 1 to 8 students, will
per semester by 2030, and the number of industrial
be useful for the state.12 Reportedly, if the draft re-
training programmes from one to four per year.
port is finalised, and accepted by states, the states
will be required to incorporate these parameters For medical education, the vision is to com-
into the teaching methodologies of their respec- pletely do away with the shortage of doctors and
tive states. The move will shift the focus from rote health personnel in the state by 2030.
learning to competence-based learning. The level of entrepreneurship in higher
education, as reflected in the number of EDPs, will
12. Source: http://www.hindustantimes.com/education/ncert-proposes-survey-to-test-children-s-learning-skills/story-BfAS0iUgDctKPgBQclKFbM.html
145
Figure 3.5: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Primary Education in Uttarakhand
Figure 3.6: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Upper Primary Education for Uttarakhand
146
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Figure 3.7: Vision 2030 for Learning Figure 3.8: Vision 2030 for Learning
Performance at the End of Primary Level (Class Performance at the End of Lower Secondary
5) for Uttarakhand Level (Class 8) for Uttarakhand
Source: Based on information provided by Government of Uttarakhand Source: Based on information provided by Government of Uttarakhand
also be enhanced from the present figure of 20 to Vision 2030 for Target 4.5
40 by 2030, and the government seeks to attain an The vision is to attain gender parity of unity for
employability ratio of 60 per cent by 2030. both primary and secondary level, up from base-
The UKSDM has been an important initiative line levels of 0.89 and 0.92 respectively by 2030. For
in the area of skill development.13 A Memoran- higher education, the vision is to reach the Gender
dum of Understanding (MoU) has also been exe- Parity Index to reach 1.44 by enrolling more fe-
cuted with 30 Sector Skill Councils (SSCs) wherein males.
a total of 29,692 trainees have currently registered Vision 2030 for Target 4.6
for the skill development mission, with the bulk of
the trainees being in the age group of 21-30 years. The vision is that all youth (15-29 years) will attain
A total of 132 batches have been allotted across 30 full literacy of 100 percent by 2030.
sectors for training 3960 youth. The majority of the Challenges for Education Sector
youths have opted for training in the IT, hospitali- The challenges faced by the state in the education
ty, retail and medical nursing sectors. Accordingly, sector have been detailed below.
in the pilot phase, UKSDM started the skill training
programme in 12 sectors for 2034 enrolled youth. General Education
Training under this programme was imparted • Attaining quality learning outcomes is one of
by 33 private training partners in 68 batches. The the biggest challenges facing the state and in
UKSDM has to follow a mandate whereby the this context, teacher absenteeism needs to be
training partner has to ensure placement for 70 per curbed.
cent of the passed students. • Pre-school learning is not adequate.
Among other measures to promote skilling in • Infrastructure gaps remain, particularly in the
the state, a Skill Development Initiative Scheme provision of electricity and arrangements for
(SDIS) of the Vocational Training Provider (VTP) disabled students. There is an inadequate num-
has been started. The state also participated in the ber of toilets at the secondary level.
Skill India Mission Operation (SIMO) under the
guidance of National Skill Development Mission • Although the Mid-Day Meal Scheme is func-
(NSDM) to discuss Disbursement Linked Indica- tioning well, it is riddled with problems like
tors (DLIS). water scarcity and low wages of cooks.
13. www.uksdm.org, accessed on July 17, 2017.
147
Figure 3.9: Vision 2030 for Skill Capacity (000)

in Uttarakhand
Figure 3.10: Vision 2030 for Number of

Polytechnics in Uttarakhand
• The student–teacher ratio is 17:1, and there are and Business Development (NIESBUD).
2000 schools with less than 10 students. • Higher education institutions have unfilled va-
• There is a high incidence of drop-outs at the cancies for the post of Principals.
secondary level due to long distances between • In large urban centres such as Dehradun, im-
the high schools and students’ homes. parting tertiary education has been left to pri-
• For higher education, maintenance of quality vate institutions entailing payment of high
and ensuring the employability of graduates tuition fees, which prevents the marginalised
are key issues. In this context, the state govern- classes from accessing high-quality education
ment is taking measures such as enhancement for their children.
of soft skills, promotion of English-speaking • The remote areas of the state face the problem
courses, and enhancing computer literacy, and of Internet access and lack of laboratories for
the provision of training for self-employment students.
at the National Institute for Entrepreneurship
148
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Technical education of occasions like the Early Childhood Care and

The major problems faced by the polytechnic edu- Education (ECCE) Day.
cation system are: • Making pre-primary education a tier of school-
• Allocation of a very low budget for the voca- ing instead of a part of an anganwadi can im-
tional streams; prove learning outcomes at that level. The
pre-primary segment will include nursery,
• Inadequate infrastructure facilities and obso- Lower Kindergarten (LKG) and Upper Kin-
lete equipment; dergarten (UKG) classes with the provision of
• Lack of quality teachers; qualified nursery teachers.
• Inadequate policies for training teachers; Elementary, Secondary and Higher Secondary Educa-
• Non-availability of courses in the new and tion
emerging areas; • In order to improve the quality of education,
• Inadequate industry linkages; and residential co-educational institutes named Ra-
jiv Gandhi Navodaya Vidyalayas have been
• Lack of R & D in technical education.
set up in every district of the state, in addition
Medical education to model schools for every block that could in-
• In view of the severe shortage of doctors and spire improvements in education in the neigh-
other medical staff in Uttarakhand, aggra- bouring schools in the block. There are sugges-
vated by the absence of any kind of medical tions to increase the number of model schools
colleges and nursing institutions in the state in the state, as these schools are envisaged to
since its very inception in 2000, it is crucial to act as a hub of activities such as science exhi-
develop a system of medical education in Ut- bitions, competitions in the arenas of sports,
tarakhand. drawing and painting, and other academic/
co-curricular activities. Each model school has
a minimum of five teachers at the primary level
Strategy for Attaining Vision 2030 to impart quality education as compared to just
The following strategies are suggested for dealing two teachers in normal schools.
with the challenges in education at different levels • The quality of education being imparted will
in the state to attain the vision for 2030: be monitored with the help of frequent quar-
Pre-primary Education terly standardised assessments and the results
will be displayed on a portal.
• Discussions with stakeholders have revealed
the need for consolidating the pre-school edu- • At the primary school level, the government
cation component in the hills , so that the an- aims to provide the option of one teacher per
ganwadis, under the jurisdiction of the ICDS class on the lines of model schools, and im-
department, can be run in an efficient manner. provement of infrastructural facilities as well,
It has also been suggested that separate guide- while ensuring the provision of at least one
lines should be issued for anganwadis in the room per class at the elementary level.
hills, distinct from those in the plains, to enable • A strengthened monitoring mechanism as well
their efficient functioning. as the recruitment of Head Teachers wherever
• There are plans to provide pre-school kits and they are absent would be a means for improv-
a curriculum for all anganwadi centres (AWCs) ing regularity in the schooling process and in
and to promote capacity building of supervi- teacher attendance. The use of biometric ma-
sors and anganwadi workers (AWWs). chines for recording attendance has already
been started in 200 schools and is slated to
• Increased community participation can be
reach other schools in future. Constitution of a
achieved through measures such as celebration
Teacher Recruitment Board to ensure zero va-
149
cancy in schools is a strategy that could help • In keeping with the general preference for En-
create a pool of candidates through the conduc- glish-medium schools, a programme called
tion of a merit-cum-aptitude test. ‘Unnati’, aimed at improving the spoken En-
• The option of using solar energy could be ex- glish of secondary level students, is slated to be
plored to address the challenge of providing run in all government schools in the state.
electricity to all schools. Technical and Vocational Education
• Private participation is being tried for improv- • In the sphere of vocational education, it has
ing the quality of education in primary schools, been proposed to set up 120 secondary schools
especially for subjects like mathematics and offering three regular subjects from six streams
English. There have been successful pilots along with two vocational subjects.
for running SMART classes in many schools,
which can also be scaled up. • For promoting technology-enabled education,
there are plans to collaborate with the Indian
• Innovative teacher training can be started with
Institute of Technology (IIT, Mumbai), and a
a four-year integrated teacher training-cum-
private university, under the aegis of Uttara-
graduation courseto facilitate effective training
khand Science Education and Research Centre
of teachers under the system.
(USERC), an autonomous organization under
• In order to universalise secondary education, the Department of Science and Technology,
the state government plans to provide access Government of Uttarakhand. The aim is to de-
to the unserved habitations by opening new vise ways of grappling with problems like the
schools or upgrading the existing junior high lack of laboratories in remote areas.
schools.
• The cost of education delivery in hills is higher
• The government also needs to expand its pres-
than in the plains, which leads to higher costs
ence in higher education with the establish-
in the education sector in the state of almost
ment of multi-faculty government colleges up
2–3times the national average.14 This imbalance
to the post-graduate (PG) level.
can be redressed by providing more finances
• There is need for planning for physical infra- for the education sector in the hill state.
structure before opening up a college for ad-
mission. Medical Education
• E-learning can be used for higher education to • The shortage of doctors and nurses in the state
reach remote areas in the state. is being tackled by setting up five medical col-
leges and five new nursing colleges in Tehri,
• Vocational education can be started even at the
Almora, Pauri, Pithoragarh, and Chamoli, as
middle school level, running in parallel with
well as one nursing college at the medical col-
the general lessons.
lege at Haldwani. While three General Nursing
• Involving NGOs can be a fruitful exercise, in and Midwifery (GNM) schools are also being
view of low budget allocation. For instance, established,the in-take capacity is being in-
one NGO has offered enormous support to the creased in the existing medical colleges.
state government’s efforts by providing math-
ematics learning kits and access to laboratories
for practical lessons, besides promoting En-
glish speaking among students.
14. Uttarakhand 2013-14.pdf from PPT (state government).
150
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
SECTION 3.3 the state is not up to expectations, particularly be-

cause water runs off in the hilly terrains instead of
getting accumulated. This compels women to walk
SDG 6: Ensure Availability and Sustainable long distances in the mountainous region merely
Management of Water and Sanitation for All to access water, which has, in fact, become an in-
herent part of their lifestyle. Therefore ensuring the
sustainability of water sources, water management
Water and sanitation are critical to the survival of
and water recycling are crucial issues for this state.
people and the planet. Goal No. 6 addresses the is-
Sanitation and water supply are intertwined issues
sues relating to drinking water, sanitation and hy-
and improving public hygiene is of paramount im-
giene, and shifts the focus on to the issue of quality
portance both for enhancing human development,
and sustainability of water resources.
as well as preserving the environment. Thus Goal
In the year 2010, the United Nations General As- No. 6 completes the triad of goals considered here
sembly explicitly recognised the human right to wa- for focusing on human development.
ter and sanitation through Resolution 64/292, and
The vision for Uttarakhand state for Goal No. 6 is
acknowledged that clean drinking water and sani-
as follows:
tation are essential to the realisation of all human
rights. The Resolution calls upon States and interna- By 2030, Uttarakhand economy will provide
tional organisations to provide financial resources, all its citizens with safe drinking water and
and help in capacity-building and technology trans- access to sanitation such that open
fer to member countries, in particular the develop- defecation is ended and successful water man-
ing countries, to provide safe, clean, accessible and agement practices will ensure conservation of
affordable drinking water and sanitation for all.15 this scarce resource and reduce pollution.
Unsafe management of faecal waste and waste- The vision for targets of Goal No. 6 are
water continues to pose challenges for public presented in Appendix 3.3.1, followed by values
health and the environment.16 Although access to for indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appen-
drinking water has seen vast improvement in re- dix 3.3.2, and Appendix 3.3.3 contains the schemes
cent years, there is still a long way to go to cover applicable for Goal no. 6. Annexure 6 contains the
the entire population. Further, ‘water stress’, cal- detailed information regarding indicators for Goal
culated as the ratio of total fresh water withdrawn no. 6 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium
by all major sectors to the total renewable fresh term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
water resources in a particular country or region, Target 6.1 By 2030, achieve universal and
adversely impacts many countries in the world, equitable access to safe and affordable drinking
wherein not enough replenishment of usable water water for all
takes place. This affects both the sustainability of
natural resources, as well as development.
The provision of water supply and sanitation in
In Uttarakhand, in the upper reaches of the Hi-
the state is managed by a few autonomous bod-
malayas, there are around 917 glaciers which are
ies specifically created for this purpose, including
the source of all perennial rivers of northern India.
the Uttarakhand Pey Jal Sansadhan Vikas Evam
As such, this mountainous state is supplying fresh-
Nirman Nigam, Uttarakhand Jal Sansthan, and
water to all the population in the lower reaches of
Uttarakhand Rural Water Supply and
northern India, and is also the source of a number
Environment Sanitation Project (Swajal). The
of eco-system services such as wood, fibre, fuel,
Pey Jal Nigam is primarily responsible for the
food and helps to regulate the climate and pol-
preparation and construction of water supply
lution. However, despite the presence of glaciers
schemes, while the Jal Sansthan is responsible
and perennial rivers in the state, in addition to the
for operation and maintenance as well as tariff
plenty of rainfall it gets, the availability of water in
15. Source: http://www.un.org/waterforlifedecade/human_right_to_water.shtml

151
152
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
collection. The Swajal project is meant to oversee tations have partial coverage at 75 per cent to less
community-based drinking water schemes and than 100 per cent, and 5586 habitations have partial
sanitation facilities supported by the World Bank. coverage at 50per cent to less than 75 per cent. The
The Swajal project was initiated with a reform rest have coverage of even less than 50 per cent.
in approach focused on service delivery, to a Sector The total number of habitations affected by poor
Wide Approach (SWAp), which envisaged that the quality of water is 18.
rural local government, in partnership with rural Although only 64.3 per cent of the habitations
communities, would plan, design, construct, oper- in the villages has access to drinking water, the
ate, and maintain their water supply and sanitation fact that the relatively disadvantaged communities
schemes to ensure access to potable water for them, such as SCs and STs have better access to this vi-
in turn, providing them health and hygiene bene- tal resource is an encouraging sign. As of October
fits. Under this programme, the ownership of wa- 2016, around 5,82,000 households had piped water
ter supply is transferred to the communities after supply connections, out of which around 2,80,000
the capacity building of gram panchayats to pre- were rural households.
pare them to handle the water supply scheme suc- Urban areas: Out of a total number of 91 ULBs,
cessfully. It is also envisaged to set up water user just 21 or 23 per cent of the total ULBs have access
associations to ensure the success of water man- to 135 LPCD of water supply as per the norms.18
agement programmes. This project aims to support While 37 ULBs have access to 70–135 LPCD of wa-
the state’s sector reform process by augmenting its ter supply,33 ULBs do not get even 70 LPCD.
institutional capacity to implement, manage, and
sustain the state’s sector development programme As regards piped water connections, even
in water management while also contributing to- though 30 per cent of the population in the state
wards total sanitation.17 lives in urban areas, the situation pertaining to
piped water supply in urban areas is better than
The indicators for Target 6.1 refer to the statis- that of rural areas with 3,00,000 urban households
tics provided by the state government for the cov- having access to piped water, much higher than
erage of habitations as per the norms of water sup- the corresponding number of rural households.
ply, outreach of the National Rural Drinking Water
Programme, and outreach of piped water supply Vision 2030 for Target 6.1
(see Annexure 6). The 2030 vision for the provision of water supply
Rural areas: The government of Uttarakhand is is to reach improved drinking water and piped
committed to supply clean drinking water to each water supply to all households in rural and urban
and every habitation as per the standard norms of areas, including people from all socio-economic
40 LPCD, a target arrived at by taking the follow- groups by 2030. Thus it is primarily aimed at ex-
ing components into account: water needed for panding coverage, considering the somewhat lim-
drinking (3 LPCD), cooking (5 LPCD), bathing (15 ited access to water at present, assuming that the
LPCD), washing utensils and clothes (7 LPCD) and planned sources of finance from the State, Centre
sanitation (10 LPCD). The government is also con- and external agencies continue to be available. Re-
sidering a proposal to raise the water consumption garding Target 6.1, the 17,864 rural habitations,
norm from 40 LPCD to 70 LPCD. which currently do not get the requisite 40 LPCD
of water supply, are to be gradually covered en-
Presently, out of a total number of 39,209 habi- tirely by 2030. In the short-run, by 2019-20, an ad-
tations, only 21,345 habitations or 54 per cent of the ditional 6074 habitations will be covered, followed
total have access to water at the standard norms. by a total of 11,660 (including an additional 5586
The number of habitations getting less than 40 habitations) by the midterm, that is, by 2023-24. In
LPCD is 17,864, out of which, a total of 6204 habi- the subsequent years till 2030, the remaining 6204
17. Inputs fromhttp://ahec.org.in/wfw/web%20ua%20water%20for%20welfare/water/Arun_Dobhal.pdf and http://www.indiawaterportal.org/articles/wa-

ter-management-through-communities-uttarakhand-neelima-garg
18. The towns getting a water supply of at least 135 LPCD are Dehradun, five towns in the Haridwar district, four in Pauri, New Tehri, two towns in Chamo-
li, Uttarkashi, two towns in Udham Singh Nagar, and five towns in Nainital.
153
Figure 3.11: Vision 2030 for Reaching Water end open defecation, paying special attention
Supply to All Habitations to the needs of women and girls and those in
vulnerable situations

Uttarakhand has very recently been declared an
open defecation free state. In general, however, san-
rural habitations will receive water supply of 40 itation outreach is not fully adequate in the state
LPCD, thereby covering all the 17,864 habitations. and there is rural–urban disparity as well in terms
of sanitation as for the water supply. While the
Similarly, the gap of 70 ULBs faced by urban Uttarakhand government is committed to
households will also be covered gradually. First, safeguarding public health and hygiene in its rural
an additional 18 ULBs will receive water supply areas with the help of the Panchayati Raj Institu-
at 135 LPCD by 2019-20, followed by an additional tions (PRIs) as well as with community participa-
23 ULBs getting covered by 2023-24 in the medium tion, the data for Census 2011 indicate that nearly
term. The remaining 27 ULBs will be covered in the half (45.5 per cent) of the rural households in the
long term, that is, by 2030. state did not have latrines just 7 years ago, while
As per the other indicators under Target 6.1,the the corresponding figure in the urban areas was
aim would be to reach all rural habitations in terms just 6.4 per cent (see Appendix 3.3.2 and Annex-
of safe drinking water under the National Rural ure 6). According to the state government, the total
Drinking Water Programme (NRDWP) programme number of individual household and community
by 2030, as compared to the baseline figure of 64.5 toilets in urban areas at present is 1540. More up-
per cent. Similarly piped water too will reach all the dated information provided in 2015 survey19 by
unserved as well as under-served households in the NSSO has ranked Uttarakhand eighth among
both rural and urban areas. 26 states on the basis of households having sanitary
toilets and using them (see Table 3.7). Since the last
Census (2011), and particularly after the launch of
Target 6.2 By 2030, achieve access to adequate the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan in 2014, there seems
and equitable sanitation and hygiene for all and to have been a vast improvement in sanitation in
Box 3.3: Some Best Practices for Augmenting Water Supply in Uttarakhand
• Solar-based dual pump: The solar pump-based schemes are based on prefabricated/readymade material
and can be installed in a short time span of only 1-3 days. A water tank of 5000 litre capacity is proposed
to be installed from which water will be further distributed to standposts. Electrical energy is not needed
for running the pumps and moreover no manual labour is required for running the hand-pump.During the
night hours when there is no sunlight, the hand-pump can be operated manually.
• Solar pumping scheme from surface sources: In places where the surface water is below the level of habita-
tion/village, the surface sources are tapped by constructing a chamber and a solar-based pump is installed to
pump the water to a higher level. In Uttarakhand,four solar-based pumping schemes (including two under
the NRDWP and two under the district plan) are being constructed for a lift of about 100 metres.
• Riverbank filtration: Riverbank filtration has a profound impact on the lives of people living in the water-scarce
hilly areas of Uttarakhand and this innovative intervention is set to continue in future. Presently, UJS is de-
veloping more than 5 RBF sites in Uttarakhand on the basis of its past experience with RBF. In fact, RBF has
brought about a significant improvement in the year-round quality of pre-treated water in the state with re-
spect to the removal of turbidity and pathogens by RBF as compared to direct surface water extraction.
19. The survey covered 73,176 households in 3788 villages in India.

Source: http://www.mdws.gov.in/sites/default/files/Swachh%20Survekshan%20Report%20Eng.PDF
154
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
the rural areas of Uttarakhand. In fact, as of 2018, Target 6.3 By 2030, improve water quality by reduc-
Uttarakhand is one the few states in the country ing pollution, eliminating dumping and minimiz-
which has been declared as open defecation free, ing release of hazardous chemicals and materials,
according to the Economic Survey 2017-18. halving the proportion of untreated wastewater
Under the Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM), some and substantially increasing recycling and safe re-
pit latrines are being built in rural areas, but these use globally
Table 3.7: State Ranking among 26 States as per NSSO Survey (2015) on Sanitation
% People Using House-
% Households Having Ac-
% Households with hold/Community Toilets
Rank State cess to Sanitary Toilets and
Sanitary Toilets out of Households
Using Them
Having Toilets
8 Uttarakhand 80.5 99.6 80.2
4 Himachal Pradesh 90.4 99.7 90.1
Source: Swachh Survekshan Gramin, 2016 accessed at http://swachhbharatmission.gov.in/sbmcms/writereaddata/images/pdf/report/Swachh-Survek-
shan-2016.pdf on 7th May 2017
have no sewerage connection. Even in urban areas, Baseline for Uttarakhand

out of 91 ULBs, only 26 ULBs or 28.6 per cent of It is important to ensure efficient wastewater man-
the total are partially covered by sewerage connec- agement and solid waste management to achieve
tions, implying that 65 towns have absolutely no the targets of SDG 6. Unregulated disposal of
sewerage connection. Thus, the measures for im- waste into water bodies, and rivers, can seriously
proving public sanitation need to be adopted at an contaminate and pollute water and affect water
accelerated pace. With a rapidly rising urban pop- quality. Poor waste management also results in
ulation following massive migration to cities and greenhouse gas emissions, and the loss of valuable
the mushrooming of slums, the situation may be resources.
exacerbated in the future years.
An integrated waste management approach
Vision 2030 for Target 6.2 is thus a crucial part of sustainable development
The state has already attained the vision of becom- strategies. The 3R concept (Reduce, Reuse, Recy-
ing a defecation free state20. The sanitation situa- cle) encapsulates well this life-cycle approach to
tion in the state has improved recently. Overall, for waste. The following four main strategies should
the Targets 6.2 and 6.3 on sanitation, the state gov- comprise the framework for waste management:
ernment aims to focus on eradicating manual scav- i) minimise waste, ii) maximise environmentally
enging, adopting modern and scientific munici- sound waste reuse and recycling, iii) promote envi-
pal waste management practices, bringing about ronmentally sound waste disposal and treatment,
behavioural change regarding healthy sanitation and iv) extend waste service coverage.
practices, generating awareness about sanitation While waste prevention and minimisation are
and linking it with public health, augmenting the important, it is equally important to manage the
capacity of ULBs, and encouraging private partici- remaining solid and hazardous wastes with effec-
pation in this sector. tive measures. Hazardous waste, owing to its tox-
The target of building 27,640 toilets by 2019–20 ic, infectious, radioactive or flammable properties,
has already been achieved and open defecation has poses an actual or potential hazard to the health
been removed. Similarly, the share of ULBs with of humans, other living organisms, or the environ-
sewerage connections (partial) will be increased ment. Solid waste recycling and composting con-
from 28.6 per cent in the baseline to 100 percent by stitute an important component of the sustainable
2030. approach to solid waste management. In addition
to reducing the amount of waste, it also reduces the
20. Accessed at http://www.thehinducentre.com/multimedia/archive/03223/Economic_Survey_20_3223794a.pdf on 19th April 2018.
155
Box 3.4: Singapore Model of Recycling Sewage to Produce Drinking Water

Singapore’s water project has become an important model for the entire Asia Pacific region.
Singapore is surrounded by oceans but lacks adequate clean water sources, which led the government to launch a
project called “NEWater” in 2003. It involves recycling wastewater to make it highly purified water, providing a
more cost-efficient and eco-friendly solution.
With NEWater, Singapore has quickly gained an international reputation for efficient recycling of wastewater. The
initiative already supplies around one-third of the country’s water demand, almost all of it for industrial purposes,
and that number is expected to grow to more than half by the year 2060.
There are now four purification plants across Singapore, producing 430 million litres of NEWater a day. A majority
of what is produced is consumed by industry or by big cooling facilities. The rest is combined with nutrient-rich
reservoir water, purified again, and filled into bottles.
Source: https://www.watercorporation.com.au/water-supply/water-recycling/water-recycling-around-the-
world and other websites.
Figure 3.12: Reduce, Reuse, Recycle: the Life-cycle approach to Waste
Source: Accessed at http://www.uncrd.or.jp/content/documents/47113R%20Brochure-20Jan2017.pdf
demand for raw materials, leading to a reduction ers).22 Considerable bio-medical waste is also gen-
in resource extraction. For waste that is not suitable erated in Uttarakhand at 2257 kg per day.
for recycling or composting, incineration is often The Uttarakhand Jal Nigam has constructed
considered the next best option, provided the in- several sewage treatment plants for treating waste-
cineration plants comply with emission standards, water at Haridwar, Srinagar, Tapovan, and Dehra-
and the recovery of energy is usually possible from dun, among other locations, which are functional
waste incineration. If recycling, composting or in- and are discharging effluents as per the design. Pa-
cineration is excluded, waste can be landfilled on a rameters are being monitored by a committee com-
controlled site. However, uncontrolled landfilling prising members from the Jal Sansthan, Jal Nigam,
may lead to serious environmental problems for and Pollution Control Board.
soil and ground water, and should be avoided.21
A recent survey by the Central Pollution Con-
Solid waste management in Uttarakhand is as trol Board (CPCB) has found that industries are
yet in a fledgling state, with just 0.5 per cent of the largely responsible for polluting the river Ganga
municipal solid waste being processed as of Sep- with their effluents and several such industries are
tember 2015. In 431 wards, there is 100 per cent located in Uttarakhand, among other states along
door to door collection and transportation of sol- the course of the river. This is the reason why the
id waste. The total hazardous waste generated for Namami Gange project, an Integrated Conserva-
Uttarakhand in 2012 was 55,627 MT/year as com- tion Mission, launched by the Union Government
pared to 34,033 MT/year for Himachal Pradesh in in June 2014 with a budget outlay of Rs.20,000 crore,
2013 (except used oil and contaminated contain-
21. Source: Agenda 21. www.un-documents.net/a21-21.htm , http://www.un.org/esa/dsd/resources/res_pdfs/publications/trends/trends_Chemicals_min-

ing_transport_waste/ch4_waste_management.pdf and http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/natlinfo/indicators/methodology_sheets/consumption_production/
waste_treatment_disposal.pdf,
22. Estimate for Uttarakhand from Indiastat website and for Himachal Pradesh from http://hppcb.gov.in/HWI.pdf
156
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
has focused,to a large extent, on the construction of • The state government is also directed to ensure
sewage management plants in the states where it is that a separate place for segregation, storage,
operative, including Uttarakhand. The twin objec- and decentralised processing of solid waste is
tives of this mega project are effective abatement demarcated in the development plan for group
of pollution, conservation and rejuvenation of the housing or commercial, institutional or any
national river Ganga. other non-residential building exceeding 200
Vision 2030 for Target 6.3 dwellings.
Target 6.3 deals with the very crucial issue of • All local bodies and Gram Panchayats have
liquid and solid waste management. The approach been asked to prepare waste management
for future action here is to expand the coverage of plans.
the waste disposal mechanisms to all the wards. • All local bodies and Gram Panchayats have
There is also preparation for segregating the munic- been asked to ensure door-to-door collection of
ipal solid waste according to whether it is bio-de- segregated solid waste from all households in-
gradable or not, as well as separating out hazard- cluding slums and informal settlements, com-
ous waste and wet and dry bio-medical waste for mercial, institutional and other non-residential
its appropriate disposal. The scheme of 100 percent institutions.
door-to-door collection and transportation of waste
will also be expanded to all the wards in the coming • There is a general direction to waste generators
15-year period. A new initiative termed as Protocol not to throw waste in the street, bury or burn
Septage Management has been introduced follow- waste in public spaces, and throw waste in wa-
ing which each ULB and each Gram Panchayat will ter bodies/rivers, among other instructions,
manage septage hygienically. There will be sep- and also to segregate waste at source.
tage management units for collecting septage and • Local bodies have been instructed to send seg-
disposing it hygienically. The District Magistrates regated bio-degradable waste to processing
(DMs) and Sub-Divisional Magistrates (SDMs) will facilities, and also to construct, operate and
be in charge of managing the entire programme. maintain sanitary landfills as per norms.
Considering that unplanned and reckless Thus, the apex body in the state judiciary system
disposal of solid waste poses a grave threat not only has provided the necessary thrust for the issue of
to our immediate environment, but also to precious solid waste disposal to be treated with the gravi-
natural resources such as rivers and water bodies, ty it deserves. It has also underscored the need for
the Uttarakhand High Court has recently issued a raising public awareness regarding such issues,
detailed directive for the disposal of solid waste, since the overall objective of ensuring public hy-
in response to a Public Interest Litigation (PIL).23 giene will be met only when each individual is
Among other directives, some are mentioned below: aware and conscious about protecting the public
• All officers of municipal corporations, Nagar health and the environment, and acts upon it.
Panchayats, municipal councils and PRIs must
ensure that no garbage/rubbish is deposited in Target 6.4 By 2030, substantially increase water-use
any street or public place. efficiency across all sectors and ensure sustainable
• Municipal bodies may consider providing withdrawals and supply of fresh water to address
all households two dustbins free of cost for water scarcity and substantially reduce the num-
collecting wet and dry bio-medical waste. ber of people suffering from water scarcity
• The state government is directed to prepare the Baseline for Uttarakhand

state policy and strategy on solid waste man- Target 6.4 draws our attention to the burning
agement for the state in consultation with the issue of water scarcity and the need for a sustainable
stakeholders within three months, for both ru- withdrawal vis-à-vis supply of freshwater. Various
ral and urban areas. sustainability structures (350 numbers) such as rain
23. Source: http://www.livelaw.in/uttarakhand-hc-issues-landmark-guidelines-solid-waste-management-read-judgment/ posted on March 17, 2017,

accessed on April 2, 2017
157
water harvesting tanks, check dams, percolation • Sometimes habitations receiving adequate
ponds, and the installation of solar dual pumping water supply can also slip back to their earli-
plants on hand-pumps, among others, have been er water-deprived state (see Table 3.8). This
proposed by the government.24 slippage happens due to the drying up of rivers.
Vision 2030 for Target 6.4 Glacial retreat is said to have affected water
This target deals with improving water use effi- availability in the upper mountain regions.
ciency, and sustainable withdrawal so that water This leads to problems of access to both drink-
scarcity is mitigated. While no indicators have been ing water and moisture for cultivation. With
devised for the same, certain initiatives are being less than 40 per cent of the cultivated area in
proposed in order to improve water use efficiency. Uttarakhand being irrigated, irrigation of ag-
Some of these are as follows: riculture in Uttarakhand is quite limited. Al-
though irrigation can be expanded through the
• The irrigation department has suggested rain- extraction of groundwater, this is a doubly neg-
water harvesting using a cross-modular techni- ative proposition. First, it requires the mining
cal system to filter water. of groundwater; second, it usually uses diesel
• Sub-ground rainwater harvesting structures fuel. A better alternative would be to resort to
can be placed in a stable manner such that the rainwater harvesting for expanding irrigation
natural soil cover is not disturbed. This water in agriculture (Ahluwalia, et al., 2016).Howev-
will move in the sub-soil level and keep the er, one of the factors that goes against the use
ground moistened during the dry periods. State of rainwater harvesting is the un-priced nature
irrigation is quite scanty—85-90 per cent of the of groundwater along with subsidised diesel.
irrigation in the hills depends on rain. Hence, Reforms are needed to remove perverse incen-
this move will help protect the rabi crop while tives for rainwater harvesting.
also aiding tourism, and ensuring benefits for • Tubewells constitute the predominant source
overall agriculture. for drinking water in urban areas, which is re-
Challenges for Water and Sanitation sulting in the emergence of ‘dark zones’.
Despite the efforts of the state and central govern- Funds Crunch for Water and Sanitation
ments and outside funding agencies to counter it, • The availability of funds for water projects
water scarcity persists in the state and there are is- has declined in urban areas. Funds for water
sues regarding sanitation. The main challenges are conservation (chal-khal, etc.) have also been
detailed below. slashed.
Limited Outreach • Around 5–8per cent of the water supply
• The coverage of water supply is still limited; schemes are damaged each year due to natu-
17,864 habitations in the rural areas are not get- ral disasters such as heavy snowfall, excessive
ting even 40 LPCD of safe water. rain, landslides, and earthquakes. Thus, there
• The peri-urban areas have seen a huge influx of is a major requirement for renovation and res-
people due to migration and face water-related toration. The salaries paid to staff members are
challenges. very high as compared to the revenues earned,
leading to a paucity of resources for mainte-
Depletion of Natural Sources of Water nance and upgradation even though these are
• Gravity flow sources are preferred but these needed for ensuring sustainability.
are getting depleted, which is why projects are • Sewerage schemes are expensive, and tariffs
increasingly opting for pump-schemes wherein require revision. The tariff was last revised in
the project implementation is slower and get- 2013 by 15per cent per annum, but more cor-
ting costlier. The comparative costs for multi- rection is needed in it. In this case, too, salary
stage pump based supply are Rs. 8,000–25,000 requirements are high, and tariff revisions are
per capita vis-à-vis just Rs. 3,000–6,000 per cap- needed to generate funds for operations and
ita for gravity-based water supply. maintenance (O & M).
24. NRDWP power point presentation provided by Peya Jal Nigam.
158
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Table 3.8: Slipped Back Habitations in Uttarakhand

2017-18
Region Total Habitations 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 2016-17
(till date)
Garhwal 20,558 1924 221 3113 803 84
Kumaon 18,651 2210 49 1513 617 128
Total 39,209 4134 270 4626 1420 212

Source: Swachh Survekshan Gramin, 2016 accessed at http://swachhbharatmission.gov.in/sbmcms/writereaddata/images/pdf/re-
port/Swachh-Survekshan-2016.pdf on 7th May 2017
Swajal Schemes Not Entirely Successful ment of solid waste in a phased manner to all vil-
The World Bank-supported PRI-partnered Swajal lages are also an important part of the strategy, as
Yojana with the SWAp model has not delivered is the effective functioning of committees related to
unqualified success. Although some of the assets health, sanitation, and nutrition.
are still functioning well and collecting tariffs,ma- Finance
ny PRIs are unable to meet the O&M expenses and
are requesting the Government to take over. The Jal Nigam has envisaged the sourcing of fi-
nance from the existing sources of centrally spon-
Strategy for attaining Vision 2030
sored schemes, state government schemes, and
The broad approach to Vision 2030 has been dis- funding by agencies such as JICA, World Bank, and
cussed and the main strategies are mentioned for the Asian Development Bank (ADB). However,
enabling the state to attain SDG 6, with the help of stakeholders in the sector have indicated decreas-
the existing schemes. ing availability of funds for water and sanitation
Water supply projects. In view of this, private sector participa-
The key strategy of the state government would tion should be encouraged.
be to increase the outreach of water supply over The Panchayati Raj department envisages the
the 15-year period in a phased manner so that by use of the resources from the Fourteenth Finance
2030, all households and all unserved/underserved Commission for expanding the sewerage system in
areas have access to not only safe drinking water, rural areas.
but also piped water connections. The expansion of
water supply and sanitation services in the rural ar- Land Allotment
eas, in particular, is hindered by the hilly terrain of The construction of sanitary landfills necessitates
the state. This difficult terrain and the frequent oc- considerable land allotment. This is a problem for
currence of natural calamities also create challenges the forested and mountainous economy of Uttara-
for maintaining water supply schemes smoothly. A khand. However, in the interests of preserving/
portion of the planned budget should be kept aside
restoring its pristine environment including wa-
for such contingencies so that the access to water
ter bodies, and rivers, land must be provided for
services to citizens is not hampered round the year.
waste management.
Sanitation
Monitoring and Evaluation
The state of Uttarakhand has been declared an
Open Defecation Free state. Public sanitation fa- The process of monitoring and evaluation must
cilities need imrovement, which implies that these be built in at every stage for projects over the pro-
issues must be addressed urgently. posed 15-year period. In particular, there should
be online monitoring of the functioning of sewage
Public awareness about the need for maintain-
treatment plants to ensure that the release of efflu-
ing cleanliness should be raised, which should be
linked to overall public health. The department of ents can be monitored continuously. The existing
Panchayati Raj intends to stop the use of hands schemes should be reviewed carefully so that the
while using latrines. Effective implementation of lessons learnt can feed into future schemes and
the Swatch Bharat Abhiyan and bringing manage- projects.
159
Appendix 3.1.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 3: Good Health and Well-Being
Target 3.1 By 2030, reduce the global maternal mortality ratio to Reduce MMR to less than 70 per 1,00,000 live births gradually by
less than 70 per 100,000 live births 2030, down from the baseline level of 165
Target 3.2 By 2030, end preventable deaths of newborns and Reduce IMR from a baseline level of 40 to 25 per 1000 live births
children under 5 years of age, with all countries aiming to reduce by 2030 and to reduce under five mortality rates from a baseline
neonatal mortality to at least as low as 12 per 1,000 live births and level of 47 to less than 25 per 1000 live births by 2030. More than
under-5 mortality to at least as low as 25 per 1,000 live births 95 percent children will be fully immunized by 2030.
Target 3.3 By 2030, end the epidemics of AIDS, tuberculosis, Eliminate HIV/AIDS, nearly eliminate malaria and leprosy,
malaria and neglected tropical diseases and combat hepatitis, reduce incidence of TB by 80 % and substantially reduce incidence
water-borne diseases and other communicable diseases of Hepatitis A, B and diarrhoea by 2030
Reduce mortality from non-communicable diseases gradually

from baseline level eventually to 16% by 2030. For share of people
(15-69) years with blood pressure, achieve a reduction to 9 percent
Target 3.4 By 2030, reduce by one third premature mortality from
by 2030. For the share of people with raised cholesterol the vision
non-communicable diseases through prevention and treatment
is to almost eliminate the problem by attaining a share of just
and promote mental health and well-being
4.5% people with this problem by 2030. There will an aim for a
30% reduction by 2030 in the share of people with mental health
problems.
Target 3.5 Strengthen the prevention and treatment of substance The estimated number of hard drug users will be halved from the
abuse, including narcotic drug abuse and harmful use of alcohol baseline level of 3000 to 1500 by 2030.
Drastically reduce the number of road accidents by 2030, so that

Target 3.6 By 2020, halve the number of global deaths and injuries
the baseline of number of accidents (1342), deaths (801) and inju-
from road traffic accidents
ries (1497) are brought down to only 168, 100 and 175 respectively.
Target 3.7 By 2030, ensure universal access to sexual and repro- By 2030, increase the contraceptive prevalence rate to 66 percent,
ductive health-care services, including for family planning, infor- the ANC coverage (at least 4 visits) to 100 percent, institutional
mation and education, and the integration of reproductive health delivery to 100 percent, the PNC coverage for Mothers to 100 per-
into national strategies and programmes cent and in 2030, maintain the TFR at the current level, 2.1.
Target 3.8 Achieve universal health coverage, including financial

The gaps in availability of health personnel will be sought to
risk protection, access to quality essential health-care services and
be filled in the coming years, for doctors and paramedicals, in
access to safe, effective, quality and affordable essential medicines
particular.
and vaccines for all
Target 3.9 By 2030, substantially reduce the number of deaths and

illnesses from hazardous chemicals and air, water and soil pollu-
tion and contamination
160
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 3.1.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 3: Good Health and Well-Being
Baseline Vision
Targets/Indicators for SDG 3
2016-17 2030
3.1 MMR (per 100,000 live births) 165 70/1,00,000 live birth
By 2030, end preventable deaths of new-borns and children
3.2
under 5 years of age
a1 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Total) 40 NMR25 / 1,000
a2 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Rural) 39 25/1000
a3 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Urban) 44 25/1000
b1 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Total) 47 25 / 1000
b2 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Rural) 46 25 / 1000
b3 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Urban) 49 25 / 1000
c Immunization of children (fully immunized) (%) 79.6 >95
By 2030, end the epidemics of AIDS, tuberculosis, malaria and

3.3 neglected tropical diseases, and combat hepatitis, water-borne
diseases and other communicable diseases
Prevalence of HIV and AIDS across different types of high-risk
a 0.11 0
categories
29,
b Prevalence of TB per 100,000 population 145
80%
c Confirmed malaria cases (number) 914 Near to elimination
d1 Registered prevalence rate (per 10,000 of pop) for leprosy 0.24 Near to elimination
d2 Kala-azar (visceral leishmaniasis) cases (number) 2 0

d3 Average prevalence of lymphatic filariasis (%) 0 0
d4 Cases of dengue (number) 2046
d5 People dying annually due to Japanese encephalitis (number) 0 0
e1 3.3e1 Confirmed cases of Hepatitis A (number) 10677 7783

e2 3.3e2 Confirmed cases of Hepatitis B (number) 254 185
f1 Annual incidence of diarrhoea (per 1,000) 10.3 7.51
g1 Confirmed cases of influenza (H1N1) (number) 20
By 2030, reduce by one third premature mortality from non-com-

3.4 municable diseases (NCDs) through prevention and treatment
and promote mental health and well-being
Mortality from non-communicable diseases attributed to cardio-

A 48% 16%
vascular disease, cancer, diabetes or chronic respiratory disease
By 2030,reduce by one third premature mortality from

B - -
non-communicable diseases through prevention and treatment
b1 People aged 15–69 years with high total cholesterol (%) 13.9% 4.5%
b2 People (aged 15–69 years) with high blood pressure (%) 26.8% 9%
c By 2030,promote mental health and well-being - -
c1 Mental health problems (%) - 30% reduction
Contd...
161
Baseline Vision
2016-17 2030
c2 Suicide rate (per 100,000 population) - -
Strengthen the prevention and treatment of substance abuse,
3.5
including narcotic drug abuse and harmful use of alcohol
a Hard drug users (estimated number) 3000 1500
Road Accidents
Road Accidents
-1342,Deaths- 801,Inju-
3.6 By 2020, halve the number of global deaths and injuries from -168,Deaths- 100,Injuries
ries – 1497(January to
road traffic accidents – 175,
October)
By 2030, ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive

health-care services, including for family planning, informa-
3.7 tion and education, and the integration of reproductive health
into national strategies and
programmes
a Contraceptive prevalence rate (modern methods) (%)
Current use of modern family planning methods (currently mar-

a1 49.3 65.96
ried women aged 15–49 years) (Total)

a2 49.8 66.46
ried women aged 15–49 years) (Rural)

a3 48.4 65.06
ried women aged 15–49 years) (Urban)
b Antenatal care (ANC) coverage (at least four visits) (%)
b1 Mothers who had at least four antenatal care visits (%) (Total) 30.9 100
b2 Mothers who had at least four antenatal care visits (%) (Rural) 25.7 100
b3 Mothers who had at least four antenatal care visits (%) (Urban) 41.2 100
c Institutional delivery (%)
c1 Institutional delivery (%) (Total) 68.6 100
c2 Institutional delivery (%) (Rural) 63.7 100
c3 Institutional delivery (%) (Urban) 79.1 100
d Postnatal Care (PNC) for mothers (%)
Mothers who received postnatal care from a doctor/nurse/

d1 LHV/ANM/midwife/other health personnel within two days of 54.8 100
delivery (%) (Total)
Mothers who received PNC postnatal care from a doctor/nurse/

delivery (%) (Rural)
Mothers who received postnatal care from a doctor/nurse/

delivery (%) (Urban)
e Total Fertility Rate (TFR) (births per women)
e1 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Total) 2.1 2.1
e2 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Rural) 2.2 2.1
e3 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Urban) 1.8 2.1
Contd...
162
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Baseline Vision
2016-17 2030
Achieve universal health coverage, including financial risk

protection, access to quality essential health-care services and
3.8
access to safe, effective, quality and affordable essential medi-
cines and vaccines for all
a Government health expenditure as % of GSDP

b Shortage of doctors at PHCs 55.78 % 0
c Shortage of obstetricians and gynaecologists 91% 0
d Shortage in the number of functioning PHCs 94% 0
e Shortage in the number of ANMs 0 0
27.15
f Number of doctors per lakh population 13.91
(7% Increase)
41.27
g Number of paramedicals per lakh population (hills and plains) 38.57
(7% Increase)
h Number of hospitals beds per lakh population 1032 1750
i Number of PHCs per lakh population 2.58 4.00
j Number of maternity and child care centres per lakh population 18.97 26.50
Number f other health centres per lakh population ( hills and
k 3.44 10.00
plains)
Number of persons covered under health insurance(Rural) 24,28,275 35,38,978
Number of persons covered under health insurance(Urban) 33,53,350 48,87,160
Number of persons covered under health insurance(Total) 57,81,625 84,26,138
By 2030, substantially reduce the number of deaths and illness-

3.9 es from hazardous chemicals and air, water and soil pollution
and contamination
Appendix 3.1.3
Schemes for SDG 3: Good Health and Well-Being
3.1 National Health Mission including NRHM Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Yojana
3.2 HRD in Health and Medical Education Integrated Child Development Services
National Mission on Ayush including Mission on Medicinal

3.3 Mukhya Mantri Swasthya Suridrikaran Yojana
Plant
3.4 National Aids and STD control Programme Cashless Health Scheme for Government employees
3.5 Mukhyamantri Bima Swasthya Yojana
3.6 Introduction of PPP-based health support system
3.7 State Health Mission
3.8 District Family Welfare Bureau
3.9 Child Survival and Safe Motherhood Programme
163
Appendix 3.1.4
Vision for Ayurvedic, Unani Services and Homeopathy
S. 2017- 2020- 2024-

Targets/Indicators Baseline
No. 2020 2024 2031
1 under
1 Up to 50 bedded hospitals at the district headquarters construc- 3 7 12
tion
2 Establishment of Ayurvedic and Unani hospitals 549 10 30 80
3 Upgradation of running Ayurvedic and Unani hospitals 8 5 15 35
Conducting special medical procedures like panchkarma/ksharsutra in the

4 38 10 30 80
already running Ayurvedic hospitals
5 Establishment of new Ayurvedic colleges in the Garhwal and Kumaon divisions 0 1 2 0

1 under
6 Establishment of a Unani college in Uttarakhand construc- 3 7 12
tion
7 Establishment of an AYUSH Gram in each district of the state 0 3 8 13
8 Training of medical officers and pharmacists 92 150 450 1150
9 Formation of herbal garden with the help of Centrally sponsored schemes 0 25 50 200
1
Establishment of an Ayurvedic Research Institute in Charakdanda, the birth- Second Third
10 0 First
place of Maharishi Charak phase phase
phase
1
Strengthening of the Rishikul Government Drug Testing Lab, Haridwar, as a 500
11 500 1500 3000
high-technology drug testing Lab medicine
samples
Starting diploma courses in Panchkarma and in a fundamental subject in the
12 0 4 8 14
Government Rishikul PG College, Haridwar
13 Construction of the buildings of all Government Ayurvedic and Unani hospitals 252 80 205 297
Increasing the manufacturing capacity of Rishikul/Gurukul Government 50 medi-

14 100 277 0
Ayurvedic pharmacies cines
Organisation of an Aarogya mela and camp in each district for generating
15 3 15 35 85
awareness about the Ayurvedic system of medicine
Identification, cultivation and marketing of herbal medicines along with herbs of

16 0 1 0 0
the Sanjeevani family
To attract tourists, establishment of yoga grams at places identified by the gov-

17 0 12 22 42
ernment
1 PG
med-
18 Setting up homeopathic medical colleges 1
ical
college
In 20
Re-
CHCs
In 25 main-
and 14
CHCs ing 41
19 Setting up homeopathic Hospitals 110 PHCs.
and 14 CHCs
Also in
PHCs and 17
Ayush
PHCs
grams
164
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 3.2.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 4: Quality Education
To attain NER of 100% for primary and upper primary levels and
Target 4.1 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys complete free, to attain NER of 80% at the secondary level. The drop-out rates
equitable and quality primary and secondary education leading to will be reduced to zero at all the three levels, while the targeted
relevant and effective learning outcomes learning outcomes, (for reading and mathematics) will be 95% for
primary and lower secondary levels, except for 90% for mathemat-
ics at lower secondary level by 2030.
Target 4.2 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys have access to
quality early childhood development, care and pre-primary edu-
cation so that they are ready for primary education
Target 4.3 By 2030, ensure equal access for all women and men to To increase the share of women in diploma seats to 40% and the
affordable and quality technical, vocational and tertiary educa- number of seats for women to 20,000 by 2030. The access to higher
tion, including university education will rise from 33.9 at present to 60 by 2030 and student
teacher ratio will improve in the same period. The vision for High-
er Education is to attain GER of 60% by 2030.
To skill 151,920 youth up to 2030, and to increase the number of

polytechnics to 200, and those in rural/backward areas to 50 by
Target 4.4 By 2030, substantially increase the number of youth and 2030. The student–teacher ratio in polytechnics will be improved
adults who have relevant skills, including technical and vocational to 10:1 by 2030 by creation of new teaching posts. New pedago-
skills, for employment, decent jobs and entrepreneurship gies will be introduced. Employability and entrepreneurship in
higher education will be greatly enhanced. The vision for medical
education is to fill the shortage of doctors and health personnel in
the state by 2030.
Target 4.5 By 2030, eliminate gender disparities in education To attain gender parity of unity for both primary and secondary
and ensure equal access to all levels of education and vocational level, up from baseline levels of 0.89 and 0.92 respectively by 2030.
training for the vulnerable, including persons with disabilities, For higher education, the vision is to reach the Gender Parity
indigenous peoples and children in vulnerable situations Index to reach 1.44 by enrolling more females.
Target 4.6 By 2030, ensure that all youth and a substantial pro-
All youth (15-29 years) will attain full literacy of 100 percent by
portion of adults, both men and women, achieve literacy and
2030.
numeracy
Target 4.7 By 2030, ensure that all learners acquire the knowledge
and skills needed to promote sustainable development, including,
among others, through education for sustainable development
and sustainable lifestyles, human rights, gender equality, promo-
tion of a culture of peace and non-violence, global citizenship and
appreciation of cultural diversity and of culture’s contribution to
sustainable development
165
Appendix 3.2.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 4: Quality Education
By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys complete free, equitable and quality primary and sec- Baseline Vision
Target 4.1
ondary education leading to relevant and effective learning outcomes 2016-17 2030
All girls and boys complete free, equitable primary and secondary education
4.1a Net enrolment rate in primary education (%) 89.18 100

4.1b Net enrolment rate in upper primary education (%) 71.00 100
4.1c Primary cycle retention rate (%) 86.15 100
4.1d Upper primary cycle retention rate (%) 98.62 100
4.1e Primary level completion rate (%) 100 100
4.1f Upper primary level completion rate (%) 96.76 100
4.1g Net enrolment rate in secondary education (%) 51.28 80
Quality primary and secondary education
4.1h Trained teachers in total number of teachers for primary education (%) 95.0 100
4.1i Trained teachers in total number of teachers for upper primary education (%) 100.0 100
4.1j School with access to basic drinking water facilities—Primary (%) 98.2 100
4.1k School with access to basic drinking water facilities—Upper Primary (%) 94.5 100
4.1l School with access to basic toilet facilities—Primary (%) 97.0 100
4.1m School with access to basic toilet facilities—Upper Primary (%) 96.0 100
4.1n School with access to basic electricity facilities—Primary (%) 73.2 100
4.1o School with access to basic electricity facilities—Upper Primary (%) 82.5 100
4.1p School with ramp and material for students with disability—Primary (%) 66.1 100
4.1q School with ramp and material for students with disability —Upper Primary (%) 59.5 100
Effective learning outcomes

4.1r Learning score (reading) at the end of primary level (class 5) 61.18 100
4.1s Learning score (math) at the end of primary level(class 5) 61.69 100
4.1t Learning score (reading) for end of lower secondary level(class 8) 62.39 100
4.1u Learning score (math) for end of lower secondary level (class 8) 34.35 100
Dropouts
4.1v Drop-out at the primary level (%) 3.16 0
4.1w Drop-out at the upper primary level (%) 1.69 0
4.1x Drop-out at the secondary level (%) 12.65 0
Target 4.2 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys have access to quality early childhood development, care
and pre-primary education so that they are ready for primary
education
4.2a Enrolment (number) in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (hills) 2,86,546 NA
4.2b Enrolment per AWC in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (hills) 8 NA
4.2c Enrolment (number) in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (plains) 1,00,183 NA
Contd...
166
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
4.2d Enrolment per AWC in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (plains) 14 NA
Target 4.3 By 2030, ensure equal access for all women and men to affordable and quality technical, voca-
tional and tertiary education, including university
4.3a Share of diploma seats for women (% of total) 30 40

4.3b Number of diploma seats for women 6200 20,000
4.3c Ratio of boys enrolment in technical and vocational education
4.3d Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) at higher education 33.9 60
4.3e Net Enrolment Ratio (NER) at higher education NA 58
4.3f Pupil–teacher ratio at higher education 142:1 20:1
Target 4.4
By 2030, increase by 75 percent the number of youth and adults who have relevant skills, includ-
ing technical and vocational skills, for employment, decent jobs and entrepreneurship
4.4a Number of students taking technical education in polytechnics (000) 20.604 50

4.4b Present skill training capacity (000) (State Skill Development
151.92
Mission)
4.4c Number of polytechnics 131 200
4.4d Number of polytechnics in backward/rural areas 34 50
4.4e Students/teachers ratio in technical education 20:1 10:1
4.4f Entrepreneurship (no. of EDPs) in higher education 20 40
4.4g Employability ratio 40 60
Target 4.5
By 2030, eliminate gender disparities in education and ensure equal access to all levels of educa-
tion and vocational training for the vulnerable, including persons with disabilities, indigenous
peoples and children in vulnerable situations
4.5a Gender Parity Index (GPI) (primary school) 0.89 1.00

4.5b Gender Parity Index (GPI) (secondary school) 0.92 1.00
4.5c Gender Parity Index (GPI) Higher Education 0.94 1.44
Target 4.6 By 2030, ensure that all youth and at least 95 percent of adults, both men and women, achieve
literacy and numeracy
4.6a Literacy rate of youth 15-29 years (%) 94.8 100.0

4.6b Literacy rate of youth 15-29 years (women) (%) 93.6 100.0
4.6c Numeracy all (15 years and older) (%)
4.6d Numeracy female (15 years and older) (%)
Target 4.7
By 2030, ensure that all learners acquire the knowledge and skills needed to promote sustainable
development, including, among others, through education for sustainable development and sus-
tainable lifestyles, human rights, gender equality, promotion of a culture of peace and non-vio-
lence, global citizenship and appreciation of cultural diversity and of culture’s contribution to
sustainable development
4.7a Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on SDGs
IEC , Edu- 4.7b Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on human rights

cation and
Awareness 4.7c Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on gender equality
on SDGs
4.7d Number of programmes for promotion of culture of peace and non-violence
4.7e Number of programmes on cultural diversity
167
Appendix 3.2.3
Schemes for SDG 4: Quality Education
Centrally Sponsored Schemes Direct State Intervention Scheme
Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA) Free textbooks and uniforms
Mid Day Meal Programme Establishment of Rajiv Gandhi Navodaya Vidyalayas
Rashtriya Madhyamik Shiksha Abhiyan (RMSA) Establishment of Kasturba Gandhi Balika Vidyalaya
Support for educational development including teachers’ training

Free reimbursement of fees under RTE
and adult education
Free education for girls up to intermediate Implementation of ICT in Government schools
Scheme to provide education to madrasas, minorities and disabled Hostel for girls
Rashtriya Ucchatar Shiksha Abhiyan (RUSA) Free textbooks and uniforms
Uttarakhand Skill Development Mission
Appendix 3.3.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 6: Clean Water and Sanitation
6.1 By 2030, achieve universal and equitable access to safe and To reach improved drinking water and piped water supply to all
affordable drinking water for all. households in rural and urban areas, including people from all
socio-economic groups by 2030.
6.2 By 2030, achieve access to adequate and equitable sanitation Provide individual/community toilets to all house-holds, rural
and hygiene for all and end open defecation, paying special and urban, and to expand public sewerage facilities to all villages
attention to the needs of women and girls and those in vulnerable and towns, by 2030. State achieved Open defecation free status in
situations. 2018.
Liquid and solid waste management/treatment will be given

6.3 By 2030, improve water quality by reducing pollution, elimi-
priority so that the natural water sources such as water bodies,
nating dumping and minimizing release of hazardous chemicals
rivers, lakes, etc. are not contaminated and hazardous chemical
and materials, halving the proportion of untreated wastewater
waste generation will be minimised and such waste disposed of
and substantially increasing recycling and safe reuse globally.
properly.
6.4 By 2030, substantially increase water-use efficiency across

all sectors and ensure sustainable withdrawals and supply of
freshwater to address water scarcity and substantially reduce the
number of people suffering from water scarcity.
6.5 By 2030, implement integrated water resources management

at all levels, including through transboundary cooperation as
appropriate.
6.6 By 2020, protect and restore water-related ecosystems, includ-

ing mountains, forests, wetlands, rivers, aquifers and lakes.
168

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 3.3.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 6: Clean Water and Sanitation
Target/Sub-target and Indicators
Target 6.1 Baseline Vision

By 2030, achieve universal and equitable access to safe and affordable drinking water 2016-17 2030
6.1a1 No. of rural habitations covered by water supply of 40 LPCD (litres per capita per day) 21,345 17,864*
6.1a2 No. of urban ULBs covered by water supply of 135 LPCD 21 70*
6.1bTotal rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) 64.3 100
6.1b1 SC-dominated rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) 70.8 100
6.1b2 ST-dominated rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) 100 100
All house-
6.1c Households with access to piped water supply** (number) 5,82,621
holds
All house-
6.1c1 Households with access to piped water supply (no.) (Rural) 2,79,964
holds
All house-
6.1c2 Households with access to piped water supply (number) (Urban) 3,02,657
holds
Target 6.2
By 2030, achieve access to adequate and equitable sanitation and hygiene for all and end open
defecation, paying special attention to the needs of women and girls and those in vulnerable
situations
6.2c ULBs with partial sewerage (%) 28.6 100
Target 6.3
By 2030, improve water quality by reducing pollution, eliminating dumping and minimizing haz-
ardous chemicals and materials, halving the proportion of untreated waste water and increasing
recycling and safe reuse
6.3a Municipal solid waste processing (total) (%) under Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM)^ 0.5
6.3b Municipal solid waste processing (equivalent) (%) under SBM^ 5.07 100
6.3c No. of wards with 100% door to door collection and transportation of solid waste^^ 431 703
6.3d Amount of hazardous waste generation (metric tonne per annum) 55,627 0
6.3e Amount of bio-medical waste generation (kg/day) 2257.41
Target 6.4
By 2030, substantially increase water-use efficiency across all sectors and ensure sustainable
withdrawals and supply of freshwater to address water scarcity and substantially reduce the
number of peoplesuffering from water scarcity
Target 6.5
By 2030, implement integrated water resources management at all levels, including through
trans-boundary cooperation as appropriate
Contd...
169
Target 6.6$
By 2020, protect and restore water-related ecosystems, including mountains, forests, wetlands,
rivers, aquifers and lakes
6.6a Afforestation (hectare) 2110 14604
6.6b Afforestation survival rate 78%
6.6c Soil conservation work(hectare) 21450 60060

6.6e Afforestation for water bodies(hectare) Included in 6.6 a
6.6h Afforestation for lakes (hectare) Included in 6.6 a
6.6i Afforestation survival rate for lakes
6.6j Number of chal-khal (pits and ponds) constructed 15,312 1,14,715
6.6k Area covered under pits and ponds (chal-khal) (hectare) 168 1271
**Source: State government. Refers to Piped water into dwelling/yard/plot, public tap/standpipe, tubewell or borehole, protected dug well or spring, rainwater, community RO plant.
Notes:* Refers to additional habitations to be covered for all years except the baseline.
^Data upto September 4, 2015 from Handbook of Urban Statistics 2016, GoI; ^^Data from Handbook of Urban Statistics, GoI, is 87
$: The information is based on the following assumptions:
6.6 a Afforestation (hectare): Actual for the year 2016-17 and target for the remaining period in the GPWDP.
6.6 b Afforestation survival rate: Based on the sample study.
6.6 c Soil conservation work (hectare): 10% of the total area of non-arable land within a microwatershed.
6.6 j Number of chal- khal (pits and ponds) constructed: Actual for the year 2016-17 and target for the remaining period in the GPWDP.
6.6 k Area covered under pits and ponds (chal-khal) (hectare): Calculated on the basis of the area under the recharge pit (1cum) 1sq.m. and area under the water pond (125 cu.M.) 96 sq.m.
Appendix 3.3.3
Schemes for SDG 6: Clean Water and Sanitation
Target 6.1 Swachh Bharat Abhiyan
National River Conservation Programme

Target 6.2
Swajal Dhara
Target 6.3 Namami Ganga Solid Waste Management
Strengthening of river bank filtration technology in urban

Target 6.4 Urban Sewage Treatment Plants
areas
Target 6.5 Rural Water and Sewerage Scheme Nagariya awasthapana suvidhaun ka vikas
Target 6.6 Jalagam/Watershed Management Plans
170
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
171
No society is entirely homogeneous and the fruits employment. Gender-based violence and
of economic development are often not shared eq- discrimination will end and women will be
uitably among various segments of the populace. empowered as a result of stronger laws and
Social development is, therefore, an important better participation in leadership in all spheres.
area of focus for policy-makers as all the axes of The vision for targets of Goal No. 5 are present-
exclusion must be addressed. These axes of exclu- ed in Appendix 4.1.1, followed by values for indi-
sion could comprise gender, socio-economic back- cators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 4.1.2,
ground including religion and caste, location, re- and Appendix 4.1.3 contains the schemes applica-
gion, and so on. The three SDGs considered under ble for Goal no. 5. Annexure 5 contains the detailed
the theme of Social Development encompass dif- information regarding indicators for Goal no. 5 for
ferent areas as well as the manifestation of exclu- baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023-
sion: SDG 5 (Gender Equality), SDG 10 (Reducing 24) and vision 2030.
Inequalities), and SDG 16 (Peace, justice and strong
institutions). These three goals are discussed in de- In this section, Targets 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3, which
tail in this chapter. deal with ending discrimination, are discussed
first. Next Target 5.4, which refers to the economic
empowerment of women, is addressed, and finally
SECTION 4.1 Targets 5.5 and 5.6 are discussed together, broadly
SDG 5: Achieve Gender Equality and Empower All addressing the issue of the political empowerment
of women. At the end, the challenges and strategy
Women and Girls
for attaining the vision are discussed for all the tar-
gets together.
Since the Declaration on the Equality of
Women and Their Contribution to Devel-
The Conceptual Context
opment and Peace in Mexico in 1975 under
the aegis of the United Nations, gender is- The following features are important with regard
sues have found centre-staging in all devel- to the gender issues in Uttarakhand (Mehta, 2008;
opment forums, in declarations and action. Public Mamgain, 2007):
policy for the last several decades has been expect- 1. As per the global trend, agriculture is being in-
ed to be gender-sensitive in all its facets, though lo- creasingly integrated with markets, in the case
cal/regional sensibilities have been accounted for. of both input markets and produce markets.
As of now, the Sustainable Development Goal No.
2. There is increased incidence of out-migration
5 is devoted to this issue.
among male workers. Although this has been
Goal No. 5 builds on some of the targets that going on for many years, the phenomenon of
began with the Millennium Development Goals, migration per se requires underscoring since it
specifically MDG 3, which made some strides but results in the feminisation of agriculture.
did not fully succeed in providing a springboard 3. There is significant invisibility of women’s
for development policy and practices that promot- work.
ed gender equality and the rights of women and 4. There is widespread male (child and adult)
girls. Women and girls continue to face discrimina- preference in society.
tion across economic, social and political spheres
These factors have reinforced the patriarchal
in different parts of India and the world, and en-
character of Indian society, and the state of Uttara-
trenched gender disparities remain major drivers
khand is no exception. Since women are engaged
of poverty and inequality. SDG 5 is thus expected
in subsistence agriculture (largely non-monetised),
to promote socio-political transformation at both
along with domestic work (including care of chil-
the local and national levels.
dren and the elderly), their control over cash re-
The vision for Goal No. 5 for the state is: sources is limited, which leads to an extension of
By 2030, the society in Uttarakhand will patriarchal values, notwithstanding the significant
have gender parity in education, health and work burden borne by womenfolk both within and
outside the home.
174
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Box 4.1: Giving Identity to Women – International Conventions

Since the past two decades, the issues of women have attracted the attention of the entire world. The year 1975 was
a milestone in the history of the women’s movement when the United Nations Organisation (UNO) declared 1975-
85 as the International Decade for Women. This led to the adoption of the Women in Development (WID), Women
and Development (WAD), and Gender and Development (GAD) approaches at the national and international lev-
els for promoting women’s development and advancement.
Recently, gender mainstreaming and rights-based approaches to women’s empowerment have gained momentum.
The concept of these approaches stems from declarations and documents emerging from a number of international
conventions and conferences, specifically the World Conference on Human Rights (Vienna, 1993); International
Conference on Population and Development (Cairo, 1994); World Summit for Social Development (Copenhagen,
1995); Fourth World Conference on Women (Beijing, 1995); Second UN Conference on Human Settlements (Istan-
bul, 1996); World Food Summit (Rome, 1996); and the five-year reviews of these conferences. The Convention on
Elimination of all Kinds of Discrimination against Women (CEDAW) has also been recognised as an international
instrument for addressing the gender-based discrimination prevailing in most of the societies in the world.
The recommendations in international documents, made by the international community, coupled with women’s
movements, have pressurised nations into taking affirmative actions which address the centuries-old practices of
unequal sharing of rights, powers, resources, and opportunities among men and women, and promote empower-
ment processes that enable women to take control over their life, destiny and actions. Consequently, the govern-
ment has initiated concerted efforts to foster the socio-economic and political empowerment of women.
The Himalayan Action Research Centre has carried out a major study to examine various aspects of empowering
women in the Uttarakhand region.
Source: Himalayan Action Research Centre, http://www.harcindia.org/index.php/69-cooperative-study
Agriculture: A majority of the villagers cultivate more young men leave their villages, while women
small and scattered holdings to produce a variety of remain behind to maintain their family farms and
traditional crops (see Ahmed, 2004, for the intersec- look after their families.
tion of gender and agriculture). Women play a sig- While migration has many beneficial aspects
nificant role in cultivating these small and marginal for the families involved, the absence of young/
farms but the productivity of their work is low as able-bodied men for considerable lengths of time,
the farms are scattered. In most districts, commercial coupled with growing accessibility to primary and
cultivation accounts for a small share in the overall secondary education, represents a significant reduc-
agricultural production, which further thwarts pro- tion in the availability of household labour: women,
ductivity. children (and particularly female ones), and the el-
Agricultural practices in the hill districts in derly tend to be the ones who have to pick up the
Uttarakhand have remained relatively backward. slack. This situation, in turn, intensifies women’s
Even in cases where modern inputs are applied drudgery. This is borne out by the findings of the
and/or the product is marketed, the gains of de- Baseline Survey (cited in Footnote 1, Mehta, 2008),
velopment are mainly taken away by traders, and which highlights the adverse effects of migration on
farmers gain little. Since the farms are largely tilled the families left behind: women’s heightened work
by the women, they are the ones most impacted ad- burdens and the increased responsibilities of having
versely by the low productivity and low incomes. to carry out work, without access to the necessary
Migration: The issue of migration has been dis- support such as the financial resources needed to
cussed in Chapter 1. Migration is a major liveli- hire labour for agricultural work.
hood option for rural households in all the hill dis- Feminisation of Agriculture: The growing feminisa-
tricts. It is driven by the lack of locally available tion of agriculture resulting from male out-migra-
employment in the rural areas due to the diminish- tion underscores a key contradiction in the lives of
ing subsistence production and increasing popula- the local women: their centrality to the running of
tion pressure as well as aspirations among the lo- households and family farms, on the one hand, and
cal population for better education and a better life. their social, economic and political marginalisation,
Out-migration is gender-specific, with relatively on the other (Mehta, 1994). This tension is becom-
175
Table 4.1: Selected Statistics for Demographics, Women’s Literacy and Work in Uttarakhand
Total Male Female
Proportion in total population (%) 100.0 50.94 49.05
Proportion in rural population (%) 100.0 50.0 50.0
Proportion in urban population (%) 100.0 53.1 46.9
Population sex ratio (per 1000 males) 963
Child sex ratio (per 1000 male children) 890
Literacy rate (%) 78.82 87.4 70.0
Literacy rate (SC) (%) 84.3 64.1
Workers (% of total) 65.9 34.1
Source: Source: Government of Uttarakhand, 2013-14.
ing more sharply defined as the market economy has dropped to 2.1 only in the last 3-4 years, child
and institutions of the state—to which men are the care is still a burden. Further, though the pover-
main conduits—come to play an increased role in ty ratio is only 11-12 per cent in the population, a
the lives of households. In this context, women of- large number of people in the hill region fall within
ten become de facto heads of households, but at the or not too far above the poverty line.
same time, they lack control over land, cash and A significantly large number of rural households
productive resources, which prevents them from also do not have access to cooking gas, and rely on
becoming efficient managers of the domestic and wood as cooking fuel. Similarly, about 35 per cent of
farm economies, or exercising the authority need- the rural habitations are not covered by safe/piped
ed to draw attention to their requirements. Despite drinking water and potable water, wherein water
the socio-economic changes, which have, over the has to be fetched from long distances. All these fac-
course of the last quarter of the twentieth century, tors add to the women’s domestic burden, particu-
brought the hill society ever closer into the orbit of larly in the tough mountainous terrain characterised
state institutions and market relations, as a constit- by uneven pathways and steep slopes. It is not only
uency, mountain women remain extremely mar- adult women who bear the burden but younger girls
ginalized and have limited or no control over pro- are also drawn into this work, which adversely af-
ductive resources and decision-making processes. fects their education as well as health.
Social Issues of Invisibility and Male Preference: The Another important aspect that needs to be con-
status of women in Uttarakhand is typically sub- sidered as part of the socio-economic framework of
servient to their male counterparts, as witnessed the state is domestic violence: NFHS-4 data report
elsewhere in India. The population sex ratio is 963, that around 12.7 per cent of ever-married women
while the child sex ratio is only 890 (Table 4.1)1. have experienced marital violence. There are also
The low child sex ratio appears to be largely ac- less obvious forms of oppression in the domestic
counted for by urban data, if we consider the NF- sphere,which are difficult to capture through quan-
HS-Round 4 data for 2015-16, according to which titative surveys. There are the issues of economic
rural child sex ratio is 924, as opposed to just 821 well-being of women, who are usually in an eco-
for the urban counterpart, the average for the state nomically weak position and unable to find seek
being 888. The very low child sex ratio in urban ar- succour either from their own or community means.
eas is indicatives of persistence of the practice of One of the categories of such women includes poor
sex selection in these areas. Women are less literate and old women without family support or any
than men by a full 17 percentage points, and their means of livelihood. Appendix 4.1.3 provides a
work participation rate is about half as compared bird’s eye-view of the existing programmes that are
to that of men. As stated earlier, in the upper ridg- expected to aid women from various socio-econom-
es, a large number of male workers migrate out for ic backgrounds to strive towards equity and equali-
work, and the women there are saddled with both ty of opportunity in the society.
farming as well as house-work. Given that the TFR
1. Data in this section are drawn from Government of Uttarakhand, ‘Uttarakhand at a Glance’, 2013-2014,and child sex ratio is from Census, 2011.
176
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Target 5.1 End all forms of discrimination against mate objective of building a better future for the
all women and girls everywhere girl child.
Baseline for Uttarakhand (iv) National Policy for the Empowerment of Women,
The task of ending discrimination against women 2001
and girls would draw power from the sound legal This policy was prepared by the Department of
basis for women’s empowerment, for which the In- Women and Child Development in the Ministry of
dian Constitution makes provisions. The principle Human Resource Development in 2001. The goal
of gender equality is also enshrined in the Indian of this policy is to bring about the advancement,
Constitution, which empowers the State to adopt development, and empowerment of women.
measures of positive discrimination in favour of The Uttaranchal State Commission for Women
women.2 Fundamental rights, among others, en- Act, 2005, was passed by the State legislative as-
sure equality before the law and equal protection sembly in November 2005 to form the Uttaranchal
of law; prohibit discrimination against any citizen State Commission for Women. The functions of the
on grounds of religion, race, caste, sex or place of Commission include, among others:3
birth; and guarantee equality of opportunity to all
citizens in matters relating to employment (see • Investigate matters that relate to safeguards
Box No. 4.2 on Constitutional privileges for wom- provided for women under the Constitution
en). Within the framework of a democratic polity, and other laws;
laws, development policies, and programmes have • Take up cases of violation of the above safe-
focused on women’s progress. India has also rat- guards with the appropriate authorities;
ified international conventions and human rights • Look into pertinent matters including depriva-
instruments committed to securing equal rights for tion of women’s rights, and non-implementa-
women, notably CEDAW. Some other initiatives in tion of laws enacted to protect women, in order
this direction are detailed below. to achieve the objectives of equality and devel-
(i) National Commission for Women opment;
In January 1992, the Government set up the Nation- • Participate in and render advice on the plan-
al Commission for Women, a statutory body with a ning process of the socio-economic develop-
specific mandate to study and monitor all matters ment of women; and
relating to the constitutional and legal safeguards • Collect information relating to offences against
provided for women, and review the existing legis- women.
lation to suggest amendments wherever necessary,
among other measures required to empower wom- The legislative framework against gender-based
en and safeguard their rights. discrimination may be somewhat in place, but the
extent to which it is reflected in real life for women
(ii) Reservation for Women in Local Self-government is also under probe, as per Target 5.1. The issues
The 73rd Constitutional Amendment Acts, passed that have been discussed include areas of health
in 1992 by Parliament, ensure that one-third of the and employment, increased work burden of wom-
total seats be reserved for women in all elected of- en in rural areas, and the social marginalisation of
fices in local bodies, whether in rural areas or ur- women due to the prevalent patriarchy. Some in-
ban areas. dicators are easier to monitor in this context, and
(iii) The National Plan of Action for the Girl Child education-related indicators show considerable
(1991-2000) gender parity at present for access to education.
The ratios of girls to boys in primary as well as in
The plan of action is to ensure survival, protection, secondary education are high at 0.89 and 0.92, re-
and development of the girl child with the ulti-
2. From the National Legal Research Desk, posted on February 11, 2012, available at http://nlrd.org/constitutional-and-legal-provisions-for-women-in-in-
dia/#comment-1006, accessed on April 15, 2017.
3. Gazette notification of Uttaranchal, dated November 11, 2005, furnished by PRS Legislative Research, available at http://www.lawsofindia.org/
statelaw/1374/TheUttaranchalStateCommissionforWomenAct2005.html , accessed on April 15, 2017.
177
Box 4.2: Constitutional Privileges for Women

(i) Equality before law for women (Article 14)
(ii) The State not to discriminate against any citizen on grounds only of religion, race, caste, sex, place of birth or
any of them (Article 15 (i))
(iii) The State to make any special provision in favour of women and children (Article 15 (3))
(iv) Equality of opportunity for all citizens in matters relating to employment or appointment to any office under
the State (Article 16)
(v) The State to direct its policy towards securing for men and women equally the right to an adequate means of
livelihood [Article 39(a)]; and equal pay for equal work for both men and women [Article 39(d)]
(vi) To promote justice, on the basis of equal opportunity and to provide free legal aid by suitable legislation or
scheme or in any other way to ensure that opportunities for securing justice are not denied to any citizen by
reason of economic or other disabilities (Article 39 A)
(vii) The State to make provision for securing just and humane conditions of work and for maternity relief (Article
42)
(viii) The State to promote with special care the educational and economic interests of the weaker sections of the
people and to protect them from social injustice and all forms of exploitation (Article 46)
(ix) The State to raise the level of nutrition and the standard of living of its people (Article 47)
(x) To promote harmony and the spirit of common brotherhood amongst all the people of India and to renounce
practices derogatory to the dignity of women [Article 51(A) (e)]
(xi) Not less than one-third (including the number of seats reserved for women belonging to the Scheduled
Castes and the Scheduled Tribes) of the total number of seats to be filled by direct election in every Panchayat
to be reserved for women and such seats to be allotted by rotation to different constituencies in a Panchayat
[Article 243 D(3)]
(xii) Not less than one- third of the total number of offices of Chairpersons in the Panchayats at each level to be
reserved for women [Article 243 D (4)]
(ix) Not less than one-third (including the number of seats reserved for women belonging to the Scheduled Castes
and the Scheduled Tribes) of the total number of seats to be filled by direct election in every Municipality to
be reserved for women and such seats to be allotted by rotation to different constituencies in a Municipality
[Article 243 T (3)]
(x) Reservation of offices of Chairpersons in Municipalities for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and
women in such manner as the legislature of a State may by law provide [Article 243 T (4)]
Source: National Legal Research Desk, available at http://nlrd.org/constitutional-and-legal-provisions-for-wom-
en-in-india/, accessed on July 10, 2017.
spectively (see Annexure 4). The share of women as well as at the level of institutions, with the latter
workers in the non-agriculture sector, according to providing an equal ‘playing field’ for all genders.
2011-12 NSS data, is just 16.8 per cent, in keeping In terms of Target 5.1, the legislations should
with the prevalent trend of low female work par- be effective and implemented on the ground. Var-
ticipation across India. ious bodies and authorities overseeing this area
Vision 2030 Target 5.1 such as government servants, police personnel,
The human development aspirations of a people and the State Women Commission need to be vig-
cannot be fulfilled entirely till all gender-based dis- ilant to ensure that the law is more effectively en-
crimination and violence come to an end, and till all forced and that it does not remain merely as words
are equally empowered in the economic, political, on paper. Other indicators under this target entail
and social spheres of life. The government of Uttara- the attainment of full gender parity of unity at the
khand would thus need to address the root causes primary and secondary levels. The vision for the
of inequality faced by women and girls, and to find share of women workers in the non-agricultural
solutions. The outcomes of such an exercise are ex- sector is that it is raised from a low of 16.8 per cent
pected to reflect changes at both the individual level at the baseline to 50 per cent by 2030.
178
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Target 5.2 Eliminate all forms of violence Target 5.4 Recognize and value unpaid
against all women and girls in the public care and domestic work through the
and private spheres, including trafficking provision of public services, infrastruc-
and sexual and other types of exploitation ture and social protection policies and the promo-
Baseline for Uttarakhand tion of shared responsibility within the household
and the family as nationally appropriate
The sex ratio at birth is much lower in the urban ar-
eas of the state as compared to the rural areas, possi- Baseline for Uttarakhand
bly signifying deliberate sex selection process in the The share of women workers in non-agriculture is
urban areas, as discussed earlier. This shows that the only 16.8 per cent, according to NSS 2011-12 data.
legal rights provided for women may be circumvent- In almost all the countries and regions, women and
ed and even violated in the face of weak implemen- girls do the bulk of unpaid work such as care for
tation and poor governance. In fact, as the discussion children and the elderly, and household chores
under SDG 16 shows in Section 4.3, incidents of rape such as cooking and cleaning. In a mountainous
and molestation/assault on women with the intent state like Uttarakhand, this also includes fetching
to outrage their modesty have increased in Uttara- water and wood for fuel from a distance. More than
khand in the last few years. Violence against women half the women among the total women engaged
is also captured by the indicators presented for SDG in domestic work were engaged in collecting wa-
5 in Appendix 4.1.2 and Annexure 5, with some data ter/wood, according to NSS data for 2011-12. The
sources (NFHS-4) suggesting higher incidence of vi- responsibilities of such unpaid care and domestic
olence in the domestic sphere. As discussed earlier, work, combined with paid work, translate into
non-reporting of domestic violence is also a problem a greater work burden for women and girls, and
to contend with. reduced time for rest and for taking care of one’s
Vision 2030 for Target 5.2 own self. This also hampers opportunities and time
for accessing better education or employment.
The vision for the coming years till 2030 would in-
clude raising the sex ratio at birth to unity in both Vision 2030 for Target 5.4
the urban and rural areas, and ending/mitigating The vision for Target 5.4 would be to increase the ra-
violence experienced in any form by women, in the tio of women workers in the non-agricultural sector
public and domestic spheres, at least to levels below from 16.8 per cent (2011-12) in the baseline to 50 per
the baseline. Women and girls must also be encour- cent in 2030. The opportunity to engage effectively
aged to come out in the open about the violence faced in economic activities would materialise for women
by them and to seek help from police and/or legal only when they are freed of the enormous burden of
redressal, and also be provided assurance that this unpaid domestic and other chores. Hence, the vision
would not result in any negative outcome for them. is to reduce the share of women engaged in collect-
ing water/wood to half from the baseline by 2030.
Target 5.3 Eliminate all harmful practices, such as
child, early and forced marriage and female gen- Target 5.5 Ensure women’s full and effective
ital mutilation participation and equal opportunities for leader-
Baseline for Uttarakhand ship at all levels of decision-making in political,
economic and public life
The incidence of child/early marriage and other
harmful practices, relating to Target 5.3, is negli- Baseline for Uttarakhand
gible in the state, according to official sources. The The indicators under this target show that at pres-
NFHS-4 data, however, has found some incidence ent, the empowerment of the women, as far as the
of child marriage in the state, at 13.9 per cent for political sphere is concerned, is fairly good, with 50
women aged 20-24 years. per cent of the seats in Panchayat bodies being held
Vision 2030 for Target 5.3 by women, though these numbers do not always
capture the real decision-making power centres
The vision is to completely eliminate any remain- in the panchayats. The share of women in public
ing incidence of child marriage in the state, by 2030. service posts is 30 per cent. According to the Sixth
179
Figure 4.1: Vision 2030 for Selected Indicators for Women’s Empowerments
Source: Based on NSS data and data provided by Government of Uttarakhand
Economic Census, the share of women entrepre- women are actually empowered or are just fig-
neurs, which would reflect women occupying po- ureheads. However, in the business sector and
sitions of leadership and of decision-making in the in public services, the representation of women
economic sphere, is very low at just 9.26 per cent. is very low.
Vision 2030 for Target 5.5 Strategy for attaining Vision 2030
The vision is to enhance the political empowerment The following strategies need to be adopted for
of women, particularly in the public service posts dealing with the above issues:
and in the share of entrepreneurs to 50 per cent and • Spreading awareness among the community
33 per cent, respectively, from the baseline levels of and among pregnant women about the declin-
30 per cent and 9.26 per cent. The share of seats in ing child sex ratio and schemes such as ‘Beti
Panchayat bodies is already 50 per cent for women, Bachao, Beti Padhao’, along with celebration of
which needs to be maintained. There is also a need the birth of a girl child at the Panchayat level to
to ascertain that the reservation of seats translates highlight the value of the girl child;
into actual decision-making power for women, and
• Conducting special awareness programmes for
that they are not mere figureheads in such positions.
pregnant women who have registered for their
Challenges for gender equality second or third pregnancy;
A lot of attention has been paid to women’s issues • Organising regular meetings with adolescent
at the national and sub-national levels, legislative girls to sensitise them regarding pre-natal sex
provisions have been made, and commissions have determination linked to female foeticide;
been formed to protect the interests of women, • Effectively implementing existing schemes
but all the available information points at the per- to end discrimination against women, espe-
sistence of the following challenges: cially enforcement of the Pre-Conception and
• The sex ratio at birth is especially skewed in Pre-Natal Diagnostic Techniques Act (PC &
urban areas, indicating the misuse of technolo- PNDT Act).
gy for sex selection to fuel the preference for a • Combating domestic violence against women,
male child. Unless the survival of the girl child by providing a toll-free number, 181, operating
is ensured, the very aim of gender empower- 24x7, to be used as a Women’s Helpline for of-
ment would be defeated. fering them emergency services and informa-
• There is not adequate enforcement of legislation for assistance in case of need;
tions in favour of women, as reflected in the • Recognising women’s positive contribution
increasing crimes against women. to agriculture, and extending to women all
• Women’s participation in economic work is the benefits that government schemes offer to
very low, part of which may be attributed to small and marginal farmers;
the huge burden of unpaid work shouldered • Taking women’s work participation away from
by women, especially in the rural areas, and part-time and unpaid work towards full-time
possibly discrimination at the workplace and gainful employment; and
the lack of suitable employment opportunities.
• Enhancing access to education at the
• Political empowerment has begun at the Pan- secondary as well as post-secondary levels, and
chayat level, though the jury is out on whether eliminating gender disparities in education.
180
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
SECTION 4.2 income growth, inequality may be rising and the

SDG 10: Reduce Inequality Within and Among Countries gap between different sections of the population
may be widening. This can have serious conse-
quences for development outlook, apart from be-
Inequality is the difference found in various mea- ing undesirable in a value-based context.
sures of socio-economic well-being among individ- In this chapter, we have earlier discussed one
uals in a group, among groups in a population, or aspect of inequality that arises from gender dimen-
among countries and regions. Inequality can arise sions (in the discussion on SDG 5). Some other axes
out of differences based on income, age, sex, disabil- of inequality are discussed under Goal No.10. The
ity, race, ethnicity, origin, religion or socio-economic vision for Goal No. 10 for Uttarakhand is:
or other status within a country. There can also be
inequalities among countries, such as those based By 2030, Uttarakhand will become a
on representation, migration, and development as- more egalitarian state with substantial
sistance. Goal No. 10 focuses on reducing all such improvement in the income of the bottom 40%
inequalities. of the population, and see improvement in
basic services supply to ensure equitable access
It is well-documented that income inequality is for all, including the backward communities.
rising globally, with the richest 10 per cent earning
up to 40 per cent of the total global income.4 The The vision for targets of Goal No. 10 are
poorest 10 per cent earn only between 2 per cent presented in Appendix 4.2.1, followed by
and 7 per cent of the total global income. Widen- values for indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in
ing disparities underscore the need to adopt sound Appendix 4.2.2, and Appendix 4.2.3 contains the
policies to empower the bottom percentile of in- schemes applicable for Goal no. 10. Annexure 10
come earners, and to promote economic inclusion contains the detailed information regarding indica-
for all segments of the population, regardless of tors for Goal no. 10 for baseline, short-term (2019-
sex, race, or ethnicity. 20), medium term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
Economic inequality is usually measured in Target 10.1 is discussed first, followed by

terms of income, or, the data that is more easily avail- Targets 10.2 and 10.3 together. The other targets,
able, that is, consumption expenditure. There is evi- whichever appropriate, are discussed thereafter.
dence that the Gini coefficient of consumption distri-
bution has been on the rise during the period 1993-94 Target 10.1 By 2030, progressively achieve and
to 2009-10 for India in what was a high GDP growth sustain income growth of the bottom 40 per
period (Himanshu, 2015). Banerjee and Piketty cent of the population at a rate higher than the
(2005) have demonstrated that income became more national average
unequally distributed after liberalisation in India in
the 1990s. The gradual liberalisation of the Indian
economy did make it possible for the rich (the top 1 In order to reduce inequality in the state, the income
per cent) to substantially increase their share of the of the poorer sections of the populace needs to
total income, and what is more, in the 1990s, the big grow at a rate higher than the average income of
income gains went only to those falling in the top 0.1 the entire population. In this context, several indi-
per cent of the income graph. The rise in the number cators can reflect the inequality in the state as well
of billionaires and millionaires in India, on the one as the income status of the people in the lower in-
hand, and stagnant wages of low wage workers on come groups. The baseline (2011-12) value of the
the other, are evidence of this (Acharya, 2016). Gini coefficient5 is not very high for Uttarakhand
at 0.35 and is comparable to the national average
It is thus important to unpack aggregate statis- (35.1) as presented in the Human Development
tics because even in the face of aggregate per capita
4. Source: http://www.undp.org/content/undp/en/home/sustainable-development-goals/goal-10-reduced-inequalities.html
5. The Gini coefficient is a widely accepted measure for inequality, which shows how equitable is the distribution of income, consumption or wealth in a
given society. A zero value for the Gini coefficient implies perfectly equal distribution and unity implies perfectly unequal distribution.
181
182
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Report 2016 by UN (UNDP, 2016).6 Target 10.3 Ensure equal opportunity and
Another indicator for income inequality is the reduce inequalities of outcome, including by
baseline (2011-12) share of the bottom 40 per cent eliminating discriminatory laws, policies and
of the population in the total consumption, which practices and promoting appropriate legislation,
shows that the bottom 40 per cent of the popula- policies and action in this regard
tion accounts for only 23 per cent of the total con- Baseline for Uttarakhand
sumption in Uttarakhand. This is higher than the Both the targets relate to overall inclusion in the
corresponding national average (2011-12) of 19.6 economy, so that all segments of the populace
per cent (Himanshu, 2015). have access to equitable opportunities and have
There are views that the Gini is unable to al- the potential to enjoy a decent life. An important
ways capture the changes in inequality over time. axis of inequality in Uttarakhand is the difference
The third indicator used to capture Target 10.1 is between the hills in the development trajectory.
the Palma ratio, which shows the ratio of the share The state has three districts which lie mainly in the
of the richest 10 per cent in the total consumption plains, namely Dehradun, Udham Singh Nagar,
to the share of the poorest 40 per cent in the total and Haridwar. The rest of the thirteen districts lie
consumption, or the income concentration in the primarily in the hilly region. Yet, as mentioned in
society. The baseline (2011-12) value for the Palma Chapter 1, these three districts account for near-
ratio for the state is 1.8, showing greater income ly 52 per cent of the population and much of the
concentration with the rich relative to the corre- growth in the state has taken place in the plains,
sponding national average of 1.5 (UNDP, 2016). bypassing the upper reaches of the state. This is
Vision 2030 for Target 10.1 reflected in the district-wise per capita income fig-
ures for 2013-14, which are Rs. 1,22,804 in Dehra-
The vision for inequality is the same worldwide, dun, Rs. 1,22,172 in Haridwar, and Rs. 1,15,543 in
that is, to reduce inequality as far as possible and Udham Singh Nagar, in contrast to less than half
eventually aim at wiping it out altogether. For Ut- of the per capita income levels of Rs. 59,791 in Ut-
tarakhand, in particular, the focal point of the long- tarkashi, Rs. 68,730 in Bageshwar, and Rs. 69,401
term vision is to bridge the gap in development and in Rudraprayag (see Figure 4.2).7 In fact, the ratio
access to services between the hills and the plains. of the per capita income of the highest and lowest
Thus, vis-à-vis Target 10.1, the aim for the chosen income districts has risen from 1.6 times in 2004-05
indicators would be as follows. The Gini coefficient to 2.05 times in 2013-14.8
should not be allowed to climb beyond its present
levels, the share of the bottom 40 per cent people One of the indicators for Target 10.2 thus has
in consumption should be increased on the basis been taken as the ratio of per capita income (PCI) of
of targeting their income growth at rates projected the highest PCI district to the per capita income of
at rates higher than the average GDP growth rates the lowest PCI district (see Appendix 4.2.2 and An-
projected for 7 per cent per annum and for 10 per nexure 10). As discussed above, the baseline value
cent per annum by 2030. The Palma ratio must be for this indicator is 2.05. The differential estimates
reduced to 1.5 or below by 2030. of poverty lines as shown in Table 4.2. also capture
the inequality across districts (GIDS, 2017).
As discussed in Chapter 1, many villages in the
Target 10.2 By 2030, empower and promote the hilly regions of the state are reported to be becom-
social, economic and political inclusion of all, ir- ing ‘ghost villages’ with all or most families having
respective of age, sex, disability, race, ethnicity, migrated out. The Census 2011 has reported 1048
origin, religion or economic or other status
6. In 2013, the Gini for India was 33.9 (source: http://hdr.undp.org/en/content/income-gini-coefficient).

7. Numbers at current prices. Source: Statistical Diary, Uttarakhand, 2014-15.
8. With inputs from http://www.catchnews.com/india-news/addressing-inequality-in-uttarakhand-what-s-the-way-ahead-55654.html, Accessed on April 5,
2017.
183
Figure 4.2: District-wise Per Capita Income (2013-14) in Uttarakhand
Source: Statistical Diary, Uttarakhand, 2014-15.
villages which have thus been emptied of resi- disparity may hurt a number of households in this
dents.9 In the villages where people do remain, state. Most importantly, differences are observed
households increasingly comprise women mem- in the nature of the inequalities between the hilly
bers living alone since men have migrated. There areas and the plains, any policy to promote equali-
are also tribal-dominated villages where the peo- ty in income opportunity throughout Uttarakhand
ple spend six months out of a year, moving to the should be based on an understanding of the nature
lower reaches during the winter months. of the inequalities, which varies regionally.
The far-flung villages are also deprived of basic Another indicator for Target 10.3 has been se-
health services, good educational institutions, and lected as the ratio of the percentage share of ‘good’10
above all, good livelihood opportunities. Thus, for houses among the urban and rural population, re-
people living in the heart of Uttarakhand, the hills, flecting the urban–rural differential in this basic fa-
there is need to pay attention towards develop- cility of shelter. The baseline (2011) value for this is
ment-related issues in order to bring these regions 1.17 (see Table 4.3 and Annexure 10).
at par with the plains. There is research evidence The condition of housing reflects the highest
for Uttarakhand that there is significant inequali- urban–rural disparity for the ST community, and
ty in income opportunities between the rural and some disparity for the other groups. The housing
the urban sectors, with the rural areas facing an occupied by the STs is closer to the average situa-
adverse bias due to the differences in the people’s tion in urban areas, which implies that the disad-
education levels and also because the returns from vantage faced by them is greater in the rural areas.
various levels of education too are relatively lower The SC households have a distinct disadvantage
in the rural sector (Ghosh, Kar and Sharma, 2007). vis-à-vis the average for both rural and urban areas.
The results of this study based on a primary sur-
vey in the Dehradun, Nainital and Uttarkashi dis- As observed from the shelter situation, an axis
tricts also show that income is somewhat lower in for potential inequality in the state is that of the dal-
a family that has a higher share of women in the it and tribal populations. There is a sizeable share
working aged population. Since there is a lot of of SC population in Uttarakhand at 18.8 per cent.
male migration in Uttarakhand, this gender-based The tribal population, though present in some of
9. Cited in http://www.hindustantimes.com/india-news/growth-inequality-is-emptying-out-entire-villages-in-uttarakhand/story-8WKFLavV9OOkqR1uQsIb-
WM.html, published March 10, 2017.
10. ‘Good’ refers to the Census 2011 categorisation for housing.
184
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Table 4.2: District-wise Estimates of Price-Adjusted Poverty Lines: Uttarakhand 2011-12 (Rs.)
(at state-level prices)
District Rural Urban
Uttarkashi 903.58 1093.03
Chamoli 937.23 1112.09
Rudraprayag 918.70 1077.38
Tehri Garhwal 881.75 1073.39
Dehradun 958.30 1141.12
Pauri Garhwal 919.71 1081.47
Pithoragarh 867.91 1058.54
Bageshwar 853.74 1067.47
Almora 803.11 1036.50
Champawat 916.03 1129.75
Nainital 869.71 1100.08
Udham Singh Nagar 865.72 1066.69
Haridwar 913.83 1128.62
Nainital Hills 899.68 1144.84
Dehradun Hills 942.58 1041.82
State 880.00 1082.00
Source: GIDS (2017).
the hilly regions such as Champawat, is otherwise gration for livelihood opportunities. The slum
small in size, accounting for around 2.9 per cent population usually have poor access to water, san-
of the total population. There is some disparity in itation, and other basic services, along with limited
literacy between the SCs/STs and other communi- opportunity for education, and health, among oth-
ties, but it is relatively small, as shown in Chapter er things. The access of households to treated water
3. As can be seen from Table 4.4, the SC and ST among the slums, according to Census 2011 data, is
communities are at a disadvantage vis-à-vis the 68.2 per cent, whereas the corresponding average
other communities, as reflected in all the state av- for urban households (Table 4.4) is 72.7 per cent.
erages in terms of access to tap water from treated A high percentage of slum households in the state,
sources, and the disadvantage is essentially seen that is, around 91.7 per cent, do have latrine facil-
in the rural areas. In the urban areas, the statistics ities within their premises, but just 29.8 per cent
reflect greater equality of access. The rural–urban of the households have closed drainage for waste
disparity in access to tap-water is high, at 1.58 for water outlets. A majority (64.4 per cent) have open
all households, and even worse at 1.80 and 1.91 for drainage, while 5.8 per cent have no drainage at all.
the SC and ST communities, respectively. As regards the socio-religious categories in Ut-
Within the districts dominated by plains, a bur- tarakhand, Muslims constitute the main minori-
geoning area of inequality is evident in the slums ties, accounting for a share of 12.09 per cent in the
that are mushrooming because of massive in-mi- population, followed by Sikhs, with a share of 2.5
Table 4.3 Share of Households (%) with ‘Good’ Condition Houses in Uttarakhand (Census 2011)
Ratio Ur-
Total Rural Urban
ban/Rural
All Households 66.8 63.6 74.4 1.17
SC households 55.1 52.8 63.1 1.19
ST households 58.2 54.8 71.8 1.31
Ratio all households to SC
1.21 1.20 1.18
households
Ratio all households to ST
1.15 1.16 1.04
households
Source: Census 2011
185
Table 4.4: Share of Households (%) Getting Tap Water from Treated Sources in Uttarakhand
(Census 2011)
Total Rural Urban Ratio Urban/Rural
All Households (%) 53.9 46.0 72.7 1.58
SC households (%) 46.1 39.1 70.3 1.80
ST households (%) 42.96 36.35 69.31 1.91
Ratio all households (%) with
access to water to SC households 1.17 1.18 1.03
(%) with access to water
Ratio all households (%) with
access to water to ST households 1.25 1.27 1.05
(%) with access to water
per cent.11 The government is committed to their schemes related to self-employment.

welfare and all-round inclusion in development. The MSDP captures the spirit of Target 10.3 as
Vision 2030 for Targets 10.2 and 10.3 this programme aims at improving the socio-eco-
Targets 10.2 and 10.3 refer to inclusion and the vi- nomic conditions of the minorities and providing
sion for 2030 is that all households, irrespective of basic amenities to them for improving the quality
whether they are living in rural or urban areas, hills of life of the people and reducing imbalances in
or plains, or in slums, or whether they are from the the identified minority concentration areas. Under
SC or ST communities, must have access to basic this programme, projects related to the provision
services such as shelter, water and sanitation, edu- of better infrastructure for education, skill develop-
cation, and health facilities. For all indicators which ment, health, sanitation, pucca housing, roads, and
capture disparity, such as per capita income, hous- drinking water, among others, are taken up besides
ing condition, and access to tap-water, the aim for schemes for creating income-generating opportuni-
2030 would be to bridge the gap between the hills ties.12 The Ministry of Social Justice and Empower-
and plains, rural and urban, and the SCs/STs and ment has several schemes for the social, educational,
other communities. and economic development of SCs and other back-
ward communities. The Direct Benefit Transfer of
Target 10.3 specifically deals with policies, LPG (DBTL) or Pradhan Mantri LPG subsidy, Pahal
schemes, and laws dealing with minorities, back- Yojana (DBTL) is a direct benefit transfer gas sub-
ward communities, disabled and other disadvan- sidy scheme now being implemented throughout
taged segments of the population, which are in- India, which has benefited consumers by providing
tended to ensure their inclusion in the society and them LPG at a subsidised price, with the difference
to protect their interests (see Appendix 4.2.3). As between the market price and the subsidised price
mentioned earlier, the Muslim community compris- getting transferred to their bank account. The Inte-
es the main minorities group in the state. The gov- grated Industrial Development Policy for the hills
ernment aims to ensure their social, economic and tries to pull in the hilly regions, which have been
educational upliftment with the aid of development bypassed in the process of industrial development.
schemes. Education is particularly in focus and
there are scholarship schemes, schemes intended to A state government scholarship scheme is also
reduce drop-outs, computer training, and moderni- in operation for classes 1 to 10. In 2016-17, the total
sation of madarsa education, among other things. number of beneficiaries under this scheme num-
In this context, it is also important to consider the bered 26,440 while a total amount of Rs. 103.37 lakh
Multi Sector Development Programme (MSDP) and was spent on it. Under the CM Skill Development
11. http://ukmc.in/minority_population.html accessed on October 3, 2017.

12. Source: http://www.minorityaffairs.gov.in/sites/default/files/guideline.pdf
186
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Figure 4.3: Major Schemes for Promoting Inclusion in Uttarakhand
Scheme, an amount of Rs. 200 lakh was spent in still have to toil for water and fuel. The farm-
2016-17 for 425 beneficiaries. The grant for self- ers in the hilly areas cannot reach their produce
employment to minorities saw an expenditure of Rs. easily to the bigger market in the lower regions
100 lakh in 2016-17 for 95 beneficiaries while Rs. 1500 due to poor connectivity, nor can they store the
lakh was spent in 2016-17 for building boundary perishables due to inadequate availability of
walls for a kabristan (cemetery) for 146 beneficiaries. chilling and storage/containerisation facilities.
Targets 10.5, 10.6 and 10.7 are not applicable at the • Not enough employment opportunities are
state level. available in the hills to keep the people, partic-
Challenges for reducing inequalities ularly the youth, and to prevent their out-mi-
gration.
Continued divide between the hills and plains, and
migration from the hills to the plains • The provisioning of services, especially health
services, is badly affected by the non-availabil-
• The agriculture sector in the hills is dominat- ity of doctors. The number of good schools and
ed by small and fragmented landholdings. higher education facilities in the hills is also in-
Agriculture on fragmented land does not pro- adequate.
vide adequate returns to farmers.
• Thus, a combination of factors is responsible
• The infrastructure in the hills is not only inad- for the hill region lagging behind the plains and
equate but is also more vulnerable to the dev- fosters continued migration to the plains and
astations caused by natural disasters than the urban areas from villages in the upper reaches
infrastructural facilities in the plains. Women of Uttarakhand.
187
Within the plains, the slums lag behind mainstream to provide education and employment oppor-
urban development tunities to youth both in the rural and urban
As migration continues to the districts in the plains, areas, including in the remote hilly villages.
and there is in-migration from other states as well This is particularly important for stemming the
in search of livelihood, slums have mushroomed unabated migration of working age males, es-
in Dehradun, Udham Singh Nagar, and Haridwar, pecially youth, from the upper reaches in the
among other districts, which lack basic amenities state. The vision for employment opportunities
like proper housing and sanitation, and deepen the has been discussed at length in Chapter 2, and
inequities in development within the urban areas. partially also in Chapter 1.
SC and ST communities and minority communities • The provision of quality health and education
such as Muslims still lag behind the mainstream in facilities, along with doctors, in the hill dis-
terms of development tricts is also crucial for retaining people, as is
the building of good infrastructure to improve
The SC community has a sizeable share in the state connectivity with the plains.
population and lags behind the others in terms of ac-
cess to basic amenities. Among the tribals, some live • Urban areas, by and large, have better access
in the higher reaches of the mountains and have a to amenities than rural areas. Yet within ur-
somewhat nomadic lifestyle. They spend five to six ban areas too, there is a dichotomy between
months taking their cattle for grazing in the moun- the slums and the rest of the city areas. Slum
tains, and come down to the plains during the win- housing, as its very name suggests, is of poor
ter. These people thus pose special challenges in quality, and sanitation in these areas, in terms
terms of inclusion. The social, economic and educa- of access to drainage, is also very poor. This
tional inclusion of Muslims in the main development inequality needs to be addressed by providing
trajectory is a major challenge for the government. slum dwellers with better housing, and water
and sanitation facilities.13
Strategy for attaining Vision 2030
• For public service provisioning specifically,
The reduction of inequality depends on all aspects both the state and Central governments have
of development in the state, such as the rate of eco- undertaken initiatives such as enactment of the
nomic growth, employment generation, the provi- Right to Services Act, and e-Governance pro-
sion of public services, infrastructural growth, and grammes (discussed under SDG 16), which give
the satisfactory functioning of social protection consumers the right to these services. Technol-
schemes. The following measures may be consid- ogy is also being used in an innovative manner
ered for achieving this reduction: to reach these services to all the citizens. Such
• Dedicated resources are needed for backward technology-dependent service provisioning
segments of the population if inequality is to provided in a rights-based framework can mit-
be bridged. As discussed above, many schemes igate inequality to a great extent, since technol-
are operative and resources have been allocat- ogy does not differentiate between consumers.
ed for them. However, these do not seem to • As mentioned above, various schemes are be-
have achieved the desired results as yet, which ing utilised by the government to bridge the
necessitates a review of the existing schemes gap between the minorities, SC/ST communi-
and the need for effective governance. ties, and the majority communities in the state.
• The pace of economic growth must be sus- These schemes need to be operated efficiently
tained in the state, and more importantly, the and need to be target-driven, to ensure that the
returns from growth must find their way to the funds reach the intended beneficiaries. The ef-
poorer sections of the population at an accel- fective implementation of such schemes, how-
erated pace. Towards this end, it is imperative ever, needs proper monitoring and evaluation.
13. This is discussed in greater detail in the section on SDG 11.
188
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
SECTION 4.3 Finally, Targets 16.9 and 16.10 have been discussed
together.
SDG 16: Promote Peaceful and Inclusive Societies for

Sustainable Development, Provide Access to Justice to Target 16.1 Significantly reduce all forms of
All and Build Effective, Accountable and Inclusive violence and related death rates everywhere
Institutions at All Levels Target 16.2 End abuse, exploitation, trafficking
and all forms of violence against and torture of
children
The SDG 16 deals with the central issues of build-
ing peaceful, just and inclusive societies, while also Target 16.3 Promote the rule of law at the national
focusing on effective and accountable institutions, and international levels and ensure equal access
which work for every citizen in the society. Glob- to justice for all
ally, many countries and regions suffer from per- Target 16.4 By 2030, significantly reduce illicit
sistent violence and armed conflict. Within India, financial and arms flows, strengthen the recovery
too, large parts of the country are facing persistent and return of stolen assets and combat all forms
armed conflict and violence perpetrated by ex- of organized crime
tremists.
Uttarakhand, a relatively young state born in
All the four targets listed above deal with the need
the year 2000, is known as ‘Dev Bhoomi’ or The
to build a peaceful society and end any form of vio-
Abode of the Gods because of its tranquil environs,
lence and crime. Uttarakhand is a relatively crime-
majestic natural beauty resonating from its snow-
free state compared to the other states in India, as
clad mountains, icy glaciers, verdant valleys, and
can be observed from the comparative statistics for
perennial rivers. The state is also relatively peace-
crimes falling under the Indian Penal Code (IPC),
ful and free from any incidence of armed conflict
presented in Table 4.5. The table contains indica-
and violence.
tors for the all-India average, statistics for Uttara-
The vision for Goal No. 16 for Uttarakhand state is: khand, and statistics for the comparable mountain-
Uttarakhand will continue to be a peaceful ous state of Himachal Pradesh.
state and by 2030, present low crime rates will For almost all types of major crimes, Uttara-
be reduced further. The state will have inclu- khand has far superior statistics as compared to the
sive and just institutions by strengthening of national average, and, for many indicators, it is even
governance and progressive acts such as Right better placed than the state of Himachal Pradesh. For
to Information and Right to Services Act. crimes against public order and economic crimes,
This section outlines the targets for Goal No. however, the data for Uttarakhand are nearly com-
16 specifically for Uttarakhand though the various parable to the national average. Another set of crimes
aspects of this SDG may not be as easy to quantify pertinent to the state are those falling under the Spe-
and assess as for the other SDGs. The vision for cial and Local Laws (SLL). These SLL crime statistics
targets of Goal No. 16 are presented in Appendix usually represent preventive policing or better polic-
4.3.1, followed by values for indicators (baseline ing efforts. The SLL category includes the Arms Act,
and vision 2030) in Appendix 4.3.2, and Appendix Excise Act, Gambling Act, Narcotic Drugs and Psy-
4.3.3 contains the schemes applicable for Goal no. chotropic Substances Act, and the Protection of Civil
16. Annexure 15 contains the detailed information Rights Act, among others. The crime rate for cases
regarding indicators for Goal no. 16 for baseline, per 100,000 population for SLL for Uttarakhand is
short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023-24) and very high at 840.5 vis-à-vis 347.6 for All-India and
vision 2030. just 45.5 for Himachal. However, as mentioned, this
also reflects better law enforcement.
Targets 16.1 to 16.4 have been discussed as a
group, since these refer to similar topics. There- As the Figures 4.4 and 4.5 show, though the
after, Targets 16.5 to 16.7 have been discussed baseline violence and crime is relatively low in the
together. Target 16.8 is not applicable for a state. state, with an appreciable law and order situation
189
190
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
is not bad, the incidence of crime shows a slightly Baseline for Uttarakhand
increasing trend over time since the inception of Corruption is widespread in India, with most of
the state in 2000, till 2015, albeit with fluctuations. the states being affected by it. One area wherein
Among major categories of crime against wom- corruption particularly affects the average citizen
en, while the number of dowry deaths shows a de- is that of the provisioning of public services. In
clining trend, it is disturbing to note that the cases view of the lack of transparency in the functioning
of rape and molestation/assault on women with of many public institutions, the consumer finds it
an intent to outrage their modesty show an up- difficult to effectively access public services. Some-
ward trajectory since 2012. times even if there is access to public provisions, it
The indicators selected for the first four tar- entails inordinate delays due to the inefficiency in-
gets (see Appendix 4.3.2 and Annexure 15) are for herent in the process. Such gaps in the delivery and
the Targets 16.1 and 16.2, which deal with crimes functioning of public services affect people in all
against body, women, SCs and STs. These repre- walks of life in their daily transactions, impacting
sent the main types of crimes perpetrated against the common citizen the most, who is unable to gain
important segments of the population, and capture easy access to costlier private service providers.
the state of violent crimes in the state. E-governance is a landmark initiative by the
Vision 2030 for Targets 16.1 to 16.4 central government to bring about transparency
and efficiency in dealing with public service pro-
Uttarakhand state aims to move towards a situation
where it is free of violence and crime, and with a viders. The basic objective is to “Make all Govern-
much more transparent and effective system of pub- ment services accessible to the common man in his
lic service delivery. As regards Targets 16.1 to 16.4, it locality, through common service delivery outlets,
was noted that the baseline levels of major crimes al- and ensure efficiency, transparency, and reliability
ready exhibit a fairly low incidence in the state. The of such services at affordable costs to realise the ba-
vision 2030 is to reduce the crime rates from their sic needs of the common man”.14
present baseline levels in the coming 15-year peri- The Government approved the National
od. However, since there has been a spurt in crimes e-Governance Plan (NeGP), comprising 31 Mission
against women in the last few years, the focus will Mode Projects (MMPs) and its eight components,
especially be on the reduction of such crimes. In in 2006.15 The NeGP seeks to lay the foundation of
addition, there is a relatively high incidence of eco- and provide an impetus for the long-term growth
nomic crimes in the state, which necessitates atten- of e-Governance within the country. This section
tion towards the reduction of such crimes as well. provides information on the creation of the right
The next set of targets, namely Targets 16.5, 16.6 governance and institutional mechanisms, setting
and 16.7 broadly deal with governance issues. Tar- up of the core infrastructure and policies, and im-
get 16.7 has to do with democratic decision-making plementation of a number of MMPs at the Central,
in the economy. State and integrated service levels.
E-district is one of the MMPs under the NeGP.
This programme aims at providing support to the
Target 16.5 Substantially reduce corruption and
basic administrative unit, that is, the district admin-
bribery in all their forms
istration to enable content development of Govern-
Target 16.6 Develop effective, accountable and ment to Citizen (G2C) services, which would help
transparent institutions at all levels deliver services to the citizen at his doorstep.16 In
Target 16.7 Ensure responsive, inclusive, the context of an e-District, the district administra-
participatory and representative decision-making tion refers to the administrative set-up led or co-
at all levels ordinated by the District Collector/Magistrate in-
14. Source: http://meity.gov.in/divisions/national-e-governance-plan, accessed on April 13, 2017.

15. Source: http://digitalindia.gov.in/content/ekranti-electronic-delivery-services, accessed on April 13, 2017.
16. Source: http://www.meity.gov.in/content/e-district-frequently-asked-questions-faq , http://www.nic.in/projects/e-district-uttarakhand, accessed on April
12, 2017.
191
Table 4.5 Crime Rate (per 100,000 population) of IPC Crimes During 2015
Type of Crime All India Uttarakhand Himachal Pradesh
All IPC crimes 234.2 97.2 198.5
Crime against women^ 53.9 28.2 37.4
Crime against children^^ 21.1 16.5 22.1
Crime against Scheduled Castes 22.3 4.9 5.5
Crime against Scheduled Tribes 10.5 2.1 1.5

Crime against body* 68.1 25.3 57.0
Crime against public order** 11.9 10.1 8.0
Economic crimes$ 11.9 10.1 8.0
Source: National Crime Record Bureau.
Notes:
^Rape, Assault on women with intent to outrage her modesty, Insult to the modesty of women, Cruelty by husband or relatives
^^ Foeticide, Infanticide, Procuration of minors, Murder, Exposure and abandonment, Offences under the POCSO Act, the Prohibi-
tion of Child Marriage Act, etc.
*Murder, attempt to commit murder, culpable homicide not amounting to murder, attempt to commit culpable homicide, kid-
napping and abduction, grievous hurt, causing death by negligence, causing injury due to rash driving/road rage, dowry death and
human trafficking.
** Riots, Arson, Unlawful assembly and Offences promoting enmity between different groups;
$ Criminal breach of trust, Cheating, Forgery and Counterfeiting;
Figure 4.4: Total Cognizable IPC Crimes in Uttarakhand (2015) (Registered Crimes)
cluding Sub-division/ Tehsil/Block/Village level stone of the Digital India Programme. More than
units responsible for service delivery. service delivery points in rural India, these have
In the long run, the services are expected to be been positioned as change agents, promoting rural
delivered via the proposed Common Services Cen- entrepreneurship and building rural capacities and
tres (CSCs), which constitute a strategic corner- livelihoods. The CSCs are meant to carry out the
following services:
192
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Fig. 4.5 Major Crimes Against Women in Uttarakhand (2015) (IPC Registered Crimes)
(i) Issue of Certificates including services: Domi- Uttarakhand has 7950 Gram Panchayats, with a
cile, Character, Caste, Income, Solvency, Hill mandate to open one Devbhoomi Jan Sewa Kendra
Area, Uttarjivi, Birth, Death etc. (CSC) in each GP. As of now, around 4000 CSCs
(ii) Social Welfare Schemes including services – have been established and these are providing
Social welfare Pensions (Old age, Widow and seamless services to rural citizens (see Appendix
Handicap) 4.3.4 for list of services being provided to consum-
ers through CSCs).
(iii) Revenue Court including services – including
Final order copy, daily cause list, Case Status The CSCs are also providing employment to
details. Government dues and recovery, chang- local village youth who are being trained by the
es in khatauni and mutation process, etc. Government to run the portal and who, in turn,
(iv) Panchayat Raj- pariwar register copy, pariwar train the villagers on the use of CSCs. The VLEs
register entry who run the portal, are now earning around Rs.
10,000–15,000 per month. The revenue comes from
(v) Disaster management – Compensation for the fee amount of Rs. 30 paid by the citizens for the
damage due to disasters, and services. Out of the pooled fee, 10 per cent goes to
(vi) Ration card related services, including services the CSC for providing the software, 10 per cent to
change of address, additions, deletions of mem- the IT department, and 80 per cent to the VLE. In
bers, application for issue of duplicates, etc. this context, it is important to spread digital liter-
acy among the people. As of now, 2,30,000 people
The Uttarakhand government started the e-Dis- have been enrolled for digital literacy, and 28,000
trict portal in 2010, and the pilot was in Pauri. By have been made digitally literate.18
March 2015, the state had rolled out e-portal ser-
vices offering five services (for example, the pro- The RTS Act is a legal provision which is being
vision of various Government certificates, paying used by some states to ensure that certain public
of bills, banking services, etc.) in 13 districts. These services are delivered to citizens in a time-bound
are now being increased.17 manner, failing which, there are mechanisms by
17. Information based on an interview with an IT department official in Dehradun.

18. Ibid.
193
which the errant officer may be fined or punished. can be seen that the state has already initiated a num-
Such legislations are expected to fight corruption, ber of measures to fight such menaces. The main in-
make officials more accountable, and provide trans- struments in this context are the e-Governance Pro-
parency in to the process of public service delivery, gramme and the RTS Act. The vision 2030 for these
strengthening the institutions in the process and targets is to strengthen the functioning of such pro-
making them more efficient. The common frame- grammes and Acts, so that all the public services are
work of the legislations in various states includes, delivered via the e-Governance programme, or spe-
granting of “right to public services”, which are to cifically, through the CSCs, as well as to improve the
be provided to the public by the designated official delivery of services under the RTS Act.
within the stipulated time frame.19
The key provisions of the state laws on public
Target 16.9 By 2030, provide legal identity for all,
service delivery are (Raha, 2012):
including birth registration
• Right to service within a specified time limit.
Target 16.10 Ensure public access to information
• Two-level appeals mechanism to seek relief for and protect fundamental freedoms, in accor-
denial of or failure to provide service. dance with national legislation and international
• Fining of government officers responsible for agreements
causing delay in delivery of service without
sufficient and reasonable cause.
Registration of children at birth is the first step in
• Compensation that may be paid to the appli-
securing recognition before the law and safeguard-
cant of the service from the fine.
ing individual rights and access to justice. Glob-
Uttarakhand State introduced the RTS Act in the ally, children living in urban areas are around 1.5
year 2011. The Uttarakhand Right to Service Com- times more likely to be registered than their rural
mission (URTSC) has been constituted with a view counterparts.21 Uttarakhand also has taken the
to strengthen the service delivery mechanism in the necessary steps to register the birth of children in
state. The government accords high priority to the the state. The percentage of registration of births is
matter of attending to citizen’s applications in re- 100 per cent at present (2015), up from 82 per cent
spect of notified services in a time-bound manner, in 2014. The indicator for Target 16.9 is the percent-
and aims to deliver quality services. Necessary steps age share of births registered in the state, which, as
have been taken in this direction through enactment mentioned earlier, is already achieved in full. Some
of the Uttarakhand Right to Service Act (URTS Act), other indicators are the registration of mothers un-
2011 and notification of various services related to der the ICDS programme and registration of mar-
the Department of Food and Civil Supplies, Reve- riages (see Appendix 4.3.2 and Annexure 15). The
nue, Medical Health and Family Welfare, Housing number of mothers registered under ICDS present-
including Urban and Village Planning, Transport,
ly stands at 13,12,450.
Drinking Water, Social Welfare, Urban Develop-
ment, School Education and Home Department.20 The RTI Act has a direct relation to Target 16.10.
The RTI Act, 2005, mandates a timely response to
As mentioned earlier, Target 16.7 concerns dem-
citizens’ requests for government information. The
ocratic decision-making and participation in the
objective of this Act is to empower the citizens,
electoral process. The voter turnout in the 2017 elec-
promote transparency and accountability in the
tions in Uttarakhand was a fairly high at 68 per cent.
functioning of the Government departments, and
Vision 2030 for Targets 16.5 to 16.7 reduce corruption.22 Uttarakhand was one of the
Regarding the Targets 16.5 to 16.7 concerning the re- earliest states in India that took the initiative to im-
duction of corruption, and improving governance, it plement the RTI Act in 2005.
19. Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Right_to_Public_Services_legislation

20. Source: http://urtsc.uk.gov.in, accessed on April 13, 2017.
22. Source: http://rti.gov.in/
194
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
There is an RTI Portal Gateway to the citizens partment for capacity building. A challenge
for quick search of information on the details of facing this team is the extent to which smart
first Appellate Authorities, and Public Information grid and smart meters can be made compati-
Officers (PIOs), amongst others, besides access to ble with the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPB6).
RTI-related information/disclosures published on
the web by various public authorities under the Right to Services Act
Government of India as well as the state govern- • Surveys conducted by some state govern-
ments. This Act symbolises a significant big step ments have revealed that the awareness levels
towards keeping the citizens of the country in- of citizens and those of service providers with
formed about the Government’s activities. respect to the provisions of the Act are quite
Vision 2030 for Target 16.9 and 16.10 low (Sahoo and Kapoor, 2012).24 While there
has been enthusiasm about the provision
Regarding Target 16.9, the vision would be to
about guaranteeing services to people, the im-
maintain the 100 per cent registration of births in
plementation on the ground level has not been
the state in the coming 15 years till 2030. The aim
satisfactory, especially in the rural areas. The
would also be to increase the registration of moth-
bottlenecks in this regard stem from manpow-
ers till at least 90 per cent by 2030.
er, finance and infrastructure, especially pow-
The vision for Target 16.10 is to strengthen acts er supply. In addition, while guarantees ate
such as RTI so that people have full access to infor- offered about the timely delivery of services,
mation in the true democratic spirit by 2030. quality standards are lacking.
Challenges for peace, justice and strong institutions • One gap in the framing of the Act is that in
Tackling Crime the process of justifying the delay or denial of
services requested for, there is no mention of
The rise in crimes against women is an important
a burden of proof in the legislation of Uttara-
challenge and needs to be dealt with by inducting
khand state, unlike in the Bihar and Himachal
more women police into the police force. More-
Pradesh Acts, which place the burden of proof
over, the state government has to deal with new-
either with the designated officer or the Ap-
er patterns of crimes that misuse technology and
pellate Authority (Raha, 2012).
the rise in economic crimes. The police department
needs to promote capacity building in terms of both • The role of the appellate authorities is very
personnel and augmenting the number of vehicles critical in actually granting the right of the cit-
and other equipment it has to improve mobility. izen to public services. These authorities are
to be notified by the State and are from with-
E-Governance Programme
in government departments, raising doubts
• CSC 2.0 was started in April 2015 in the state about their independence. In Uttarakhand,
by the Government of India’s Telecom Depart- and in most other states, penalty is imposed
ment and the Ministry of Electronics and IT for delay only when it is shown that the de-
(MEIT). But 3000 Gram Panchayats, mostly in lay was unjustifiable. In this context, since the
hills, still do not have 3G and other connectivi- grounds for delay are not specified, consider-
ty.23 able discretion has been vested with executive
• Five districts have borders with Nepal and Chi- authorities to make this assessment. Above
na, and are thus placed in a strategic location, all, if the appeals process is long-drawn, it is
but these places have no connectivity. likely that citizens will stay away from access-
ing it for grievance redressal.
• State e-mission team (SEMT): The Central Gov-
ernment provides consultants to the state IT de-
23. The plans of the IT department for the vision 2030 for providing connectivity to the entire state have been discussed in Chapter 2.
24. The observations are about states in India in general, such as Bihar, Madhya Pradesh and Punjab, and not specifically about Uttarakhand.
195
Box 4.3: Some Proposed Initiatives by the Uttarakhand Police
In view of increasing urbanisation as well as the increasing use of technology in daily life, the police department
perceived the need for modernisation to cater to the present-day policing requirements and to meet the demands
in the future. The wexpansion of the organisational structure of the police with the inclusion of more specialised
wings is on the anvil.
The Proposed New Wings in the police would include the: Anti-narcotics cell, Anti-Human Trafficking Cell, Eco-
nomic Offences Wing, Emergency Services (to subsume SDRF and Fire Services), Directorate of Technical Services
(CCTNS, SCRB and Radio/Wireless), Training Directorate, Traffic Directorate, Legal Wing, Police Welfare and
Housing Corporation, Sports Directorate, Smart Control Room and Motor Transport Unit.
Ensuring Responsive Transparent Administration or Smart Policing is another important strategy. The Uttara-
khand Police is also committed to becoming a modern and smart police force and to providing more services
through web-enabled services and mobile-based applications. Such services include:
Online FIR registration, passport verification and tracking, tenant verification, employee verification, procession re-
quest, event request, arms licence and tracking of request, e-challan payment, police clearance certificate, character
verification report, and permission for use of loudspeakers, among others.
Right to Information Act underlying causes identified, along with an analy-

In January 2013, the Uttarakhand Government pre- sis of the regions where these are escalating in or-
pared a new set of RTI Rules combining the fees der to curb them on a war-footing. The department
and cost rules and the appeals rules. A report by has plans to establish separate women police sta-
the Commonwealth Human Rights Initiative sug- tions in all the districts. Helplines/helpdesks and
gests that while the RTI Rules notified in 2005 were women cells have been set up to provide assistance
in harmony with the RTI Rules notified by the Cen- to women. More women may also be inducted into
tral Government, some of the new RTI rules pro- the police force for ensuring better management of
posed by the Uttarakhand Government are likely such crimes. In addition, the disposal process must
to create confusion and increase the inconvenience be expedited and conviction rates augmented.
levels for potential applicants and appellants Juvenile cells and separate police officers have
(Daruwala, et al., 2013). If implemented, the chang- also been established to deal with matters related
es will increase the litigation burden at the first and to children. In order to speed up the recovery of
second appeal stages. In addition, the proposed ‘missing children’, the state police department has
rules seek to remove the Uttarakhand Information conducted ‘Operation Smile’ in all the districts.
Commission’s inherent powers to oversee compli- The state must also ready itself to face newer
ance with its orders. The proposed rules, rather crimes based on the misuse of technology as well
than favouring the citizens, lead to an adversari- as the rising tide of economic crimes. Here, police
al interaction between the information-seeker and personnel trained in the latest technology would
the public authority. be deployed for curbing such sophisticated crimes,
Strategies for attaining Vision 2030 rather than following the traditional methods of
Tackling Crime crime investigation.
The Uttarakhand Police aims to become a police Governance

force that is responsive, empathetic, and profes- • e-Governance efforts are being strengthened
sional with the ability and capacity to implement in the state to ensure that the Vision 2030 can
the rule of law uniformly. The rise in crimes against become a reality. The state government has
women will be addressed with urgency and the requested the Central Government for a Very
196
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT) for providing • The Gram Sabha must be strengthened for fa-
connectivity to the remote hilly areas, which is cilitating its effective community participation
a major challenge. in governance issues.
• As regards the sensitive and strategic districts • For achieving better implementation of the var-
of the state located along the international bor- ious Acts and programmes guaranteeing rights
ders, the Central Government has agreed to to citizens to access public services, the exist-
provide connectivity to 8 out of a total of 47 ing infrastructure must be improved to reach
check-posts. The state government has, howev- all the unserved and under-served regions of
er, asked for connectivity in a total of 89 loca- the state, especially the sparsely populated and
tions. remote hilly regions.
• The e-Governance programme is being imple- • Capacity-building in terms of personnel must
mented by VLEs, but it is imperative to spread be undertaken, where required, and adequate
greater awareness about it. This is particularly funds earmarked for all such activities for ef-
applicable for the Right to Services (RTS) Act fective governance.
and Right to Information (RTI) Act, as since • The RTS act suffers from some internal weak-
people have very little awareness about their ness in terms of the fact that those who oversee
right to access public services and informa- its execution and those who assess the delays
tion. It is only when each and every citizen ac- and grounds for such delay belong to the same
quires full knowledge about all the features of pool of officers. This issue could be addressed
these Acts, that they can optimally benefit from by bringing in third party assessment where
them, and become truly empowered citizens of possible.
the state.
• All programmes and implementation of Acts
• At the village level, the School Management such as the RTS and RTI need periodic monitor-
Committee, committees for public health, san- ing and review. Only such periodic evaluation
itation and nutrition, Mata Samiti, etc. should of its democratic institutions and processes can
be strengthened and brought under a strong help Uttarakhand become a truly democratic
leadership, and the department of Panchayati state by 2030.
Raj needs to be actively engaged in this task.
197
Appendix 4.1.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 5: Gender Equality
To strengthen the implementation of existing constitutional

provisions and laws for ending gender-based discrimination,
Target 5.1 End all forms of discrimination against all women and
to increase gender parity to unity at the primary and secondary
girls everywhere
levels of education, and to raise the share of women workers in
non-agriculture sector to 50% by the year 2030.
To raise the sex ratio at birth to unity throughout the state, and to
Target 5.2 Eliminate all forms of violence against all women and girls end or mitigate violence faced by women, in public and private
in the public and private spheres, including trafficking and sexual spheres, by the year 2030. Women and girls must find a reassuring
and other types of exploitation ambience such that they can seek redressal for the violence that
they have faced, without any fear.
Target 5.3 Eliminate all harmful practices, such as child, early and To completely eliminate any remaining incidence of child mar-
forced marriage and female genital mutilation riage in the state, by 2030.
Target 5.4 Recognize and value unpaid care and domestic work The share of women in non-agriculture sector will be raised to
through the provision of public services, infrastructure and social 50% by 2030 and the share of women engaged in collecting water/
protection policies and the promotion of shared responsibility within wood in total women engaged in domestic work will be halved to
the household and the family as nationally appropriate 26% by 2030.
Target 5.5 Ensure women’s full and effective participation and equal To maintain the seat share of women in Panchayat bodies at 50%,
opportunities for leadership at all levels of decision-making in politi- and to enhance share of women in public service posts to 50%, as
cal, economic and public life well as to enhance the share of women entrepreneurs to 33%.
Target 5.6 Ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive health

and reproductive rights as agreed in accordance with the Programme
of Action of the International Conference on Population and Develop-
ment and the Beijing Platform for Action and the outcome documents
of their review conferences
198
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 4.1.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 5: Gender Equality
Base line 2016-

Target 5.1 End all forms of discrimination against all women and girls everywhere Vision 2030
17
5.1a Ratio of girls to boys in primary level education 0.89 1
5.1b Ratio of girls to boys in secondary level education 0.92 1.00
5.1c Ratio of literate women (15-24 years) to literate men (15-24 years) 1.00
5.1d Share of women workers in the non-agricultural sector (%) 16.8 50

5.1e. Ratio of women to men wage in casual farm work
5.1f. Ratio of women to men wage in casual non-farm work
Target 5.2 Eliminate all forms of violence against all women and girls in the public and pri-
vate spheres, including trafficking and sexual and other types of exploitation
5.2a1 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) 888 1000

5.2a2 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) (Rural) 924 1000
5.2a3 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) (Urban) 817 1000
5.2b Ratio of women to men in life expectancy 1.03 1.08
5.2c Women (15-49 years) who experience physical or sexual violence as reported (number) 1412
5.2d Violence against women as reported January 1, 2016 to November 30, 2016 1896 <1,896
5.2e Ever married women who have experienced spousal violence (15-49 years) (%) 12.7 <12.7
Eliminate all harmful practices, such as child, early and forced marriage and female Negligible
Target 5.3
genital mutilation incidence
Negligible
5.3a Women aged <18 years who are married or in union (%)* 0
incidence
Target 5.4
Recognize and value unpaid care and domestic work through the provision of
public services, infrastructure and social protection policies and the promotion of
shared responsibility within the household and family as nationally appropriate
5.4a % of women engaged in collecting water/wood out in total women in domestic work 52.7 26
5.4b. Average hours spent per day by women in domestic and care activities
Target 5.5 Ensure women’s full and effective participation and equal opportunities for leader-
ship at all levels of decision-making in political, economic and public life
5.5a Seats held by women in Panchayat bodies (%) 50

5.5b Women in public service posts (%) 30 50
5.5c Share of women entrepreneurs (%) 9.26 33
5.5d Seats held by women in legislature (%)
Target 5.6
Ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive health and reproductive rights
as agreed in accordance with the Programme of Action of the International Confer-
ence on Population and Development and the Beijing Platform for Action and the
outcome documents of its review conferences
5.6. Awareness about reproductive rights among girls and women (%)
*According to NFHS-4 data (2015-16), around 13.9 per cent of the women aged 20-24 years were married before attaining 18 years of age.
199
Appendix 4.1.3
Schemes for SDG 5: Gender Equality
Targets Centrally Sponsored Schemes Direct Intervention Schemes
National Mission for Empowerment of Women including Indira

Target 5.1 Gauri Devi Kanya Dhan Yojana
Gandhi Mattritav Sahyog Yojana
Rajiv Gandhi Scheme for Empowerment of Adolescent Girls Kasturba Gandhi Balika Vidyalaya with hostel
Target 5.2
(SABLA) facilities
Target 5.3 Child Protection Commission Protection of Women from Domestic Violence
Target 5.4 Training of Elected PRI Women Representatives
Target 5.5 Women Empowerment Mission
Target 5.6 Mukhya Mantri Mahila Satat Ajeevika Yojana
Some additional ongoing efforts of the state to address the issue of gender inequality and empowerment, including details of
some of the schemes mentioned above, are as follows:
• The state has prepared a Gender Budgeting Document, which forms the basis for allocation of funds for gender-related
activities.
• Ration cards and gas connections are being issued in women’s names, since they are now being shown as heads of house-
holds.
• One of the important social security schemes launched for women is the Gaura Devi Kanya Dhan Yojana. Under this
scheme, girls who have passed high school are eligible for receiving education-related benefits if they belong to the Below
the Poverty Line (BPL) category. If they are Above the Poverty Line (APL), the urban/rural income cut-off line is used for
determining their eligibility. They are given Rs. 50,000 in fixed deposits in banks, with a lock-in for five years, if they are
enrolled in Government or private-aided educational institutions. For technical education, a sum of Rs. 25,000 per annum
for engineering/ medical students for girls falling in the general category is offered.
• Widow pension is given to BPL widows, at Rs. 4,000 per month.
• Women belonging to the BPL category, who were injured while working, and have suffered a 20 per cent handicap, are
given a disability pension at Rs. 1,000 per month.
• Abandoned women or mentally unstable women belonging to the BPL category get a pension of Rs. 1,000 per month.
• Marriage grants are given for girls, at Rs. 50,000 for low-income households.
• In case of inter-caste marriages too, a grant of Rs. 50,000 is given.
• A Nirbhaya cell (prakosth) has been set up comprising lawyers, and counsellors, among others, to provide services to
women victims ranging from counselling to paralegal advice to filing of First Information Reports (FIRs). The cell is a One
Stop Centre (OSC). Six new police stations (thanas) are being set up under the scheme in addition to the two existing ones,
to deal with crimes against women.
• Nari Niketans or women’s shelter homes have also been set up for women in need.
• There is a 30 per cent reservation for women in all jobs.
• A subsidy of 2 per cent is given for land/property registration to women.
Note: For further elaboration, see Uttarakhand, Uttarakhand Academy of Administration, http://uaoa.gov.in/index.php?-
mod=content&page=75
200
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 4.2.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 10: Reduced Inequalities
To reduce inequality in the state, by ensuring that the income of the

10.1 By 2030, progressively achieve and sustain income growth of bottom 40 percent of the population grows at a rate greater than the
the bottom 40 per cent of the population at a rate higher than the state average income growth (7-10%) and such that the concentra-
national average tion of income with the rich declines with a more egalitarian society
being formed by 2030
10.2 By 2030, empower and promote the social, economic and politi-
cal inclusion of all, irrespective of age, sex, disability, race, ethnicity,
origin, religion or economic or other status To improve provision of basic services such as water, sanitation,
housing, education, health, etc. so that all households have equi-
table access by 2030. The supporting policies and schemes in exis-
10.3 Ensure equal opportunity and reduce inequalities of outcome, tence need continuation and/or strengthening to fulfil this objective
including by eliminating discriminatory laws, policies and practices of inclusive growth by 2030
and promoting appropriate legislation, policies and action in this
regard
10.4 Adopt policies, especially fiscal, wage and social protection

policies, and progressively achieve greater equality
10.5 Improve the regulation and monitoring of global financial

markets and institutions and strengthen the implementation of such
regulations
10.6 Ensure enhanced representation and voice for developing

countries in decision-making in global international economic and
financial institutions in order to deliver more effective, credible,
accountable and legitimate institutions
10.7 Facilitate orderly, safe, regular and responsible migration

and mobility of people, including through the implementation of
planned and well-managed migration policies
201
Appendix 4.2.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 10: Reduced Inequalities
By 2030, progressively achieve and sustain income Baseline Vision

Target 10.1 growth of the bottom 40% of the population at a
rate higher than the national average 2016-17 2030
Reduce or arrest
10.1a Consumption inequality (measured by Gini coefficient) 0.35
at present level
Improve the share to above 23%
based on their income growing at
10.1b Share of bottom 40% of population in total consumption (%) 23.0
rates above 7% p.a. and at above 10%
by 2030
10.1c Palma ratio (Ratio of share of richest 10% in total consump- Reduce the Palma ratio to at least or
1.8
tion/ share of poorest 40% in total consumption) below 1.5
Target 10.2 By 2030, empower and promote the social, economic

and political inclusion of all, irrespective of age, sex,
disability, race, ethnicity, origin, religion or econom-
ic or other status
10.2a Ratio of male and female at panchayat level
10.2b Ratio of male and female in the state assembly
Target 10.3 Ensure equal opportunities and reduce inequalities
of outcome, including by eliminating discriminatory
laws, policies and practices and promoting appro-
priate legislation, policies and action in this regard
10.3a Ratio of per capita income of district with highest value to
2.05 Reduce from present level
that of district with lowest per capita income value
10.3bRatio of households (%) living in ‘good’* houses in urban areas
1.17 1
to those in rural areas
10.3c Ratio of all households (%) with access to tap-water from
1.58 1
treated sources in urban areas to those in rural areas
10.3d Ratio of share of all households (%) to share of SC households
1.17 1
(%) with access to tap-water from treated sources
10.3e Ratio of share of all households (%) to share of ST households
1.25 1
(%) with access to tap-water from treated sources
10.3f Slum households (%) with access to tap-water from treated
68.3 100
sources
10.3g Slum households (%) with access to closed drainage for waste
29.8 100
water outlet
10.3h Poverty ratio (rural vs urban) 1.11
Adopt policies, especially fiscal, wage and social
Target 10.4 protection policies, and progressively achieve greater
equality
10.4a Growth of real wages
Improve the regulation and monitoring of global
Target 10.5 financial markets and institutions and strengthen
the implementation of such regulations
Ensure enhanced representation and voice for
developing countries in decision-making in global
Target 10.6 international economic and financial institutions in
order to deliver more effective, credible, accountable
and legitimate institutions
Facilitate orderly, safe, regular and responsible
migration and mobility of people, including through
Target 10.7
the implementation of planned and well-managed
migration policies
202
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 4.2.3
Schemes for SDG 10: Reduced Inequalities
Target No. Centrally Sponsored Schemes Direct Intervention Schemes

Multi-sectoral development programme for minorities
All Uttarakhand Border Backward area Development Nidhi
(MSDP)
Scheme for development of scheduled castes Integrated Industrial development policy for hills
Scheme for development of other backward castes,

CM Skill Development Scheme
nomadic and semi-nomadic tribes
Pradhan Mantri LPG subsidy Pahal Yojana (DBTL) State government scholarship scheme for classes 1 to 10
Mudra Yojana
Scheme for Economically backward classes
Umbrella scheme for education of ST students
Backward Region Grants Fund (BRGF)
Scheme for Promoting Quality Education in Madrasas

(SPQEM)
Appendix 4.3.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 16: Peace, Justice and Strong Institutions
Target 16.1 Significantly reduce all forms of violence and related

death rates everywhere
Target 16.2 End abuse, exploitation, trafficking and all forms of vio-
lence against and torture of children
To reduce the present crime rates further till 2030. The focus will
Target 16.3 Promote the rule of law at the national and international be on crimes against women and economic crimes.
levels and ensure equal access to justice for all
Target 16.4 By 2030, significantly reduce illicit financial and arms

flows, strengthen the recovery and return of stolen assets and combat
all forms of organized crime
Target 16.5 Substantially reduce corruption and bribery in all their
forms
Target 16.6 Develop effective, accountable and transparent institu- To make all public services available through CSCs, strengthen
tions at all levels the functioning of Right to Services Act and make the state free of
corruption.
Target 16.7 Ensure responsive, inclusive, participatory and represen-
tative decision-making at all levels
Target 16.8 Broaden and strengthen the participation of developing

countries in the institutions of global governance
Target 16.9 By 2030, provide legal identity for all, including birth To maintain 100% birth registration till 2030. The registration of
registration mothers will also be increased under ICDS to reach 90% by 2030.
Target 16.10 Ensure public access to information and protect The vision for Target 16.10 is to strengthen acts such as RTI so that
fundamental freedoms, in accordance with national legislation and people have full access to information in the true democratic spirit
international agreement by 2030.
203
Appendix 4.3.2
Targets and Indicators related to SDG 16: Peace, Justice and Strong Institutions
Baseline 2016-
Vision 2030
17
Significantly reduce all forms of violence and related death rates
Target 16.1
everywhere
16.1a Crime against body^ per 100,000 population 25.3
16.1b Crime against women^^ per 100,000 population 28.2 Reduce all forms of crime
16.1c Crime against Scheduled Castes per 100,000 population 4.9 from baseline levels
16.1d Crime against Scheduled Tribes per 100,000 population 2.1
End abuse, exploitation, trafficking and all forms of violence against

Target 16.2
and torture of children
16.2a Child labour (% of children age 5-17 years)

Reduce all forms of crime
16.2b Crime against children^^ôver total crime 16.5
from baseline levels
16.2c Number of child abuse/trafficking cases
Promote the rule of law at the national and international levels and
Target 16.3
ensure equal access to justice for all
16.3a Threatened detainees over the overall prison population
Target 16.4 By 2030, significantly reduce illicit financial and arms flows, strengthen
the recovery and return of stolen assets and combat all forms of
organized crime
Target 16.5 Substantially reduce corruption and bribery in all their forms
16.5a Number of corruption /bribery cases
16.5b Number of trial against corruption/bribery
Target 16.6 Develop effective, accountable and transparent institutions at all levels
16.6a Number of Common Service Centres 4000 7950
Ensure responsive, inclusive, participatory and representative decision-
Target 16.7
making at all levels
16.7a Voter turnout (%) 68
Target 16.8 Broaden and strengthen the participation of developing countries in the
institutions of global governance
16.7a Voter turnout (%)
Target 16.9 By 2030, provide legal identity for all, including birth registration
16.9a Percentage of births registered (%)$ 100 100
16.9b Registration of mothers under ICDS (number) 1312450 Attain 90%
16.9c Marriage certificate by gender and social groups
16.9d Number of PAN cards issued
16.9e Number of Aadhaar cards issued
Ta r g e t Ensure public access to information and protect fundamental freedoms,

16.10 in accordance with national legislation and international agreements
*Source: National Crime Record Bureau. The baseline data refer to 2015.
^Murder, attempt to commit murder, culpable homicide not amounting to murder, attempt to commit culpable homicide, kidnapping and abduction, grievous hurt, causing death by negligence,
causing injury due to rash driving/road rage, dowry death and human trafficking.
^^Rape, Assault on women with intent to outrage her modesty, Insult to the modesty of women, Cruelty by husband or relatives.
^^^Foeticide, Infanticide, Procreation of minors, Murder, Exposure and abandonment, Offences under the POCSO Act, the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act etc.
$ The birth registration of children whose births are reported registered under ICDS are 1905085 in number. This is proposed to be increased to 90% by 2030.
204
SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Appendix 4.3.3
Schemes for SDG 16: Peace, Justice and Strong Institutions
Target 16.1 Digital India
Target 16.2 Development of Infrastructure Facilities for the Judiciary Right to Information (RTI)
Targets 16.3 Integrated Child Protection Scheme (ICPS) Right to Service (RTS) Act
Target 16.4
Creation of the Suraj and Bhrashtachar Unmoolan Department
Target 16.5
created
Target 16.6 Establishment of the Child Labour Care Centre
Appendix 4.3.4 List of Services Currently Available on the Digital Seva Portal
1.Agricultural services Kisan Point, mKisan Registration, VNR Seeds
Lending Kart Loans for VLEs, Pump Kart, LED Kit and Raw Material Order, PVC Card Order,
ePashu Chikitsa, eLegal Service, Videocond2h : Recharge and Set Top box , Income Tax Ser-
2. B2C services
vices , Order Devices from CSC , CBSE NEET Registration, CSC Bazaar, Uber Driver Registra-
tion, Kisan eStore, Life Certificate LIC
Pin Pad Device Payment, Bank Mitr Fee Payment, Aadhaar Seeding, Apna Dhan is now DIGI
3. Banking Pay, Bank Mitr Registration, Digital Financial Inclusion, Merchant Onboarding Form, Mudra
Loan Registration
CSC NIELIT Centre, Shankar Mahadevan Academy, Tally Certification Program, Basic Comput-
er Course (BCC), Khan Academy, NIOS Registration for Examination, NIOS Online Admission
(Stream 1, 2, 3, & 4), NIELIT Services , Sarkari Pariksha (Govt. Job Exam preparation), Dr. C
4. Education related services
V Raman University, iScholar i30 IIT-JEE 2017 1yr Online course, CSC School- Multimedia
Content (6th to 10th), Tally Kaushal Praman Patra , Competitive Exam Prep- IIT/PMT/Banking
(Embibe)
5. Election services Election Commission Services - Uttarakhand
6. Electricity bill payment services State electricity services
NSDL - PAN Card Service, FSSAI Registration Service , Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – Urban,
Jeevan Pramaan Certificate, Soil Health Card , Public Grievances, Swachh Bharat, National Pen-
7. G2C services sion System (Swavalamban Yojana) , Rashtrapati Bhavan Museum Visit, Passport, Jan Suraksha
Yojana, UTIITSL - PAN Card Service, National Career Services , Birth and Death Certificate
Registration, PVC Election Card Oder
8. Health services Jiva Ayurveda, CSC Telemedicine, Apollo Tele Health, Hello Health
9. Insurance services RAP Registration, Life Insurance Premium Payment
10. Mobile services Mobile Recharge, Mobile Bill Payments, DTH Recharge, DataCard Recharge
Contd...
205
11. Recruitment services Indian Navy
12. Skill Development services L&T Skill Courses Form, CAD Registration
13. State Government services eChallan – Uttarakhand, eDistrict Uttarakhand
Learn English: Certificate from British Council, Cricket Strokes (Learn Cricket Online), Anima-
14. Training courses
tion Course, Online English Speaking Course
15. Travel services Bus India - Govt. Bus Ticket Booking, IRCTC, CSC Travel (Air)
Aadhaar Demographic Registration, Aadhaar Demographic Update, Aadhaar Print – e-Know

16. UID services
Your Customer (e-KYC), Best Finger Detection (BFD), Aadhaar Mobile Update, Aadhaar Print
eCourts, Online Results, Market Prices, Weather Information, Apply for Mandatory Free CCC
17. Free services
Examination, CSC RAS
18. Information zone Kiosk banking, insurance
206
207
208
Human beings have made giant strides in terms a very close association.1 As the world has pro-
of economic growth, harnessing all the natural gressed on higher growth trajectories and increased
resources at their disposal. However, in the energy consumption, it has become increasingly
process, they have also placed themselves in a clear that there are several pitfalls of generating
position where they are being compelled to make energy via the conventional route with the help of
an important choice: whether to maximise today’s fossil fuels such as coal, oil, and petroleum. Fossil
consumption at the cost of that of the future genera- fuel combustion leads to air and water pollution
tion. Natural resources are getting depleted, and air and adverse climate change. These add particu-
and water pollution is increasing alarmingly. Unless late matters to the atmosphere, lead to the rising
human beings make a concerted effort to repair the emission of Greenhouse Gases (GHGs), and also
damages to our natural ecosystem over the years, in add effluents and pollutants to water.2
future there will simply not be enough food, water, The search for cleaner energy has led to the
or clean air to go around for all the citizens of the emphasis on using energy emanating from sourc-
world. Thus, it is important to ensure that the pro- es that can be naturally replenished such as wind,
cess of development, and patterns of consumption solar, and hydro-power, among others. Such
and production are environmentally sustainable. sources are renewable or sustainable or green
In this chapter, five SDGs are discussed: SDG energy sources.3 Energy is the dominant contribu-
7 (affordable and clean energy), SDG 11 (sustain- tor to climate change, accounting for around 60 per
able cities and communities), SDG 12 (responsible cent of the total global greenhouse gas emissions.
consumption and production), SDG 13 (climate ac- The SDG No. 7, ‘Ensure affordable, reliable, sus-
tion), and SDG 15 (life on land). tainable and modern energy for all’ is an import-
Uttarakhand is a mountain state, which plays a ant pillar of the set of 17 SDGs as energy is crucial
pivotal role in providing many ecosystem services for achieving almost all the SDGs, ranging from
such as provisioning services, regulating services, its role in eradicating poverty through achieving
and cultural services, among others. Yet as a moun- progress in health, education, water supply and
tain economy, it has its own specific vulnerabilities industrialisation, to combating climate change.
such as inaccessibility, fragility, marginality, and di- The agreement reached in Paris at the Confer-
versity. As this chapter shows, due to these vulner- ence of Parties (COP21) represents an important
abilities, the state has already been significantly af- milestone for future changes in energy and climate
fected by the process of climate change. Apart from policies, aiming at limiting global greenhouse gas
weather-related extremities, the natural calamity emissions to sustainable levels.
which caused a huge loss in terms of lives and prop- The proportion of the global population with
erty in 2013, highlight the need for protecting the access to electricity has increased steadily, from
environment amidst rapid strides in development. 79 per cent in 2000 to 85 per cent in 2012, but 1.1
billion people in the world are still living without
electricity. The proportion of the world’s popula-
SECTION 5.1 tion with access to clean fuels and technologies for
SDG 7: Ensure Access to Affordable, Reliable, cooking increased from 51 per cent in 2000 to 58
Sustainable and Modern Energy for All per cent in 2014. However, there has been limited
progress since 2010, and this progress has been
Economic growth and energy consumption have
1. Elasticity of electricity consumption on GDP has been declining since the Third Plan period when it peaked at 5.04. The average elasticity from 1969–2012
(the Fourth Plan to the Eleventh Plan period) is calculated at 1.27. The Ministry of Power, Government of India, had forecast an elasticity of 0.9 for the Twelfth
Plan (2012–2017) and 0.8 for the Thirteenth Plan (2017–2022). Based on this elasticity, the projection of energy requirement was pegged at 1403 BU at the
end of the Twelfth Plan (2016–2017) and 1993 BU at the end of the Thirteenth Plan (2021–2022).
2. http://nebula.wsimg.com/a0ccc702e9ee3b4afad758e1a295668a?AccessKeyId=6CFD152CF7548226ACAF&disposition=0&alloworigin=1, accessed on
April 20, 2017.
3. Large hydro-based plants with more than 25 MW capacity are not considered to be renewable sources of energy. While hydro-power is cleaner than
conventional thermal power, other environmental issues such as displacement of people, diversion of the routes of rivers, the changing flow pattern/sedi-
mentation, and disturbance of immediate ecosystems are matters of concern around the building of large hydro-power projects.
209
outstripped by the global population growth. Another report by OECD views renewable
Moreover, the progress has been mostly limited energy sector as more of a growth driver, espe-
to the urban areas. cially in rural areas.5 This report maintains that
The Uttarakhand Government is committed to renewable energy sector is more capital-inten-
improving the quality of life of its citizens by pro- sive, rather than being labour-intensive. Most of
viding them the opportunity for higher electricity the direct jobs for this sector are in operating and
consumption. The joint initiative of the state and maintaining the installations. The largest share of
central governments of ‘Power for All’ is steadfast long-term jobs is ‘not in direct energy generation,
in its aim is to provide round the clock electricity but along the renewable energy supply chain – in
to each household in the state. This is expected construction, manufacturing, specialised services,
to not only accelerate economic development in and also rural activities such as farming, forest-
the state, but also enhance the inclusive nature of ry, etc.’ Whichever way the linkages lie, towards
development. growth and/or employment, the renewable ener-
gy sector is clearly the rising sector of the future
and holds a lot of promise.
Small Hydro-power: Renewable Energy Sector
In India, hydro projects up to 25 MW station capac- Small Hydro Power Sector: Benefits and Chal-
ities have been categorized as Small Hydro Power lenges6
(SHP) projects. The mandate for small hydro power
(up to 25 MW) has been given to Ministry of New The Government of India has laid great empha-
and Renewable Energy. Small hydro power proj- sis on production of renewable power as a clean
ects are further classified as: Micro Hydro (Up to source of energy. Not only do the SHPs come un-
100 kw), Mini Hydro (101-2000 kw) and Small Hy- der clean energy, but their contribution becomes
dro (2001 to 25000 kw). Uttarakhand has a substan- more significant as SHPs require minimal sub-
tial potential capacity of 1707.87 MW which is 8.6 mergence, rehabilitation and minimal impact to
percent of the all-India capacity of 19749.44 MW, as environment. Owing to the twin factors of scope
of March, 2014. The state has an installed capacity of SHP development and its established method-
of 174.82 MW installed capacity and projects under ology for CDM (Clean Development Mechanism)
implementation with capacity of 174.04 MW. registration, SHPs have gained great significance
in Uttarakhand. Other advantages of Small Hy-
The renewable energy sector, which includes dropower Projects are that these help in promot-
SHP, also has considerable employment potential ing the local industries in remote areas and can
and it is expected that it can act as a significant assist in self-employment. The development of
growth driver. Employment in the renewable SHPs also need minimum rehabilitation and re-
energy sector, excluding large hydropower, in- settlement as well as environmental problems.
creased globally by 2.8 percent to reach 8.3 mil-
lion in 2016, with China, Brazil, the United States, Uttarakhand state has several rivers and canals
India, Japan and Germany being the leading job which spells tremendous potential for producing
markets, according to a report by the Internation- hydro-power energy in the state. This potential is
al Renewable Energy Agency.4 A large chunk of enhanced not only by the availability of ice fed and
the employees in renewable energy sector world- rain fed rivers but also because of the natural in-
wide were in Asia where renewable energy proj- cline in the state. It has been recognized that small
ects were on the rise. The agency expects that jobs hydropower projects can play a critical role in im-
in the sector could reach 24 million by 2030, more proving the overall energy scenario at the national
than offsetting fossil-fuel job losses and becoming level and, in particular, for remote and inaccessible
a major economic driver around the world. areas. Thus for a hilly state such as Uttarakhand,
this source of energy is particularly suitable. For
4. http://economictimes.indiatimes.com/jobs/renewable-energy-jobs-growing-worldwide-irena/articleshow/58848020.cms accessed on July 7, 2017.

5. OECD (undated).
6. This section has drawn on Singh and Rastogi (2006) and Joshi (2007)
211
instance, in the remote area of Badrinath, power is The power sector of the state is regulated by
supplied with the help of an SHP. the Uttarakhand Electricity Regulatory Commis-
However, there remain many challenges in sion (UERC) while the Uttarakhand Renewable
the area of construction of SHPs as well as in Energy Development Agency (UREDA) is the
their execution. For the former, there is lack of nodal agency for the promotion and implemen-
hydrological data, since SHPs are constructed tation of various renewable energy programmes
mainly on small streams or tributaries of rivers. in the state.
Secondly, given that a major part of Uttaranchal
state is under seismic Zone-V, the state is suscep-
tible to earthquakes. Structural design needs to Target 7.1 By 2030, ensure universal access to
take care of this feature, which in turn increases affordable, reliable and modern energy services
the cost. Uncertain geological conditions such as The indicators presented in Appendix 5.1.2 and
Loose River bed Material (RBM), Unstable Slopes, Annexure 7 show that presently, the level of elec-
Land/Avalanche Slides, etc., as well as remote trification of households is almost 100 per cent
location, make construction difficult and costly.
in the urban areas and 96.5 per cent in the rural
These conditions also pose steep challenges for
areas. This implies that despite having complet-
smooth operations, as do weak grid connections.
ed the implementation of the Ministry of Power’s
RGGVY scheme, the state still has 3.5 per cent (or
The vision 2030 for the state for Goal No. 7 is: 1,00,407) rural households that are yet to be elec-
By 2030, there will be deployment of green trified.
power in Uttarakhand for empowerment, It may also be noted that the definition of rural
security, affordability and equity. electrification has recently been modified. Accord-
The vision for targets of Goal No. 7 are presented ing to the new definition of village electrification,
in Appendix 5.1.1, followed by values for indica- which came into effect from the year 2004-05,7 a
tors (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 5.1.2, village would be declared as electrified, if:
and Appendix 5.1.3 contains the schemes appli- • Basic infrastructure such as distribution trans-
cable for Goal no. 7. Annexure 7 contains the de- former and distribution lines are provided in
tailed information regarding indicators for Goal an inhabited locality as well as in the dalit bas-
no. 7 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium ti (hamlet) where it exists.
term (2023-24) and vision 2030. For this SDG, all • Electricity is provided to public places like
the targets have been discussed together. schools, panchayat offices, health centres,
dispensaries, and community centres, among
Baseline for Uttarakhand others.
• The number of households electrified should
As per the provisions of the Electricity Act 2003,
be at least 10 per cent of the total number of
the following three independent unbundled
households in the village.
utilities are operational in the state:
(1) Generating Company—Uttarakhand Jal Thus, the percentage share of villages
Vidyut Nigam Limited (UJVNL), being electrified does not indicate that all the
households in the village, or even a majority of
(2) Transmission Company—Power Transmission the households in the village, are electrified. In
Corporation of Uttarakhand Limited (PTCUL), addition, the definition does not mention the
(3) Distribution Company—Uttarakhand Power number of hours for which electricity is available,
Corporation Limited (UPCL). which can also lead to slightly more optimistic
7. Issued by MOP, vide their letter No. 42/1/2001-D(RE) dated February 5, 2004, and its corrigendum vide letter no. 42/1/2001-D(RE) dated February 17,
2004, according to the DDUGJY website, http://www.ddugjy.gov.in/mis/portal/definition_electrified_village.html, accessed on May 2, 2017
212
Table 5.1 Availability Mix of Energy from Firm Sources in FY 15 (in MW)
Source MW Firm Entitlement % age of Total Firm Availability

Own Generating Stations (OGS)
Hydro 1134.96 48.02%
Small Hydro 32.70 1.38%
Subtotal – OGS 1167.66 49.40%
Private Generating Stations (PGS)
Non Solar (R.E.) 213.30 9.02
Solar 6.6 0.28%
Vishnugarh (J.P.) 48.00 2.03%
Subtotal – PGS 267.90 11.33%
Central Generating Stations (CGS)
Coal based 400.10 16.93%
Gas Based 69.64 2.95%
Subtotal-Thermal 469.75 19.87%
Nuclear 31.24 1.32%
Hydro Based 427.13 18.07%
Subtotal – CGS 928.12 39.27%
Grand Total 2361.08
Source: PFA 24x7 document.
assessments regarding rural electrification, than with a share of around 76 per cent, followed by
may be the case on the ground. thermal capacity at 17 per cent, gas-based at 3 per
The indicators for the percentage share of cent, and nuclear capacity at 1 per cent, and the
balance 3 per cent constituting solar and co-gen-
households using clean fuels (electricity, LPG/nat-
eration capacity.
ural gas, bio-gas) for cooking shows considerable
rural–urban disparity. In the urban areas, 86.6 per However, only around 10 per cent of the avail-
cent of the households use clean fuels, contrasted able hydropower has been harnessed in the state.
with a mere 31.1 per cent for the rural areas. This Projects in the upper reaches of the Bhagirathi
reflects the continued dependence of households Valley have been stopped by the Central Govern-
on wood as a fuel in the villages in Uttarakhand. ment due to environmental concerns.
Micro, mini and small hydro power plants of
The per capita consumption of electricity of
up to 25 MW capacity are considered as renew-
the state, at 1154 kwh in 2014-15, was higher than
able sources. Presently (as of FY 2016-17), the
the national average of 1010 kwh. At present, the
cumulative capacity for renewable energy in the
state per capita consumption is 1279 kwh.
state is 206 MW, in the state, the components of
which are shown in Table 5.2. Further, 3.2 per cent
Target 7.2 By 2030, increase substantially the of the energy demand of the state is met from re-
share of renewable energy in the global energy newable sources.
mix
The electricity supply can come from either con- Target 7.3 By 2030, double the global rate of
ventional sources or renewable sources. Current- improvement in energy efficiency
ly, the state has a huge potential for hydro-elec- One indicator for this target is the transmission and
tricity, with the total installed capacity as on distribution loss (in percentage recorded in the state,
March 31, 2015 (the allocated capacity in state, the baseline value for which is 18.63 per cent.
private, joint and central generating stations), at Vision 2030 for Targets 7.1 to 7.3
2361.08 MW, out of which its own generating ca-
pacity is about half at 1167 MW (see Table 5.1). In the background of the vision 2030 for the de-
The hydro-based capacity dominates in the state, ployment of green power in Uttarakhand, the
213
Table 5.2: Renewable Energy Capacity in Uttarakhand (MW)

Projects Capacity (MW)
Grid connected projects 118.50
Of which –co-generation-based power plant 72.60

--solar PV power plant 40.90
-- micro/mini/small hydro-power plants 5.00
Off grid projects 87.73
Of which –rice husk and W2E biomass power projects

44.00
--solar decentralised power projects
36.00
-- micro/mini/small hydro-power plants (for village electrifica-
7.73
tions through 25-200 kw MHPs and watermill/gharat)
Total renewable energy capacity 206.23
Figure 5.1: Vision for Renewable Energy in Uttarakhand
broad goalposts for 2030 are: Ministry of Power, the Uttarakhand 24 x 7 Pow-
1. To meet 15 per cent of the energy demand er For All Initiative, the Uttarakhand Solar Power
from renewable sources from the present Policy 2013, the Uttarakhand Policy for Develop-
level of 3.2 per cent. ment of Micro and Mini Hydro Power Projects up
to 2 MW by 2015, and the recent draft policy on
2. To save up to 25 per cent of energy consump-
mini and micro grids brought out by the Ministry
tion in order to fulfil the Government of
of New and Renewable Energy.
India’s commitment to source at least 40 per
cent of its energy requirements from renew- Regarding Target 7.1, the vision is to
able sources. cover the remaining households that still do not
have access to electricity, as envisaged in the
These goals are being supported on the ground
Uttarakhand 24x7 Power for All Initiative.
by various Central and state government schemes
Among the around one lakh un-electrified rural
and policies. Among them are DDUGJY of the
households, recent surveys have identified 54,015
214
Table 5.3: Changing Shares (%) of Components of Renewable Energy

as Proposed in Vision 2030
Source of Renewable Energy (million units) 2016-17 2019-20 2023-24 2029-30

Micro hydel 18 74 95 151
Solar 70 351 409 601
Co-gen, biomass, W2E 284 821 922 1137
Total Renewable Energy (Million Units) 371 1246 1426 1889
Source of renewable energy (%)
Micro hydel 4.85 5.9 6.6 8.0
Solar 18.86 28.2 28.7 31.8
Co-gen, biomass, W2E 76.54 65.9 64.7 60.2
% Renewable w.r.t. Total Demand 3.2 10.5 11.8 15.1
households, and there are plans to bring them to act like a single window clearance agency
under the electricity grid system through the facilitating approvals from different line
DDUGJY scheme of the Government of India. An- departments. Here, its capacity to fulfil this
other 2,229 households have been planned to be role may prove a constraint.
brought under for electrification through off-grid • The success of all the enabling policies and
solutions, since it was considered un-economical initiatives for creating last mile connectivi-
to extend the grid to cover these households. The ty by micro-griding local renewable genera-
balance 44,163 households are undergoing scruti- tion resources, will be achieved only when it
ny for inclusion under one of the two categories. is able to demonstrate maximum participa-
As mentioned above, the share of renewables tion of the private sector or of Panchayati Raj
is slated to increase substantially to 15 per cent by Institutions (PRIs). As of now, the number of
2030 from the baseline share of 3.2 per cent (Tar- households/hamlets which may come under
get 7.2). Table 5.3 shows the planned increase in such micro-grids is not well identified. If the
the renewable share along with the share of the main grid does reach the isolated area before
individual components. the investment of the micro-grid is recovered,
Under Target 7.3, which deals with ensuring it shall remain a risk for the investor. Even if
energy efficiency, the government aims to reduce there is a compulsory power purchase agree-
the Transmission and Distribution (T&D) loss ment with the main grid, factors like tariff
from the baseline value of 18.63 per cent to 9 per structure, tariff cross-subsidisation, feed-in-
cent in 2030. In the interim years, the targets are to tariff, and standards of interconnectedness in
be modified to 14 per cent by 2019-20 and further either case come into play, which necessitates
to 12 per cent by 2023-24. careful considerations and policy tuning.
Challenges for affordable and clean energy • The share of hydro generation, at 48 per cent
of the total firm availability, has remained the
• The state has laid out ambitious goals to in- mainstay for the state in its efforts to mitigate
crease the share of renewables in the gener- peak demand. Notwithstanding these efforts,
ation mix. The state nodal agency, UREDA, 90 per cent of the potential still remains un-
has a critical role to play in the facilitation of tapped. However, it is amply clear that unre-
different clearances required for renewable stricted expansion of bulk hydro generation
capacity additions. In effect, it is supposed without adequate study, analysis and safe
215
guards to the ecology will not be sustainable. Uttarakhand Solar Power Policy and the Jawa-
In this scenario, it is necessary to map the ca- harlal Nehru National Solar Mission (JNNSM).
pacity addition programme with the demand • Capacity installations of mini hydro-pow-
growth, and put contingency plans in place er projects of up to a cumulative capacity of
for generation resource constraints. It is also 43 MW under the “Policy for Development
important to undertake a risk analysis of the of Micro & Mini Hydro Power up to 2 MW,
on-going hydro projects to determine the ex- 2015”.
tent to which water shall be available in suc-
cessive years. • Training and capacity building of various
stakeholders in the field of renewable energy
• It has been observed that the share of renew- and energy conservation.
able energy in the total energy demand has
been planned for expansion, from the current • Generating publicity and awareness of renew-
3.2 per cent to 15.1 per cent by 2030, mainly on able energy programmes and energy-efficient
the back of the expansion of mini hydro and equipment.
solar capacity additions. This needs an ade- • Accreditation of new renewable energy proj-
quate in-depth study of solar irradiance, land ects under the Renewable Energy Certificate
availability, and water resources. (REC) mechanism.
• In order to facilitate the increased penetration • Timely establishment of renewable energy
of grid connected renewables and at the same projects to fulfil the Renewable Purchase Ob-
time, to ensure the safety, security and stabili- ligation (RPO)) compliance8 of obligated enti-
ty of the grid under all operating conditions, it ties as stipulated by the Uttarakhand Electric-
is necessary to equip the State Load Dispatch ity Regulatory Commission (UERC) from time
Centre with robust renewable resource fore- to time.
casting solutions. This will enable the load
dispatch system to schedule and manage the
The second goalpost attempts to bridge
grid system from the adverse impacts of vari-
the remaining gap to achieve an overall
able renewable power.
share of 40 per cent energy from renew-
able sources. This goal identifies efficien-
Strategies for attaining Vision 2030 cy measures to achieve a 25 per cent re-
In line with the first goalpost of duction in energy consumption leading
increasing the share of renewable up to FY 2030.
energy to 15.1 per cent, the interim
goalposts planned include shares The detailed strategy for achieving this goal is as
of 10.5 per cent in 2019-20 and 11.8 follows:
per cent in 2023-24.
• Replacement of incandescent lamps/CFLs
The detailed strategy for achieving this goal is used by consumers of UPCL with LED bulbs;
as follows:
• Replacement of conventional street lights with
• Electrification of remotely located habitations LED street lights in ULBs;
through renewable energy projects under the
• Replacement of inefficient equipment/devic-
net-metering scheme through involvement of
es with energy-efficient devices in buildings
village communities.
of ULBs;
• Harnessing 360 MW of solar power under the
8. RPO is a mechanism by which the State Electricity Regulatory Commissions (SERCs) are obliged to purchase a certain percentage of power from
renewable energy sources. RPO is being implemented throughout the country to create demand for renewable energy.
216
• Installation of solar water heating systems in Very recently in 2016, the Uttarakhand gov-
government offices, schools, colleges, hostels, ernment joined the Ujwal DISCOM Assurance
housing complexes, hospitals, and hotels, and Yojana or UDAY scheme for attaining an opera-
in industries where hot water is required for tional turnaround of the DISCOMs. The aim is to
processing. bring down Aggregate Technical and Commercial
• Use of star labelled motor pumps, power ca- (ATC) losses and to eliminate the gap between the
pacitors, and foot reflex valves in the agricul- cost of supply of power and realisation through
ture sector. various measures such as compulsory distribu-
tion transformer metering, consumer indexing,
• Installation of an automatic power factor cor- GIS mapping of losses, upgradation/change in
rection relay in all industries; and transformers and meters, smart metering of high-
• Implementation of energy conservation build- end consumers, and feeder audits, among others.9
ing codes.
As the state power sector moves to provide
power for all, the Power Transmission Corpora-
There are various measures already in place to tion of Uttarakhand has commensurate plans and
improve energy efficiency (as related to Tar- strategies to expand the power transmission ca-
get 7.3) such as the Perform, Achieve and Trade pacity in the state. In the period from the baseline
(PAT) scheme of the Central Government. Op- up to 2019-20, the strategy is to construct EHV
erating under the overarching National Action transmission sub-stations with a capacity addi-
Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC), and under the tion of 2655 Mega Volt Amp (MVA), along with
National Mission for Enhanced Energy Efficiency the construction of associated transmission lines,
(NMEEE), the PAT scheme is a regulatory instru- among other plans. In the medium term period up
ment to reduce specific energy consumption in to 2014, the strategy includes the construction of
energy-intensive industries, with an associated EHV transmission sub-stations of 400 KV sub-sta-
market-based mechanism to enhance cost-effec- tion, construction of GIS sub-stations as well as as-
tiveness through the certification of excess ener- sociated transmission lines. Duirng both periods,
gy saving which can be traded. Thus, energy-ef- the strategy also includes plans to add transmis-
ficient practices in industry are encouraged and sion capacity at existing sub-stations. The overall
rewarded. In the coming years, there are plans vision for the period up to 2030 is to construct 400
on the anvil to ‘deepen’ the scheme by the inclu- and 220 KV transmission systems for evacuation
sion of more units from sectors already included of power from upcoming IPPs, as well as to con-
and to ‘widen’ the scheme by including new units struct one 132 KV sub-station of 50 MVA and as-
from new industrial sectors. sociated transmission lines. There are also plans
to construct a 765 KV sub-station at Rishikesh.
9. http://pib.nic.in/newsite/PrintRelease.aspx?relid=138496, accessed on October 16, 2017.
217
218
SECTION 5.2 population (4 per cent) is more than three times that
SDG 11: Make Cities and Human Settlements Inclusive, of rural growth (1.2 per cent) in the state. Urban
population is concentrated in the cities of Dehra-
Safe, Resilient and Sustainable
dun (capital), Haridwar (religious city), Rudrapur,
Roorkee, Kashipur, Nainital, and Haldwani, which
According to NITI Aayog estimates, though 68 are richly endowed with in agro-based and other
per cent of India’s total population lives in rural industries. Dehradun grew at more than 4 per cent
areas, by 2030, India is expected to be home to six during the decade 2001-2011.
mega-cities with populations above 10 million. Apart from residents in urban areas, there is
Currently, 17 per cent of India’s urban population a large floating population in the towns of Mus-
lives in slums. Indian cities need to be prepared to soorie, Nainital, Rishikesh, Badrinath, and Kedar-
meet the challenge of both spatial and economic nath, among others. The tourist inflow figures into
inequalities to achieve the goal of sustainable de- these cities were to the tune of 311.08 lakh and
velopment. 268.09 lakh during 2010 and 2011, respectively,
The state of Uttarakhand bears the national that is, nearly three times more than the total popu-
characteristics of low urbanisation till now. But its lation of the state. This indicates the huge potential
topography does not permit a very high degree of for growth in the state revenue and the resultant
sustainable urbanisation. It is largely a hilly state, pressure on infrastructure as well.
very rich in natural resources, especially water and The mountainous areas of the state experi-
forests, blessed with rare bio-diversity, and has an ence heavy rainfall, making the shallow soil cov-
enviable stock of mineral deposits. er highly susceptible to erosion. These conditions
It has a vast potential of tourism, in adventure, necessitate conservation of the precious soil cover
leisure, eco-tourism, and religious tourism as four during the monsoons and harvesting of irrigation
of the most revered Hindu Temples, Char Dham, water for the dry months. Steep slopes and diffi-
are located here. A huge number of small-scale cult terrain make both mobility and connectivity
industries have come up in the state. Small-scale difficult. Areas with high seismic activities make
industries are growing at the rate of nearly 3 per the settlements vulnerable to disaster risks. In such
cent annually while the rate of employment in this areas, regulating construction activities is of prime
sector is around 2.4, with both figures being higher importance in planning. Adherence to the seismic
than the national average. code needs to be made mandatory in the building
designs. The phenomena of increasing urbanisa-
The state is much better placed as compared to
tion, industrialisation, and intrusion of commercial
the national average in terms of the major indica-
activities like tourism on the limited land cover in
tors of urban development. It should not face se-
the state has led to encroachment of forest land
vere problems in directing the course of urbanisa-
and green cover, and construction on unsuitable
tion with proper planning and forecasting. During
land. There is need to generate awareness of these
its creation, the state took away a better part of the
problems among local residents, and to evolve par-
natural and human resources from the parent state,
ticipatory planning and management with the in-
Uttar Pradesh. Although Uttarakhand has large ru-
volvement of local bodies.
ral areas, it is not crowded by too many polluting
economic activities. Industries account for more The Urban Development Department is the ad-
than 50 per cent of the State Domestic Product ministrative department for local self-government
(SDP). The state has moved up from the 23rd posi- in the state. The Uttarakhand Housing Depart-
tion in 2015 to the 9th in 2016 as per the Ease of Do- ment and Urban Development Authorities cater to
ing Business ranking of the Department of Indus- housing development while the Town and Coun-
trial Policy and Promotion (DIPP), Government of try Planning Department is responsible for urban
India. planning and development control. The Uttara-
khand Pey Jal Nigam and Jal Sansthan under the
As per the Census 2011, around 70 per cent of
Drinking Water Department provide water sup-
the total population of the state lives in rural areas.
ply, drainage and sewerage services to the project
However, the average rate of growth of the urban
219
towns. The Uttarakhand Environment Protection meet its expenditure. It does not get any state or
and Pollution Control Board, and the Public Works central grant. The major source of revenue is from
Department are among the major organisations the sale of land and flats, development fees, and
working in the state’s urban areas. Often, there is conversion fees, among others. As it is responsi-
overlapping of jurisdiction as well as the absence ble for the provision of physical infrastructure, the
of networking, which leads to gaps in efficiency. levels of both capital and revenue expenditure are
The agencies are hesitant to share data. considerably high.
The Town and Country Planning Department The Uttarakhand Urban Sector Development
(TCPD) is responsible for preparing the Master Investment Programme was conceived to sup-
Plans for the growing cities. Two Master Plans port the Government of India and Government of
have been prepared till date, that is, the Dehradun Uttarakhand in the implementation of policy to
Master Plan (2005 – 25) and the Haridwar Master ensure balanced regional development and pov-
Plan – 2025. Such plans for 19 more towns are on erty reduction through improvement in urban
the anvil in the coming seven years. The process governance, management, and service provision
has already started for various cities and the prog- throughout the urban sector in the state. It is an
ress is as follows: Firms have been empanelled for Asian Development Bank (ADB)-funded project,
GIS survey in four cities, basic surveys for urban and controlled by the Urban Development De-
areas are complete for two cities and the total sur- partment of the state. The department has set up
vey has been completed for two cities, Roorkee and a state level Investment Programme Management
Rishikesh. The TCPD plans to complete these ac- Unit (IPMU) for overall monitoring, execution, and
tivities by 2020. Master Plans for the remaining ten policy direction. It is registered as the Uttarakhand
towns are slated to be taken up during seven years. Urban Sector Development Agency (UUSDA). It
In 2025, the plans for Dehradun and Haridwar will also provides advice and technical support to
be revisited and the Badrinath plan will be com- ULBs and other state level agencies. In addition, it
pleted. has the mandate to execute other externally aided
The Mussoorie–Dehradun Development Au- programmes in urban areas.
thority (MDDA) was established in 1984 to control The state has a total of 13 districts, of which 9
urban activities in these two expanding cities and are totally hill areas, while 2 districts are totally in
in its adjacent 187 villages. It has been responsible the plains area. The major thrust of urbanisation
for supplying housing to all income groups and is felt in the four districts of Dehradun, Nainital,
providing related infrastructure in order to ensure Udham Singh Nagar, and Haridwar. The last two
ordered urban development. However, the rapid districts are totally in the plains area while parts of
growth of the population has outnumbered the
Dehradun and Nainital are in the hills.
provisions of supply and slums have sprung up all
over the city. Mussoorie has comparatively better There are 92 ULBs in the state comprising 6 Mu-
controlled land use to prevent unauthorised con- nicipal corporations, 39 Nagar Palika Parishads,
struction but land regulations are not very effec- and 47 Nagar Panchayats. Among the 92 ULBs, 44
tive in Dehradun. Increasing population is contin- are situated in the hills. This makes the provision of
uously encroaching on forest land with little state infrastructure quite challenging. Apart from the lo-
control. The MDAA is different from other urban cal residents, the infrastructural needs of pilgrims
agencies as it has to generate its own revenue to and tourists also need to be provided. This calls for
Box 5.1: Mussourie – Dehradun Development Authority Financial Resources Required (Rs. Lakhs)
Components 3 year Plan 7 Year Plan 15 Year Plan
Affordable Housing 1,20,500 2,40,500 3,90,700
Hospital 3000 5000 9000
Infrastructure 30,000 1,00,600 2,50,000
River Front Development 1,01,802.73
Source: MDDA Vision 2030.
220 220
different strategies to meet different requirements. 5.2.2. Annexure 11 contains the detailed informa-
The topology and geographical features of the state tion regarding indicators for Goal no. 11 for base-
are additional challenges for urban planners, and line, short-term (2019-20), medium term (2023-24)
the multiplicity of organisations and complex in- and vision 2030. In the urban sector, Targets 11.4
stitutional arrangements add to the complications. and 11.5 are not applicable.Target 11.5 has been
There are six municipal corporations, that is, subsumed under disaster management.
Dehradun, Hardwar, Roorkee, Haldwani, Rudra-
pur, and Kashipur, in the state. Dehradun is the Target 11.1: Slum Upgradation and
most populated city in the state with a population Affordable Housing
of 5.74 lakh. The next populous city, a distant sec-
ond, is Hardwar with a population of 2.31 lakh.
Other cities have populations ranging between A. Percentage of Slum Households in the Total
1.18 lakh and 2.01 lakh people. The University Urban Households: 40
town of Roorkee is the smallest city with a popu- B. Percentage of Slums Denotified: 35
lation of 1.18 lakh. The vision for Uttarakhand for C. Percentage of Slum Households covered by
Goal No. 11 is: Low-cost Housing Programmes: 25
By 2030, the cities and human settlements of D. Percentage of Slum Households living in Pucca
Uttarakhand will be inclusive and safe, with Houses: 35
affordable housing for all in a clean environ- E. Percentage of Shelter Capacity to the Shel-
ment such that every inhabitant also has ac- ter-less Population: 0.8
cess to safe public space. The proportion of the slum population of the
The vision for targets of Goal No. 11 are pre- state (7.71 lakh) is low (7.08 per cent) as compared
sented in Appendix 5.2.1, followed by values for to the total population (1.08 crore) of the state, but
indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix significantly high (25 per cent) as compared to
the total urban population (30.91 lakh), according
Figure 5.2: Priority Areas for Urban Development
221
to the Census 2011. However, the major cities of Vision 2030 for Target 11.1
Uttarakhand have witnessed a large increase in the The state is experiencing high urban growth in
slum population. In the Rudrapur city of Udham selected areas. It is endowed with abundant natural
Singh Nagar district, almost 60 per cent of the pop- resources in terms of water, electricity, and land. It
ulation lives in slums. The cities of Dehradun, Ka- needs aggressive urban planning and speedy im-
shipur, and Roorkee accounted for 22, 20, and 19 plementation to make the process of urbanisation
per cent, respectively, of the total slum population, a smooth one. The industrial vision of the state is
per the Census 2001. This figure increased to 26 following the objective of rapid industrialisation.
per cent for Dehradun, as per the Census 2011. The This vision should be modified with controlled in-
state has conducted various slum surveys and BPL dustrialisation and should be synchronised with a
household surveys from time to time with assis- controlled urbanisation policy in such a way that
tance from the United Nations Development Pro- the supply of basic services does not lag too far be-
gramme (UNDP), ADB, and the Central Govern- hind the demand as the city grows in terms of eco-
ment. According to the latest survey, the state has nomic activities, while at the same time, keeping in
about 1.53 lakh slum households, of which 57,500 mind the highly fragile environment of the state.
are BPL households. Urban infrastructure is a late entry in the national
The ADB-financed Uttarakhand Urban Sector reform agenda. Hence, it has been possible to cov-
Development Investment Programme (UUSDIP) er various aspects carefully at the policy level. In
is a major programme for slum improvement that the context of Uttarakhand specifically, the poli-
aims to cover 300,000 poor people, constituting cy guidelines under the major urban schemes like
nearly half of the slum population for providing Atal Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban Transfor-
basic amenities. A slum upgradation strategy is mation (AMRUT) and Pradhan Mantri Awas Yoja-
being developed by the UUSDA, stemming from a na (PMAY) are highly relevant.
demand-based approach to provide infrastructure. The vision and strategy for urban development
The state is also working on a community-based should covers the following main priority areas
participatory planning approach for the planning (see Figure 5.2):
and maintenance of community assets involving
community-based organisations (CBOs), NGOs, o Slum Improvement and Affordable Housing
and ULBs. The programme aims to cover 69 slums o Water Supply and Sewage Management
in Dehradun, 20 in Haridwar, 10 in Nainital, and 16 o Roads and Urban Traffic Management
in Rudrapur for the provision and upgradation of
infrastructure. The slum population is spread over o Solid waste Collection and Disposal
all the districts of the state except Rudraprayag. o Strengthening of ULBs
Dehradun has the highest number of slums (162), o Sustainable Settlement Planning
followed by Haridwar (122), Udham Singh Nagar
(121), and Nainital (55). Besides these plain areas, For Target 11.1, the vision 2030 aims for a near-
slums are spread in eight hilly areas, with the num- ly slum-free future for Uttarakhand. The share of
ber ranging from 7 to 21. slum households would be gradually reduced, the
number of denotified slums increased, nearly all
The state has a significant proportion of shel- the slum households covered by housing and pro-
ter-less population (around 3000) spread over 11 vided access to pucca houses. Most importantly,
districts. However, the total number of functional concerted efforts will be made to provide shelters
shelters have a capacity of 628 persons only, with to every shelter-less citizen of the state. The 2030
all of them being in the plains areas. There are provision for all indicators is shown below, and the
posals from all districts to construct shelters with values of the indicators for the interim timelines
an additional capacity of 880 persons. There is con- 2019-20 and 2023-24 are shown in the Annexure 11.
siderable delay in the sanctioning funds release of
funds that results in a slow pace of construction. The vision for 2030 for Target 11.1 aims to:
In FY 2016-17, only 62 per cent of the sanctioned • Reduce Slum Households in the Total Urban
funds have been released. Households to 10% from a baseline of 40%.
222
• Increase the Slums Denotified to 80% from a congestion, improving parking conditions, provid-
baseline of 35%. ing bus and truck terminals, and increasing safety
• Increase share of Slum Households covered by standards for pedestrian movement.
Low-cost Housing Programmes to 90%, from a Dehradun is trying to implement greenfield de-
baseline of 25%. velopment as an educational hub under the Area
• Increase share of Slum Households living in Based Development (ABD) in Smart City Proj-
Pucca Houses to 85%, from a baseline of 35%. ect. The entire development in the state has been
planned as pedestrian-friendly, with limited loop
• Increase the percentage of Shelter Capacity to vehicular traffic on the surface. The area has been
Shelter less Population to 50%, raised from a designated to create a compact city amenable to
baseline of 0.8%. walking. The total development is designed such
that all transit nodes and activity zones are con-
Target 11.2 Roads and Urban Traffic Management centrated within a radius of a 400 m walk, along
with multiple bicycle tracks. The plan for the city is
Baseline for Uttarakhand to develop intelligent traffic management systems
The baseline values for the indicators for Tar- like dynamic traffic light sequences, which will
get 11.2 considered appropriate for Uttara- help reduce congestion on the peripheral roads
khand are given below (also see Annexure). and improve road efficiency. This type of planning
The data are not available for indicators B is the first of its kind in the state.
through to G. The city ABD is also planned to have video sur-
A. Geographical Coverage of Public Transport veillance in public places to deter criminal activity,
(%): 10 24/7 monitoring by the central command centre for
B. Per capita Availability of Public Transport enabling a prompt reaction to emergencies, and the
location of street level panic alarm systems at short
C. Percentage of Road Network with Dedicated
intervals to help residents immediately. These mea-
Bicycle Tracks
sures are especially aimed to help the vulnerable sec-
D. Availability of Passenger Information System tions, and there are plans to replicate them in other
E. Availability of Traffic Surveillance System parts of the state.
F. Percentage of Traffic Intersections with Pedes- Vision 2030 for Traget 11.2
trian Crossing Facilities The coverage of public transport will be increased
G. Percentage of Disabled-friendly Transport, for to 70 per cent by 2030, increasing from the present
example, Low-floor Buses to Accommodate baseline of 10 per cent. The interim targets are 20
Wheelchairs per cent coverage for 2019-20, and 50 per cent for
Since Uttarakhand is a hilly state, there is an ur- 2023-24. The vision is also to create green, walkable,
gent need for laying surfaced (all-weather) roads in limited vehicle zones in the cities to reduce traffic
the state to connect the scattered populations while congestion, to create dedicated bicycle tracks with
minimising the risk to people’s lives and liveli- pedestrian-friendly areas, to pay special attention
hoods. However, the surfaced road length per lakh to disabled-friendly modes of transport, and to cre-
population in the state (123 km) was much lower ate various linkages for increasing connectivity.
than the national average (233.86 km) though it was
higher than that of Uttar Pradesh (98 km) in 2001- Target 11.3: Sustainable Human Settlement
02. In 2015-16, this figure increased to around 230 Planning and Management
km for Uttarakhand, nearly doubling in 14 years
but still below the national average. UUSDIP has Baseline for Uttarakhand
covered roads and traffic management with the A. Percentage Area Notified as per the Master
objective of improving traffic conditions, reducing Plan: 30
traffic time, and improving traffic safety with a spe-
B. Number of Building Plans Sanctioned with Ef-
cial focus on the vulnerable population. The man-
fective Planning Control: NA
date of UUSDIP covers road widening to reduce
223
C. Number of Active Ward Committees in Local al Mission (JNNURM) has provided Central funds
Bodies: NA for the development of to three cities of Dehradun,
D. Percentage of Women Councillors in ULBs: 10 Haridwar, and Nainital. The UUSDIP also covers 31
cities including these three cities, and is trying to co-
E. Number of SHGs Formed: 250 ordinate with the JNNURM while also internalising
F. Percentage of Consumer Grievances Ad- some of the latter’s mandatory reforms. The main
dressed: 25 features of the UUSDIP are:
Uttarakhand is an environmentally sensitive • Decentralisation of urban governance with
region with rapid population growth. Unplanned implementation of the 74th Constitutional
development will pose a severe ecological threat to Amendment Act (CAA);
the region, especially since unplanned growth usu- • Efficient and sustainable water supply and
ally takes place much faster than planned growth. sewerage provision within the decentralised
Although the TCPD is in charge of controlling ur- framework in line with Water Supply and Sani-
ban growth, much of the urban development takes tation reform guidelines of the Central Govern-
place in an unplanned way, contributing to the ment;
lack of proper urban amenities. Building plans are
not sanctioned according to regulatory guidelines, • Municipal finance reform with financial man-
nor is urban development spreading according to agement; and
Master Plan provisions. • Private sector partnership for the provision of
The state has taken a lot of initiatives to gen- services.
erate public and community awareness about the The institutional capacity building of 31 ULBs
short-term inconvenience but long-term benefits of is one of the core agendas of the urban develop-
infrastructure projects. The beneficiaries are made ment programme. The Programme Performance
aware of preventive care to avoid health-related Monitoring System (PPMS) for ADB projects is be-
hazards, to avoid wasting of water and issues re- ing updated on a monthly basis. The indicators for
lated to user charges, and property tax reforms. In this system include:
Dehradun and Nainital city, an NGO each has been (i) Physical progress for infrastructure works;
nominated under the Community Awareness and
Participatory Programme (CAPP) to handle public (ii) Institutional development and capacity build-
grievances and facilitate social and environmental ing; and
safeguards at construction sites and labour camps. (iii) Impact assessment indicators.
The modes of public transport facilities and their The formation of Self-Help Groups (SHGs) for-
delivery are different in large towns and smaller mation is an important component of participatory
towns. The National Urban Transport Policy has planning and implementation. However, till now,
mentioned three delivery models for public trans- SHGs have been formed in only 12 of the 92 ULBs,
port in larger towns; (a) a fully integrated monopo- which is far below the target. In these ULBs, only
ly public service provider, (b) a combination of mo- 135 (33 per cent) SHGs are operational as opposed
nopoly service provider and small private agencies to a target of 405, implying that only one-third of
providing services under contract, and (c) several the target has been achieved. However, there is no
service providers operating on an equal footing, record of regular meetings between the stakehold-
regulated by an independent agency. For smaller ers and ULBs.
towns, the road infrastructure needs to be upgrad-
ed by the state. Private agencies could be invited Vision 2030 for Target 11.3
both for providing services provision as well as The vision for 2030 for Target 11.3 aims to:
setting up new terminals. The choice of models • Increase the share of Area Notified as per Mas-
will depend on the existing institutional structure ter Plan to 100%, from the present 30%.
and the level of financial support offered by the
government. • Promote active participation of all ward com-
mittees in local bodies by 2030.
The Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renew-
• Enhance the share of women councillors will
224
Table 5.4: Household Coverage of Basic Services in Major Cities in Uttarakhand

HH Level Cover- Coverage
Incidence
Coverage age of of Storm Incidence
Per capita Coverage of Sewer-
S. of Water Sewerage Water of Water
City No. of HHs Water Sup- of Latrines age Mixing
No. Supply Network Drainage Logging
ply (LPCD) (%) in Drains
Connection Services Network (%)
(%)
(%) (%) (%)
Dehra-
1 1,25,271 78 135 70 15 11 0 4
dun
Harid-
2 47,251 90 187 87 52 50 25 50
war
Hald-
wani
3 40,599 80 133 87 10 41 12 2
Kathgo-
dam
Rudra-
4 29,662 11 49 100 0 -- -- --
pur
5 Kashipur 22,908 15 45 90 0 60 50 40
6 Roorkee 22,806 48.18 109 99.80 23 60 75 15
Source: State Annual Action Plan for Implementing AMRUT in Uttarakhand (2015-16), Report submitted by Mission Director.
be increased to 50%, from a baseline of 10%. I. Percentage of Households having 24/7 Access
• Augment the number of SHGs will increase to to Electricity within the Premises: 55
800 by 2030, from a baseline of 250. In the urban sector, the Green Agenda is as
• Address all consumer grievances by the end of important as the Brown Agenda. The rapidly in-
2030, while increasing substantially from the creasing population in some cities, coupled with
present share of 25%. unplanned growth and high tourist inflow, poses a
serious challenge to the natural environment, caus-
ing degradation of natural resources. There is de-
Target 11.6: Environmental Concerns pletion of forest areas, loss of bio-diversity, and the
Baseline for Uttarakhand threat of air, water and noise pollution, stemming
from the untreated discharge of industrial and mu-
A. Percentage Reduction in the nicipal water. The major rivers, which are sources
Level of Air Pollution: 20 of drinking water and irrigation, are being used as
B. Percentage Reduction in the drains of the city. Similarly, lakes and water bodies
Level of Noise Pollution: NA and also being polluted with uncontrolled dispos-
C. Percentage of Garbage Collected and Trans- al of solid wastes. Cities like Dehradun are facing
ported to the Garbage Generated: 5.07 growing air, noise and water pollution of levels
that are 125 to 200 per cent higher than the norms
D. Percentage of Sewage Treated to Sewage Gen- specified by the CPCB. Increasing urbanisation is
erated: NA also polluting the green environment. At the same
E. Percentage of Wastewater Treated to Generat- time, the growing shortage of basic services, espe-
ed: 30 cially inadequate waste management, is making it
F. Percentage of Households Connected to Drain- difficult to follow the Brown Agenda for improv-
age System: NA ing the quality of life.
G. Number of Wards with 100% Garbage Collec- The state is much better placed in terms of the
tion and Transportation: 431 supply of electricity as its electricity consumption
per capita has increased from 824 kwh in 2009 to
H. Percentage of Households with 24/7 Access to 1020 kwh in 2015-16, which is far above the na-
Potable, Safe Drinking Water within the Prem- tional average. The per capita water consumption
ises: 50 has also increased significantly but it is still farther
225
from the objective of providing water supply to all dun and Haridwar have storage facilities with
the households within the premises. Table 5.4 de- their own water tanks whereas in Nainital, only
picts the extent of deprivation in basic services in one-fourth of the households have this facility. It
the six municipal corporations that accommodate is generally felt that there is no shortage of wa-
44 per cent of the urban population of the state. ter in the city but the water management is very
There is wide variation in the level of direct poor. For example, water is equally distributed
water supply connection even among the most ur- between hotels and houses but the consumption
banised cities of the state. The Haridwar Munici- of water in former is considerably higher. In con-
pal Corporation accounts for the maximum most gested cities like Nainital, people are reluctant to
household coverage in this component, while in get water pipelines laid across private property.
Rudrapur city, only 11 per cent of the households In cities like Dehradun and Haridwar, more than
half of households are willing to pay for new con-
have direct water supply connection. As regards
nections while the situation is the reverse in Nain-
the per capita water supply, only two cities are
ital where people are willing to pay user charges
above the norm of 135 LPCD as per the Ministry of
if they get better quality of water.
Urban Development (MoUD) guidelines. Three cit-
ies are way behind the norm while Haldwani Kath- The setting up of community toilets is the
godam is very close to achieving the standard. The need of the hour as long as the households do not
average coverage of latrine services is satisfactory have attached toilets in the houses. Communities
(88.96 per cent) with only Dehradun falling below in many towns are ready to provide land and pay
the average, as the huge slum population in Deh- for using the toilets. The task becomes much easier
radun increases the level of deprivation. Most of when the community undertakes the responsibili-
the cities show a pathetic performance in terms of ties to maintain community assets. In Uttarakhand,
the coverage of the sewerage network. The highest many communities are willing to take that respon-
network coverage of 52 per cent has been identified sibility if they are convinced about the benefits. The
in Haridwar, while Rudrapur and Kashipur have financial data of the municipalities show that the
a negligible network coverage. Even in the capi- ULBs do not utilise all the potential taxes, thereby
tal city of Dehradun, only 15 per cent of the total weakening the existing resource base. The effective
households have sewerage network coverage. adaption of model municipal laws may be helpful
in resolving such issues.
The state has to seriously address the issue of
solid waste management in order to fulfil the goal Vision 2030 for Target 11.6
of Swachh Bharat by 2019. It tabled the Uttara- Uttarakhand is a naturally beautiful state with a
khand Anti Littering and Anti Spitting Bill, 2016, high quality of natural resources such as air and
in the Assembly. The ULBs are working to evolve water. The vision 2030 would be to restore the pris-
rules for the imposition of heavy fines on the vio- tine quality of these natural resources by reducing
lators but the supply machinery needs to be more air and noise pollution, and sustainably treating
effective. The facility of door-to-door garbage col- and managing liquid and solid waste.
lection is effective in 431 out of the 706 wards of The vision for 2030 for Target 11.6 aims to:
six Municipal Corporations. The ADB-financed
project has focused on Investment in solid waste • Increase the percentage reduction in air and
management, which includes a level of solid waste noise pollution level to 70% by 2030.
collection coverage of 50–72 per cent and effecting • All the garbage generated will be collected and
improvements in the collection method. It lays em- transported by the year 2030
phasis on: (a) segregation of waste at the household • Increase the share of sewage treated to sewage
level, (b) improvement of management at the ward generated to 70% by 2030
and town levels, (c) provision of waste collection
• All wards will have garbage collection and
and transportation equipment, and (d) construc-
transportation by 2030
tion of sanitary landfills.
• All urban households will have sewerage con-
Due to the irregular and limited water supply,
nection by 2030
around 69 per cent of the households in Dehra-
• All urban households to have 24x7 access to
226
Table 5.5 Norms for Green Space and Parks
S. No. City Per Person Open Space in the Plan Area (sq. m.)
1 Dehradun 3
2 Haridwar 0.31
3 Haldwani Kathgodam 2.13
4 Rudrapur 7
5 Kashipur 2.51
6 Roorkee 0.5
Sources: Urban and Regional Development Plans Formulation and Implementation (URDPFI), MoUD, GoI.
Potable, Safe Drinking Water within Premises It intends to create a variety of open spaces with con-
by 2030 nectivity between them and various water bodies.
• All urban households to have 24x7 access to The existing green spaces will be transformed into a
electricity within Premises by 2030 dynamic community place. These open spaces need
to have controlled retail activities, with dedicated
zones for hawkers and street vendors to provide
Target 11.7: Access to Safe Public Place clean public space to the citizens. This space should
be well connected and safe. If this project is imple-
mented successfully, it will open up a wide scope
The baseline values are not available for any of the for replication in other congested areas of the state.
indicators presented below for Target 11.7.
Vision 2030 for Target 11.7
A. Per Capita Availability of Green Space
The Vision 2030 for Target 11.7 is to provide uni-
B. Average Distance of Accessing Public Space versal access to safe, inclusive and accessible, green
C. Average Distance of Accessing Recreational and public spaces to all, especially women, children
Space and disabled people, as per state norms. The state
needs a robust vision for controlling indiscriminate
The MoUD has specified the availability of
urban development and increase in inequality. The
green space as indicated in Table 5.5. It implies that
unequal spread of opportunities often results in the
15 to 18 per cent of the urban land need to be ear-
expansion of smaller urban areas to the outskirts,
marked for open space.
thereby reducing the significance of ULBs. The state
The state has by default various open spaces is already experiencing uneven urban growth. Mas-
as construction in the hilly areas is very expensive ter plans, housing needs, service delivery, and ca-
and not supported by supplementary infrastruc- pacity of the ULBs are deeply interlinked. The ULBs
ture. However, open space does not mean desert- need to play effective roles in city development in
ed place. Open space is much needed in the cities order to arrest the skewed trend of urbanisation.
as well, as these open spaces function as the lungs The ULBs in the state are not yet ready to take up
of the city. Open spaces need to be green, walk- this challenge, as observed earlier. The transitional
able, safe, and vehicle-restricted zones with only towns, which maintain important linkages with vil-
non-motorised vehicles being permitted here. The lages and make the bottom of the pyramid stronger
state at present does not have many such places are declining in number. There is also a huge prob-
with all of them being crowded with uncontrolled lem of spatial and economic inequality between the
micro economic activities that spoil the character of hill areas and the plains. It is time to realise that the
the open space and pollute the environment. Deh- Urban Vision in the state will remain incomplete
radun has prepared a plan under the Smart City without proper implementation of planned devel-
Project for innovative use of open space in its ABD. opment and empowerment of local bodies.
227
Challenges for sustainable cities and sured that the plans were followed in actual prac-
communities tice. This power has now been passed into the
hands of the development authorities. The ULBs
Target 11.1 have lost some important sources of revenue like
• Slum improvement is a serious challenge as octroi and toll tax, which were abolished by the
shortage of land makes relocation of slums state, without adequately compensating the ULBs
difficult. Bulk water supply and sewer lines for the recurring loss. Development charges and
need to be provided at the entry of the slum fees for the approval of building plans are also no
areas. There are various Central Government longer available to the ULBs. The ULBs have thus
schemes for financing slum improvement pro- suffered a serious loss of independence and have
grammes but their implementation is delayed become subordinate agencies of the state. They
because matching state contributions are slow cannot make any appointments unless the state
to come. The problems of slums are especially government has created the post and granted per-
acute in the plains areas, but the hill areas too mission to the fill in the post.
are not slum-free. It is very difficult to provide
The Nagar Palika Parishads (NPP) and Nagar
infrastructure in the hills and the major urban
Panchayats (NP) do not have any mandatory pow-
schemes are also concentrated in the plains.
er to raise revenue unlike the Nagar Nigam (NN),
Slums in the hills pose a threat to both lives
which is empowered to levy property taxes, in-
and the environment.
cluding water, drainage and conservancy taxes
• The shelter-less population poses another and the like.
challenge of urbanisation in the state. It is
The ULBs in the state have some special fea-
nearly impossible for people to survive with-
tures which have a bearing on their financial situ-
out shelter in adverse weather conditions, es-
ation. A large number of ULBs have a population
pecially in the hilly areas.
of less than 25,000, and many of them have less
Target 11.2 than 10,000 persons. At the other extreme, out of
Uttarakhand is an environmentally sensitive re- 92 ULBs in the state, only six Municipal Corpora-
gion with a rapid population growth. Unplanned tions have population in excess of one lakh. Most
development leading to unplanned vehicular use of the ULBs in the hill districts fall in the lowest
as well as traffic congestions pose a severe ecologi- two classes described above. Almost the same
cal threat to the region and signify major challeng- situation exists with respect to the area of ULBs.
es for the transport department. These ULBs are totally dependent on the state as
they do not have any self-generating sources of fi-
Target 11.3
nance owing to the small areas and small number
It is imperative to have effective coordination be- of inhabitants.
tween all tiers of governments for sustainable hu-
man settlement planning and management. Over Target 11.4
time, the ULBs have seen an erosion in their power. The state faces the challenge of enhancing the
Previously, the ULBs were running institutions like vast tourism potential through the creation of
primary schools, dispensaries, and veterinary hos- awareness and coordination among the stake-
pitals, while some of them were also looking after holders, and generation of adequate capital ex-
water supply. The cities of Mussoorie and Nainital penditure in tourism and private sector partici-
were also generating and distributing electricity. pation. In order to attract tourists from all over
Gradually, all these activities have been taken over the world, there is an an urgent need to create an
by the state. All the properties and assets connect- efficient and modern infrastructure that adheres
ed with these functions have also been transferred to environmental guidelines while catering to the
to the agency without any compensation being specific needs of tourists of all categories. In this
paid to the ULBs. context, the availability of land is a major chal-
In the past, ULBs had the power to approve lenge in Uttarakhand.
building plans as per their bye-laws and they en-
228
Target 11.5 It is very difficult to control the builder lob-

One major challenge faced by the government after by if the public place is located in an area with a
the unprecedented disaster in 2013 was to restore high commercial value. The TCPD thus needs to
the washed away power houses. The need for tak- be very vigilant and effective in preventing any
ing into account local environmental aspects while development in violation of the Master Plan.
constructing hydro-power projects had never Strategy for attaining Vision 2030
been so acutely felt. Disaster-prone areas need Target 11.1
infrastructure like helipads, alternate roads, and
tunnels for emergency operations. The potential • To develop land from all the available sourc-
areas vulnerable to landslides need to be identi- es keeping in mind the difficulty in transfer-
fied and measures taken to avoid future disasters. ring forest land, and to facilitate coordination
among various state departments in order to
Being a huge tourist attraction, the state is utilise any undeveloped land in the best possi-
also characterised by huge construction activities. ble way;
Stone blasting weakens the overall strength of
the rock and also degrades the environment and • To map all slum areas and households, espe-
ecology of the area. Unsustainable mining activ- cially BPL households;
ities are taking place in the riverbed areas. The • To provide basic infrastructure at the earliest so
development of tourism along the riverbed and that slums can be denotified;
the construction of hotels open up the areas to the • To increase the supply of affordable houses so
threat of a large scale disaster. that new slums do not surface;
Target 11.6 • To focus on the hill areas in order to make them
The state has to gear up both its administration slum-free;
and finances to face the tremendous challenge of • To expedite the construction of shelters so that
improving the urban living environment. Land there is no shelter-less population in the state;
has always been a major bottleneck for the Urban • To pool all the financial resources from rele-
Development Department, as 70 per cent of the vant central and state schemes; and
state is covered by forest area. The ULBs suffer
from a huge scarcity of funds and technical re- • To explore the scope for a Public–Private Par-
sources. Various Central Government schemes ticipation (PPP) model,
like AMRUT are operational, but still inadequate. The state government is working on a proposal
There are not many options of generating addi- to build towns in the hills so that people can access
tional resources. Many towns are situated on the basic economic and social services there. One big
bank of rivers and landfill sites are not permitted challenge here is the transfer of land since much of
within a radius of 100 meters of the river. the land belongs to the Forest and Horticulture de-
The state is the source of origin of both the Gan- partments. The timely release of funds and speedy
ga and Yamuna, yet people have to deal with an construction of shelters is the need of the hour.
inadequate supply of drinking water, especially Target 11.2
since the sources of natural water are drying up.
Public transport facilities and their delivery are
Target 11.7 different in large towns and smaller towns. The
On various occasions, the preservation and plan- National Urban Transport Policy has mentioned
ning of open space may require land pooling and three delivery models for public transport in larg-
acquisition. If there are scattered owners of different er towns: (a) a fully integrated monopoly public
parcels of land, it is challenging to reach a consen- service provider, (b) a combination of monopoly
sus. Inadequate land acquisition will affect project service provider and small private agencies pro-
viability and cost estimates. Delay in land settle- viding services under contract, and (c) several
ments will result in delay in project implementation. service providers operating on an equal footing,
regulated by an independent agency. For smaller
229
towns, the road infrastructure needs to be upgrad- socio-economic surveys including a benefit Mon-
ed by the state. Private agencies could be invited itoring and Evaluation Baseline survey in all the
for both service provision as well as for setting up three initial project towns for preparing bench-
new terminals. Both the public and private sectors mark information. This needs to be replicated in all
can be consulted for networking route design and the towns.
non-motorised transport form. A strategy for safe Target 11.4
transport provision would involve using GIS to
improvise the passenger information and traffic Establishment of a land bank for creating infra-
surveillance systems. structure for tourism is the need of the hour. The
state needs to pull up unused public and private
Target 11.3 lands and to explore all possibilities for the devel-
There is a need to regulate settlement planning ac- opment of a land bank.
cording to the Master Plan for controlled urbani- Target 11.5
sation and to plan for compact mixed use devel-
opment with sufficient residential and commercial Reconstruction of dilapidated and damaged infra-
development for the future city growth require- structure needs to be the top priority. All develop-
ments. ment needs to be disaster-proof in order to attain
the sustainability objective and ensure the sus-
Decentralisation should be made effective so tainable development of the hill areas. Finance is a
that ULBs can be actively associated with urban major challenge here. The state and central govern-
planning. It is important to initiate coordination ments should earmark a significant proportion of
among various urban development agencies for net- the budget for this sector.
working and data sharing with ICT-based solutions.
Target 11.6
Under the AMRUT programme, the state gov-
ernment has prioritised the ULBs based on their It is encouraging that 30 ULBs have transferred
financial strength to disburse monetary assistance land from other departments and another 12 are in
to the financially weak ones. The ULBs with a the process of getting it in order to construct waste
higher proportion of urban poor have also been processing units. Rainwater harvesting and other
earmarked for prioritisation for financial disburse- means of water conservation need to be imple-
ment. The state has made allocation to different mented urgently. Modern technology of water con-
ULBs within the state consistent with the urban servation and plugging of leakage need urgent at-
profile of the state. tention. This need to be attempted with increasing
functional responsibilities at ULB level. At present,
The state needs to explore all possible sourc- in the three related areas of water supply, sewer-
es of funding including the PPP mode. There are age and sanitation, only the last is the responsibili-
several sectoral and financial programmes that ty of the ULBs. The state has decided to transfer the
need to be dovetailed like ADB, Namami Gange, management of water supply and sewerage also to
Smart City Project, SBM, 14th Finance Commission the ULBs to ensure effective service delivery.
grants, and the like. The Local Area Development
(LAD) funds of Members of Parliament (MPs) and The state needs to explore the possibility of us-
Members of the Legislative Assembly (MLAs) also ing the PPP model in both state level agencies and
need to be explored and combined. The state Ur- ULBs for setting up services like water supply and
ban Development Directorate needs to gear up as sewerage schemes, and recreation centers. Effective
a nodal agency for coordination with the ULBs, Service delivery is a pre-requisite for the successful
parastatal agencies, and other stakeholders, and implementation of such a model for delivering satis-
for disseminating information related to all gov- factory services to the beneficiaries. The PPP option
ernment programmes. should include appropriate performance standards
as an integral part of the contract. The PPP operators
There is a need to develop a performance mon- would be required to procure the infrastructure and
itoring system for the timely completion of proj- maintain the same till the cost is recovered and assets
ects. ADB has conducted baseline physical and are transferred to the owner thereafter.
230
It is important to allocate and release funds on • To ensure that green cover is retained and not
time for the timely implementation of projects. The threatened by unauthorised construction;
ULBs can be financially strengthened through the • To develop public places into activity hubs so
levy of user charges. The quality of service will mo- that sufficient footfalls are ensured
tivate the beneficiaries to pay for the services. It is
also possible to improve finances under town-spe- • To supply 24/7 energy-efficient street lighting
cific Revolving Funds in the pilgrimage centres to make the places safe; and
through a levy on visitors exclusively in the par- • To ensure a continuous and timely surveillance
ticular towns where facilities need to be upgraded. system using ICT.
Other strategies to address the environmental Major Relevant Urban Development Schemes
concerns in the urban areas would include: Central Government Schemes
• Identification of sources of air and noise pollu- The main central government schemes are: (1)
tion and focusing on the use of technologies to Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana (PMAY), (2) Deen-
reduce the levels of pollution; dayal Antyodaya Yojana (DAY), (3) Prime Minis-
• Identification of service level gaps in water ter’s New 15-point Programme for the Welfare of
supply and sanitation; the Minority Community and (4) Twenty-Point
• Involvement of stakeholders for monitoring Programme.
and management of the community assets gen- 1. PMAY – Housing for All (Urban): The major
erated; components of this scheme are:
• Development of a sewage treatment mecha- • In-site slum Redevelopment-- Central grant
nism in every landfill site in order to save pre- of Rs. 1 lakh per slum house
cious land; and • Credit-linked subsidy scheme-- Beneficia-
• Empowerment of ULBs for the management of ries to get interest subsidy of 6.5 per cent on a
water supply, sewerage and sanitation. loan up to Rs. 6 lakh
Target 11.7 • Affordable housing in partnership with the
In the hill state, any type of construction needs private or public sector – Central assistance
clearance from the environment department and of Rs. 1.5 lakh per EWS house to be provided
the CPCB. This may be a lengthy and time-con- in the projects with at least 35 per cent of the
suming process, which will delay the start of the houses falling in the EWS category and a single
project. It is advisable to design the project in or- project having at least 250 houses.
der to consider all such aspects, and to associate Beneficiary-led individual house construction/
the elected representatives with land deals through enhancement – Central assistance of Rs. 1.5
negotiations. This may help in preventing agitation lakh is available to the eligible EWS families10.
by the landowners. 2. Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana – National Urban
It is necessary to ensure 24/7 water supply and Livelihood Mission (DAY-NULM)
electricity to public places, otherwise, there will be The Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJS-
lower footfalls and income generation. The other RY) has been restructured into NULM since
strategies are: 2013. It aims at organising the urban poor into
• To increase the per capita availability of green SHGs, imparting skill training to the urban
space as per the national norm; poor for self and wage employment and help-
• To focus on greenfield development for attaining them to set up self-employment ventures by
ing a pollution-free sustainable living environ- providing credits at subsidised rates of interest.
ment; Shelters for the urban houseless and infrastruc-
10. An EWS family is defined as a family with an annual income of up to Rs. 3 lakh and an LIG family as one family with an annual income ranging
between Rs.3 and -6 lakh.
231
Table 5.6: Targets and Achievements for Construction of Dwelling Units 2015-16
State BSUP IHSDP Total
Targets Achievement Targets Achievement Targets Achievement
Uttarakhand 132 48 (36%)
Uttar Pradesh 3938 1718 (44%) 7489 2444 (33%) 11427 4162 (36%)
Himachal
41 - 569 - 610 -
Pradesh
All India 86769 42,878 (49%) 63,231 31,811 (50%) 1,50,000 74,689 (49.7%)
Source: Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation, Annual Report 2015-16.
ture for street vendors can also be taken up State Level Schemes
under this mission. UUSDIP is the major scheme for the state with
It is being implemented in all the district head- major finance coming from the ADB, spreading
quarters and all other cities with a population across the period 2008-16. This programme has
of 100,000 or more as per the Census 2011. The the following components: (i) Water supply (ii)
scope of the mission has now been enhanced Waste water management (iii) Slum Improve-
to include all statutory towns. It has been re- ment (iv) Solid Waste Management, and (v) Road
named as DAY-NULM. and Traffic Management.
3. Prime Minister’s New 15 point programme for Investment in water supply aims at improv-
welfare of minorities include the following ing the volume, availability and quality of water
• Swarn Jayanti Shahri Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY) supply. It will try to reduce leakage in the system
restructured as NULM and illegal connections through the provision of
water meters, augmenting supply, and extending
• Schemes in 15 point for which flow of fund to distribution networks. It has targeted a coverage
minority concentration area is quantified. of 83 per cent to be achieved by the time the pro-
• Integrated Housing and Slum Development gramme ends, by when it expects to supply pota-
Programme (IHSDP) ble quality water on a 24/7 basis to a majority of
• Basic Services for the Urban Poor (BSUP) the households.
4. The Twenty-Point Programme (1986) has been re- In waste water management, the programme
structured in conformity with the priorities of the aimed at improving environmental quality
government, as contained in the National Com- through the management of water bodies, collec-
mon Minimum Programme, the Millennium De- tion and treatment of sewage through appropriate
velopment Goals (MDGs), and the SAARC So- technology and extending service coverage to an
cial Charter. The restructured Programme called average 60 per cent of the population by 2016. It
Twenty-Point Programme, 2006 (TPP -2006) has is planned to cover populations of 50–90 per cent
been operational since April 1, 2007. and 30-50 per cent for large and medium towns,
respectively. In smaller towns, the option of using
The MHUPA is the nodal minority for the im-
technology option will be dependent on the geo-
plementation of the following two projects: Garibi
graphical and climatic features as well as the type
Hatao (Poverty Eradication), and National Urban
and quality of sewage generated.
Livelihood Mission (NULM). The achievement of
the state under various central schemes is shown in The towns shortlisted for UUSDIP have been
Table 5.6. selected on the basis of eight criteria including the
population, population growth rate, enterprise
232
growth, administrative importance, education ernment grant and the Special Purpose Vehicle
centre, location on the pilgrimage route, pilgrim- (SPV), jointly formed by the MDDA and UHUDA,
age terminal, and financial soundness. A total of with equal contributions from each partner.
31 towns have been selected for this programme,
including six municipal corporations. This proj-
ect will benefit around 3.8 million people expect- Jan Awas Yojana
ed to be living in these 31 cities and towns. The Uttarakhand Housing and Urban Develop-
The UUSDIP has undertaken both financial ment Authority (UHUDA) has decided to pro-
and institutional reforms. In order to improve vide housing units to the people of Rudrapur
the municipal accounting system, they are pre- under Jan Awas Yojana (JAY). An MoU has been
paring a manual on an accrual-based double en- signed between UHUDA and Water and Power
try accounting system that is globally accepted as Consultancy Services Ltd. (WAPCOS) for the con-
transparent and efficient. Towards this end, it has struction of 2000 houses for people belonging to
internalised the major components of JNNURM, the Economically Weaker Sections (EWS) persons.
and brought the three cities identified under JN- These constitute the first phase in affordable cate-
NURM, namely, Dehradun, Nainital and Harid- gory with a one BHK set at a price of Rs. 2.5 lakh
war, under the programme. Municipal reforms per unit. The units are expected to be available by
comprise one of the major focus areas of this pro- the middle of this year.
gramme.
Development of Small Towns in Hill Areas
Smart City Programme The state government has given the responsibility
The state capital, Dehradun has been chosen un- of planning small towns in the hill areas to Ernst
der the programme. It has two components: Ar- & Young. The objective is to check outmigration
ea-based and Pan-city programmes. The city has from the hill areas by providing basic civic fa-
chosen government land which has not been de- cilities to them. It is proposed to consider basic
veloped till now for greenfield development with education, health, housing and employment in
the proposal of developing a Higher and Techni- these towns so that people do not have to travel
cal Education hub on around 2000 acres of land. far to come to the plains for these services. How-
Its Pan City proposal aims at creating a city level ever, these plans cannot be completed without
single window mechanism that can bring together providing transportation and other physical in-
the services of all city agencies and provide them frastructure. Coordination between departments
through a mobile platform. The solution aims to like those of Horticulture and Animal Husband-
address governance, quality of life and ease of ry is necessary as they own large parcels of land
business, covering all aspects of urban life. The some of which need to be transferred to the urban
programme is to be financed by a Central Gov- development department for city planning.
233
Box 5.2: Coverage of Slum Households by Low Cost Housing Programme
Percentage of Slum Households Covered by Loss Cost Housing Programme

1. Budgetary Provision for PMGY-HFA 2017-18 Rs. 95.00 crore
Total Funds Requirement for 2012-18 to
Rs. 1600.00 crore
2019-20
GoI Share Rs. 600.00 crore
State Government share Rs. 200.00 crore
Beneficiary share Rs. 800.00 crore
Rs.1400 crore
2023-24
Government Share Rs. 525.00 crore
State Government Share Rs. 175.00 crore
Beneficiary Share Rs. 700.00 crore
Rs. 400.00 crore
2030-31
GoI share Rs. 150.00 crore
State Government Share Rs. 50.00 crore
Beneficiary Share Rs. 200.00 crore
11.6 Municipal Solid Waste Processing under
SBM
1. Budgetary Provisions for SBM in 2017-18 Rs. 78.00 crore
Rs. 786.00 crore
2019-20
GoI Share Rs. 275.00 crore
State/Other Resources Rs. 511.00 crore
Funds gap to be filled through NGBRAA under the Ganga Action Plan and through CSR
234
SECTION 5.3 practices (SDG 2), using resources such as water in

SDG 12: Ensure Sustainable Consumption and a sustainable manner as well as sustainable sani-
tation practices, including solid and liquid waste
Production Patterns
management (SDG 6) are all linked to SDG 12. The
use of sustainable and modern energy production
‘The world has enough for everyone’s need but not processes (SDG 7), and sustainable industrial pro-
enough for everyone’s greed’--- Mahatma Gandhi cesses would also impact SDG 12.
The world has limited resources and For sustainable consumption, equality and eq-
judicious use must be made of these uity are essential, an issue that is covered under
so that the planet is left in good shape SDG 10. Again, responsible consumption and pro-
for the coming generations and such duction are intricately linked to ecology and the
that they do not want for resources. environment, showing links to SDGs 13 and 15.
Over-exploitation of resources can jeopardise the Quality education is likely to contribute to respon-
future of the human race. In this sense, sustainable sible consumption and production practices, since
consumption and production aims at “doing more more educated consumers are more aware of these
and better with less,” increasing gains from eco- issues. Thus, it is evident that for effectively imple-
nomic activities by reducing the use of resources, as menting SDG 12, nearly all other Goals would have
well as reducing degradation and pollution along to be implemented, thus underscoring the inter-de-
the whole lifecycle, and simultaneously improving pendent nature of the sustainable development
the quality of life. According to the United Nations goals, and especially, of Goal No.12.12
Environment Programme (UNEP), sustainable Since Uttarakhand is a mountainous state, the
consumption/production is: “…the use of prod- patterns of production and consumption in this
ucts and services which respond to basic needs and state need to respect the fragility of the mountain
bring a better quality of life while minimising the ecosystem as the state continues on its develop-
use of natural resources and toxic materials as well ment path towards 2030. The vision 2030 for Goal
as the emissions of waste and pollutants over the No. 12 for Uttarakhand is:
life cycle of the service or product, so as to not jeop-
By 2030, Uttarakhand economy will adopt
ardize the needs of future generations.”11
sustainable consumption and production patterns
As the global population continues to burgeon by enhancing sustainable management of natural
by around 75 million annually, efficient manage- resource use, sharp reduction in food waste includ-
ment of our shared natural resources, and effective ing post-harvest losses, and achieve reduction in
disposal and mitigation of toxic wastes and envi- waste generation including use of plastics.
ronmental pollutants become extremely important.
The vision for targets of Goal No. 12 are pre-
A sustainable way of development involves sus-
tainable methods of production and consumption,
which would reduce our ecological footprints.
5.3.2, and Appendix 5.3.3 contains the schemes ap-
Conserving the use of water in agriculture, for in-
plicable for Goal no. 12. Annexure 12 contains the
stance, is crucial, since this sector is the biggest user
detailed information regarding indicators for Goal
of water worldwide. It is also important to urge
no. 12 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium
and convince industries, businesses and consum-
term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
ers to recycle and reduce waste. Thus the Goal No.
12 has numerous stakeholders including business, The present status in terms of sustainable pro-
consumers, policy makers, researchers, scientists, duction and consumption has been discussed for
retailers, media, and development cooperation the state with respect to the individual targets of
agencies, among others. Sustainable agricultural SDG 12. Target 12.1 is not applicable at the state
level. Targets 12.2 and 12.3 have been discussed
11. See https://www.slideshare.net/IsuruAbeynayake/integrating-sustainable-consumption-production

12. This section has used information from http://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/sustainable-consumption-production/ and http://www.undp.org/
content/undp/en/home/sustainable-development-goals/goal-12-responsible-consumption-and-production.html, accessed on April 12, 2017.
235
236
individually, followed by Targets 12.4 and 12.5 dwar). Also in 2006, 20 industrial sectors in the PPP
that have been discussed together. Finally, Targets mode were developed in the state.
12.6, 12.7 and 12.8 have been discussed together. The indicators used for Target 12.2 (see Appen-
dix 5.3.2 and Annexure 12) are the use of bio-fer-
Target 12.2 By 2030, achieve the tilisers in agricultural production, which is 0.3 kg/
sustainable management and efficient ha and an estimated carbon sink in forest area, for
use of natural resources which the baseline is an estimated 537 MT. Two
indicators which have not been measured so far,
Baseline for Uttarakhand but which the state needs to develop in order to
The UN discusses two measures, material foot- track the sustainable use of natural resources, are
print and domestic material consumption, which the consumption of energy from fossil fuel and
provide an accounting of global material extraction firewood, both of which must be reduced in the in-
and use, as well as flows or consumption of mate- terest of a better environment and conservation of
rials in countries.13 The material footprint reflects resources.
the amount of primary materials used to meet a Vision 2030 Target 12.2
country’s needs, and is an indicator of the material
standard of living of an economy. Domestic mate- For Target 12.2, the use of bio-fertilisers will be in-
rial consumption measures the amount of natural creased gradually from the baseline of 0.3 kg/ha
resources used in economic processes. to 0.4 kg/ha (2019-20), to 0.5 kg/ha (2023-24) and
eventually to 0.6 kg/ha by 2030. The carbon sink
In 2010, the total material footprint in the de- should also be enhanced beyond the baseline level
veloped regions exceeded that of the developing of an estimated 537.02 MT.
regions by a huge mar gin, at 23.6 kg per unit of
the GDP versus 14.5 kg per unit of the GDP, re-
spectively. The material footprint of developing re- Target 12.3 By 2030, halve per capita
gions increased from 2000 to 2010, with non-metal- global food waste at the retail and
lic minerals showing the largest increase. Domestic consumer levels and reduce food
material consumption in the developed regions, losses along production and supply
at 15.3 tonnes per capita (2010), is far higher than chains, including post-harvest losses.
the value for developing regions, at 8.9 tonnes per Baseline for Uttarakhand
capita in 2010. Domestic material consumption per
capita in Asia rose rapidly between 2000 and 2010 Each year, an estimated one-third of all food pro-
as a result of rapid industrialisation. duced globally ends up rotting in the bins of con-
sumers and retailers, or spoiling due to poor trans-
At the state level, there is no wherewithal as yet portation and harvesting practices.14 The annual
to estimate the material footprint in this manner, harvest and post-harvest loss of India’s major agri-
though Uttarakhand, too, has undergone rapid in- cultural produce was reported to be an estimated at
dustrialisation in recent years. It achieved the sec- Rs. 92,651 crore, according to the Ministry of Food
ond highest GSDP growth in the country. The key Processing Industries.15 The assessment, calculated
sectors include tourism and hydropower, but there by using production data of 2012-13 at 2014 whole-
are others too like biotechnology, pharmaceuticals sale prices, was based on a study by ICAR - Central
and automobile component industries. During Institute of Post-Harvest Engineering and Tech-
2005–2006, the state successfully developed three nology (CIPHET), Ludhiana, titled “Assessment of
Integrated Industrial Estates (IIEs) at Haridwar, Quantitative Harvest and Post-Harvest Losses of
Pantnagar, and Sitarganj; a Pharma City at Selaqui; Major Crops and Commodities in India”. The per-
an Information Technology Park at Sahastradhara centages of post-harvest losses as estimated by the
(Dehradun); and a growth centre at Siggadi (Kot- study are shown in Table 5.7.
13. Source: http://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/sustainable-consumption-production/, accessed on April 12, 2017.

14. Source: http://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/sustainable-consumption-production/ accessed on April 20, 2017.
15. http://pib.nic.in/newsite/PrintRelease.aspx?relid=136922, accessed on April 20, 2017.
237
Table 5.7: Post-harvest Losses for Select Products

Crops Cumulative Wastage (%)
Cereals 4.65 – 5.99
Pulses 6.36 – 8.41
Oil Seeds 3.08 – 9.96
Fruits & Vegetables 4.58 – 15.88
Milk 0.92
Fisheries (Inland) 5.23
Fisheries (Marine) 10.52
Meat 2.71
Poultry 6.74
Source: Jha et al (2015)
Uttarakhand had a good representation in the sam- Baseline for Uttarakhand

ple in terms of the production of apples and citrus Responsible consumption and production entail
fruits. It is seen that fruits and vegetables, a major managing wastes that are harmful for the planet as
output of the state, suffered a very high post-har- well as minimising wastage generation, use of recy-
vest loss in the range 4.58-15.88 per cent. cling, and using materials least harmful to the envi-
ronment.
Vision 2030 for Target 12.3 Plastics is one material that is widely used in the
Target 12.3 deals with the wastage of food, includ- modern world, and yet which is potentially harmful
ing post-harvest losses, which are particularly high for the environment. Plastics are non-biodegradable
synthetic polymers. Some types of plastics absorb
for some of the main products of Uttarakhand, that
odours and flavours from food and drink. The re-
is, fruits and vegetables. The wastage of food even
cyclable plastics include PET, HDPE, LDPE, PP, and
as some sections of the population go hungry is
PVC, while the non-recyclable plastics include bake-
unacceptable, and the entire state machinery, as
lite, multi-layer and laminated plastics, melamine,
well as the public should be made aware of the
nylon, etc. However, plastics can be recycled only
need to minimise wastage of food. Innovative
2-3 times, because each time the recycled material is
ways can be found of making good use of food
more harmful for the environment as compared to
that would otherwise be thrown away or disposed
the virgin material. Although no firm estimates are
of. The vision would be to reduce the post-harvest
available at the state level, at the national level, an
losses to less than 2 per cent by 2030.
estimated 15342 tons of plastic waste is generated
each day (Envis Newsletter, 2015).
Target 12.4 By 2020, achieve the environmentally Hazardous waste, owing to its toxic, infectious,
sound management of chemicals and all wastes radioactive or flammable properties, poses an ac-
throughout their life cycle, and significantly tual or potential hazard to the health of humans,
reduce their release to air, water and soil in other living organisms, or the environment. At the
order to minimize their adverse impacts on hu- global level, the Basel Convention on the Control of
man health and the environment. Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes
Target 12.5 By 2030, substantially reduce waste and Their Disposal, the Rotterdam Convention
generation through prevention, reduction, on the Prior Informed Consent Procedure for Cer-
recycling and reuse tain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in In-
ternational Trade, and the Stockholm Convention
on Persistent Organic Pollutants are established
international frameworks to achieve the environ-
mentally sound management of hazardous wastes,
238
chemicals and persistent organic pollutants.16 India ness for sustainable development and lifestyles in
is a party to the Basel Convention. harmony with nature
The hazardous waste generation per year is
55,627 MT per annum in the state, as also discussed
under Indicator 6.3d under SDG 6.
The concepts of sustainable production and con-
Sustainable production implies the continuous
sumption, and, in general, of sustainable devel-
application of resource-conserving environmental
strategies, products, and services to increase the opment are fairly new. The Targets 12.6, 12.7 and
overall efficiency, and reduce risks of irreversible 12.8 focus on the integration of such sustainable
damages to humans and the environment. For in- practices into corporate practices, including their
stance, if people worldwide switched to energy ef- reporting cycle, in public procurement as well as
ficient light bulbs, the world would save US$120 on wide dissemination among the public. As ear-
billion annually. Cleaner production in a dynamic lier discussed, the success of such sustainability
manner can be applied to processes used in indus- efforts will depend on the engagement of various
try as well as in various services. Efforts should also stakeholders and the general public. If each in-
be made to avoid unnecessary cosmetic ‘product dividual in the society behaves in a responsible
improvement’, when actually there is no real im- manner vis-à-vis the consumption and produc-
provement in the product.17 More specifically, pro- tion trends, the goal will be addressed effectively,
duction processes should attempt to conserve raw and generating awareness is the first step towards
materials, water and energy; eliminate toxic and the achievement of such a behavioural change. To
dangerous raw materials; and reduce the quantity
wit, it can be observed that the younger genera-
and toxicity of all emissions and waste material at
tions are relatively more aware of environmental
the source, during the production process.
degradation and the need to preserve the same.
Vision 2030 for Targets 12.4 and 12.5 Thus, the share of the population covered by cam-
Regarding Targets 12.4 and 12.5, the vision is to mi- paigns regarding sustainable production and con-
nimise the release of harmful chemicals and other sumption is an appropriate indicator in this con-
wastes into the air, water, soil, and also to minimise text, though no estimate of the same is available
the generation of waste and to manage the disposal as of now.
of waste in an efficient and sustainable way. Specif-
Challenges for responsible consumption and
ically, the use of plastics should be brought to zero
by 2030, and hazardous waste generation should production
also be brought down from the present level of Post-harvest losses: Post-harvest practices need to
55,627 MT annually to zero by 2030. be improved in the following areas: infrastruc-
ture facilities for storage, including cold storage,
logistics and cold chain handling, transportation,
Target 12.6 Encourage companies, especial-
ly large and transnational companies, to adopt processing, packaging and distribution. There is
sustainable practices and to integrate sustainabil- a lack of processing facilities at the farm gate and
ity information into their reporting cycle few innovative on-farm preservation systems.18
Target 12.7 Promote public procurement practices Inadequate management of plastic waste: Plastic
that are sustainable, in accordance with national waste is non-biodegradable and if left in the en-
policies and priorities vironment or upon burning, can leach/emit dan-
Target 12.8 By 2030, ensure that people every- gerous toxins into the environment. The Uttara-
where have the relevant information and aware- khand Government had promulgated laws such
as Plastic Waste (Management and handling)

17. See, Story of Stuff, at https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9GorqroigqM
18. Slide on Post Harvest Logistics and Food Processing, available atwww.cgisydney.org/Images/pdf/10-agri-business.ppt, accessed on April 20, 2017.
239
Rules, 2011, laying certain conditions for man- areas and @ 75 per cent for the North-eastern
ufacturing, stocking, sale and use of plastic car- region and difficult areas (North-eastern states,
ry bags and sachets, which were required to be Sikkim, J&K, Himachal Pradesh and Uttara-
monitored by the State Pollution Control Boards/ khand), subject to a maximum grant-in-aid of
Municipal Authorities. However, these rules have Rs. 10 crore per project is provided for setting
not been properly implemented, and in fact, the up the cold chain infrastructure in the country.
use of plastics has expanded to rural areas as well. • While the state intends to industrialise for fur-
There was also no provision regarding ascribing ther developing and weaning young workers
responsibility on those generating waste. away from subsistence agriculture in the up-
lands, the associated industrialisation or in-
Strategy for attaining vision 2030 creased service sector activity must also take
care of sustainability of the environment by
• The Governmental strategy at the Centre has preventing the setting up of industries that
been to promote the food processing industry pollute the air, water and earth. This is pos-
in the country to reduce the wastage of agri- sible through measures like the introduction
cultural produce and minimise post-harvest of modern, clean technologies; scientific waste
losses. As a result, the Ministry of Food Pro- disposal; waste re-cycling; and regular envi-
cessing Industries (MoFPI) is implementing ronmental audits. Taxes (polluter pay taxes)
various Central Sector Schemes, namely (i) could be imposed to compensate for the pollu-
Scheme for Development of Infrastructure for tion and the amount so recovered earmarked
Food Processing having components of Mega for reversing the environmental damages.
Food Parks, Integrated Cold Chain, Value Ad-
dition and Preservation Infrastructure and • Agriculture is a major sector in Uttarakhand
Modernization of Abattoirs and (ii) Scheme and to make agriculture cleaner, the strate-
for Quality Assurance, Codex Standards, Re- gy would be to lower carbon emission from
search & Development and Other Promotion- livestock, lower inorganic fertiliser/pesticide
al Activities. use, and increased bio-fertiliser use. Improved
governance could reduce consumption of
In order to arrest post-harvest losses of horti- wood and timber. Much of the waste gener-
culture and non-horticulture produce and to ated in the state can be recycled, which would
provide integrated cold chain and preserva- also create employment as well as renewable
tion infrastructure facilities from the farm gate energy. Uncontrolled land-use conversion
to the consumer or from the production site from agriculture to non-farm activities is an
to the market, MoFPI has been implementing important source of fuelling excess supply
the Central Sector Scheme of Cold Chain, Val- in real estate. While housing for the poor/
ue Addition and Preservation Infrastructure low-income urban populations should be a
since 2008-09. The scheme is primarily private priority, in reality, large plots of land are in-
sector-driven wherein financial assistance @ creasingly being brought under realty sector
50 per cent of the total cost of plant and ma- developers, who indulge in all kinds of mal-
chinery and technical civil works in the general practices, which needs to be controlled.
240
SECTION 5.4 The vision for targets of Goal No. 13 are pre-
SDG 13: Take Urgent Action to Combat Climate sented in Appendix 5.4.1, followed by values for
Change and its Impacts
5.4.2, and Appendix 5.4.3 contains the schemes ap-
plicable for Goal no. 13. Annexure 13 contains the
Climate change is a relatively new area for coun- detailed information regarding indicators for Goal
tries, leave alone state governments. This phenom- no. 13 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), medium
enon has been defined in the Intergovernmental term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) as ‘a change in
the state of the climate that can be identified (eg.
Introduction
using statistical tests) by changes in the mean and/
or the variability of its properties and that persists While the effects of climate change are being felt
for an extended period, typically decades or lon- worldwide, and in the state of Uttarakhand, a data
ger’ (IPCC, 2007, cited in INRM, et al., 2016). It can system has not yet been fully developed in the state
be caused by natural variability or due to human to study the same. But some indicators can be men-
activity. But according to usage by the United tioned, for which data collection methods have to
Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNF- be devised. These indicators should be tracked, at
CCC), it refers to a change attributed to human ac- least on an annual basis, so as to get an idea of how
tivity, whether directly or indirectly, that alters the the situation in the state is developing.
composition of the global atmosphere and that is The IPCC (2007) summarises the following key fac-
in addition to natural climate variability observed tors that make mountain areas vulnerable:
over comparable time periods.19
1. Above average warming;
The state of Uttarakhand is very vulnerable to cli-
2. Shortened snow-melt resulting in downstream
mate mediated risks, according to the Uttarakhand
flooding;
State Action Plan for Climate Change (USAPCC) re-
port (Government of Uttarakhand, 2014). Some of the 3. In combination with reduced glacier extent,
reported climate change induced variations include: there are also water shortages;
receding glaciers and upwardly moving snowline, 4. Mountains being subject to soil loss;
depleting natural resources, erratic rainfall, irregu-
lar winter rains and reduction in snow, rise in tem- 5. High transport costs that reinforce resource-ex-
perature, increasing intensity and frequency of flash tractive livelihoods;
floods, advancing cropping seasons, fluctuations in 6. High levels of resource-extractive livelihoods
the flowering behavior of plants, etc. A recent report resulting in loss of endemic species; and
on climate change in the state has observed consis- 7. Limited diversification of mountain livelihoods
tent temporal trends of warming and increasing pre- and low educational capacity levels, resulting
cipitation in Uttarakhand (INRM, et al., 2016). in low adaptive capacity.
These factors of vulnerability yield the following
The Vision for 2030 for Uttarakhand for Goal No. set of indicators that need to be tracked in order to
13 is: monitor vulnerability:
By 2030, Uttarakhand state will strength- 1. The extent of warming for different ecological
en its adaptive capacity to climate related zones of the state, viz., the Terai; low moun-
hazards and mitigate the impact of climate tains, mid-mountains and high mountains;
change by reducing GHG and methane emissions, 2. Snow melt period;
integration of climate change measures in
national policies & planning, and by spreading 3. Glacier extent;
awareness about such issues. 4. Soil loss;
19. https://unfccc.int/files/press/backgrounders/application/pdf/press_factsh_science.pdf,
accessed on July 10, 2017
241
242
5. Transport costs; into account the greater variability in precipitation,

6. Loss of endemic species; and with both severe shortages and excess rainfall like-
ly to occur.
7. Diversification of livelihoods; and educational
attainment levels. Baseline for Uttarakhand
As mentioned at the outset, Uttarakhand is The baseline situation for Goal No. 13, the vision
prone to a number of problems regarding climate 2030, challenges and strategies have been dis-
change related problems (Uttarakhand Action Plan cussed in an integrated way, rather than according
for Climate Change, 2016, Chapter 8, pp. 102-115). to individual targets, in view of the fact that the
Recent years have seen: (1) water shortage - uncer- issue of climate change is new and complex. The
tainty in the precipitation patterns leading to se- baseline for this Goal is as follows:
vere drought conditions (for example, in 2007-08, 9 • Existence of State Action Plan for Climate
out of 13 districts were declared drought-affected); Change (SAPCC);
(2) excess monsoonal precipitations leading to se- • Lack of State capacity to quickly respond to
vere floods (for example, flash floods in many riv- large-scale climate-related hazards; and
er basins); (3) glacial melting and glacial burst (for
example, the Chorabari Glacier and Lake in 2013); • Little integration of climate change measures
thus, there is a combination of water shortage and into State polices.
excess water situations; (4) changes in climatic pa- Vision 2030 for SDG 13
rameters, which are affecting the state’s biodiversi- The Vision 2030 for SDG 13 envisages that by 2030,
ty; some species are showing stress, while invasive Uttarakhand would have embarked on a growth
species are establishing themselves; (5) with warm- trajectory that is inclusive, climate-resilient, and
ing, some species are moving upwards, leading to a sustainable. It would have succeeded in eliminat-
change in agricultural possibilities, as for instance, ing the emission of harmful GHGs from different
in the case of peaches, which are now cultivable at sources, substantially increased its adaptive capac-
higher altitudes than earlier. ity and resilience, and would have effectively inte-
In dealing with the effects of climate change and grated measures related to climate change in State
building adaptive capacity or resilience, it should policies.
be noted that many of the changes have been Any action to combat climate change entails
caused by local actions, and are not just the result a combination of different kinds of measures. As
of distant trends, as in the case of global warming. is clear from the indicators for SDG 13, the first
Anthropogenic actions create the landscape and, emphasis is on actions to reduce GHG emissions.
in interaction with other natural processes, foster Consequently, this discussion begins with the
the problems that we face. This is what leads to the manner in which Uttarakhand can contribute to
geological concept of the Anthropocene, where- India’s Nationally Determined Plan (INDP) to re-
in it is recognised that humans are also a force of duce the emissions intensity of the GDP. The fol-
nature. In a simple way, one may observe that the lowing targets can be envisaged for elimination of
floods in the Char Dham pilgrimage region in 2013 GHG emission, including methane emission see
were the result of not only unprecedented precipi- Figure 5.3:
tation but also the interaction of high precipitation
with the blocking of river channels through uncon- • Eliminate GHG emission from cooking by es-
trolled construction in these pilgrimage areas. Pre- tablishing LPG or electricity as the primary
cipitation may not be affected in a major way by cooking fuel for 70 per cent of the households
local conditions, but the capacity to absorb water by 2020, and for all households by 2025.
is certainly related to the manner in which the local • Reduce methane emission through rice cul-
landscape is constructed. Consequently, in dealing tivation by: (1) enabling a shift from rice to
with the disasters related to climate change, we fruit cultivation on 25 per cent of the present
need to not only cope with the disasters but also to area under rice by 2020, and 50 per cent by
build or re-build in a manner that reduces the risks 2030, and (2) adopting AWD technologies to
of their recurrence. Local area planning has to take reduce methane emission in continuing rice
243
Figure 5.3: Strategies for Reducing Green House Gas Emmission in Uttarakhand
cultivation, at an estimate of 15 per cent by 2020 • Add to the removal of emissions by increasing
and 80 per cent by 2030. the carbon absorption by forests.
• Eliminate GHG emissions from public Uttarakhand contributes much more than its
transport by adopting CNG or electric energy, share (either measured by population or GDP) to
at an estimate of 50 per cent by 2020 and 100 India’s nationally determined contributions. This is
per cent by 2025. because the proportion of land under forests stands
Reducing GHG Emissions at 63 per cent in Uttarakhand as against the all-In-
dia average of 23 per cent. There is always a cost in-
A sector can bring about an impact on GHGs in volved in setting aside land from direct productive
any one of the following ways: use. This opportunity cost of the land set aside from
• Reduce emissions, as for instance, by cultivation for retention as forests is the production
changing the method of rice production or live- that could have taken place. For this production or
stock production to reduce methane emissions; income foregone, there is presently no compensa-
• Avoid emissions, as by changing the fuel tion. To take some major examples of loss, all log-
used in cooking; and
ging has been banned above the altitude of 1000
• Remove emissions, as through carbon seques- m, leading to a loss of possible income. Similarly,
tration in expanding the area under forest
cover. the hydro-electric generation potential of states is
restricted by many areas being eco-sensitive zones.
The state government can deal with this issue by
targeting some important sectors in the following The State Government had informed the 14th
way: Finance Commission about the necessity for com-
pensating Uttarakhand for income foregone in the
• Reduce emissions in agriculture and livestock
interest of meeting India’s nationally determined
production by 50 per cent each by 2030;
contribution to mitigating climate change. The
• Eliminate emissions from cooking with solid Gadgil–Mukherjee formula for the transfer of funds
biomass by 100 per cent by 2030; from the Centre to the states is not in use; but some
• Eliminate emissions from public transport by method needs to be worked out for compensating
100 per cent by 2030; and states recording an above-average performance for
their contribution to public goods.
244
This opportunity cost exists not only in the case • Excessive dependence on traditional agri-
of setting aside forests for carbon sequestration, culture and the need to increase livelihood
but also for other public goods such as water. Ut- adaptive capacity; and
tarakhand is the source of the Ganga–Yamuna riv- • Increasing efficiency of land use.
er system, which sustains the agriculture and other
livelihoods of the population of North and East In- Strategy for Containing Emissions
dia. The foregone use of this water for the own de- The strategies for containing emissions for some
velopment of Uttarakhand is the opportunity cost important sectors are discussed in Table 5.8. It may
that Uttarakhand bears for supporting the water be noted that the state and Central governments are
systems of North and East India. It should be not- already implementing some schemes, which deal
ed that Switzerland has a long established system with climate change and address this phenomenon.
where upstream communities are compensated The major schemes are listed in Appendix 5.4.3.
for water provided to downstream hydro-electric
power and irrigation systems. Some compensation The Energy Sector
of this kind to Uttarakhand for its contribution to
carbon sequestration and water supply would pro- Energy in Uttarakhand is a combination of
vide an incentive for the state to increase its contri- hydro-electricity for office and factory use,
butions in providing such public goods. diesel and petrol for transport, and LPG and solid
biomass for cooking. There is no thermal or
The Uttarakhand Government quotes studies coal-based electricity generation in Uttarakhand.
that the value of ecosystem services provided by In addition, most of the electricity in the state is
the state to the country amounts to between Rs. generated in run-of-river hydro plants, which
25,000–.40,000 crore per annum. In lieu of these eliminate or minimise flooding and the resultant
services, the state government has requested the rehabilitation of displaced families.
Centre to provide a Green Bonus of just 10 per
cent, or Rs. 2,000 crores per annum. According to Fuel Switching in Cooking: The one area of
recent media reports, the state government has energy supply (which is also simultaneously an
now requested the Central Government for a high- area of energy demand) that can be transformed
er amount of Rs. 4000 crore per annum, which is 10 to reduce GHG emissions is that of the use of solid
per cent of the upper-end estimated value of eco- biomass, wood, and agricultural waste, as cooking
system services provided by the state to the coun- fuel. Wood is the primary cooking fuel for 69.8 per
try, at Rs. 40,000 crore, as Green Bonus. A carbon cent of the rural households in Uttarakhand, which
market can be established where deficit states, such is a little higher than the all-India figure of 67.3
as the highly industrialised southern states, can per cent of rural households (NSSO, 2011-12). The
purchase carbon credits from the surplus states, burning of wood has two negative effects. First, it
such as Uttarakhand. increases the emissions of GHGs (carbon dioxide,
Challenges for climate action carbon monoxide and black carbon) into the atmo-
sphere. Second, through the release of these gases
The challenges occur in the following areas of the and other particulate matter, it leads to household
economy: air pollution, resulting in respiratory, pulmonary,
• Reducing emissions from rice and and vision problems. These negative health effects
livestock production—the present mode of rice mainly affect women and children. Since solid bio-
production leads to methane and nitrous ox- mass and agricultural residues account for 14.5 per
ide production, and dairy cattle are a source of cent of India’s primary energy mix (Ahluwalia, et
relatively more GHG emission; al., 2016, Table 3), fuel switching from solid bio-
• Eliminating emissions from cooking--there is mass to LPG will entail a substantial contribution to
still a great deal of preference for use of wood reducing the emissions intensity of energy supply.
for cooking in the state; Thus, both as a contribution to INDP to re-
• Eliminating emissions from public transport; duce GHG emissions and even more as a mea-
sure to improve the health and well-being of rural
• Increasing carbon absorption by forests; women and children, it is necessary to bring about
245
Table 5.8 Strategies to Attain Emission-Related Targets

S.
Emission-related Targets for Vision 2030 Strategy
No.
Establish LPG or electricity as primary cooking fuel for
Reduce GHG emissions from cooking:
1 50% of rural households by 2020; and 100% rural house-
50% by 2020 and eliminate by 2025
holds by 2025
Shift from rice to fruit cultivation on 25% of present rice
Reduce methane emission through rice area by 2020 and 50% by 2030
2 cultivation from present level by 30% by
2020 and 60% by 2030 Adopt AWD* rice cultivation technology on 5% of rice
area by 2020 and 80% of rice area by 2030
Eliminate GHG emission from public Shift from diesel to CNG or electric vehicles for public
3
transport by 100% by 2020 transport
* AWD stands for Alternate Wetting and Drying.
a switch in cooking fuel from wood and other sol- achievement of national food security and devel-
id biomass to LPG or electricity. The Government opment goals” (FAO, 2011). Rice is the main cereal
of India’s Ujjwala Yojana can be scaled up by the and a key crop in Uttarakhand. In the manner in
Uttarakhand Government to provide capital sub- which it is cultivated the fields are flooded leading
sidies for LPG connections to poor women. But to the production of methane and nitrous oxide.
the experience of earlier LPG distribution projects This system of cultivation also uses a lot of wa-
and programmes has shown that capital subsidies ter, often pumped up with diesel engines. Recent
alone lead to fuel stacking and not fuel switching, studies suggest that rice cultivation is an important
with wood remaining the primary fuel. It has also anthropogenic source of both methane and nitrous
been argued that capital subsidies need to be sup- oxide (Reddy, et al., 2016). Methane is particularly
plemented by support to women’s increased in- important in global warning since it traps 84 more
come earning activities (Nathan, et al., 2017). times heat than carbon dioxide (FAO, 2016).
Fuel Switching in Public Transport: Public trans- Initiated by the International Rice Research In-
port, chiefly buses, taxis and rickshaws, run on stitute (IRRI), new ‘climate smart rice production
diesel or petrol, both of which have high emission systems’ have been developed (WRI, 2014, and
intensity, besides increasing outdoor pollution, Reddy, et al., 2016). There are a number of varieties
particularly in urban areas. However, this problem of these systems, but the basic principle is of not
can be countered by increasing the use of vehicles keeping the rice fields continuously flooded, or as
running on compressed natural gas (CNG). In Del- it is called ‘alternate wetting and drying’ (AWD).
hi, for instance, it has been made compulsory for all They are also called ‘Systems of Rice Intensifica-
public transport to operate only with CNG or election’ (SRI). These systems reduce the quantity of
tricity. With the current limited battery capacity of water used, increasing the ‘crop per drop’. Such
electric vehicles, electric rickshaws can be promot- technologies have begun to be implemented in Ut-
ed and even replace both diesel vehicles and cycle tarakhand as in other states. Water consumption
rickshaws. This will increase the share of electricity can be reduced by up to 25 per cent (Reddy, et al.,
in the energy mix, electricity that can be generated 2016: 208). The saved water could be put to other
through renewable sources. uses. A reduction in water needed for the staple
rice crop is also important in the context of falling
water availability in the hills and mountains.
Agriculture The alternate wetting and drying interrupts the
In combating climate change and developing re- flooding of rice fields. This has been shown to reduce
silience, the Food and Agriculture Organization methane emissions by up to 50 per cent (Reddy, et
(FAO) now uses the concept of ‘Climate Smart Ag- al., 2016: 207). In reducing both water and methane
riculture’ (CSA), which is “agriculture that sustain- emitted, these systems outperform conventional
ably increases productivity, resilience (adaptation), rice with respect to increasing adaptation to climate
reduces/removes GHGs (mitigation) and enhances change (Geethalakshmi, et al., 2016: 254). But the
246
fact that AWD or other systems of rice intensifica- The sources of GHG emissions are mainly from
tion have not consistently increased yield per acre as enteric fermentation (39.1 per cent), feed (46.7 per
compared to conventional flooded rice production cent) and manure management (9.7 per cent). Wid-
poses a problem (Geethalakshmi, et al., 2016: 254). er use of existing best practices and technologies in
While this means that more research is needed raising livestock could cut the sector’s GHG emis-
to develop less water using high yield rice, it is nec- sions by 30 per cent (FAO, 2016: 13). Best practices
essary to ask why a reduction in water used, i.e. a are related to improving feed quality, health and
reduction in an input of up to 25 per cent, does not husbandry and grazing practices can all contribute
result in an adoption of the less input-intensive tech- to making livestock raising more climate friendly.
nology? The reason is that water itself is not priced
and diesel, which is often used to draw the water, Strategy for Disaster Response: Building Dynamic
is subsidized. The free and subsidized nature of the Resilience
inputs means that there will be no private incentive
to reduce input use. A reform of the water supply The next important targets for the state to attain Vi-
system to price water drawn, whether from surface sion 2030 would be to:
or ground sources, could promote the adoption of • Increase adaptive capacity by promoting sec-
climate smart rice cultivation technology. Thus in- ondary and post-secondary education and es-
stitutional reforms are required to overcome per- tablishing universal connectivity; and
verse incentive problems. • Promote resilience by providing women the
right to land, leading to increasing efficiency in
Livestock land use.
Livestock constitute an important component of A shock or disturbance is any event that
rural livelihoods. While the growth of large live- can cause damage to a social system and
stock (cattle, and buffalos) was quite subdued in some or all of its members. Resilience is
the state, just 1 per cent and 1.6 per cent per an- “the ability of a system to absorb distur-
num respectively from 1997 to 2007 (Uttarakhand bance and still retain its basic function and structure”
Climate Change Action Plan, 2016: 89), the large (Walker and Salt, 2006: 1). This is an ecosystem or
increases were observed in goats (13.3 per cent) eco-social system definition of resilience. In the con-
and poultry (26 per cent). From a climate change text of a social system and its members, individuals
point of view, this is a positive change, since cat- or social groups, this definition of resilience can be
tle and buffaloes are major contributors to the 14.5 modified with respect to either income or well-be-
per cent anthropogenic GHG emissions accounted ing. But, even with respect to income or well-being,
for by livestock (FAO, 2016: 6). Poultry, buffaloes which are static concepts, what underlies these out-
and small ruminants all have much lower emis- comes is capabilities. Resilience can then be taken to
sions intensity. Their contributions to global GHG be the capacity of a person, household or commu-
emissions are quite small (612, 618, and 474 million nity to retain its basic capabilities. Resilience then
tonnes of CO2 equivalent, respectively) as against is not just a manner of “…[returning] to the way it
2,128 million tonnes for dairy cattle (FAO, 2016). was [since] it risks recreating vulnerable and disas-
As sources of protein, chicken, eggs and meat only ter-prone communities for the future” (Fordham,
have an emissions intensity of 42 (kg CO2 per kg. 2006: 175). Rather, it is necessary to link the notion
protein equivalent) as against 84 for cattle milk. of vulnerability with that of moving out of vulner-
Thus, a shift to egg and chicken would reduce ability, which means developing and not just main-
GHG emission intensity. taining existing capabilities.
Methane is the main GHG produced in the live- Resilience then includes the component of ad-
stock value chain. Given that emissions intensity of aptation. Adaptation “unlike coping is understood
buffaloes is lower than that of dairy cattle, a shift as a long-term process that also includes structural
in favour of the former would itself have a positive changes and measures, as well as strategies to deal
effect in reducing emissions. But even more can be with the negative impacts of natural hazards and fu-
done to reduce emissions from buffalos and cattle. ture climate change impacts” (UNU-ADW, 2013: 47).
247
Table 5.9: Strategies for Reducing Vulnerability and Increasing Adaptive Capacity
S.
Targets for Vision 2030 Strategy
No.
By diversification of livelihoods
1 Increase adaptive capacity By promoting secondary and post-secondary education— 70% of all
students to complete high school by 2030; and 30% in post-secondary
education by 2030
Increase efficiency of land By providing titles to women, since the men have migrated,
2
use legalise leasing of land
UNDP uses the term ‘core capabilities’. “Peo- Mountain Vulnerabilities and Diversification
ple are vulnerable when they lack sufficient core The IPCC (2007) summarises the key vulnerabili-
capabilities, since this severely restricts their ties of mountain regions as follows: (1) The moun-
agency and prevents them from doing things tains have experienced above-average warming.
they value or coping with threats,” (UNDP, 2014: (2) Related to this are shortened snow-melt and
23). Capability, including core capability, is also resulting downstream floods. (3) In combination
multi-dimensional, including at least health, edu- with reduced glacier extent, there are water short-
cation and skills, besides income. It is necessary ages. (4) With the relatively thin and fragile soils,
to analyse ways in which people, households and mountain areas are subject to soil loss. (5) High
communities are and become resilient. This means transport costs reinforce the concentration on re-
that we need a dynamic analysis of the destruction source-extractive livelihoods (agriculture, live-
and adaptation or creation of capabilities. The con- stock). (6) This, in turn, leads to high levels of soil
cept of core capabilities needs to be elaborated in a losses combined with loss of endemic species. (7)
manner that would allow it to be used for empir- Adaptive capacity is limited probably due to this
ical analysis. Core capabilities include education limited diversification of mountain livelihoods in
and health, command over material resources, and combination with poor educational levels.
personal security (UNDP, 2014: 23). But it is nec-
essary to identify the features of these variables. Strategies to Reduce Vulnerability
For instance, households lacking in the following The broad strategies to increase the adaptive ca-
could be said to lack core capabilities: pacity of the state and to increase land use effi-
Education—(1) an illiterate, or only primary ciency in order to reduce vulnerability have been
school educated, head of the household; presented in Table 5.9, and are discussed at length
thereafter.
Health—(2) children without immunisation,
or (3) social groups with a high incidence of infant There are a number of aspects of livelihood di-
mortality; versification to be considered such as a shift from
subsistence rice farming to cultivating high-value
Economic—(4) high dependency ratio; (5) house- fruit and vegetable crops in the temperate climate
hold income level below the poverty level or with- of Uttarakhand, education and connectivity. In a
in the poverty level plus one standard deviation; poorly connected state economy, it is understand-
(6) landless households able that people concentrate on the production of
Personal security—(7) female-headed household. staple foodstuffs. Rice, therefore, has been a major
Households with the above features (or, say, crop in the state. But the state is now better-connect-
exhibiting 75 per cent of the above features) could ed with the neigbouring states than earlier, though
be defined as lacking in core capabilities and thus there are still issues of poor road connectivity, espe-
vulnerable. The proportion of such households in cially in some remote upper mountain areas.
an area (village, district, etc.) could be taken as the In a situation of well-established road links,
measure of the extent of vulnerability in the area. markets can perform reasonably well in moving
248
rice and other necessities into areas with demand. phone to access to broadband service for data and
This makes it possible for mountain economies to other digital connectivity. Digital connectivity not
specialise in areas where they have the advantage only provides access to education, thereby over-
of a favourable climate. In rice production, moun- coming poor physical connectivity and remote-
tain productivity would definitely be much low- ness, but it also promotes the development of new
er than productivity in the plains of Punjab and digital services, both for local and extra-local ac-
Haryana. But by cultivating fruits like apples and tivities. Digital connectivity is also a necessity for
pears in temperate climate, and vegetables in win- developing homestays in off-beat locations, and it
ter, the mountain farmers can secure higher pro- is important in building networks of all kinds of
ductivity than those in the tropical plains. Remem- knowledge-based communities.
bering that Uttarakhand is a part of India, the state Increasing Efficiency of Land Use: Following the
itself need not be too concerned about producing large male outmigration, women have become
its own food; rather, the concern is with securing the actual cultivators in the Uttarakhand hills. But
higher incomes, which can be used to purchase the they do not own the land they cultivate. This re-
necessary food. The adjoining mountain state of stricts their ability to access loan facilities or even
Himachal Pradesh followed just such a strategy of technical extension. In addition, the climate-smart
shifting from subsistence rice to high-value com- technologies are knowledge- and management-in-
mercial fruits and has, as a result, secured a much tensive. Securing the required knowledge and
higher per capita income for its population. checking up on good practices and technical ad-
Such diversification into high-value fruits and vances requires a strong technical extension sys-
vegetables, however, requires some specific sup- tem, with good connectivity. This necessitates
port from the government. Villages that are still measures for enabling women to gain and access
without all-weather road connections need to be knowledge on a continuous basis.
connected to the main roads. Cold storage and
warehouse facilities need to be set up. And there
needs to be concerted extension to teach more Integrating Climate Change in State Plans
farmers, particularly the women who manage the As mentioned above, the State has prepared a doc-
farms, on the cultivation methods and post-har- ument on its Action Plan on Climate Change. As
vest processing involved. envisaged in the UAPCC, a State Climate Change
Higher Education: Other areas that need attention Centre (SCCC), Uttarakhand, has been established
for diversification are education and digital con- to formulate climate actions with support from
nectivity. Education is necessary to enable people UNDP and other partners. The SCCC envisages
to shift from low-income to high-income liveli- to integrate Climate Actions, State Action Plan on
hoods. Even in the event of displacement by di- Climate Change (SAPCC), Uttarakhand, Vulnera-
sasters and the destruction of old livelihoods (for bility and Risk Assessment (VRA), Sustainable De-
example, by the deposition of gravel on agricul- velopment Goals (SDGs), and Intended Nationally
tural lands) those with more education will be able Determined Contributions (INDCs).20 A Vulnera-
to rehabilitate themselves better than those with bility Risk Assessment exercise has been under-
hardly any education. The latter often end up as taken by the SCCC to implement a climate change
rickshaw pullers or porters in the urban centres, plan, prioritise climate action and integrate the
while the more educated can hope to look for bet- same into state planning. The VRA is based on a
ter employment. total of 78 indicators. Some elements of the pro-
posed Sectoral Agenda for Climate Action for a
Digital Connectivity: Most people in the state few major sectors are presented in Box No. 5.3.
would now own a mobile phone. But it is import-
ant to move from mere ownership of a mobile
20. http://www.sccc-uk.org/site/about accessed on July 10th 2017.
249
Box 5.3: Sectoral Agenda for Climate Action
Agriculture Sector
• Assess irrigation strategies and crop yield studies and revaluate guidelines for irrigation
practices, espescially for vulnerable districts as well as promote climate-smart agricultural
techniques which reduce dependence on natural resources
• Generate farm-level awareness of climate risk of climate insurance schemes, assess viabili-
ty of climate resilient seeds and of switching to alternative, more resilient crops
• Examine viability of organic agriculture as a climate-resilient measure
• Organise capacity build-up training of agriculture extension teams to farmers regarding
climate change impact and appropriate measures to protect crops.
Forest Sector
• Introduce conservation measures with specific focus on existing biodiverse forests to
stem the rate of fragmentation; regulate invasive species as weeds expected to thrive with
increased temperatures
• Facilitate appropriate measures to improve productivity and production of herbal and
medicinal plant and their trade; increase focus on short rotation forestry where biomass
expected improvement is expected to occur and improved livelihoods through targeted
agro forestry programmes
• Review the ten-year Forest Development Corporation Management Plan and Green India
Mission Perspective Plan for Uttarakhand; examine national level policies such as Nation-
al Agroforestry Policy (NAP) and REDD-plus policy.
Water Sector
• Map availability, supply and demand for water at the basin level, focus on participatory
irrigation management at the Gram Panchayat level, and develop as well as implement a
multi-hazard early warning system
• Conduct scientific analysis of spring water dynamics in hilly districts and promote water
saving and re-use schemes; improve flood forecasting through flood plain mapping and
preparation of inundation maps for flood-prone areas
• Use VRA findings on stream flow dependability, to take advantage of when and where
river flows are likely to be sustained year-round for planning project
• Ensure regular monitoring, evaluation and maintenance of dams/reservoirs, linked to
EWS for better understanding of when and where flooding may occur
• Develop groundwater and surface water use schemes with an incentive or tariff system to
discourage users from over extracting water
Source: State Government
250
SECTION 5.5 5.5.2, and Appendix 5.5.3 contains the schemes

SDG 15: Protect, Restore and Promote Sustainable Use applicable for Goal no. 15. Annexure 14 contains
of Terrestrial Ecosystems, Sustainably Manage Forests,
the detailed information regarding indicators for
Combat Desertification, and Halt and Reverse Land Goal no. 15 for baseline, short-term (2019-20), me-
Degradation and Halt Biodiversity Loss dium term (2023-24) and vision 2030.
The discussion begins by focusing on Targets
15.1–15.3 dealing with various aspects of protec-
Forests are crucial to the survival and prosperi- tion of the forest and inland freshwater ecosys-
ty of human and other species as they not only tem, conservation, management, and arresting
provide food security and shelter, but are also degradation. This is followed by a discussion of
instrumental in fighting climate change, and pro- Targets 15.4 and 15.5, which deal with bio-diver-
tecting bio-diversity as well as the homes of in- sity, and Target 15.7, which deals with poaching
digenous populations. It has been observed that and trafficking of wildlife. Finally, Target 15.9 has
human actions are fundamentally, and to a great been discussed, which deals with the integration
extent irreversibly, changing the diversity of life of the issues covered by SDG 15, comprising lo-
on earth. Most of these changes represent a loss of cal planning, and poverty reduction strategies,
biodiversity.21 among other things.
There are very few states in India with more
than 60 per cent of the geographical area under
natural vegetation cover and Uttarakhand is one Target 15.1 By 2020, ensure the conservation,
of them (FSI, 2011, cited in Planning Commission, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial
2013). The state has a wide variety of forests rang- and inland freshwater ecosystems and their ser-
ing for the tropical to the alpine. There are also vices, in particular forests, wetlands, mountains
twelve National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries and drylands, in line with obligations under
covering almost 14 per cent of the total area in the international agreements
state. The number of species of flowering plants Target 15.2 By 2020, promote the implementa-
in Uttarakhand stands at around 4700 at present, tion of sustainable management of all types
and there are around 146 species of fodder plants. of forests, halt deforestation, restore degraded
It is evident that SDG No. 15, with its focus forests and substantially increase afforestation
on the protection and conservation of forests, and and reforestation globally
arresting the loss of biodiversity, is of crucial im- Target 15.3 By 2030, combat desertification,
portance to the people of Uttarakhand. restore degraded land and soil, including land
affected by desertification, drought and floods,
and strive to achieve a land degradation-neutral
The vision for Goal No. 15 for the state is: world
By 2030, the state of Uttarakhand will
attain a more sustainable use of terrestrial eco-
systems by increasing carbon absorptive Baseline for Uttarakhand
capacity, reducing degraded watersheds, Conservation of Forests, Afforestation and
containing loss of bio-diversity and promo- Reforestation
tion of rainwater harvesting. Uttarakhand already has much higher propor-
The vision for targets of Goal No. 15 are pre- tion of land under forest cover, at 63 per cent, as
sented in Appendix 5.5.1, followed by values for compared to the corresponding all-India figure of
indicators (baseline and vision 2030) in Appendix 27 per cent. Consequently there is limited scope
21. http://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/biodiversity/ and https://www.hcvnetwork.org/resources/folder.2006-09-29.6584228415/CommonVisionRef-

Doc.080910.pdf accessed on 11 July, 2017
251
252
for expanding the area under forest cover. The bated by climate change, resulting from extreme
percentage change in forest cover at present is neg- weather events (drought or sudden rain). Land
ative. The quality of forest cover is also important, degradation results in the loss of terrestrial car-
and the baseline for the total land area covered by bon stores from soils and vegetation, and has mi-
dense forests as a share of the total forest cover is croclimate effects, possibly reducing moisture ab-
34 per cent. The baseline for afforestation (includ- sorption and retention. Consequently, measures
ing all types of plantations) is 18,251 hectares, and to reverse land degradation not only have a local
at present there are 45 soil and water conservation impact in terms of affecting crop productivity but
works in the state. A total of 268 lakh seedlings also entail global implications by affecting carbon
are being grown currently and the area covered storage. Land management strategies, therefore,
under different afforestation schemes is 3,05,248 need to be seen with this dual perspective of local
hectares. productivity and global carbon storage; they are
Uttarakhand is fortunate to have a strong tra- simultaneously adaptive and mitigating strate-
dition of community forest management, run by gies (see UNCCD, 2015).
the Van Panchayats, whose primary concern has Although Uttarakhand has been losing topsoil,
been the conservation of forests. the state has implemented many programmes for
The conservation of water bodies is another watershed management, which can be expected
area of importance for the state and already 11 to substantially reduce land degradation.
rivers/riverlets are covered under the Namami Vision 2030 for Targets 15.1 to 15.3
Gange project, accounting for the afforestation The aim to attain the vision for Goal No. 15 vision,
of 1000 hectares of river/riverlets. The baseline as outlined at the outset, is that an extra 2 per cent
value for the area covered under pits and ponds forest cover would be attained by 2030. It is im-
(chal-khal) is 215 hectares. portant to improve the quality of the forest cover,
Land Degradation that is, to turn some part of the moderately dense
The issues of land degradation and climate change forest (accounting for 56 per cent of the total for-
are closely linked. Land degradation is exacer- est cover) into dense forest, and some part of the
Figure 5.4: Selected Indicators for Vision 2030 for Life on Land
253
open forest (accounting for 24 per cent of the total gone adaptation practices for soil and water man-
forest cover) into moderately dense forest. Dense agement is envisaged to double by 50 per cent till
forest cover could be expected to reach 35.5 per 2030, with interim targets of a 20 per cent increase
cent by 2030 from the baseline of 34 per cent (see by 2019-20, and a 30 per cent increase by 2023-24.
Appendix 5.5.2 and Annexure 14 for detailed indi- Challenges for Targets 15.1, 15.2 and 15.3
cators and also Figure 5.4 for selected indicators).
The following are the challenges with respect to
The vision for afforestation (including all types the implementation of Targets 15.1, 15.2, and 15.3:
of plantations) is to reach 2,24,000 hectares by 2030,
with interim targets of 48,000 hectares by 2019-20, • Increasing and improving the forest cover in
and 1,12,000 hectares by 2023-24. The number of the state;
soil and water conservation works is expected to • High rate of male migration in the Uttara-
go up from the present 45 to 7000 by 2030, reach- khand economy, especially because tradition-
ing 1500 in the interim period by 2019-20 and 3000 ally men have been part of the strategising for
by 2023-24. A total of 3780 lakh seedlings will be land management;
grown by 2030, and the area covered under differ- • Glacial retreat, which is reportedly affecting
ent afforestation schemes is slated to increase by water availability in the upper mountain re-
73 per cent from the present 3,05,248 hectares to gions—this leads to problems pertaining to
5,29,248 hectares. both drinking water and moisture for cultiva-
In addition to improving the quality of the tion, while the lack of natural sources of water
forest cover, it is also necessary for the forests to leads to excessive pumping of groundwater;
yield income for those dwelling in and around the • Need to increase the incomes of forest-dwell-
forests. Besides timber, there are many valuable ers from forest needs—in the absence of some
non-timber forest products (NTFP), such as nuts form of control, it is difficult to sustain the ex-
(walnuts, pine nuts), medicinal herbs and plants, traction of NTFP without the risk of degrada-
bamboo shoots, and high-value mushrooms. The tion of forests; and
Forest Department has issued instructions that 20
• Continued loss of top soil in the state, which
per cent of all new plantations should be those of
makes it imperative to halt, and even revers,
fruit-bearing trees.
watershed degradation.
Under the Namami Gange project, the affor-
Strategies for attaining Vision 2030
estation of river/riverlets will increase significant-
ly from the present 1000 hectares to 3000 hectares • In dealing with land management strategies,
by 2019-20, to 7000 hectares by 2023-24, and final- as in many other areas of action, it is neces-
ly, to 14,000 hectares by 2030. The area covered sary to combine both formal and informal (or
under pits and ponds (chal-khal) will also increase local) knowledge. Given the high rate of male
substantially from 215 hectares to 3500 hectares by migration out of the mountain economy, the
2030. utilisation of informal knowledge entails the
inclusion of women in the discussion, and the
The Van Panchayats already manage 40 per
decision-making and implementation process-
cent of the total forest area, and this arrangement
es.
is slated to continue till 2030. Although the pri-
mary concern of the Van Panchayats has been • While the phenomenon of glacial retreat as a
the conservation of forests, it is also possible to whole has to be dealt with by reducing global
involve them in devising appropriate systems of warming, local measures can be taken to recre-
extracting NTFP, carrying out re-planting, and ate a small-scale, village level moisture retain-
management of the resources. ing structure, as has been done in the Ladakh
‘Ice Stupa’.22
The number of watersheds that have under-
22. For further details, see http://icestupa.org/ and ‘Adventures in the Anthropocene’ by Gaia Vince.
254
• The sustainable extraction of NTFP necessi- the mix, mixed cropping with multiple species
tates a well-managed system of production helps cultivators protect themselves against
quotas, re-planting, and so on. Such a sustain- the inevitable output price fluctuations.
able income-bearing relationship is necessary • The watershed management programmes in
even for the protection of the forest itself, as villages that are being implemented upstream
in the absence of properly managed common of hydro-electricity generation plants can be
property systems, the forests would turn into utilised to reduce land degradation in the fol-
open access resources and soon be degraded. lowing way. These generation plants depend
Climate change mitigation schemes, such as upon good quality water, that is, with sedi-
REDD+, as also the likely national carbon mar- ments below a certain level. One way of secur-
ket, can be used for conservation to provide an ing this would be to pay upstream villages for
income. The funds accumulated for afforesta- providing water of the requisite quality. This
tion, be they under the Compensatory Affor- system of payments for good quality water as
estation and Fund Management and Planning an eco-system service has been tried out in hy-
Authority (CAMPA) or the to-be Compensato- dro-electric plants in Nepal and has worked
ry Afforestation Fund (CAF) should be allocat- to reduce land degradation. Offering an in-
ed to the Van Panchayats in order to extend centive to provide good quality water, that is,
the role of communities in forest management. water with low sediment, would strengthen
• Women play an important part both in forest watershed management in upstream villages.
protection and the collection of NTFP. Their Further, the mitigating effects of better land
management roles in the Van Panchayats need management on carbon storage also need to
to be strengthened. For income generation be taken into account. Just as tree storage of
from forest areas, rather than clearing of for- carbon is recognised and rewarded under the
ests for growing commercial crops, methods of UNFCC’s REDD programme, similarly carbon
agro-forestry can be tried, including the elabo- stores in soil and vegetation also need to be
rate multi-tier, multi-species cropping systems recognised and rewarded.
which, to an extent, mimic natural forests. In
addition to having high-value tree crops in
Figure 5.5: Selected Indicators for Conservation of Mountain Eco-Systems

and Bio-Diversity in Uttarakhand
255
Target 15.4 By 2030, ensure the conserva- nal year 2030. The number of tigers is slated to in-
tion of mountain ecosystems, including their crease by 50 from the baseline level to 390 by 2030.
biodiversity, in order to enhance their capacity to Measures to prevent the extinction of threatened
provide benefits that are essential for sustain- species including construction of water holes,
able development removal of lantana, patrolling, and building of
Target 15.5 Take urgent and significant action to boundary pillars will be escalated. The quanti-
reduce the degradation of natural habitats, halt tative targets for these measures have been pro-
the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect and vided in the Annexure 14 and selected indicators
prevent the extinction of threatened species have been presented in Figure 5.5.

The major threat to biodiversity comes from habi- Target 15.7 Take urgent action to end poaching
tat loss due to human changes in land use, includ- and trafficking of protected species of flora and
ing the conversion of forests into agricultural land fauna and address both demand and supply of
or of agricultural into urban land. The changed illegal wildlife products
weather conditions brought about by climate Baseline for Uttarakhand
change, and global warming also affect biodiver- Poaching of wildlife has been a persistent problem
sity, as many species are sensitive to warming in the state, according to various media reports.
temperatures. It is estimated that warming may Tigers and leopards are especially vulnerable. At
be a greater threat to biodiversity than habitat de- present, the number of poaching cases that have
struction (Center for Health and the Global Envi- been prevented with the aim of curbing wildlife
ronment, 2017.) Global warming effects cannot be trafficking is 33, but there are no community-led
overcome by Uttarakhand state alone, but the loss anti-poaching units.
of habitats can be addressed at the state and local
levels. Vision 2030 for Target 15.7
Although a complex area, some attempt has The aim is to curb poaching over the coming
been made to capture the bio-diversity in the years, such that it stops altogether. In this, com-
state with the help of indicators (see Appendix munity-led anti-poaching units are expected to
5.5.2 and Annexure 14). The baseline level for contribute and it is planned to start three such
the mountain ecosystems covered by the protect- units by 2019-20, which will increase to 7 by 2023-
ed areas is 20 per cent, at present. The state gov- 24, and finally to 14 by 2030.
ernment has also made a list of the extinction of
threatened species, which includes the share of Target 15.9 By 2020, integrate ecosystem and
threatened fauna, estimated to be around 4.2 per biodiversity values into national and local
cent. Among the list of currently endangered spe- planning, development processes, poverty re-
cies (fauna), the number of wild tigers in the state duction strategies and accounts
is 340 at present. Indicators for various measures
undertaken by the state government to prevent Baseline for Uttarakhand
the extinction of threatened species, such as the The state government has been making concerted
construction of water holes, removal of lantana, efforts to integrate conservation efforts into local
patrolling, and building of boundary pillars, have planning. Currently tigers, elephants, and snow
also been provided in the Appendix 5.5.2 and An- leopards are included under conservation plans.
nexure 14. Tourism as an economic activity can act as a
Vision 2030 for Targets 15.4 and 15.5 poverty reduction strategy and be climate change
The share of mountain ecosystems covered by smart, since it requires not extraction but the pres-
protected areas will be maintained at 20 per cent ervation of natural resources. However, nature
in the timelines 2019-20, 2023-24, and the termi- tourism should be eco-tourism, or tourism de-
256
fined as that which provides for the conservation Challenges for Targets 15.4–15.9
of biological and cultural diversity, includes mean- • Bio-diversity needs to be linked with higher
ingful community participation, and is economi- incomes.
cally sustainable (Committee on Biological Diversi-
ty, 2004). The baseline levels for various indicators • The incidence of poaching is a continuing
provided by the state government for developing menace in the state.
eco-tourism in the state such as the development • A danger in promoting eco-tourism is that ex-
and maintenance of awareness centres, informa- cessive tourist footfalls can endanger tourist
tion centres, picnic spots, and Van Chetna Kendras, destination in the fragile mountain environ-
are presented in the Appendix 5.5.2 and Annexure ment; similarly, human walking on glaciers,
14. Similarly, indicators have been developed for too, similarly can hasten the warming up and
infrastructure facilities such as the strengthening eventual collapse of glaciers.
and maintenance of forest roads, and construction Strategies for attaining Vision 2030
and maintenance of puls/pulias.
• Communities need to be involved in bio-di-
Vision 2030 for Target 15.9 versity conservation.
The conservation plans for tigers, elephants and • Community-led anti-poaching units can be set
snow leopards will continue for the 15-year peri- up.
od. For the development of eco-tourism, the num-
• It is imperative to regulate tourist movement
ber of awareness centres, information centres and
within the national parks and glaciers. For in-
picnic spots etc. will increase from 3 in the base-
stance, in the Valley of Flowers, which is both
line to 60 by 2030, with interim targets of 12 (2019-
a bio-diversity hot spot and a major tourist at-
20) and 28 (2023-24). The number of Van Chetna
traction, the tourists must continue to be pro-
Kendras will increase from the current figure of
hibited from walking on the valley floor itself,
9 to 20 by 2019-20, and will continue at the same
as is done in many such bio-diversity hotspots
level for the remaining years till 2030. For infra-
around the world. Similarly, restrictions are
structure facilities, too, the vision is to scale up the
needed on humans walking on glaciers.
facilities over the 15-year period.
257
Appendix 5.1.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 7: Affordable and Clean Energy
Target 7.1 By 2030, ensure universal access to affordable, reliable

To cover all remaining households with access to electricity.
and modern energy services
Target 7.2 By 2030, increase substantially the share of renewable To increase the share of renewable energy in the total to 15% by
energy in the global energy mix 2030.
Target 7.3 By 2030, double the global rate of improvement in energy

To reduce Transmission & Distribution loss to 9% by 2030.
efficiency
Appendix 5.1.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 7: Affordable and Clean Energy
By 2030, ensure universal access to affordable, reliable and modern energy
Target 7.1 Baseline 2016-17 Vision 2030
services
7.1a1 Households using clean fuels (electricity, LPG/Natural gas, bio-gas) for cooking (%) (Rural) 31.1
7.1a2 Households using clean fuels (electricity, LPG/Natural gas, bio-gas) for cooking (%) (Urban) 86.6
7.1b1 Households with electricity (%) (Rural) 96.5 100.0

7.1b2 Households with electricity (%) (Urban) 99.4 100.0
7.1c Number of villages with electricity facility 15638 15745 (100%)
1118191
7.1d Rural households (no.) using electricity for lighting 995573
(100%)
7.1e Total Installed capacity (MW)* 1290.10 1648
7.1f Electricity consumption (kWh per capita) 1279 2153
7.1f households (%) using firewood as main cooking fuel
By 2030, increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the global
Target 7.2
energy mix
7.2a Renewable share of micro hydel in total energy demand (million units) 18 151
7.2b Renewable share of solar energy in total energy demand (million units) 70 601
7.2c Renewable share of others (co-gen, biomass, W2E) in total energy demand (million units) 284 1137
7.2d Renewable share in total energy demand (million units) 371 1889
7.2e Share of renewable energy in total energy (final) consumption in state (%) 3.2 15.1
Target 7.3 By 2030, double the global rate of improvement in energy efficiency
7.3a Transmission and Distribution loss (%) in state 18.63 9.00

7.3b Use of efficient lighting systems — LED for street light (%)
7.3c Energy Saving by renewable sources (MW)
*This Target has already been achieved in 2018
258
Appendix 5.1.3
Schemes for SDG 7: Affordable and Clean Energy
Targets State Schemes Direct Intervention Schemes
Target 7.1 Promotion of green power projects Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana
Target 7.2 Small hydro-power projects
Target 7.3 Integrated Transmission Systems (EAP) Perform, Achieve and Trade Scheme
Appendix 5.2.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 11: Sustainable Cities and Communities

• Reduce Slum Households in the Total Urban Households to
10% from a baseline of 40%.
• Increase the Slums Denotified to 80% from a baseline of 35%.
11.1 By 2030, ensure access for all to adequate, safe and affordable • Increase share of Slum Households covered by Low-cost
housing and basic services and upgrade slums Housing Programmes to 90%, from a baseline of 25%.
• Increase share of Slum Households living in Pucca Houses to
85%, from a baseline of 35%.
• Increase the percentage of Shelter Capacity to Shelter less
Population to 50%, raised from a baseline of 0.8%.
• Increase the geographical coverage of public transport to 70%

by 2030, from baseline of 10%
11.2 By 2030, provide access to safe, affordable, accessible and sus-
tainable transport systems for all, improving road safety, notably • To create green, walkable, limited vehicle zones in the cities to
by expanding public transport, with special attention to the needs reduce traffic congestion
of those in vulnerable situations, women, children, persons with • To create dedicated bicycle track with pedestrian-friendly
disabilities and older persons areas
• Take special care for disabled friendly transport
By 2030
• Increase the share of Area Notified as per Master Plan to 100
percent, from the present 30%.
11.3 By 2030, enhance inclusive and sustainable urbanization and • Promote active participation of all ward committees in local
capacity for participatory, integrated and sustainable human settle- bodies.
ment planning and management in all countries
• Enhance the share of women councillors to 50%, from a base-
line of 10%.
• Augment the number of SHGs to 800, from a baseline of 250.
• Address all consumer grievances, while increasing substantial-
ly from the present share of 25%.
11.4 Strengthen efforts to protect and safeguard the world’s cultural

and natural heritage
11.5 By 2030, significantly reduce the number of deaths and the

number of people affected and decrease by 100 percent the eco-
nomic losses relative to gross domestic product caused by disasters,
including water-related disasters, with a focus on protecting the
poor and people in vulnerable situations
Contd...
259
By 2030
• Increase the percentage reduction in air and noise pollution
level to 70%.
• All the garbage generated will be collected and transported.
11.6 By 2030, reduce the adverse per capita environmental impact • Increase the share of sewage treated to sewage generated to
of cities, including by paying special attention to air quality and 70%.
municipal and other waste management
• All wards will have garbage collection and transportation
• All urban households will have sewerage connection
• All urban households to have 24x7 access to Potable, Safe
Drinking Water within Premises
• All urban households to have 24x7 access to electricity within
Premises
11.7 By 2030, provide universal access to safe, inclusive and accessi- Provide universal access to safe, inclusive and accessible, green
ble, green and public spaces, in particular for women and children, and public spaces to all, especially women, children and disabled
older persons and persons with disabilities people, as per state norms.
Appendix 5.2.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 11: Sustainable Cities and Communities
By 2030, ensure access for all to adequate, safe and affordable housing and basic Baseline
Target 11.1 Vision 2030
services and upgrade slums 2016-17
11.1a Percentage of Slum Households to Total Urban Households 40 10
11.1b Percentage of Slums Denotified 35 80
11.1c Percentage of Slum Households covered by Low-cost Housing Programmes 25 90
11.1d Percentage of Slum Households living in Pucca Houses 35 85

11.1e. Percentage of Shelter Capacity to Shelter less Population 0.8 50
By 2030, provide access to safe, affordable, accessible and sustainable transport

systems for all, improving road safety, notably by expanding public transport, with
Target 11.2
special attention to the needs of those in vulnerable situations, women, children,
persons with disabilities and older persons
Sus-
tainable
11.2a Geographical Coverage of Public Transport 10 70
Transport
System
By 2030, enhance inclusive and sustainable urbanization and capacity for participa-
Target 11.3 tory, integrated and sustainable human settlement planning and management in all
countries
11.3a Land Notifications as per Master Plan (%) 30 100

Sustain-
11.3b Number of Building Plans Sanctioned as per Planning Control NA 100
able Ur-
banization 11.3c Number of Active Ward Committees in the ULBs NA 100%
& Human
settlement 11.3d Percentage of Women Councillors in the ULBs 10 50
11.3e Number of waste disposal plants in each ULBs 250 800
11.3f Percentage of Consumer Grievance Addressed in each ULBs 25 100
Target 11.4 Strengthen efforts to protect and safeguard the world’s cultural and natural heritage
Contd...
260
By 2030, significantly reduce the number of deaths and the number of people affected
and decrease by 100 percent the economic losses relative to gross domestic product
Target 11.5
caused by disasters, including water-related disasters, with a focus on protecting the
poor and people in vulnerable situations
By 2030, reduce the adverse per capita environmental impact of cities, including by
Target 11.6
paying special attention to air quality and municipal and other waste management
11.6a Percentage Reduction in the Level of Air Pollution 20 70
11.6a1 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Dehradun Clock Tower 180.05
11.6a2 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Dehradun ISBT 288.12
11.6a3 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Haridwar SIDCUL 127.88
11.6b1 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Dehradun Clock Tower 25.07

Air
Pollution 11.6b2 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Dehradun ISBT 27.10
11.6b3 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Haridwar SIDCUL 24.96
11.6c1 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Dehradun Clock Tower 28.66
11.6c2 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Dehradun ISBT 30.05
11.6c3 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Haridwar SIDCUL 27.78
11.6d Concentration of carbon monoxide
11.6g Municipal Solid Waste processing (total) (%) under SBM 0.5
11.6h Municipal Solid Waste processing (Equivalent) (%) under SBM 5.07
11.6i No. of wards with 100% door to door collection and transportation of solid waste 431
11.6n Hospitals disposing bio-medical waste safely (number) 708
11.6nPercentage of garbage collected and transported to garbage generated 5.07 100

Solid
Waste & 11.6o Percentage of sewage treated to sewage generated NA 70
Drainage
11.6p Percentage Households connected to drainage system NA 70
11.6q Percentage of waste water treated to generated 30 90
11.6r Number of wards with 100% waste collection and transportation (Total wards
431 700 out of 700
700)*
11.6s Percentage of households having 24/7 access to potable, safe drinking water
50 100
within the premises
11.6t Percentage of households having 24/7 access to electricity within the premises 55 100
11.6u Percentage reduction in the level of noise pollution NA 70
By 2030, provide universal access to safe, inclusive and accessible, green and public
Target 11.7 spaces, in particular for women and children, older persons and persons with disabil-
ities
261
Appendix 5.3.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production
Target 12.1 Implement the 10-year framework of programmes on

sustainable consumption and production, all countries taking ac-
tion, with developed countries taking the lead, taking into account
the development and capabilities of developing countries
Natural resources will be used efficiently by

Target 12.2 By 2030, achieve the sustainable management and effi- increasing the use of bio-fertilizers from 0.3 kg/Ha gradually to 0.6
cient use of natural resources kg/Ha and also by enhancing the existing carbon sink in the forests
in the state.
Target 12.3 By 2030, halve per capita global food waste at the retail Waste of food will be minimised at all levels of the production and
and consumer levels and reduce food losses along production and supply chain, and the post-harvest loss for all products will be
supply chains, including post-harvest losses reduced to less than 2% by 2030.
Target 12.4 By 2020, achieve the environmentally sound manage-

ment of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle, in Minimise the release of harmful chemicals and other wastes into
accordance with agreed international frameworks, and significantly air, water, soil, and to reduce the use of plastics and the hazardous
reduce their release to air, water and soil in order to minimize their waste generation to zero by 2030.
adverse impacts on human health and the environment
Target 12.5 By 2030, substantially reduce waste generation through

Minimize generation of waste by 2030.
prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
Target 12.6 Encourage companies, especially large and transna-

tional companies, to adopt sustainable practices and to integrate
sustainability information into their reporting cycle
Target 12.7 Promote public procurement practices that are sustain-

able, in accordance with national policies and priorities
Target 12.8 By 2030, ensure that people everywhere have the rele-
vant information and awareness for sustainable development and
lifestyles in harmony with nature
262
Appendix 5.3.2
Targets and Indicators related to SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production
Implement the 10-year framework of programmes on sustainable consumption

and production, all countries taking action, with developed countries taking 2017-18 to
Target 12.1 2016-17 Baseline
the lead, taking into account the development and capabilities of developing 2030-31
countries
By 2030, achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural re-
Target 12.2
sources
12.2a Bio-fertilizers in agricultural production (kg/ha) 0.3 0.6
12.2d Total carbon sink (MT) in forest area 537.02*
By 2030, halve per capita global food waste at the retail and consumer levels and
Target 12.3 reduce food losses along production and supply chains, including post-harvest
losses
12.3a Post harvest loss fruits and vegetables (annual) as % of total production 4.58-15.88** Reduce to <2%
By 2020, achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all

wastes throughout their life cycles, in accordance with agreed international
Target 12.4
frameworks, and significantly reduce their release to air, water and soil in order
to minimize their adverse impacts on human health and the environment
Sound Man- 12.4.a Use of plastics (per capita in grams per day) 0
agement of
Chemicals 12.4 b Amount of hazardous waste generation (metric tonnes per annum) 55627 0
By 2030, substantially reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction,

Target 12.5
recycling and reuse
Encourage companies, especially large and transnational companies, to adopt

Target 12.6 sustainable practices and to integrate sustainability information into their
reporting cycle
Promote public procurement practices that are sustainable, in accordance with

Target 12.7
national policies and priorities
By 2030, ensure that people everywhere have the relevant information and
Target 12.8
awareness for sustainable development and lifestyles in harmony with nature
12.8a Population covered by awareness campaigns (%) 100%
*Estimate by Raj and Joshi (Uttarakhand State Perspective Strategic Plan 2009-27, Watershed Management Directorate, Uttarakhand), cited in the Annual Plan 2013-14, Vol. I, State Planning Commis-
sion, Government of Uttarakhand.
**Estimated at the national level by ICAR-CIPHET for 2013-14.
263
Appendix 5.3.3
Schemes for SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production
Target 12.1 National Policy on Biofuels Seed Development Programme

Target 12.2 National Clean India Fund
Target 12.3 National Clean Energy Fund
Renewable Energy: Renewable Energy Global Investment Promo-

Target 12.4
tion Meet and Expo
Target 12.5 Soil Health Card Scheme
Target 12.6 State Sector—Promotion of Organic Farming
Appendix 5.4.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 13: Climate Action
Target 13.1: Strengthen resilience and adaptive capacity to cli-

mate-related hazards and natural disasters in all countries By 2030, Uttarakhand would have embarked on a growth trajec-
tory that is inclusive, climate-resilient, and sustainable. It would
have succeeded in eliminating the emission of harmful GHGs from
Target 13.2: Integrate climate change measures into national poli-
different sources, substantially increased its adaptive capacity and
cies, strategies and planning
resilience, and would have effectively integrated measures related
Target 13.3: Improve education, awareness-raising and human and to climate change in State policies. There is need to reduce GHG
institutional capacity on climate change mitigation, adaptation, emissions by:
impact reduction and early warning Eliminating GHG emission from cooking by establishing LPG or
electricity as the primary cooking fuel for households
Reducing methane emission through rice cultivation by: (1)
enabling a shift from rice to fruit cultivation and (2) adopting
AWD technologies to reduce methane emission in continuing rice
cultivation.
Eliminating GHG emissions from public transport by adopting
CNG or electric energy.
264
Appendix 5.4.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 13: Climate Action
Baseline Vision
2016-17 2030
Strengthen resilience and adaptive capacity to climate-related hazards
Target 13.1
and natural disasters in all countries
All ACs and fridges 100% ACs and Fridges

13.1.b Consumption of ozone-depleting substance (ODS tonnes)
with ODS without ODS
No CNG/electric All transport CNG/

13.1.c Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by transport sector (%)
transport electric
Shift 50% cultivated

13.1.d Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by agriculture sector (%)
area to Horticulture
80% rice area under

13.1.h GHG emission (in N2O) from agricultural sector (Gg) All rice under flooding
AWD
70% rural cooking with Eliminate all rural

13.1.k GHG emission (in CO2) from energy sector (industrial, transport and other) (Gg)
wood cooking with wood
State action plan

Integrate climate change measures into national policies, strategies 50% of state budget
Target 13.2 on climate change
and planning linked to SAPCC
(SAPCC) formulated
13.2a Number of sectors to be prioritised under the climate

change action plan
Climate Change
Action Plan
13.2b Number of sectors covered under the climate change
action plan
Target 13.3
Improve education, awareness-raising and human and insti-
tutional capacity on climate change mitigation, adaptation,
impact reduction and early warning
Increase college enrol-

13.3a Proportion of population covered by climate change edu-
ment to 30% of high
cation (%)
school graduates
13.3b Trained persons in climate change mitigation (early warn-

ing etc.) (number)
Education, Aware-
ness and IEC
13.3c Number of awareness program at state level have integrat-
ed climate mitigation and adaptation
13.3d Number of awareness programmes at the sub-state level

that have integrated climate mitigation and adaptation
*AWD refers to Alternate Wetting and Drying, which is a water-saving technology.
265
Appendix 5.4.3
Schemes for SDG 13: Climate Action
Target Central Government State Government
13.1 Strengthen resilience and adaptive capacity to

climate-related hazards and natural disasters National Action Plan on Climate Change
included in which –
13.2 Integrate climate change measures into na- National Solar Mission.
tional policies, strategies and planning
National Mission for Enhanced Energy
Efficiency.
National Mission on Sustainable Habitats. Hamara Ped, Hamara Dhan
National Water Mission. Multi-purpose plantation and
13.3 Strengthen education, awareness-raising National Mission for Sustaining the Hima- conservation of forest
and human and institutional capacity on climate layan Ecosystem.
change mitigation, adaptation, impact reduction
National Mission for a Green India.
and early warning
National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture.
National Mission for Strategic Knowledge on
Climate Change
Appendix 5.5.1
Vision for Targets under SDG 15: Life on Land
15.1 By 2020, ensure the conservation, restoration and sustain- An extra 2% forest cover would be attained by 2030. Some part of
able use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their the moderately dense forest will be turned into dense forest, and
services, in particular forests, wetlands, mountains and drylands, in some part of the open forest will be converted into moderately
line with obligations under international agreements dense forest.
Afforestation (including all types of plantations) is to reach 224,000
hectare by 2030.
15.2 By 2020, promote the implementation of sustainable manage-
ment of all types of forests, halt deforestation, restore degraded The number of soil and water conservation works will increase to
forests and substantially increase afforestation and reforestation 7000 by 2030.
globally The area covered under pits and ponds (Chal-khal) will increase to
3500 ha by 2030.
15.3 By 2030, combat desertification, restore degraded land and soil, The number of watersheds that have undergone adaptation practic-
including land affected by desertification, drought and floods, and es for soil and water management is envisioned to double by 50%
strive to achieve a land degradation-neutral world till 2030
15.4 By 2030, ensure the conservation of mountain ecosystems,

including their biodiversity, in order to enhance their capacity to The share of mountain eco-systems covered by protected areas will
provide benefits that are essential for sustainable development be maintained at 20%
The number of tigers is slated to increase to 390 by 2030
15.5 Take urgent and significant action to reduce the degradation of There will be escalation of measures to prevent the extinction of
natural habitats, halt the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect threatened species.
and prevent the extinction of threatened species
15.6 Promote fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from
the utilization of genetic resources and promote appropriate access
to such resources, as internationally agreed
Contd...
266
15.7 Take urgent action to end poaching and trafficking of protected

species of flora and fauna and address both demand and supply of Curb poaching over the coming years, such that it stops altogether
illegal wildlife products
15.8 By 2020, introduce measures to prevent the introduction and

significantly reduce the impact of invasive alien species on land and
water ecosystems and control or eradicate the priority species
The conservation plans for tigers, elephants and snow leopards will
15.9 By 2020, integrate ecosystem and biodiversity values into continue for the 15-year period. For the development of eco-tour-
national and local planning, development processes, poverty reduc- ism, the number of awareness centres, information centres and
tion strategies and accounts picnic spots etc. will increase, as will the number of Van Chetna
Kendras and infrastructural facilities.
Appendix 5.5.2
Targets and Indicators for SDG 15: Life on Land
Baseline 2016-17 Vision 2030
By 2020, ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestri-

al and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services, in particular forests,
Target 15.1
wetlands, mountains and dry lands, in line with obligations under international
agreements
15.1 a Total land area covered by dense forest against total forest cover (%) 34 35.5
15.1 b Total land area covered by bushes /scrub (%) 0.006 0.006
15.1 c Forest under community based management (as% of total forest area)(Van
40% 40%
Conserva- Panchayat)
tion and
Restoration 15.1d Conservation areas (including Forest)(in proportion to total land area) 71% 71%
of Forest
15.1 e Conservation of lakes, wetlands and ponds (No) - -
15.1 g afforestation (ha)(Including all type of plantation departmental & Mass
18251 224000
planting)
15.1 i Soil &Water conservation works (Number) 45 7000
15.1 j Number of river and riverlets covered 11 11
15.1 k Afforestation for rivers and riverlets (Ha) 1000 29302
15.1 l Number of lakes taken up for treatment - -
15.1 m Afforestation for lakes (Ha) - -
15.1 n Number of contour trenches, chal-khals (pits and ponds) Constructed 1020 14000
15.1 o Area covered under pits and ponds (Chal-khal) 215 3500
Conser-
15.1 p Soil and Moisture Conservation - 6196.85
vation &
Restoration 15.1 q Maintenance of Herbal Garden (number) 4 4
of Water
15.1 r Protection of Bugyals LS 15
Bodies
15.s River front development (ha) - 442.78
15.t Bio-remediation and Bio-filtration (Ha) - 240
15 u Institutional/Industrial Plantation (ha) - 290
15.v Ganga Van (Eco Park Development) (ha) - 379.8
15.w Riparian Wildlife Management (ha) - 1620
15.x Brick construction/Tree guard Plantation(ha) 150
Contd...
267
By 2020, promote the implementation of sustainable management of all

Target 15.2 types of forests, halt deforestation, restore degraded forests and increase
afforestation and reforestation
Afforestation and Reforestation

15.2 a Rate of forest loss and degradation (%) - -
15.2 b Handover of forest to leasehold forest groups (000 ha) - -
15.2 c Additional plantation (Ha) per annum - -
15.2 d Growing of seedlings (Lakh seedlings) 268 3780
15.2 e Percentage change in forest cover -1.1 2
15.2 f Number of plants raised for schools (lakh seedlings) 5.03 70
15.2 g Total tree covered achieved outside forest area (sq. km) 752 850
15.2 h Total area covered under different afforestation schemes (Ha) 305248 529248
By 2020, combat desertification, restore degraded land and soil, including

Target 15.3 land affected by desertification, drought and foods, and strive to achieve a
land-degradation-neutral world
Combat desertification, restore degraded land and soil
1.Treatment of 286
MWS will contin-
ue till 2021-22
2. Project proposal
for 176 MWS will
286 MWS are
be prepared for
15.3a Identification and management of watersheds (number) being treated
financing
(ongoing)
3. Approved
projects under
EAPs and CSS for
176 MWS will be
implemented
15.3b Conservation of watersheds (number) 286 462

15.3c Reclaim flooded and other degraded land (in 000 ha) 1.0 8.0
15.3d Number of watersheds undergone adaptation practices for soil and water stress manage-
82 462
ment
15.3e Conservation of rivulets and rive banks through bioengineering (km) 26.45 75.00
15.3f Increase tree/forest cover in degraded area (Hectare) 2481 5200
By 2030, ensure the conservation of mountain ecosystems, including their

Target 15.4 biodiversity, in order to enhance their capacity to provide benefits that are
essential for sustainable development
conservation of mountain ecosystems, including their biodiversity

15.4a Potentially dangerous glacial lakes (%)
15.4b Mountain ecosystems covered by the protected areas (%) 20% 20%
15.4c Restoration of water bodies/streams in mountain areas
15.4 d Improvement of local livelihood (increase in (%)(Livelihood will be generated indirectly 0.5% of total pop-
-
not through department) ulation
15.4 e Increase in per capita income of mountain dwellers 0 0
Contd...
268
Take urgent and significant action to reduce the degradation of natural

Target 15.5 habitats, halt the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect and prevent the
extinction of threatened species
Prevent the extinction of threatened species

15.5a Threatened flora (medicinal and aromatic plants) (%)
15.5b Threatened fauna (mammals, birds, reptiles, amphibians, fishes, insects, platyhelminths,
molluscs, etc.) (%)
15.5 c Wild tigers (number) 340 390
15.5 d Blackbucks(number) - -
15.5 e Red list Index - -
15.5 f Number of endangered species
15.5 g Construction of water holes (numbers) 49 840
15.5 h Removal of lantana (ha) 1640 28000
15.5 i Patrolling for protection (Number) 513 7000
15.5 j Maintenance of fire lines (Km) 49524 49524
15.5 k Control burning (Ha) 159993 160000
15.5 l Fire watcher (number) 7251 8000
15.5 m Strengthening of check posts (number) 36 36
15.5 n Construction/maintenance of Boundary Pillars (Number) 895 14000
15.5 o Creation of large water bodies for elephant 2 56
Ensure fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the utiliza-
Target 15.6
tion of genetic resources and promote appropriate access to such resources
15.6a Poaching of tigers and other wild life prevented to curb the wildlife
15.6b Community led anti-poaching units mobilized (number)
Take urgent action to end poaching and trafficking of protected species of

Target 15.7 flora and fauna and address both the demand and supply sides of illegal
wildlife products
15.7a Number of poaching cases prevented to curb the wildlife trafficking 33

Poaching and
Trafficking of
wild life and 15.7b Community led anti-poaching units mobilized (number) - 14
endangered
species of flora
& fauna 15.7c Number of detection and prevention of traded wildlife that was
poached or illicitly trafficked
By 2020, introduce measures to prevent the introduction and significantly

Target 15.8 reduce the impact of invasive alien species on land and water ecosystems
and control or eradicate the priority species
By 2020, integrate ecosystem and biodiversity values into national and

Target 15.9 local planning, development processes, poverty reduction strategies and
accounts
15.9a Plant (floral) species under conservation plans (number)
03(Tiger, Elephant 03(Tiger, Elephant

15.9b Animal (faunal) species under conservation plans (number)
& Snow Leopard) & Snow Leopard)
Contd...
269
15.9e Total direct/indirect budgetary allocation under the biodiversity programmes over the
total budget
15.9 h1 Ecotourism-- Development of awareness center, information center/ Picnic spots 3 60
15.9 h2 Ecotourism-- Maintenance of Zoos 3 3

15. h3 Ecotourism-- Strengthening of FRH 1 175
15. h4 Ecotourism-- Maintenance of Van Chetna Kendra 9 20
15. h5 Ecotourism-- Construction of Zoos (Number) 2 3
15.9 i1 Infrastructure--Strengthening of Forest Roads (Km) 17 roads 1750
15. 9 i2 Infrastructure--Maintenance of Forest Roads (Km) 487 3000
15. 9 i3 Infrastructure-- Maintenance of Bridle Paths (Km) LS 8400
15. 9 i4 Infrastructure-- Construction of Buildings (Number) 2 Part 560
15. 9 i5 Infrastructure-- Maintenance of Buildings (number) 49 5600
15. 9 i6 Infrastructure-- Construction/Maintenance of Pul/Pulias (Number) - 280
Appendix 5.5.3
Schemes for SDG 15: Life on Land
Target 15.1 National Afforestation Programme (National Mission for Green India) Strengthening of Van Panchayats
Integrated Development of Wildlife

Target 15.2 Eco-task Force
Habitats
Target 15.3 Project Tiger Multi-purpose Plantation
Target 15.4 Development of Wildlife Habitat (State Sector)
Target 15.5 Compensatory Afforestation

Target 15.6 Eco-sensitive Zone Marking
Target 15.7 Protected Area (Parks, Sanctuaries, Conservation reserves, etc.)
Target 15.8 Establishment of Wildlife Board
270
RESOURCE MOBILISATION
271
Introduction khand has performed well with respect to many
The SDGs for the state cannot be realised without of the social indicators such as the education and
considering the current status of financial resourc- health sectors. All the indicators point towards the
es and future investment potential. The SDG 17 has development of qualitatively better human capital.
identified 19 targets for “Strengthening the means However, the state faces a severe crisis in the avail-
of implementation and revitalize the global part- ability of drinking water, unrestricted construction,
nership for sustainable development’’. All these and treatment of waste management, among other
targets are dependent on country level applicabil- areas. There are certain sectors where the gap be-
ity rather than state level policy. Recently the Cen- tween targets and achievements is very high. State
tre–state fiscal relationship in India went through expenditure needs to be prioritised and diverted to
major restructuring with greater devolution of fi- those sectors as per the estimated gaps between the
nancial power as well as the shifting of some major targets and achievement, thereby leading to the re-
responsibilities to the states. The Goods and Ser- quirement of financial resources. Once the resource
vices Tax (GST) has become a law that will have a requirements are estimated, efforts need to be di-
major impact on state revenue. It will be difficult to rected towards resource generation and explora-
set financial targets as long as the implications of tion of possible sources of finance.
all these changes are not fully realised. It was seen in Chapter 1 that the state’s Gross
However, some common and reliable indica- State Domestic Income (GSDP) has shown an im-
tors may be identified to show the prospects of re- pressive growth rate of around 7 per cent during
source mobilisation in future. These are: the period 2011-12 to 2017-18, with the exception
of 2014-15. The current and capital expenditure
a) Tax collection as a percentage of GSDP; are increasing significantly, indicating the growth
b) Tax collection efficiency; of physical assets of the state (Table 6.1). The cred-
c) Fiscal and revenue deficit as a percentage of it–deposit ratio of the state has remained almost
GSDP; steady, except in 2013-14 when the devastating
floods created havoc in the economic scenario.
d) Total liability as a percentage of GSDP; More than half of the bank deposits are invested
e) Credit–Deposit Ratio; and in the state, reflecting the positive business envi-
f) Successful utilisation of grants. ronment.
A review of state budgets will be helpful in re- The share of major sectors in the GSDP has re-
alising how and to what extent these indicators can mained almost the same during the last five years.
be used in order to achieve the target of resource The tertiary sector, including education and med-
mobilisation in future. ical services, contribute more than one third of the
total state income, while the agricultural sector
contributes a little over 11 per cent. Despite being
General Review of the Economy largely rural, income from the agricultural sector
The driving sectors of the state at present are has remained the same. Modernisation of agricul-
agro-processing and horticulture, tourism, hy- ture may increase its share, to some extent, but
dro-power, IT, bio-technology, and micro, small much resource generation from this sector is high-
and medium industries in which the state enjoys a ly improbable.
comparative advantage. The future growth drivers The number of small and medium industries
to focus on will be horticulture, including hill ag- has have increased significantly in the state. Their
riculture, medicinal and aromatic plants, tourism contribution has been pegged to more than half of
and small hydro-power, while the IT sector is envi- the GSDP during last five years. With an increase
sioned to act as an enabler for the entire economy. in production in this sector, there seem to be many
The MSME sector is a cross-cutting sector through untapped resources to be explored in terms of tax-
all the above in terms of job creation and is the es and domestic loans. Agro-processing industries
main sector for providing employment. can contribute to the exchequer with proper diver-
As the preceding chapters have shown, Uttara- sification of investment.
Table 6.1 Revenue and Capital Expenditure in Uttarakhand during 2011-12 to 2015-16
Components 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 AGCR

Revenue Expenditure (Rs. Lakh) 1297500 13960 22 16216 41 2088436 23086 44 12.21
Capital Expenditure (Rs. Lakh) 448820 530204 587213 631406 649734 7.68
Source: Government of Uttarakhand data and Uttarakhand at a Glance for different years.
The sectoral shares in the state economy show The State of Finance
that the primary and secondary sectors are slowly The revenue receipts of the state have been increas-
losing their shares in the GSDP, while that of tering significantly between 2011-12 and 2015-16 (Table
tiary sector is increasing (Figure 6.1). The primary 6.2). Taxes and grants from the Central Government
sector, already at a low level, is losing its share fast- account for around 90 per cent of the total revenue
er than the secondary sector. Even as the secondary of the state. The share of taxes in the total revenue
sector, dominated by manufacturing, contributes has increased by more than 8 per cent over the
around half of the GSDP, the contribution of the years, while the share of Central grant declined from
tertiary sector may grow to catch up with the sec- around 30 to 25 per cent. The state’s own tax reve-
ondary sector. It reflects the growing strength of the nue has shown a growth rate of more than 10 per
state economy, which is showing familiar signs of cent though its share in the total taxes has increased
development. Apart from being an educational hub, by around 3 per cent. Its share in Central taxes grew
the state has an enormous potential in IT-related by more than its own tax revenue. Non-tax revenue,
services and digitisation. The high standard of edu- which constitutes 35 to 40 per cent of the total rev-
cational institutions can be instrumental in provid- enue receipts, has shown a low growth rate of less
ing and spreading training in computers, the Inter- than 5 per cent. The state’s own non-tax revenue has
net and other related services in rural areas in order grown at a rate of as low as 1.43 per cent, while rev-
to facilitate an improvement in production quality, enue grants, constituting a significant proportion of
disbursement of loans, and the creation of market- the non-tax revenue, have recorded a much higher
ing facilities for small producers through improved growth rate. This indicates increasing dependence of
connectivity. The state must seize the opportunities the state on Central funds, thereby implying declin-
provided by the Central Government through the ing financial independence. The state should concen-
‘Digital India’ and ‘Skill India’ initiatives. trate on increasing its own revenue base.
Figure 6.1 Sectoral share (%) in Gross Value Added in Uttarakhand (at current prices)
274
On the other hand, domestic borrowing of The state allocates the maximum proportion of
the state has experienced a quantum jump from expenditure for the compensation of employees,
around 14 to 32 per cent. This results in the diver- that is, salary and other administrative expenses.
sion of a significant proportion of the expenditure During the last three years, this expenditure has
towards debt servicing and reducing the share of increased from 12 to 24 per cent. Construction ex-
building capital assets or social services. penditure is the next significant area, showing an
Property receipts have shown increasing increase from 4 to 12 per cent. However, capital
growth rate, though its share in total revenue is transfer is very low, that is, less than 2 per cent, in-
less than 3 per cent. It signifies that state must ex- dicating that there is hardly any revenue surplus to
plore the possibility of generating more remunera- be transferred to capital account. The state spends
ble public properties as an important instrument of very little (0.1 per cent) towards interest payment
resource generation in future. to Central Government loans though other interest
payments are pegged at around 7 per cent.
Borrowing at home is increasing at the rate of
around 14 per cent annually, while loans from cen- Capital formation in the state is primarily in the
tral government, though, very small in percentage, form of physical capital rather than financial capi-
is growing at the rate of 19.84 per cent annually. A tal. Naturally, a major component of annual expen-
positive aspect of finance is that recovery of loans diture is directed towards construction activities.
and advances is growing at nearly 20 per cent an- It is disturbing to note that that the allocation of
nually, though again, it is not significant in over-all expenditure amounts towards the major social sec-
budgetary receipts. tors like education, health, energy, water supply
Another significant development in the reve- and transport are decreasing as percentages of the
nue account is decreasing percentage of suspense total expenditure though there is a considerable
and miscellaneous component. It has been reduced gap between the targets and achievement in each
to almost half, indicating improved financial and of these sectors. In agriculture and transport, the
fiscal administration. Remittance receipt is show- growth rate of expenditure is also very low. In the
ing increasing tendency with positive impact on energy sector, the growth rate is negative. In edu-
the economy. cation, the percentage of expenditure has declined
from 31.09 per cent to 19.62 per cent (Table 6.4).
The growth of revenue expenditure has been
higher than that of revenue receipts during the last The important components in the ‘Others’ cate-
five years. Interest payments and pension consti- gory include general administration, public safety,
tute around 25 per cent of the total revenue expen- housing and community amenities, cultural activ-
diture. The share of interest payments has remained ities, relief and calamities, trade promotion, and
the same, on an average, while the share of pension cooperative promotion activities. The combined
is increasing slowly, indicating the growing de- expenditure has been increasing significantly as
pendency ratio in the economy. The growth rate of a percentage of the total expenditure and has also
pensions is the highest among all the components been showing the highest growth rate. It seems
of expenditure. The capital expenditure is growing that the Plan expenditure needs to be realigned to
moderately. The value of the loans and advances match the gaps between the targets and achieve-
taken by the government is much more than that of ment in the various SDG components.
the loans given. The revenue expenditure is grow-
ing much faster than the capital expenditure, sig- Resource Mobilisation
nifying that the growth of capital assets is much
lower than that of administrative expenses. Resource mobilisation can be achieved in two
parts: (i) Efficient use of existing resources and (2)
The analysis of expenditure in the state bud- Generation of new resources.
gets shows that a significant proportion, that is,
more than one-third of the total expenditure, has The major sources of revenue may be classified
been allocated for the education sector as it is an as follows:
important destination for educational tourism. 1. Tax revenue
2. Non-–tax revenue
275
Table 6.2: Distribution of Total Budgetary Receipts during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh)
Major Items 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 AGCR
13,69,141 15,74,721 17,32,053 2,024,624 21,23,443

A) Revenue Receipts 17.14
(100) (100) (100) (100) (100)
1. Taxes 8,48,166 9,68,712 10,92,873 12,13,080 14,71,098 15.36

Percentage of (A) 61.95 61.52 63.1 59.92 69.28
1a.State’s Own Tax
5,61,556 6,41,424 7,35,534 8,33,850 9,37,779 10.80
Revenue
Percentage of (A) 41.02 40.73 42.47 41.19 44.16
1b. Share in Central
2,86,610 3,27,288 3,57,338 3,79,230 5,33,319 13.22
taxes
Percentage of (A) 20.93 20.78 20.63 18.73 25.16
2. Non Tax Revenue 5,20,975 6,06,009 6,39,181 8,11,544 6,52,345 4.60
Percentage of (A) 38.05 38.48 36.90 40.08 30.72
2a. State’s Own Non-
1,13,606 1,60,288 1,31,654 1,11,044 1,21,966 1.43
Tax Revenue
Percentage of (A) 8.30 10.18 7.60 5.48 5.74
2b. Revenue Grant from
4,07,369 4,45,721 5,07,527 7,00,500 5,30,379 5.42
GOI
Percentage of (A) 29.75 28.30 29.30 34.6 25.00
Total (A) 13,69,141 15,74,721 17,32,053 20,24,624 21,23,443 9.17
Percentage 100 100 100 100 100
B. Loans, Advances and 3147611 1868641 5232797 2126809 2332773 7.22
others (Rs. Lakh) - - - -
-100 -100 -100 -100 -100
1. Borrowing at home 446983 573368 531669 593594 739207 13.4
Percentage of (B) 14.2 30.68 10.16 27.91 31.69
2. Loans from GOI 4640 5000 3496 5000 9000 18.01
Percentage of (B) 0.15 0.27 0.07 0.24 0.39

3. Recovery of loans
9057 36810 5523 4570 3739 19.84
and Advances
Percentage of (B) 0.29 1.97 0.11 0.21 0.16
4. Suspense and Miscel-
2031239 906007 3814245 906005 924533 17.86
laneous
Percentage of (B) 64.53 48.48 72.89 42.6 39.63
5. Remittance 304966 271600 481669 280111 309956 0.41
Percentage of (B) 9.69 14.53 9.2 13.17 13.29

6. Others 350726 75856 396195 337529 346338
Percentage of (B) 11.14 4.06 7.57 15.87 14.85
7. Subtotal (B) 3147611 1868641 5232797 2126809 2332773 7.22
276
Total (A+B) 4516752 3443362 6964850 4151433 4456216 2.11
Revenue Receipts (A) 1369141 1574721 17 32053 2024624 2123443 17.14
Percentage of (A+B) 30.31 45.73 24.86 48.77 47.65

Loans, Advances, Oth-
3147611 1868641 5232797 2126809 2332773 7.22
ers (B)
Percentage of (A+B) 69.69 54.27 75.14 51.23 52.35
Source: Analysis of State Government Budgets of Uttarakhand for different years, Directorate of Economics and Statistics, Government of
Uttarakhand
Figure 6.2: Distribution of Total Budgetary Receipts 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh)
Table 6.3: Distribution of Total Budgetary Expenditure during 2011-12 to 2015-16

(Rs. Lakh)
Major Items 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 AGCR
A. Revenue 12,97,532 13,96,022 16,21,641 20,88,436 23,08,644
Expenditure (100) (100) (100) (100) (100) 12.21
1. Interest Payments 1,76,921 2,08,873 2,05,604 2,40,561 3,02,111 11.29
Percentage of (A) 13.63 14.96 12.68 11.52 13.09
2. Pensions 1,13,510 1,36,568 2,13,064 2,45,191 2,62,782 18.28
Percentage of (A) 8.75 9.78 13.15 11.74 11.38
3. Others 10,07,101 10,50,584 12,02,973 16,02,684 17,43,751 11.60
Percentage of (A) 77.62 75.25 74.18 76.74 75.53
B. Capital 4,48,820 5,30,204 5,87,213 6,31,406 6,49,734
7.68
Expenditure (100) (100) (100) (100) (100)
1. Capital Outlay 2,31,731 3,54,210 3,71,202 4,93,905 4,21,730 12.72
Percentage of (B) 51.63 66.81 63.21 78.22 64.91
2. Loans and
24,684 27,257 67,799 30,097 8314 -19.56
Advances
Percentage of (B) 5.50 5,14 11.54 4.77 1.28
3. Others 1,92,405 1,48,737 1,48,212 1,07,404 2,19,690 2.69
Percentage of (B) 42.87 28.05 25.24 17.01 33.81
277
C. Total 17,46,352 19,26,226 22,08,854 27,19,842 29,58,378

11.12
Expenditure (100) (100) (100) (100) (100)
1. Revenue 12,97,532 13,96,022 16,21,6 41 20,88,436 23,08,644
12.21
Expenditure
Percentage of (C) 74.30 72.47 73.42 76.79 78.04
2. Capital 4,48,820 5,30,204 5,87,213 631406 6,49,734
7.68
Expenditure
Percentage of (C) 25.70 27.53 26.58 23.21 21.96
Source: Analysis of State Government Budgets of Uttarakhand for different years, Directorate of Economics and Statistics, Government of Uttara-
khand.
Figure 6.3: Distribution of Budgetary Expenditure during 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh)
Table 6.4: Share of Budget Expenditures on Major Heads during 2011-12 to 2015-16 (Rs. Lakh)
Compo-
2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 CAGR (%)
nents
Education 3,91,251 4,22,562 5,29,630 6,65,674 7,10,928 16.10
Percentage 31.09 25.96 21.15 27.52 19.62
Health 73,292 8365 1,08,623 1,90,858 1,70,825 23.56
Percentage 5.82 0.51 4.34 7.89 4.71
Agriculture 1,31,609 1,36,454 9588 6695 1,32,720 0.21
Percentage 10.46 8.38 0.38 0.28 3.66
Energy 26,560 1,03,650 29,172 46,915 23,674 -2.83
Percentage 2.11 6.37 1.16 1.94 0.65
Water
24,634 36,997 51,696 51,300 44,673 16.05
Supply
Percentage 1.96 2.27 2.06 2.12 1.23
Transport 1,06,381 1,11,330 1,23,684 1,84,616 1,21,712 3.42
Percentage 8.45 6.84 4.94 7.63 3.36
Others 5,04,722 8,08,628 16,54,144 12,73,068 24,19,126 47.96
Percentage 40.11 49.67 66.05 52.63 66.76
Total 17,46,352 19,26,226 22,08,854 27,19,842 29,58,378 30.27
100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
Source: Analysis of State Government Budgets of Uttarakhand for different years, Directorate of Economics and Statistics, Government of
Uttarakhand.
Note: Budget expenditure consists of both revenue and capital expenditure.
278
3. Grants in aid The trend of fiscal deficit was also increasing

4. Recovery of loans and advances slowly except in 2015-16, though it is well with-
5. Public debt in limits. The trend of revenue surplus was fluc-
6. Small savings tuating during the period 2011-12 to 2013-14, but
7. Deposits and advances during the last two years, it has been in deficit. The
primary deficit is also very low but the outstanding
8. Remittances
liability at the end of the year is quite significant
9. Reserve and sinking fund and is increasing continuously. It shows increasing
10. Suspense and cash balance dependence on borrowing as the state finds it dif-
Similarly, the expenditure can be classified as fol- ficult to raise adequate internal revenue to finance
lows:: its growing expenditure. Table 6.6 clarifies this
point further.
1. Interest payments and servicing of debt
Capital outlay is defined as follows: Capital
2. Pension payments Outlay = Capital Expenditure – (Loans and Ad-
3. Salaries vance + Repayment of Loans). Borrowed fund
4. Grants and subsidies needs to be fully utilised for creating capital assets.
But this does not happen consistently. Most of the
5. Social services time, borrowed funds are diverted to other areas,
6. Economic services thereby weakening financial management and the
7. Compensation and assignment to local bodies confidence of getting future loans. Among the last
five years, borrowed funds could not be used for
8. Capital expenditure creating capital assets for three years (Table 6.6).
9. Loans and advances In the last year, only a little more than 60 per cent
10. Public debt of the borrowed funds could be utilised. This is an
area of concern, indicating that the construction of
A major indicator of prudence in fiscal manage- capital assets is seriously lagging behind the grow-
ment is the status of deficits. There are three types ing demand, thereby slowing down the pace of
of deficits that merit attention. These are defined as growth.
follows:
Ways and Means Advances - The state has main-
tained a good record in utilising ways and means
Revenue deficit = Revenue Expenditure – Revenue advances and has tried to reduce use of overdrafts.
Receipt The efficiency of tax collection is one major in-
Fiscal Deficit = (Total Expenditure – Repayment of dicator of tax administration. The state fares well
Loan) – (Total Receipt – Loan Taken) in this field. Tax efficiency is measured by the tax
Primary Deficit = Revenue Deficit – Interest Pay- collected as a percentage of the tax demand or tax
ment projection. It may also be measured as a ratio be-
tween the tax collected and the cost of tax collec-
The fiscal gap indicates how the gap will be tion. During the last five years, the cost of tax col-
financed by borrowing. Ideally, the borrowings lection varied between 21 per cent and 27 per cent
should be invested in capital projects. The Govern- of the property tax, indicating a huge scope of rev-
ment of Uttarakhand enacted the Fiscal Respon- enue augmentation in this area. It was 1 to 3 per
sibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act in cent related to the tax collection of commodity and
2005, and set a target of eliminating revenue deficit services. The state can boast of efficient tax admin-
by 2015. However, the revenue deficit still contin- istration.
ues, though at less than one per cent of the GSDP.
The fiscal deficit was 3.29 per cent of the GSDP as Revenue expenditure, which is the expenditure
per 2015-16 data. Both these deficits are well within incurred on the day-to-day running of the organiza-
the limits specified by the FRBM Act but the fiscal tion, is classified into general services (police, land
deficit is significantly high as a percentage of the revenue, justice, jail, pension, etc.), social services
total expenditure, at around 20 per cent. (education, health, water supply, etc.) and econom-
279
ic services (agriculture, rural development, energy, cise 35 to 40 per cent flexibility to direct the course
industry, transport, etc.). Capital expenditure is the of development.
expenditure incurred to create permanent assets, to Public debt has been constituting approximate-
enhance the utility of such assets or to reduce per- ly the same percentage of GSDP for the last five
manent liabilities. years, ranging between 14 and 16 per cent, while
During the years 2011-12 to 2015-16, there has the total liability also maintains a stable share, vary-
been a shortfall of the actual expenditure against the ing between 19 to 21 per cent of the GSDP during
budget estimates by 9 to 11 per cent. If the actual the same period, emphasizing a more or less uni-
expenditure is less than the budget estimates, it may form financial picture with the liabilities not being
result in contraction of economic activities. Interest negatively skewed (Table 6.8).
payments and debt servicing account for 13 to 15 Tables 6.9 and 6.10 present the expected bud-
per cent of the total revenue expenditure. getary allocations under different heads and the
Savings from grants do not refer indicate funds required to achieve the SDGs at different
positive development. They refer to the slow or points of time. The estimates for fund requirements
non-implementation of schemes. The state has not have been prepared by the concerned departments.
been able to utilise 25 to 60 per cent of the grants These are presented in Appendix 6.1.
in various schemes, mostly welfare related ones. In The expected budgetary allocations have been
the area of economic services like energy, industry calculated on the basis of current trends as reflect-
and labour, the savings were sometimes to the tune ed in the state for the last five years. The compara-
of 75 per cent, indicating a serious shortage of proj- tive analysis shows that there are serious shortages
ects. These have led to slow growth of the economy of fund in departments like education, drinking
not because of the shortage of funds but due to the water and sanitation, electricity and irrigation. The
lack of proper implementation (Table 6.7). departments have estimated that the budgets will
Committed expenditure to various sectors and be sanctioned as per requirements, but the current
various components reduces the flexibility for de- trends do not reflect this optimism.
velopmental spending. During 2011-12 to 2015-16, It requires vigorous efforts to increase state
committed expenditure accounted for 61 to 64 per revenue to raise the required resources. The
cent of the total revenue receipts. The proportion state should seriously look into tax administra-
has declined in case of the total revenue expendi- tion and management, public–private partic-
ture from 64 per cent to 59 per cent. However, it ipation and domestic borrowings to fill the fi-
shows that the state government could only exer- nancial gap. The 14th Finance Commission has
Table 6.5: Trend of Budgetary Surplus (+)/Deficit (-) during 2011-12 to 2015-16
(Rs. Lakh)
Component 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16
Revenue Deficit/ 71,609 1,78,699 1,10,412 -68,312 -1,85,201

Surplus (00.61) (01.34) (00.73) (00.41) (00.99)
-1,35,749 -1,59,924 -3,05,026 -5,71,230 -6,12,534
Fiscal Deficit/Surplus
(01.16) (01.20) (02.23) (03.46) (03.29)
Primary Deficit/Sur- 41,112 48,949 -99,422 -3,30,669 -3,10,423
plus (00.35) (00.36) (00.66) (02.00) (01.67)
Total Outstanding 21,75,300 25,54,000 2876700 32,88,800 38,46,000
Liability at the end of
the year (18.72) (19.21) (19.19) (19.94) (20.70)
GSDP at current
1,16,16,500 1,32,91,900 1,49,87,300 1,64,93,100 1,85,75,300
prices
280
Figure 6.4: Budgetary Surplus/Deficit during 2011-16 (Rs. Lakh)
effectively reduced the share of the state in the to identify the potential areas of revenue generation.
Central pool as compared to the 13th Finance All central sources of funding should be tapped vig-
Commission. The state should thus urgently orously and utilised fully. At the same time, the state
concentrate on resource mobilisation in order to and local bodies should explore all possible ways of
realize the SDGs within 2030. This should, how- increasing revenue for re-investing continuously in
ever, be possible given the strong financial track order to achieve the SDGs fully.
records of the state.
It has been observed from the budgetary anal- Conclusion
ysis that the gap between budgetary allocation
and fund requirement is likely to increase during The state is registering a high score on fiscal man-
the 15-year slot as per current trends. Hence, it is agement. With high growth in the GSDP and per
advisable to translate developmental values into capita income, the economic potential of the state
monetary returns. Land value is likely to increase is quite promising. Low revenue as well as fiscal
consequent to an improvement in infrastructure. deficit indicate good fiscal management without
This must be converted into an increase in the tax the pressure of high inflation and an increasing
base, rents and fees, wherever applicable. E-gov- loan burden. Sound financial records pave the way
ernance and E-commerce are likely to offer a huge for more loans and grants, if desired. A good track
potential for increasing the revenue base. All devel- record of loan repayment is very important for re-
opmental activities should be properly documented source mobilisation through external assistance.
Table 6.6: Proportion of Borrowed Funds Spent on Capital Outlay
Component 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16

1
Capital Outlay (Rs. Crore) 2317.00 3542.10 3712.02 4939.00 4217.00
2
Borrowed Fund (Rs. Crore) 3244.00 2983.00 4038.00 4754.00 6998.00
3
Percentage of (1) to (2) 71.42 118.74 91.92 103.89 60.26
Source: Calculated from Accounts at a Glance, 2015-16, Government of Uttarakhand.
281
Table 6.7: Non-Utilisation of Grants under Selected Components (Percentage)
Components 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16

60.89
Education and Culture 57.89 33.95 38.97 31.81
Labour and Employment 17.35 32.26 19.66 27.77 40.60
Energy 78.68 38.73 52.55 73.40 47.88
Industries 94.62 58.42 74.99 66.53 21.19
Tourism 40.60 74.41 61.06 67.08 40.18

Source: Compiled from Accounts at a Glance, 2015-16, Government of Uttarakhand.
However, the state should be more prudent more along with the prospects of increasing the
in generating internal financial resources. A very non-tax revenue. Receipts from property are very
low proportion of tax revenue to the GSDP indi- low, and so are the proceeds from the sale of goods
cates that the tax base needs to be widened and an and services. The manufacturing and service sec-
increase in tax rates also may be considered with tors reflect strong growth potentials that need to
increasing per capita income. be explored. However, infrastructural provisions
Very low cost of tax collection indicates ef- in the productive sectors need a boost to facilitate
ficient tax administration. The scope of increase the realisation of the revenue potential. There
in both direct and indirect taxes needs to be ex- should be a distinction between productive and
plored. non-productive loans. The ratio of the former to
the latter should be increased for investments to
Loans and advances form more than half of the make more remunerative.
revenue receipts while the recovery of loans does
not account for even one per cent of the total rev- It has been observed that the allocation of re-
enue receipt. This situation needs to be explored sources among the different sectors has remained
Table 6.8: Financial Management Indicators for the State during 2011-12 to 2015-16
Indicators 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16
1 Revenue Surplus as % of GSDP 0.61 1.34 0.73 (-)0.55 (-)0.99
2 Fiscal deficit as % of GSDP (-)1.16 (-)1.20 (-)2. 03 (-) 3.46 (-)3.29
3 Tax Revenue as % GSDP 7 7 7 7 8
4 Own Tax Revenue as % of GSDP 5 5 5 5 5

4.32
5 Efficiency on Tax Collection (%) 2.77 2.59 2.60 4.02
Committed Expenditure as % of Total
6 61 59 61 61 64
Revenue Receipts
Committed Expenditure as % of Total
7 64 67 66 58 59
Revenue Expenditure
8 Total Liability as % of GSDP 20 19 19 20 21
9 Credit–Deposit Ratio 53 54 43 56 55
Source: Compiled from Accounts at a Glance, 2015-16 and Analysis of State Government Budgets, Uttarakhand.
282
Table 6.9: Funds Likely to be Available under the Budget Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh)
S.
Components 3 Years (2017-20) 7 Years (2017-24) 15 Years (2017-30)
No.
1 Agricultural and Allied Services* 176726.00 481737.00 1056869.00
2 Minor Irrigation 94703.00 113380.00 846113.01
3 Department of Labour 450.00 1000.00 2000.00
MSME and
4 5425315.00 9832156.00 11223570.00
Industries
5 Ministry of Health 328375.33 1025371.56 3125798.72
6 Education 90234.00 167425.00 372584.00
7 Electricity 49809.00 72860.00 1042519.00
8 Drinking water and Sanitation 221133.00 923585.00 1828757.00
Slum Housing and Solid Waste

9 229156.38 832458.45 3058700.38
Management
Public Works
10 838452.34 240325.00 502583.00
Department
11 Rural Development 14572.00 39278.00 101256.78
Women Empowerment and Child

12 34293.84 43380.00 96113.01
Development
13 Panchayati Raj 108224.54 485285.00 975286.00
Disaster Mitigation and Manage-

14 1025155.00 2345561.52 3925872.44
ment
15 Civil Defense and Law and Order 49500.00 95702.00 145238.00
*Includes Agriculture, Horticulture, Animal Husbandry and Milk cooperatives.

Source: Uttarakhand government
almost stable though the gap between targets and pense and miscellaneous accounts and reduce its
achievements is not the same in every sector. The impact on both revenue receipts and expenditure.
areas wherein these gaps are large need to be iden- In some years, the percentage has been more than
tified and the resources allocated accordingly, so half of the total revenue receipts. The savings
that the state can progress towards the attainment from this head can be utilised more effectively.
of SDGs in a time-bound manner. The social sec- It is necessary to utilise loans totally for cre-
tors should receive more resources for raising the ating capital assets. Any diversion of these loans
standard of human development. It would not be does not reflect prudent financial management
difficult to mobilise resources once the gaps are and creates uncertainty in the disbursement of
identified. loans in future. Detailed project planning with
It is imperative to analyse the nature of sus- matching financial requirements should thus
283
be prepared. A clear and time-bound cash flow The state needs to be careful about tied or com-
analysis is imperative for resource generation on mitted expenditure. If a significant proportion of
a sustainable basis. the expenditure is tied to particular areas, then
Similarly, if grants are not utilised within time flexibility gets compromised and expenditure
frame and returned prematurely, it creates a hin- buoyancy is not fully realised. Administrative
drance for the sanctioning of grants in future and loopholes need to be plugged, and the leakage of
a reduction in allotments. supply chains needs to be looked into. Resources
Table 6.10: Funds Required under Various Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh)
15 Years
S. No. Components 3 Years (2017-20) 7 Years (2017-24)
(2017-30)
1 Agriculture and Allied Services* 213092.00 538592.00 1385433.00
2 Minor Irrigation 154703.00 443383.00 1146113.00
3 Department of Labour 550.00 1500.00 3000.00
4 MSME and Industries 6443600.00 10441200.00 14604500.00
5 Health and Medical Services 358428.55 1373451.96 4032664.69
6 Education 1893511.11 2196402.40 2569383.53
7 Electricity 669572.00 1113659.00 1754031.00
8 Science and Technology 7960.00 9820.00 15725.00
9 Tourism 56930.00 576038.00 965910.00
10 Drinking Water and Sanitation 426486.00 1138415.00 NA

Slum Housing and Solid Waste Manage-
11 238600.00 1140000.00 3340000.00
ment
Women Empowerment and Child Devel-
12 134293.04 443380.00 1146113.01
opment
Public Works
13 960732.00 2808850.00 6161002.75
Department
14 Rural Development 20395.76 50587.06 122645.78
15 Panchayati Raj 189772.11 545223.78 1410413.1
16 Disaster Mitigation and Management 1239107.00 2609607.00 471685.00
17 Civil Defense and Law and Order 52500.00 110500.00 175500.00
*Includes Agriculture, Horticulture, Animal Husbandry and Milk cooperatives.

Source: Uttarakhand government
284
Figure 6.5: Funds Required under Various Heads to Achieve Vision 2030 (Rs. Lakh)
need to be utilised for the creation and mainte- The financial requirements of some major de-
nance of assets to ensure zero wastage of capital. partments have been compiled in the Annexure. It
With the major financial indicators reflecting is evident that the gap in budgetary provision and
very positive values, resource mobilisation should actual requirement ranges from 20 to 60 per cent.
not be a problem for the state. It should tap all the It is thus time to focus on need-based funding and
Central as well as external funds to augment its to prioritise expenditure. The state does not suffer
own resources for achieving the SDGs in a time- a huge shortage of funds but proper financial ad-
bound manner. ministration is the need of the hour.
285
Appendix 6.1 Financial Resources Required for Various Sectors during 2017-2030 (Rs. Lakh)
1 Health
1.1 Ministry of AYUSH

3 years 7 years
S.no Components 15 Years (2017- 2030)
(2017-2020) (2017-2024)
1 Construction of hospitals/dispensaries 1980.00 3120.00 7780.00
2 AYUSH village 770.00 1100.00 1100.00
3 College 8000.00 4510.00
4 Training Centres 46.00 62.00 58.00
5 R&D 400.00 600.00 405.00
6 Awareness Programme 340.00 50.00 85.00
Total 11536.00 9442.00 9428.00
Source of Fund
1 Fund required 12276.00 9442.00 9428.00
2 Budgetary Provision 12000.00 14000.00 9428.00
2.1 Central Schemes 12000.00 14000.00 9428.00
2.2 State Schemes
1.2. Allopathic
S. No. Components 3 years 7 years 15 years
1 State Sector 292180.97 837453.95 2470569.02

2 Central Sector 143991.58 412709.96 1216966.89
3 EAP 39720.00 113846.05 335700.78
Total 346892.55 1364009.96 4023236.69
2. Department of Labour
3 years 7 years 15 Years
S. no. Components
(2017-2020) (2020-2024) (2024- 2030)
Eradication of forced labour and child
1 400.00 1100.00 2200.00
labour
2 Rights of women and migrants labour 150.00 400.00 800.00
Total 550.00 1500.00 3000.00

1 Fund required 550.00 1500.00 3000.00
286
3. Electricity
3 Years 7 Years 15 Years
S. No. Components
(2017-2020) (2020-2024) (2024- 2030)
1 H.P.P up to 25MW 114800 48900 163700
2 H.P.P more above 25MW 285231 789747 878819
Construction of transmission sub status, transmission lines

3 192129 197600 634100
and capacity addition
4 Availability of electricity to all households 77412 77412 77412
5 Total 669572 1,113,659 1754031
1 Fund required 669572 1,113,659 1754031
4. Science and Technology

3 years | 7 years
S.No. Components 15 Years (2024-2030)
(2017-18-19-20) (2017-18 -23-24)
Uttarakhand Space
1 650.00 2085.00 3937.50
Application Centre
2 Bio Technology Research and Development 1680.00 825.00 725.00
3. Biotech Park 300.00 700.00 1500.00
Skill Development 150.00 100.00 200.00

4.
5. Bio Tech University 1200.00 1200.00 1500.00
6. Others 3980.00 4910.00 7862.50
7. Total 7960.00 9820.00 15725.00
5.Education
5.1 Elementary Education
S Components 3 years 7 years 15 Years
No.
(2017-2020) (2017-2024) (2017- 2030)
1 Teachers 154741.00 170215.4 185690.4
2 Personality/Skill Development 90381.22 99419.34 108457.46
3 Exposure Visit 3068.8 3375.76 3682.56
4 Transport and Security 7323.05 8055.36 8787.66
5 School Beautification 8514.7 5232.48 5708.16
6 Recreational Facilities 15344.00 16878.4 18392.8
7 ICT Facilities 81562.00 89718.2 97874.4
8 Textbooks, Uniform, Food, Stationeries, Motivational Works 679070.12 746977.13 814884.16
9 Training 9991.8 10990.98 11990.16
10 Improving Learning Score 703.82 774.2 844.58
11 Basic Infrastructure 665112.18 728951.66 798476.77
12 Total 1716900.14 1874668.29 2045093.55
287
5.2 Secondary Education

S. No. Components
(2017-2020) (2020-2024) (2024- 2030)
Information, Communication,
1 39.00 39.00 39.00
Education (ICE)
2 Up gradation of existing schools 4500 4500 4500
3 Provision of Basic Amenities 9031.91 10130.38 10636.25
4 Test Books and uniform 3799.73 3799.73 3799.73
5 Infrastructure 26855.33 37750.00 86775.00
6 Exposure 475.00 475.00 475.00
7. Fund Required 44700.97 56694.11 106224.98
Total 44700.97 56694.11 106224.98
5.3 Higher Education

3 Years 7 Years
S. No. Components 15 Years (2024- 2030)
(2017-2020) (2020-2024)
a Construction of Buildings and Infrastructure 6500 6000 12380
b Human Recovery 4300 10080 14500
Total 10800 16080 26880
5.4. Technical Education

S. No. Components
(2017-18-19-20) (2017-18 -23-24) (2017-18 -30-31)
1 Construction/Improvement of Buildings 101300 206636.8 324683.55
2 Infrastructure 19810 42323.2 66501.45
3 Total 121110 248960 391185
6. Drinking Water and Sanitation
3 Years 7 Years
(2017-2020) (2020-2024)
1 Urban water supply and sewerage 172242.00 709000.00

2 Rural Water Supply 254244.00 352615.00
3 Peri Urban 76800.00 NA
4 Total 426486.00 1138415.00
288
7. Minor Irrigation
3 Years 7 Years
(2017-2020) (2020-2024)
1 Bharat Nirman Programme 154700.00
2 Tribal Subplan construction and Subsidy 500.00
3 Scheduled Caste Sub-plan 730.00
4 State sector construction (SCSP) 2080.00 5400.00
5 State Sector (TSP) 1430.00 3710.00
6 Total C.S.S 439873.00 1137003.01
Total 443383.00 1146113.01
Source of Fund
S. No. Components 3 years 7 years 15 years
1 Fund required 154703.01 443383.01 1146113.01
2.1 Central Schemes 153473.00 439870.00
2.2 State Schemes 1230.00 3510.00
2.3 EAP
8. Women Empowerment and Child Development

S. No. Components
(2017-2020) (2020-2024) (2024- 2030)
1 SAM & MAM (Underweight) 56700
2 Education 76400
3 Gender Equality and Empowerment 1193.84 2113.84 3723.84
4. Total 134293.84
Source of Fund
1.1 Central Schemes 153473.00 439870.00
1.2 State Schemes 1230.00 3510.00
289
9. Department of Animal Husbandry

S. No. Components 3 Years 7 Years 15 Years
Construction of Veterinary Hospitals/Dairy Units/Other
1 3567.83 11.550.92 26432.79
capital works
Livelihood upliftment, Animal rearing, Distribution of
2 13831.69 45349.59 126878.96
animals
3 Livestock Census 1944.52 5573.38 14406.13
4 Prevention of Animal Disease 2137.8 6127.39 15838.24
5 Total 82691.79 236982.43 612533.38
Source of Fund
Central Source 745760 21375 55250.49
State Source 7523419 215607.44 557282.89
Total 8269179 236982.43 612533.38
10. Panchayati Raj

1 Grants from 14th Finance Commission 120969 380466.3 1012096
2 Finance Commission Grants (Others) 18828 18828 18828
3 State Finance Commission 18000 45846 113625

4 Capacity Building 1733.11 4967.48 12840.1
5 Cleanliness and Digitisation 30242 95116 253024
Total 189772.11 545223.78 1410413.1
11. Public Works Department

S. No. Components
(2017-18-2019-20) (2017-18-2013-24) (2017-2030)
Road Connectivity in small villages

1 232750 657750 1297118.75
(<Rs. 250 person)
2 Road Expansion 247616 746675 1783383

3 Access to all weather roads 480366 1404425 3080501
Total 960732 2808850 6161002.75
12. MSME and Industries

1 District Sector 27300 37400 67200
2 State Sector 934700 1443100 2693300
3 Central Sector 1881600 2960700 5844000
4 EAP 3600000 6000000 6000000
Total 6443600 10441200 14604500
290
13. Disaster Mitigation and Management

1 Compensation for damaged houses 15000 30000 45000
2 Consumption for death injury due to disaster 8000 15000 23000
3 Loss of animals due to disaster 5000 75000 12500
4 Construction/Improvement of Buildings Infrastructure 101300 206636.8 324683.55
5 Infrastructures 198107 42323.2 66501.45
Total 1239107.00 2609607.00 471685.00
14. Rural Development

1 PMAY 975 975 975
2 NRLM 180 420 1,000.00
3 MGNREGS 18000 45846 113625
4 SPMRUM 96 225 1440
EAP (IFAD Supported
5 Programme) 450 450 450
6 BADP 114 266 570
7 State Schemes 1030.76 2405.06 5155.78
8 Total 20395.76 50587.06 122645.78
15. Civil Defense and Law and Order

1 Creation of New Police Status and Outposts 5000 15,000.00 25000
2 Creation of Traffic Directorate 1000 2000 3,000
3 Creation of Infrastructure for Women Safety 1000 2000 3000
4 Creation of New five status 11000 24000 46000
5 Creation of command and control centres in all districts 12500 24500 24500
6 Security for Religions festivals 5000 20000 30000
7 Home Guards Manpower and Infrastructure 15000 20000 40000
8 Civil Defense Manpower and Infrastructure 2000 3000 4000
9 Total 52500.00 110500.00 175500.00
291
16. Slum Housing

1 GOI Share 60000 52500 15000
2 State Government share 20000 17500 5000
3 Beneficiary share 80000 70000 20000
4 Total 160000 140000 40000
Municipal Solid Waste Processing under SBM
1 GOI Share 27500
2 State /Other Resources 51100
3 Total 78600
4. Grand Total 238600 1140000 3340000
17. Agriculture and Allied Services

S. No. Components 3-Year Plan 7-Year Plan 15-year Plan
1 Agriculture 80400.00 207400.00 442900.00
2 Horticulture 45000.00 120000.00 320000.00
3 Animal Husbandry 82691.79 203692.43 612533.38
4 Milk Co-operatives 5000.00 7500.00 10000.00
Total 213092.00 538592.00 1385433.00
18.Tourism
Sl. No. Components 3 year Plan 7 Year Plan 15 year Plan
1 Accommodation 10000.00 20000.00 50000.00
2 Skill Development 700.00 800.00 1500.00
3. Development of new home stays 2000.00 2000.00 6000.00
4. Development of Rural Tourism 5000.00 5000.00 15000.00
5. Development of 13 new destinations 500000.00 800000.00
Tourism Development Authorities/Destination Manage-
6. 50.00 50.00 150.00
ment committees
Infrastructure (Ropeways, Parking, Wayside amenities
7. Complexes, St. WM Mountaineering Routes/Mountain 36580.00 47688.00 92760.00
Train Biking Routes)
8. Safety and Security 2600.00 500.00 500.00
Total 56930.00 576038.00 965910.00
292
293
294
SDG Targets and Indicators*
ANNEXURE 1
SDG 1: End poverty in all its forms everywhere
Target/Sub-Target and Indicators Physical Targets
Source/Notes 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 2017-18 to

Baseline 2019-2020 to 2023- 2030-31
24
Target By 2030, eradicate extreme poverty for all people everywhere, currently
1.1 measured as people living on less than $1.25 a day
1.1a: Households (no.) who are deprived (SECCs) (lakhs) rural GoI 429,888 343,911 171,955 0
2011 171955 (reduce by (reduce (reduce by
SECC 171955 20%) by 40%) 40%)
1.1b: Population who are deprived (SECC (lakhs) urban NA NA NA NA
1.1c: No. of homeless households 21,930 18,853 3,077 0
1.1d. Population below US$ 1.25 per day (ppp value), (%)
1.1e. Per capita state domestic product (in Rs.) (at 2011-12 prices) 140405 217562
Target By 2030, reduce at least by half the proportion of men, women and children of 2011-12
1.2 all ages living in poverty in all its dimensions according to national definitions NSS
All ages
1.2a Population below state poverty line (%) 11.26 Reduce

1.2b Population below state poverty line (lakhs) 11.6 to at least
5.63%
1.2c No. of people (lakh) below poverty line (rural) 8.25
1.2d % of people below poverty line (rural) 11.62
* Data obtained from Uttarakhand State Government, unless otherwise mentioned. Some indicators for which values are currently not available, have also been included, in view of
the fact that statistical methods can be improved in the future for collection of such important information. This is particularly applicable for climate change related indicators.
296 | UTTARAKHAND: VISION 2030

Baseline 2019-2020 to 2023- 2030-31
24
1.2e No. of people (lakh) below poverty line (urban) 3.35

1.2f % of people below poverty line (urban) 10.48
1.2g. Women of all ages below national poverty line
1.2h. Children of all ages below national poverty line
Target Implement nationally appropriate social protection systems and measures for all,
1.3 including floors, and by 2030 achieve substantial coverage of the poor and the vulnerable
1.3a Social protection expenditure in total budget (%)

1.3b1 Beneficiaries (no.) under Old Age pension scheme 425962 555000
1.3b2 Beneficiaries (no.) under Widow pension scheme 139381 180000
1.3b3 Beneficiaries (no.) under Disability pension scheme 64921 80000
1.3b4 Beneficiaries (no.) under Farmer pension scheme 19469 25000
1.3c. % of Employed people (Working Poor) below national poverty
line
1.3d Employment to population ratio (UPS)
Target By 2030, ensure that all men and women, in particular the poor and the
1.4 vulnerable, have equal rights to economic resources, as well as access to
basic services, ownership and control over land and other forms of property,
inheritance, natural resources, appropriate new technology and financial
services, including microfinance
Financial 1.4a Number of Jan Dhan Yojana accounts opened till February 2017 2170963 Cover all
Services 1.4b Number of women SHGs unreached
1.4c Number of men SHGs house-holds
1.4d Number of functional SHGs wrt microfinancing like CCL &
inter/intra loaning(women)
1.4e Number of functional SHGs wrt microfinancing like CCL &
inter/intra loaning(men)
Economic 1.4f Share of bottom quintile in national consumption (%)
Resource 1.4g Ownership of Land by Women
1.4h Ownership of Land by SC/ST
1.4i No.of small/marginal land holdings for poor & vulnerable (men)
1.4j No. of small/marginal land holdings for poor & vulnerable (women)
ANNEXURES | 297

Baseline 2019-2020 to 2023- 2030-31
24
Target By 2030, build the resilience of the poor and those in vulnerable situations and
1.5 reduce their exposure and vulnerability to climate-related extreme events and
other economic, social &environmental shocks & disasters
1.5a Houses fully damaged due to natural disaster (to be 806 700 500 100
reconstructed, in number)
1.5b Houses partially damaged due to natural disaster 2440 2000 1500 200
(to be reconstructed, in number)
1.5c Loss of lives from disasters (number) 126 100 10 0
1.5d Injuries due to natural disaster (in number) 100 60 50 0

1.5e Loss of animals (big) due to natural disaster (in number) 394 300 200 50
1.5f Loss of animals (small) due to natural disaster (in number) 1070 900 700 100
1.5g Persons affected by disaster(number)
1.5h Direct disaster Economic loss /GSDP
1.5i Agriculture area effected by disaster(Hect)
1.5j Disaster warnings through SMS (% villages) Nil 70% (high 100%
disaster by
prone areas) 2025
by 2020
ANNEXURE 2
SDG 2: End hunger, achieve food security and

improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
Source/Notes 2016-17 Baseline 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to

2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 2.1 By 2030, end hunger and ensure access by all people, in particular the poor
and people in vulnerable situations, including infants, to safe, nutritious
and sufficient food all year round
2.1a Per capita average food consumption or food grain production Food and NA
civil supplies
2.1b per hectare foodgrain production (Mt) website 1843785 1969032* 2020349** 2076303***
2.1c % Share of Antyodaya and BPL households in total households 24% 0
(BPL replaced by priority households)
2.1d Population spending more than two-third of total consumption
on food
Target 2.2 By 2030, end all forms of malnutrition, including achieving, by 2025, the
internationally agreed targets on stunting and wasting in children under
5 years of age, and addressing the nutritional needs of adolescent girls,
pregnant and lactating women and older persons
Underweight 2.2a (i) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%) NFHS-4 26.60 21.20 10.40 <5
(2015-16) for
2.2a (ii) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%) baseline 25.60 20.45 10.15 <5
(Urban)
27.10 21.58 10.53 <5
2.2a (iii) Prevalence of underweight children <5 years (-2SD) (%)
(Rural)
ANNEXURES | 299

2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Stunting 2.2b (i) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) 33.50 26.38 12.13 <5
NFHS-4
2.2b (ii) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Urban) (2015-16) for 32.50 25.63 11.88 <5
baseline
2.2b (iii) Prevalence of stunted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Rural) 34.00 26.75 12.25 <5
Wasting 2.2c (i) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) 19.50 15.88 8.63 <5
2.2c (ii) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Urban) 18.60 15.20 8.40 <5
2.2c (iii) Prevalence of wasted children <5 years (-2SD) (%) (Rural) 19.90 16.18 8.73 <5
Anaemia 2.2d (i) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age 45.20 36.00 19.00 <10
(15-49 months) (%)
2.2d (ii) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age 43.40 35.00 18.00 <10
(15-49 months) (%) (Urban)
2.2d (iii) Prevalence of anaemia among women of reproductive age 46.20 37.00 19.00 <10
(15-49 months) (%)(Rural)
2.2e Prevalence of anaemia among children 59.80 46.00 19.00 <5
(6-59 months) (%)

2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 2.3 By 2030, double the agricultural productivity and incomes of small-scale
food producers, in particular women, indigenous peoples, family farmers,
pastoralists and fishers, including through secure and equal access to
land, other productive resources and inputs, knowledge, financial services,
markets and opportunities for value addition and non-farm employment
Value 2.3a Targeted seed distribution rice (quintal) Directorate of 18,464 25,210 31,450 34,490
addition 2.3b Targeted seed distribution wheat (quintal) Agriculture 120,337 121,597 122,000 122,000
2.3c Crop insured (farmers covered) 375,000 400,000 500,000 550,000

Security
2.3d Crop insured (area covered) (Ha) 85,790 103,164 137,552 257,909
2.3e Land productivity for fruits (metric tonnes per hectare) 3.83 4.1 4.1 5.0
Productivity
2.3f Land productivity for vegetables (metric tonnes per hectare) 9.13 9.32 9.52 10
2.3g Land productivity for potato (metric tonnes per hectare)
2.3h Land productivity for spices (metric tonnes per hectare) 16.14 16.23 16.36 16.88
2.3i Area under flower production (hectare)
2.3j Productivity( per hect production of cereals ) 6.38 8.13 8.24 8.4
2.3k Productivity( Per hect production of pulses)
2.3l Productivity( per hect production of millets) 1400 1900 3500 5000
2.3m Average income of small scale food producer 21.69 22.93 23.45 24.02
2.3n Agriculture households having land ownership (%) 10.48 11.92 12.31 12.93
2.3o Irrigated land out of total land (%) 16.17 16.74 17.04 17.39
2.3p Land ownership of SC/ST (%)
Target 2.4 By 2030, ensure sustainable food production systems and implement
resilient agricultural practices that increase productivity and production;
that help maintain ecosystems; that strengthen capacity for adaptation to
climate change extreme weather, drought, flooding and other disasters and
that progressively improve land and soil quality
ANNEXURES | 301

2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Resilient 2.4a Agricultural land (foodgrain) at the present level (,000 hectare) 900.197 907.63 909.65 911.49
Agriculture 2.4b Agriculture productivity (quintal per hectare)
Practices 2.4c Organic Agriculture productivity (quintal per hectare) 20.48 21.69 22.21 22.78
2.4d Bio-fertilizers in agricultural production (kg/Ha) 16.03 17.0 18.9 20.0
2.4e Area under organic certification (thousand hectares)
2.4f Land under horticulture (lakh hectare) 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
35^ 125 200 250
2.4g Soil testing status( per 1000 hectare)
2.4h Soil treatment (per 1000 hectare) 3.194 3.459 3.895 4.95
2.4i Number of Soil card distributed
2.4j Number of farmers adopting the soil test practice 79678 203604 407208 882284
Adaptation 63.3 63.3 63.3 63.3
to climate 459917 1368975 2737950 5932225
change 459917 1368975 2737950 5932225
Target 2.5 By 2020, maintain the genetic diversity of seeds, cultivated plants and
farmed and domesticated animals and their related wild species, including
through soundly managed and diversified seed and plant banks at the
national, regional and international levels, and ensure access to and fair and
equitable sharing of benefits arising from the utilization of genetic resources
and associated traditional knowledge, as internationally agreed
Genetic 2.5a Establish DNA bank for variety of seeds Seed bank
Diversification 2.5b Establish DNA bank for variety of plants Uttarakhand
of Seeds(GDS) 2.5c Establish DNA bank for variety of animal species Seeds and Terai
2.5d Number of farmers using traditional knowledge for Development
agriculture production Corporation
Traditional 2.5e Number of traditional practices for farming has long term
knowledge 2.5f Number of KVKs objective of 15%
association for 2.5g Number of capacity building programme to transform the annual average
GDS process traditional practices for Genetic Diversified Process growth rate
2.5h Number of farmers trained for such programmes (as in 2.5g)
Note:
*Average value for 3 years; ** Average value for 7 years; *** Average value for 13 years ^ The value is for 2014-15, as per State Government and this area is slated to increase
successively to 50 thousand hectares in 2015-16, and to 75 thousand hectares by 2016-17.
ANNEXURE 3
SDG 3: Ensure healthy lives and
promote well-being for all at all ages
Source / Notes 2016-17 Base- 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 3.1 By 2030, reduce global MMR to <70 per 100,000 live births
MMR (per 100,000 live births) AHS 2012-13 165 141 94 70/1,00,000
live birth
Target 3.2 By 2030, end preventable deaths of new-borns and children under 5 years of
age
3.2a1 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Total) 40 36 29 25 / 1,000
3.2a2 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Rural) 39 36 29 25 / 1000
3.2a3 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Urban) 44 39 30 25/1000
3.2b1 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Total) 47 42 31 25 / 1000
3.2b2 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Rural) 46 41 30 25 / 1000
3.2b3 Under-five mortality rate (per 1,000 live births) (Urban) 49 43 31 25 / 1000
3.2c Immunization of children (fully immunized) (%) 79.6 85 95 >95
Target 3.3 By 2030, end the epidemics of AIDS, tuberculosis, malaria and neglected
tropical diseases, and combat hepatitis, water-borne diseases and other com-
municable diseases
3.3a Prevalence of HIV and AIDS across different types of high-risk 0.11 0.08 0.03 0
categories.
3.3b Prevalence of tuberculosis (TB) per 100,000 population 145 118 73 29
20% 50% 80%
reduction reduction (reduction)
3.3c Confirmed malaria cases (number) NVBDCP/ 914 500 Near to elimi- Near to elimi-
State Govern- nation nation
ment
3.3d1 Registered prevalence rate (per 10,000 of pop) for leprosy 0.24 0.19 0.12 Near to elimi-
nation
3.3d2 Kala-azar (visceral leishmaniasis) cases (number) 2 0 0 0
3.3d3 Average prevalence of lymphatic filariasis (%) NVBDCP/ 0 0 0 0
State Govt
3.3d4 Cases of dengue (number) NVBDCP/ 2046
State Govt
3.3d5 People die annually due to Japanese encephalitis (number) 0 0 0 0
ANNEXURES | 303

line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
3.3e1 Confirmed cases of hepatitis A (number) 10677 9609 8648 7783
3.3e2 Confirmed cases of hepatitis B (number) 254 229 206 185
3.3f1 Annual incidence of diarrhoea (per 1,000) 10.3 9.27 8.34 7.51
3.3g1 Confirmed cases of influenza (H1N1) (number) IDSP/state 20
govt
Target 3.4 By 2030, reduce by one third premature mortality from non-communicable
diseases (NCDs) through prevention and treatment and promote mental
health and well being
3.4a1 Mortality rate attributed to cardiovascular disease, cancer, diabetes GBD 2014 48% 42% 35% 16%
or chronic respiratory disease
3.4b By 2030,reduce by one third premature mortality from non-commu- - - - -
nicable diseases through prevention & treatment
3.4b1 People (aged 15–69 years) with raised total cholesterol (%) ICMR 13.9% 11% 8% 4.5%
INDIAB
3.4b2 People (aged 15–69 years) with raised blood pressure (%) NFHS 26.8% 21% 16% 9%
2015-16
3.4c By 2030,promote mental health and well being - - - -
3.4c1 Mental health problems (%) - 10% Reduction 15% Reduction 30% Reduction
3.4c2 Suicide rate (per 100,000 population) - - - -
Target 3.5 Strengthen the prevention and treatment of substance abuse, including
narcotic drug abuse and harmful use of alcohol
3.5a Hard drug users (estimated number) Raman Devel- 3000 2500 2050 1500
opment agency
3.5b Drugs users( estimated number) selected by
NACO for
IDUs.
(2007)
Target 3.6 By 2020, halve the number of global deaths and injuries from road traffic Transport Road Accident Road Accident Road Accident Road Accident
accidents Commissioner, -1342, Death- -671, Death- -336, Death- -168, Death-
3.6a Number of death from road accident Uttarakhand 801, Injuries 400, Injuries 200, Injuries 100, Injuries
3.6b Number of injuries from road accident Letter No – 1497, (Jan to – 748, – 370, – 175,
3.6c Number of IEC activities (awareness programme) in the schools -NH- 466/Ent/ Oct)
3.6d Number of schools covered under the awareness programme Rs/1-8(3)/2017
3.6e Number of schools covered coming under the major highway(IEC) dated 31
Jan.2017

line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 3.7 By 2030, ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive health-care
services, including for family planning, information and education, and the
integration of reproductive health into national strategies and programmes
3.7a Contraceptive prevalence rate (modern methods) (%)
3.7a1 Current Use of Modern Family Planning Methods (currently married NFHS 2015-16 49.3 52.87 58.82 65.96
women age 15–49 years) (Total)
37a2 Current Use of Modern Family Planning Methods (currently married 49.8 53.37 59.32 66.46
women age 15–49 years) (Rural)
3.7a3 Current Use of Modern Family Planning Methods (currently married 48.4 51.97 57.92 65.06
women age 15–49 years) (Urban)
3.7b Antenatal care (ANC) coverage (at least four visits) (%)
3.7b1 Mothers who had at least 4 antenatal care visits (%) (Total) 30.9 48 83 100
3.7b2 Mothers who had at least 4 antenatal care visits (%) (Rural) 25.7 44 81 100
3.7b3 Mothers who had at least 4 antenatal care visits (%) (Urban) 41.2 56 85 100
3.7c Institutional Delivery (%)
3.7c1 Institutional delivery (%) (Total) 68.6 76 92 100
3.7c2 Institutional delivery (%) (Rural) 63.7 73 91 100
3.7c3 Institutional delivery (%) (Urban) 79.1 84 95 100
3.7d Postnatal Care (PNC) for mothers (%)
3.7d1 Mothers who received postnatal care from a doctor/nurse/LHV/ 54.8 66 89 100
ANM/midwife/other health personnel within 2 days of delivery (%)
(Total)
(Rural)
(Urban)
3.7e Total Fertility Rate (TFR) (births per women)
3.7e1 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Total) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
3.7e2 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Rural) 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.1
3.7e3 Total fertility rate (TFR) (births per women) (Urban) 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1
Target 3.8 Achieve universal health coverage, including financial risk protection, access
to quality essential health-care services and access to safe, effective, quality
and affordable essential medicines and vaccines for all
ANNEXURES | 305

line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
3.8a Government health expenditure as % of GSDP
3.8b Shortage of doctors at PHCs 55.78% 0
3.8c Shortage of obstetricians and gynaecologists 91% 0
3.8d Shortage in No. of functioning PHCs 94 0
3.8e Shortage in no. of ANMs 0 0
3.8f No. of doctors per lakh population - 13.91 14.19 (2% 23.58 (5% 27.15
Increase) Increase) (7% Increase)
3.8g No. of paramedicals per lakh population ( hills and plains) - 38.57 39.34 40.50 41.27
(2% Increase) (5% Increase) (7% Increase)
3.8h No. of hospitals beds per lakh population - 1032 1270 1508 1750
3.8i No. of PHC per lakh population - 2.58 3.08 3.58 4.00
3.8j No. of maternity & child care centre per lakh population - 18.97 21.47 23.97 26.50
3.8k No. of other health centre per lakh population ( hills and plains) - 3.44 5.62 7.80 10.00
3.8l Number of Persons covered under Health Insurance(R) MSBY data 2428275 2940000 3198542 3538978
3.8m Number of Persons covered under Health Insurance(U) MSBY data 3353350 4060000 4417035 4887160
3.8n Number of Persons covered under Health Insurance(T) MSBY data 5781625 7000000 7615577 8426138
3.9 By 2030, substantially reduce the number of deaths and illnesses

from hazardous chemicals and air, water and soil pollution and
contamination
Illness
3.9A Number of illness from hazardous chemical
3.9b Number of illness from hazardous air
3.9c Number of illness from water and soil and contamination
Deaths
3.9d Number of deaths from hazardous chemical
3.9e Number of deaths from hazardous air
3.9f Number of deaths from water and soil and contamination
ANNEXURE 4
SDG 4: Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education

and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 4.1 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys complete free, equitable and quality
primary and secondary education leading to relevant and effective learning
outcomes
All girls and boys complete free, equitable primary and secondary education
4.1a Net enrolment rate in primary education (%) 89.18 90 95 100
4.1b Net enrolment rate in upper primary education (%) 71.00 76 85 100
4.1c Primary cycle retention rate (%) 86.15 90 95 100
4.1d Upper primary cycle retention rate (%) 98.62 99 100 100
4.1e Primary level completion rate (%) 100 100 100 100
4.1f Upper primary level completion rate (%) 96.76 100 100 100
4.1g Net enrolment rate in secondary education (%) 2015-16 51.28 58 66 80
Quality primary and secondary education

4.1h Trained teachers in total number of teachers for primary education (%) 95.00 100 100 100
4.1i Trained teachers in total number of teachers for upper primary education (%) 100.00 100 100 100
4.1j School with access to basic drinking water facilities—Primary (%) 98.2 100 100 100
4.1k School with access to basic drinking water facilities—Upper Primary (%) 94.5 100 100 100
4.1l School with access to basic toilet facilities—Primary (%) 97.0 100 100 100
4.1m School with access to basic toilet facilities—Upper Primary (%) 96.0 100 100 100
4.1n School with access to basic electricity facilities—Primary (%) 73.2 80 100 100
4.1o School with access to basic electricity facilities—Upper Primary (%) 82.5 85 100 100
4.1p School with ramp and material for students with disability—Primary (%) 66.1 75 90 100
4.1q School with ramp and material for students with disability —Upper Primary (%) 59.5 65 90 100
Effective learning outcomes
4.1r Learning score (reading) at the end of Primary (Class 5) (%) 61.18 65 80 95
4.1s Learning score (math) at the end of Primary (Class 5) (%) 61.69 65 80 95
4.1t Learning score (reading) for end of Lower secondary (class 8) (%) 62.39 65 80 95
ANNEXURES | 307

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
4.1u Learning score (math) for end of Lower secondary (class 8) (%) 34.35 40 65 90
Dropouts
4.1v Drop-out at primary level (%) 3.16 2 0 0
4.1w Drop-out at upper primary level (%) 1.69 1 0 0
4.1x Drop-out at secondary level (%) 12.65 9.65 5.65 0
Target 4.2 By 2030, ensure that all girls and boys have access to quality early childhood
development, care and pre-primary education so that they are ready for primary
education
4.2a Enrolment (number) in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (hills) ICDS/ 286546
MWCD
4.2b Enrolment per AWC in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (hills) 8 Increase by
10%
4.2c Enrolment (number) in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (plains) 100183
4.2d Enrolment per AWC in pre-school education among 3-5+ year olds (plains) 14
Target 4.3 By 2030, ensure equal access for all women and men to affordable and quality
technical, vocational and tertiary education, including university
4.3a Share of diploma seats for women (% of total) 30 30 32 40
4.3b Number of diploma seats for women 6200 6500 7500 20000
4.3c Ratio of boys enrolment in technical and vocational education
4.3d GER at Higher Education 33.9 42 50 60

4.3e NER at Higher Education NA 38 47 58
4.3f Pupil Teacher Ratio at Higher Education 142:1 120:1 70:1 20:1
Target 4.4 By 2030, increase by 75 percent the number of youth and adults who have
relevant skills, including technical and vocational skills, for employment, decent
jobs and entrepreneurship
4.4a Number of students taking technical education in polytechnics (000) 20.604 21.664 24 50
4.4b Present skill training capacity (000) (State Skill Development Mission) 44 79.199 151.92
4.4c Number of polytechnics 131 150 170 200
4.4d Number of polytechnics in backward/rural areas 34 17 AICTE 5 new 50
unapproved institutions will
institutions will be opened
be approved

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
4.4e Students/teachers ratio in technical education 20:1 384 new New 500 10:1
teaching posts teaching posts
4.4f Entrepreneurship (no. of EDPs) in Higher Education 20 25 30 40
4.4g Employability ratio 40 45 50 60
Target 4.5 By 2030, eliminate gender disparities in education and ensure equal access to all
levels of education and vocational training for the vulnerable, including persons
with disabilities, indigenous peoples and children in vulnerable situations
4.5a Gender Parity Index (primary school) 0.89 0.92 0.95 1.00
4.5b Gender Parity Index (secondary school) 0.92 0.93 0.97 1.00
4.5c Gender Parity Index (higher Education) 0.94 1.04 1.24 1.44
Target 4.6 By 2030, ensure that all youth and at least 95 percent of adults, both men and
women, achieve literacy and numeracy
4.6a Literacy rate of youth (15-29 years )(%) 94.8 100.0
4.6b Literacy rate of youth ( 15-29 years) (women) (%) 93.6 100.0
4.6c Numeracy all (15 years and older) (%)
4.6d Numeracy female (15 years and older) (%)
Target 4.7 By 2030, ensure that all learners acquire the knowledge and skills needed to
promote sustainable development, including, among others, through education
for sustainable development and sustainable lifestyles, human rights, gender
equality, promotion of a culture of peace and non-violence, global citizenship and
appreciation of cultural diversity and of culture’s contribution to sustainable
development
IEC , 4.7a Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on SDGs
Education 4.7b Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on Human Rights
and 4.7c Number of seminars/workshops/trainings on Gender Equality
Awareness
4.7d N
umber of programmes for promotion of culture of peace & non-
on SDGs
violence
4.7e Number of programmes for cultural diversity
ANNEXURES | 309
ANNEXURE 5
SDG 5: Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Source/ 2016-17 Base line 2017-18 to 2019- 2017-18 to 2023- 2017-18 to 2030-
Notes 2020 24 31
Target 5.1End all forms of discrimination against all women and girls
everywhere
5.1a Ratio of girls to boys in primary level education 0.89 0.92 0.95 1
5.1b Ratio of girls to boys in secondary level education 0.92 0.93 0.97 1.00
5.1c Ratio of literate women (15-24 years) to literate men (15-24 years) 1.00
5.1d Share of women workers in the non-agricultural sector (%) NSS 2011-12 16.8 50
(All ages) UPS
5.1e. Ratio of women to men wage in casual farm work
5.1f. Ratio of women's to men's wage in casual non-farm work
Target 5.2 Eliminate all forms of violence against all women and girls in the public
and private spheres, including trafficking and sexual and other types of
exploitation
5.2a1 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) NFHS-4 (2015- 888 1000
16)
5.2a2 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) (Rural) NFHS-4 (2015- 924 1000
16)
5.2a3 Sex ratio at birth (female to male) (Urban) NFHS-4 (2015- 817 1000
16)
5.2b Women (15-49 years) who experience physical or sexual violence as State Women’s 1412
reported (number) Commission
(NFHS)
5.2c Violence against women reported 1st January 2016 to 30th November Police HQ 1896 <1,896
2016
5.2d Ever married women who have experienced spousal violence (15-49 NFHS-4 12.7 <12.7
years) (%) (2015-16)
Target 5.3 Eliminate all harmful practices, such as child, early and forced
marriage and female genital mutilation
5.3a Women aged <18 years who are married or in union (%)* As reported by Negligible 0
State WC incidence

Notes 2020 24 31
Target 5.4 Recognize and value unpaid care and domestic work through the
provision of public services, infrastructure and social protection policies
and the promotion of shared responsibility within the household and
family as nationally appropriate
5.4a Share of women workers in non-agricultural sector (%) NSS 2011-12 16.8 50
(All ages) UPS
Unpaid care and domestic work
5.4b % of women engaged in collecting water/wood out in total women NSS 2011-2012 52.7 26
in domestic work
5.4c. Average hours spent per day by women in domestic and care
activities
Target 5.5 Ensure women’s full and effective participation and equal opportunities
for leadership at all levels of decision-making in political, economic and
public life
5.5a Seats held by women in Panchayat bodies (%) 50
5.5b Women in public service posts (%) 30 50
5.5c Share of women entrepreneurs (%) Sixth Economic 9.26 33
Census
5.5d Seats held by women in legislature (%)
Target 5.6 Ensure universal access to sexual and reproductive health and
reproductive rights as agreed in accordance with the Programme of
Action of the International Conference on Population and Development
and the Beijing Platform for Action and the outcome documents of its
review conferences
5.6. Awareness about reproductive rights among girls and women
(%)
* According to NFHS-4 data (2015-16), around 13.9% of women aged 20-24 years were married before 18 years of age
ANNEXURES | 311
ANNEXURE 6
SDG 6: Ensure availability and
sustainable management of water and sanitation for all

Notes 2020 24 31
Target 6.1 By 2030, achieve universal and equitable access to safe and
affordable drinking water for all
6.1a1 No. of Rural habitations covered by water supply of 40 lpcd (litres 21345 6074 11660 17864
per capita per day)*
6.1a2 N
o. of Urban ULBs covered by water supply of 135 lpcd (litres per 21 18 43 70
capita per day)*
6.1b Total rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) NRDWP 64.3 100
website 2014-15
6.1b1 SC dominated rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) Same as above 70.8 100
6.1b2 ST dominated rural habitations using safe drinking water (%) Same as above 100 100 100 100
6.1c Households with access to piped water supply** (number) Domestic water 582621 All households
connection as of
Oct 2016
6.1c1 Households with access to piped water supply (no.) (Rural) Same as above 279964 All households
6.1c2 Households with access to piped water supply (no.) Urban) Same as above 302657 All households
Target 6.2 By 2030, achieve access to adequate and equitable sanitation
and hygiene for all and end open defecation, paying special
attention to the needs of women and girls and those in
vulnerable situations
6.2a1 Households without latrines (%) Census 2011 34.2 0
6.2a2 Households without latrines (%) (Rural) Census 2011 45.9 0
6.2a3 Households without latrines (%) (Urban) Census 2011 6.4 0
6.2b Individual toilets and community toilets (number) State Govt 1540 $ 27640
6.2c Urban Local Bodies with partial sewerage (%) State Govt 28.6 100
Target 6.3 By 2030, improve water quality by reducing pollution,
eliminating dumping and minimizing hazardous chemicals
and materials, halving the proportion of untreated waste water
and increasing recycling and safe reuse

Notes 2020 24 31
6.3a Municipal Solid Waste processing (total) (%) under SBM^ Handbook of 0.5
Urban Statistics
2016, GoI
6.3b Municipal Solid Waste processing (Equivalent) (%) under SBM^ As above 5.07 100
6.3c No. of wards with 100% door to door collection and transportation State govt 431 703
of solid waste^^
6.3d Amount of hazardous waste generation (metric tonne per annum) Indiastat 55627 0
website; data
2012
6.3e Amount of bio-medical waste generation (kg/day) Indiastat 2257.41
website; data
2013
6.3f Quality affected habitations( Number)
Target 6.4 By 2030, substantially increase water-use efficiency across State 350 sustainability
all sectors and ensure sustainable withdrawals and supply of government structures have been
freshwater to address water scarcity and substantially reduce proposed for 2016-17
the number of people suffering from water scarcity
Sustainable 6.4a Water stress or withdrawal/Total available
withdrawal of water
water 6.4b Number of people suffering from water scarcity
Target 6.5 By 2030, implement integrated water resources management
at all levels, including through trans boundary cooperation as
appropriate
Target 6.6$ By 2020, protect and restore water-related ecosystems,
including mountains, forests, wetlands, rivers, aquifers and
lakes
ANNEXURES | 313

Notes 2020 24 31
6.6a afforestation( Hectare) On the basis 2110 7212 7632 14604
6.6b afforestation survival rate of actual 78%
achievement
6.6c Soil conservation work(Hectare) till 2016-17and 21450 28028 37880 60060
6.6d Number of water bodies(Total) target set in
Gram Panchayat
6.6e Afforestation for water bodies( Hectare) Included in 6.6a
Watershed
6.6f Afforestation survival rate for water bodies Development
6.6g Number of lakes Plan prepared
by the local
6.6h afforestation for lakes ( Hectare) Included in 6.6a
community
6.6i afforestation survival rate for lakes
6.6j Number of chal-khal ( pits and ponds) constructed 15312 36865 47586 114715
6.6k Area covered under pits and ponds (chal-khal) (Hectare) 168 404 522 1271
Note: *Refers to additional habitations to be covered for all years except baseline. **Source: State govt. Refers to Piped water into dwelling/yard/plot, public .tap/standpipe, tube well or borehole, protected dug
well or spring, rainwater, community RO plant.
^Data upto 4th September 2015 from Handbook of Urban Statistics 2016, GoI; ^^Data from Handbook of Urban Statistics GoI is 87
$ Note : The information is based on following assumptions.
6.6 a Afforestation (Hectare)- Actual for the year 2016-17 and target for the remaining period in GPWDP.
6.6 b Afforestation survival rate- Based on sample study.
6.6 c Soil Conservation work (Hectare)- 10% of the total area of non arable land within Microwatershed
6.6 j Number of Chal- Khal (Pits & Ponds) constructed- Actual for the year 2016-17 and target for the remaining period in GPWDP.
6.6 k Area covered under pits and ponds (Chal-Khal) (Hectare)- Calculated on the basis of area under Recharge Pit (1cum) 1sqm and area under Water pond (125 cum) 96 sqm.
$$ Achieved by 2018
ANNEXURE 7
SDG 7: Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all
Source/ 2016-17 Baseline 2017-18 to 2019- 2017-18 to 2023- 2017-18 to 2030-

Notes 2020 24 31
Target 7.1 By 2030, ensure universal access to affordable, reliable and modern
energy services
7.1a1 H
ouseholds using clean fuels (electricity, LPG/Natural gas, bio- NFHS-4 31.1
gas) for cooking (%) (Rural) (2015-16)
7.1a2 Households using clean fuels (electricity, LPG/Natural gas, bio- NFHS-4 86.6
gas) for cooking (%) (Urban) (2015-16)
7.1b1 Households with electricity (%) (Rural) UPCL 96.5 100.0 100.0 100.0
7.1b2 Households with electricity (%) (Urban) UPCL 99.4 100.0 100.0 100.0
7.1c Number of villages with electricity facility Revenue villages 15638 15745 15745 15745
(census) (100%) (100%) (100%)
7.1d Rural households (no.) using electricity for lighting UPCL 995573 1118191 1118191 1118191
(100%) (100%) (100%)
7.1e Total Installed capacity (MW)* UPCL 1290.10 151 438 1648
7.1f Electricity consumption (kWh per capita) 4.46% CGPA 1279 1587 1873 2153
(PFA document)
7.1f Households (%) using firewood as main cooking fuel
Target 7.2 By 2030, increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the
global energy mix
7.2a Renewable share of micro hydel in total energy demand (million UREDA 18 74 95 151
units)
7.2b Renewable share of Solar in total energy demand (million units) UREDA 70 351 409 601
7.2c Renewable share of others (co-gen, biomass, W2E) in total energy UREDA 284 821 922 1137
demand (million units)
7.2d Renewable share in total energy demand (million units) UREDA 371 1246 1426 1889
ANNEXURES | 315

Notes 2020 24 31
7.2e S
hare of renewable energy in total energy (final) consumption in 3.2 10.5 11.8 15.1
state (%)
Target 7.3 By 2030, double the global rate of improvement in energy efficiency
7.3a Transmission and Distribution loss (%) in state UPCL 18.63 14.00 12.00 9.00
7.3b Use of efficient lighting systems — LED for street light (%)
7.3c Energy Saving by Renewable sources (MW)
*The figures for 2019-20, 2023-24 and 2029-30 refer to increments over the baseline.
ANNEXURE 8
SDG 8: Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full

and productive employment and decent work for all
Source/ 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes NSS baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
All ages
Target Sustain per capita economic growth in accordance with national
8.1 circumstances and, in particular, at least 7 percent gross domestic
product growth per annum in the least developed countries
8.1b Per capita GSDP growth (%) 2011-12 to 7.1 >7.1

2017-18
average
8.1a Share of bottom quintile in total consumption (%) 9.7 >9.7
Target Achieve higher levels of economic productivity through
8.2 diversification, technological upgrading and innovation,
including through a focus on high-value-added and labour-
intensive sectors
8.2a Growth of agricultural sector (%) 2011-12 to 1.4% >1.4%
2017-18
average
8.2b Growth of construction sector (%) 2011-12 to 7.7% Maintain
2017-18 the growth
average rate
8.2c Growth of manufacturing sector (%) 2011-12 to 7.3% >7.3%
2017-18
average
8.2d. Labour productivity of agriculture sector Rs. 93,439 > Rs. 93,439
8.2e. Labour productivity of non-agriculture sector Rs. 359,542
8.2f. Labour productivity of construction sector Rs. 198,343 > Rs.
198,343
8.2g. Labour productivity of manufacturing sector Rs. Maintain
1,310,968
ANNEXURES | 317

Source/ 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
All ages
Target Promote development-oriented policies that support productive
8.3 activities, decent job creation, entrepreneurship, creativity and
innovation, and encourage the formalization and growth of
micro-, small- and medium-sized enterprises, including through
access to financial services
8.3a: Share (%) of workforce in non-agriculture 56% >56%
8.3b: Share (%) of regular employment 19.9% >19.9%
8.3c: Share (%) of formal employment 10.5% >10.5%

8.3d: Share (%) of Regular Workers in (Public/Government Sector) 44.6%
8.3e: MSME (numbers) 53 thousand
8.3f: MSME (employment) 2.5 lakhs
Target Improve progressively, through 2030, global resource efficiency
8.4 in consumption and production and endeavour to decouple
economic growth from environmental degradation, in accordance
with the 10-yearframework of programmes on sustainable
consumption and production, with developed countries taking
the lead
Target By 2030, achieve full and productive employment and decent
8.5 work for all women and men, including for young people and
persons with disabilities, and equal pay for work of equal value
Full Employment
8.5a: Unemployment (15-59 years) (%) 4.2% >4.2%
8.5b: Underemployment rate (15-59 years) (%) 5.0% >5.0%
8.5c: Share (%) of women employment (15-59 years) in total 26.8% >26.8%
8.5d: Share (%) of women workers (15-59 years) in non-farm 18.5% >18.5%
8.5 e: Share(%) of women workers in regular work (UPS) 12.8% >12.8%

Target By 2020, substantially reduce the proportion of youth not in
8.6 employment, education or training

Source/ 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
All ages
8.6a: Youth unemployment (15-29 years) rate (%) 14.3% <14.3%
8.6b: Unemployment per cent for high educated youth (secondary 17.2% <17.2%
and above)
8.6c: Youth (15-29 years) underemployment rate (%) 7.0% <7.0%
8.6d: Share (%) of youth (15-29 years) not in education, training or 24% <24%
employment.
8.6e: Number of youth trained in vocational trades (Youth Welfare 429#
and PRD Department)
8.6f: Average daily earnings male (regular work) Rs 453 >Rs 453
8.6g: Average daily earnings female(regular work) Rs 420 >Rs 420
Target 8.7 Take immediate and effective measures to secure the
prohibition and elimination of the worst forms of child
labour, eradicate forced labour and, by 2025, end child
Child Labour
labour in all its forms, including the recruitment and
use of child soldiers
8.7a Incidence of child labour (%) (UPS) 1.0 0
Target 8.8 Protect labour rights and promote safe and secure
working environments for all workers, including
migrant workers, in particular women migrants, and
those in precarious employment
Safe and Secure 8.8a Number of migrant workers
Working
environment
Reduce informal employment and enhance regular/
secure employment
Target 8.9 By 2030, devise and implement policies to promote
sustainable tourism that creates jobs and promotes
local culture and products
8.9a1 Tourist arrivals (lakh) 2016 317.77
8.9a2 Tourist arrivals (domestic) (lakh) 2016 316.69 3 times
8.9a3 Tourist arrivals (foreign) (lakh) 2016 1.13 3 times
8.9b1 Increase in tourists to lesser known unexplored destinations 19% 33%
ANNEXURES | 319

Source/ 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
All ages
8.9b2 Religious tourist destinations (in % of existing tourist 70 68 65 60
destinations)
8.9b3 Registration of Hotels (under TT) (in % of existing hotels) 875 no.s 50 100
8.9b4 Registration of TA/TOs** (under TT) (in % of existing hotels) 172 no.s 50 100
8.9c1 Accreditation (under SRT norms) for Hotels (in % of total 0 5 15 25
number of hotels)
8.9c2 Accreditation (under SRT norms) for TA/TOs (in % of total 0 5 15 25
number of hotels)
8.9c1 Accreditation (under SRT norms) for Dhabas, eateries and other 0 5 15 25
tourism units (in % of total number of hotels)
8.9d1 Recognition of Prior learners and other capacity development 0 5000 10000 20000
measures for mountain and destination guides (Paryatan Mitra),
dhaba owners, porters, cooks, waiters, drivers, etc.
8.9d2 Registration of new entrants for mountain and destination guides 330 2000 5000 10000
(Paryatan Mitra), bird watching guides, dhaba owners, porters,
cooks, waiters, drivers, etc.
8.9d3 Registration of existing homestays (%) NA 30 70 100
8.9d4 Development of new homestays (no.) 256 250 500 1000
8.9e No. of Gram Panchayats to be developed for rural tourism 73 100 200 500
8.9f Development of 13 new destinations in 13 new districts 0 13
8.9g Tourism development authority/destination management 2 5 10 25
committees
8.9h1 Infrastructure--Toilet complexes only (no. of seats) 192 (1949) 263 353 445
(2344) (2876) (3406)
8.9h2 Infrastructure-- Wayside amenities complexes 0 5 10 25
8.9h3 Infrastructure--Parking 4 10 25 50
8.9h4 Infrastructure—Solid and Liquid Waste management in Tourist 0 10 25 50
destination
8.9i Development of trekking/mountaineering routes /mountain 32 50 100 200
trail biking or MTBs) routes (new)
8.9j Safety and security—Tourist tracking (% of total tourists) 0 50 80 100
8.9k Tourism share in GSDP(%)

Source/ 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
All ages
8.9l Expenditure on tourism sector over total expenditure(%)
8.9m Total allocation on tourism against the budget(%)
8.9n Total job creation in tourism sector(% of total job created)
Target 8.10 Strengthen the capacity of domestic financial
Banking/Financial institutions to encourage and expand access to
Institutions Status banking, insurance and financial services for all
8.10a No. of commercial bank branches per 100000 population
8.10b No. of co-operative bank branches per 100000 population
8.10c ATMs per 100000 population
8.10d Number of accounts
8.10e Number of accounts opened in PMJDY
8.10f. Households (%) having bank account
Insurance Status
8.10f. Households (%) having any health insurance cover
8.10g. Households (%) having life insurance cover
** TA is Travel Agent and TO stands for Tour Operator
# Figure is for 2015-16
Note: Hotspots are famous tourist destinations. Sustainable destinations are those where an effective organization exists to manage and protect tourism assets.
ANNEXURES | 321
ANNEXURE 9
SDG 9: Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive

and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation

Source/ 2016-17 Base 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 9.1 Develop quality, reliable, sustainable and resilient
Physical and Communication infrastructure, including regional and trans border
Connectivity infrastructure, to support economic development and
human well-being, with a focus on affordable and
equitable access for all
9.1a Road length per lakh population (km) 322.93 357.63 407.21 461.29
9.1b Access to all-weather roads (% villages) 67.665 76.97 87.98 100.00
9.1c Telephone connections by (incl WLL) BSNL only 2014-15 168630
9.1d Mobile connectivity in villages (%) 55 70 100 Uncovered
areas along
state highways
9.1e Internet connectivity to all Gram Panchayats (% of villages) 10 30 70 100
9.1f Households (%) with internet connectivity (fixed or mobile)
Target 9.2 Promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and, by
2030, significantly raise industry’s share of employment and
gross domestic product, in line with national circumstances,
and double its share in least developed countries
Increasing industrial share in gross state domestic product
9.2a Industry share in GSDP (%) 2014-15 quick 48.36
estimate State
Economic
survey
Increasing industrial share in employment
9.2b Share (%) of industry/manufacturing in employment
9.2c Employment generation in the MSME sector (number) 258000 320,000 460,000 850,000
9.2d Employment generation in large industry (number)** 168718 184363 248438 444123
9.3e Number of MSMEs 53000 68,000 94,000 170,000

Notes line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
9.3f Capital investment in MSMEs (Rs crore) 10,960 14,000 18,000 36,000
9.3g Number of heavy industries** 1,828 1998 2,618 4510
9.3h Capital investment in large industries (Rs cr)** 21,826 23155 30351 53769
Target 9.3 Increase the access of small-scale industrial and other
enterprises, in particular in developing countries, to financial
services, including affordable credit, and their integration
into value chains and markets
Financial Inclusion in SSI 9.3a CD ratio wrt SSIs
& other Enterprises 9.3b Households (%) with bank accounts (lakh) 62.71
9.3c % of SSIs have taken loan from Financial
Institutions
Value chain and Markets 9.3d. % of SSIs are part of value chains
9.3e SSIs share in markets (%)
9.3f % of SSIs covered under any type of market
Target 9.4 By 2030, upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to
make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency
and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound
technologies and industrial processes, with all countries
taking action in accordance with their respective capabilities
9.4a Number of industrial areas with adequate infrastructure
9.4b Number of industries getting facilities under single window system

Target 9.5 Enhance scientific research, upgrade the technological
capabilities of industrial sectors in all countries, in particular
developing countries, including, by 2030, encouraging
innovation and increasing the number of research and
development workers per 1 million people and public and
private research and development spending
9.5a Mapping of soil map by USAC NA 1:50 1:10 1:4k
9.5b Mapping of waste water sources and sewage NA 5 50 60
by USAC in towns
ANNEXURES | 323

Notes line 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
9.5c GIS based city information system developed by 1 2 10 20
USAC in towns
9.5d R&D investment over GSDP
9.5e Number of researchers over total population
9.5f Number of researcher enrolled (% increase)
9.5g Number of research and innovations (%
increase)
*TRAI does not provide separate data for Uttarakhand
**The data pertain to State Infrastructure & Industrial Development Corporation of Uttarakhand Limited (SIIDCUL)
ANNEXURE 10
SDG 10: Reduce inequality within and among countries

Source/ NSS 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes All ages baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 10.1 By 2030, progressively achieve and sustain income growth of the bottom
40% of the population at arate higher than the national average
10.1a Consumption inequality (measured by Gini coefficient) 0.35 Reduce/ Reduce/ Reduce/
Arrest at Arrest at Arrest at
present level present level present level
10.1b Share of bottom 40% of population in total consumption (%) 23.0 Improve the share to above 23% based
on their income growing at rates above
7% p.a. and at above 10% by 2030
10.1c Palma ratio (Ratio of share of richest 10% in total consumption/ share of 1.8 Reduce the Palma ratio to at least or
poorest 40% in total consumption) below 1.5
Target 10.2 By 2030, empower and promote the social, economic and political inclusion
of all, irrespective of age, sex, disability, race, ethnicity, origin, religion or
economic or other status
10.2a Ratio of male and female at panchayat level
10.2b Ratio of male and female in the state assembly
10.2c. Ratio of SC population and their representation in local panchayat
10.2d. Ratio of SC population and their representation in state assembly
10.2e. Ratio of male and female at government jobs
10.2f. Ratio of SC population and their representation in govt jobs
Target 10.3 Ensure equal opportunities and reduce inequalities of outcome, including
by eliminating discriminatory laws, policies and practices and promoting
appropriate legislation, policies and action in this regard
10.3a Ratio of per capita income of district with highest value to that of district State Govt 2.05 Reduce from present level
with lowest per capita income value 2013-14
10.3b Ratio of households (%) living in ‘good’* houses in urban areas to those Census 2011 1.17 1
in rural areas
10.3c Ratio of all households (%) with access to tap-water from treated sources Census 2011 1.58 1
in urban areas to those in rural areas
ANNEXURES | 325

Source/ NSS 2011-12 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes All ages baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
10.3d Ratio of share of all households (%) to share of SC households (%) with Census 2011 1.17 1
access to tap-water from treated sources
10.3e Ratio of share of all households (%) to share of ST households (%) with Census 2011 1.25 1
access to tap-water from treated sources
10.3f Slum households (%) with access to tap-water from treated sources Census 2011 68.3 100
10.3g Slum households (%) with access to closed drainage for waste water Census 2011 29.8 100
outlet
10.3h Poverty ratio (rural vs urban) 1.11
Target 10.4 Adopt policies, especially fiscal, wage and social protection policies, and
progressively achieve greater equality
10.4a Growth of real wages

Target 10.5 Improve the regulation and monitoring of global financial markets and
institutions and strengthen the implementation of such regulations
Target 10.6 Ensure enhanced representation and voice for developing countries
in decision-making in global international economic and financial
institutions in order to deliver more effective, credible, accountable and
legitimate institutions
Target 10.7 Facilitate orderly, safe, regular and responsible migration and mobility
of people, including through the implementation of planned and well-
managed migration policies
*’Good’ refers to census 2011 categorization of housing.
ANNEXURE 11
SDG 11: Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 11.1 By 2030, ensure access for all to adequate, safe and affordable housing and
basic services and upgrade slums
11.1a Percentage of Slum Households to Total Urban Households Census 2011 40 30 20 10
11.1b Percentage of Slums Denotified Department of Urban 35 45 60 80
Development
11.1c Percentage of Slum Households covered by Low-cost Housing Programmes Department of Urban 25 40 70 90
Development
11.1d Percentage of Slum Households living in Pucca Houses Census 2011 35 45 65 85
11.1e. Percentage of Shelter Capacity to Shelter less Population AMRUT Report 0.8 15 30 50
Target 11.2 By 2030, provide access to safe, affordable, accessible and sustainable transport
systems for all, improving road safety, notably by expanding public transport,
with special attention to the needs of those in vulnerable situations, women,
children, persons with disabilities and older persons
Sustainable 11.2a Geographical Coverage of Public Transport Departmnt of 10 20 50 70
Transport Transport
System
11.2b Per-capita Availability of Public Transport Departmnt of NA As per
Transport national
norm
11.2c Percentage of Road Network with Dedicated Bicycle Tracks Departmnt of NA
Transport
11.2d Availability of Passenger Information System Departmnt of NA

Transport
11.2e Availability of Traffic Surveillance System Departmnt of NA

Transport
11.2f P
ercentage of Traffic Intersections with Pedestrian Crossing Departmnt of NA
Facilities Transport
11.2g Percentage of Disabled-friendly Transport, eg. Low-floor Buses Departmnt of NA

Transport
ANNEXURES | 327

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 11.3 By 2030, enhance inclusive and sustainable urbanization and capacity for
participatory, integrated and sustainable human settlement planning and
management in all countries
Sustainable 11.3a Land Notifications as per Master Plan (%) Town & Country 30 100 100 100
Urbanization Planning Department
& Human 11.3b Number of Building Plans sanctioned as per Planning Control Town & Country NA 100% 100% 100%
settlement Planning Department
11.3c Number of Active Ward Committees in the ULBs Department of Urban NA 100% 100% 100%
Development
11.3d Percentage of Women Councillors in the ULBs Department of Urban 10 35 45 50
Development
11.3e Number of waste disposal plants in each ULBs Urban Development 250 470 650 800
Agency
11.3f Percentage of Consumer Grievance Addressed in each ULBs Urban Development 25 50 75 100
Agency
Target 11.4 Strengthen efforts to protect and safeguard the world’s cultural and natural
heritage
Target 11.5 By 2030, significantly reduce the number of deaths and the number of people This target has been covered under SDG 1
affected and decrease by 100 percent the economic losses relative to gross
domestic product caused by disasters, including water-related disasters, with a
focus on protecting the poor and people in vulnerable situations
Target 11.6 By 2030, reduce the adverse per capita environmental impact of cities,
including by paying special attention to air quality and municipal and other
waste management
Air Pollution 11.6a Percentage Reduction in the Level of Air Pollution Pollution Control 20 30 45 70
Department
11.6a1 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Dehradun Clock 2016; Uttarakhand 180.05
Tower Environment
Protection & Pollution
Control Board website.
Annual averages
11.6a2 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Dehradun ISBT Standard value 60 288.12

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
11.6a3 Concentration of particulate matter (PM 10) Haridwar 127.88
SIDCUL
11.6b1 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Dehradun Clock Tower Standard value 50 25.07
11.6b2 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Dehradun ISBT 27.10
11.6b3 Concentration of sulphur dioxide Haridwar SIDCUL 24.96
11.6c1 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Dehradun Clock Tower Standard value 40 28.66
11.6c2 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Dehradun ISBT 30.05
11.6c3 Concentration of nitrogen dioxide Haridwar SIDCUL 27.78
11.6d Concentration of carbon monoxide
11.6e Concentration of lead
11.6f Concentration of ozone
Solid Waste 11.6g Municipal Solid Waste processing (total) (%) under SBM Data upto 4th 0.5
&Drainage September 2015 from
Handbook of Urban
Statistics 2016, GoI
11.6h Municipal Solid Waste processing (Equivalent) (%) under SBM As above 5.07
11.6i No. of wards with 100% door to door collection and State government* 431
transportation of solid waste
11.6j Households connected to sewerage (%)
11.6k Households in slums connected to sewerage (%)
11.6l Percentage of solid waste treated
11.6m Percentage of waste water treated
11.6n Hospitals disposing bio-medical waste safely (number) UEPCB website 708
11.6n Percentage of Garbage Collected and Transported to Garbage Department of Urban 5.07 50 75 100
Generated Development
11.6o Percentage of Sewage treated to Sewage Generated Department of Urban NA 30 50 70
Development
11.6p Percentage Households connected to Drainage System Department of Urban NA 30 50 70
Development
ANNEXURES | 329

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
11.6q Percentage of Waste Water Treated to Generated Department of Urban 30 50 70 90
Development
11.6r Number of Wards with 100% Waste Collection and Department of Urban 431 300 out of 500 out of 700 out of
Transportation (Total wards 700)* Development 700 700 700
11.6s Percentage of Households having 24/7 Access to Potable, Safe Department of Urban 50 60 75 100
Drinking Water within Premises Development
11.6t Percentage of Households having 24/7 Access to Electricity Department of Urban 55 65 75 100
within Premises Development
11.6u Percentage Reduction in the Level of Noise Pollution Pollution Control NA 30 50 70
Department
Target 11.7 By 2030, provide universal access to safe, inclusive and accessible, green
and public spaces, in particular for women and children, older persons and
persons with disabilities
11.7a Per-capita Availability of Green Space As per
NA National
Norm
11.7b Average Distance from accessing Public Space NA As per
National
Norm
11.7c Average Distance from accessing Recreational Facilities NA As per
National
Norm
11.7d Built up area over public space
Note: * the data for same indicator from 2016 Handbook of Urban Statistics GoI is 87
ANNEXURE 12
SDG 12: Ensure Sustainable consumption and production patterns

2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 12.1 Implement the 10-year framework of programmes on sustainable Source/
consumption and production, all countries taking action, with developed Notes
countries taking the lead, taking into account the development and
capabilities of developing countries
Target 12.2 By 2030, achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of
natural resources
12.2a Bio-fertilizers in agricultural production (kg/Ha) 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
12.2b Use of fossil fuel energy consumption (% of total)
12.2c Share of firewood in total energy mix (%)
12.2d Total carbon sink (MT) in forest area 537.02* Baseline level
should be
increased
Target 12.3 By 2030, halve per capita global food waste at the retail and consumer
levels and reduce food losses along production and supply chains,
including post-harvest losses
12.3a Post harvest loss fruits and vegetables (annual) as % of total production 4.58-15.88** Reduce to <2%
Target 12.4 By 2020, achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals
and all wastes throughout their life cycles, in accordance with agreed
international frameworks, and significantly reduce their release toair,
water and soil in order to minimize their adverse impacts on human
health and the environment
Sound 12.4.a Use of plastics (per capita in grams per day) 0
Management of 12.4 b Amount of hazardous waste generation (metric tonne per Indiastat 55627 0
Chemicals annum) website; data
2012
12.4.c Disposal of liquid industrial waste/generated (%)
12.4.d Disposal of solid industrial waste/generated(%)
Target 12.5 By 2030, substantially reduce waste generation through prevention,
reduction, recycling and reuse
ANNEXURES | 331

2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target 12.6 Encourage companies, especially large and transnational companies, to
adopt sustainable practices and to integrate sustainability information
into their reporting cycle
Target 12.7 Promote public procurement practices that are sustainable, in accordance
with national policies and priorities
Target 12.8 By 2030, ensure that people everywhere have the relevant information
and awareness for sustainable development and lifestyles in harmony
with nature
12.8a Population covered by awareness campaigns (%) 100%
*Estimate by Raj and Joshi (Uttarakhand State Perspective Strategic Plan 2009-27, Watershed Management Directorate, Uttarakhand), cited in Annual Plan 2013-14, Vol.I,
State Planning Commission, Govt of Uttarakhand. **Estimated at national level by ICAR-CIPHET for 2013-14
ANNEXURE 13
SDG 13: Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts

Source/ 2016-17 Baseline 2017-18 to 2019- 2017-18 to 2023-24 2017-18 to 2030-31
Notes 2020
Target 13.1 Strengthen resilience and adaptive capacity to climate-
related hazards and natural disasters in all countries
13.1.a Annual CO2 emissions (metric tonnes per capita)
13.1.b Consumption of ozone-depleting substance (ODS All ACs and Reduce 10% Reduce 20% 100% ACs and
tonnes) fridges with ODS ACs and fridges ACs and fridges Fridges without
without ODS without ODS ODS
13.1.c Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by transport sector No CNG/electric All new transport 25% transport All transport
(%) transport CNG/electric CNG/electric CNG/electric
13.1.d Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by industrial sector
(%)
13.1.e Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by commercial
sector (%)
13.1.d Greenhouse gases (GHG) emitted by agriculture sector Shift 10% Shift 25% Shift 50% cultivated
(%) cultivated area to cultivated area to area to Horticulture
Horticulture Horticulture
13.1.g GHG emission (in CH4) from agricultural sector (Gg)
13.1.h GHG emission (in N2O) from agricultural sector (Gg) All rice under 5% rice area under 25% rice area 80% rice area
flooding AWD* under AWD under AWD
13.1.i GHG emission (in CO2) from agricultural sector (Gg)
13.1.j G
HG emission (in CO2) from industrial sector (cement
and lime) (Gg)
13.1.k GHG emission (in CO2) from energy sector (industrial, 70% rural cooking Reduce rural Reduce rural Eliminate all rural
transport and other) (Gg) with wood cooking with cooking with cooking with
wood to 60% wood to 50% wood
13.1l A
rea growing drought-resistant and flood-resistant
crops (% of total)
13.1m Length of river with perennial flow of water (km)
13.1n Number of casualties due to disaster
ANNEXURES | 333

Source/ 2016-17 Baseline 2017-18 to 2019- 2017-18 to 2023-24 2017-18 to 2030-31
Notes 2020
13.1o Number of people affected due to disaster
Target 13.2 Integrate climate change measures into national State action Formulate ways of 30% of state 50% of state
policies, strategies and planning plan on climate integrating SAPCC budget linked to budget linked to
change (SAPCC) into state policies SAPCC SAPCC
formulated
Climate 13.2a Number of sectors prioritized under
change climate change action plan
action plan 13.2b Number of sectors covered under climate
change action plan
Target 13.3 Improve education, awareness-raising and human and
institutional capacity on climate change mitigation,
adaptation, impact reduction and early warning
Education, 13.3a Proportion of population covered by (a) Introduce Increase High Increase College
Awareness climate change education (%) climate School enrolment enrolment to 30%
and IEC awareness into to 100% of High School
schools graduates
100% connectivity
(b) Broad-band of villages
connectivity
for mitigation
and
adaptation
13.3b Trained persons in climate change
mitigation (early warning etc.) (number)
13.3c Number of awareness program at State
level have integrated climate mitigation
and adaptation
13.3d Number of awareness program at sub-
state level which have integrated climate
mitigation and adaptation
*AWD is Alternate Wetting and Drying which is a water-saving technology
ANNEXURE 14
SDG 15: Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems,
sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, and halt and reverse
land degradation and halt biodiversity loss

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
Target By 2020, ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland
15.1 freshwater ecosystems and their services, in particular forests, wetlands, mountains and
dry lands, in line with obligations under international agreements
Conserva- 15.1a Total land area covered by dense forest against total forest cover(%) FSI 2015 34 34.5 35 35.5
tion and
15.1 b Total land area covered by bushes /scrub(%) FSI 2015 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006
Restoration
of Forest 15.1 c Forest under community based management (as% of total forest area) Forest Stats 2014-15 40% 40% 40% 40%
(Van Panchayat)
15.1d Conservation areas (including Forest)(in proportion to total land area) Forest Stats 2014-15 71% 71% 71% 71%
15.1 e Conservation of lakes, wetlands and ponds (No) - - - -
15.1 f a fforestation (ha)(Including all type of plantation departmental & 18251 48000 112000 224000
Mass planting)
15.1 g Soil &Water conservation works (Number) 45 1500 3500 7000
Conserva- 15.1 h Number of river and riverlets covered Namami Gange 11 11 11 11
tion &
15.1 i afforestation for river & riverlets (Ha) Namami Gange 1000 29302 29302 29302
Restoration
of Water 15.1 j Number of lakes taken for treatment - - - -
Bodies
15.1 k afforestation for lakes (Ha) - - - -
15.1 l Number of contour trench, pits & pond (chal-khal) Constructed MPR 2016-17 1020 3000 7000 14000
15.1 m Area covered under pits and ponds (Chal-khal) MPR 2016-17 215 750 1750 3500
15.1 n Soil& Moisture Conservation Namami Gange - 6196.85 6196.85 6196.85
15.1 o Maintenance of Herbal Garden (number) MPR 2016-17 4 4 4 4
15.1 p Protection of Bugyals LS 15 15 15
15.q River front development (ha) Namami Gange - 442.78 442.78 442.78
15.r Bioremediation & Bio filteration (Ha) Namami Gange - 240 240 240
15 s Institutional/Industrial Plantation (ha) Namami Gange - 290 290 290
15.t Ganga Van(Eco Park Development) (ha) Namami Gange - 379.8 379.8 379.8
ANNEXURES | 335

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
15.u Riparian Wildlife Management (ha) Namami Gange - 1620 1620 1620
15.v Brick construction/Tree guard Plantation(ha) Namami Gange 150 150 150
Target By 2020, promote the implementation of sustainable management of all types of forests,
15.2 halt deforestation, restore degraded forests and increase afforestation and reforestation
Afforestation and Reforestation
15.2 a Rate of forest loss and degradation (%) - - - -
15.2 b Handover of forest to leasehold forest groups (000 ha) State has Van Panchayats - - - -
15.2 c Additional plantation (Ha) per annum - - - -
15.2 d Growing of Seedlings (Lakh seedlings) 2015-16 268 810 1890 3780
15.2 e Percentage change in forest cover FSI 2015 -1.1 1 1.49 2
15.2 f Number of Plants raised for schools 2016-17 5.03 15 35 70
(Lakh seedlings)
15.2 g Total tree covered achieved outside forest area ISFR 2015 752 770 800 850
(Sq.Km)
15.2 h Total area covered under different afforestation schemes (Ha) Departmental report (From 2002-03 to 305248 353248 417248 529248
2016-17)
Target 15.3 By 2020, combat desertification, restore degraded land and soil, including land affected
by desertification, drought and foods, and strive to achieve a land-degradation-neutral
world
Combat desertification, restore degraded land and soil
15.3a Identification and management of watersheds 1. Total 1110 Micro-water 286 MWS Treatment 1. Treatment 1. Treatment of
(number) shed (MWS) are situated are being of 286 of 286 286 MWS will
in state excluding district treated MWS MWS will continue till
Haridwar. (ongoing) will be continue 2021-22
2. Out of which 843 MWS continued 2. Project 2. Project
identified for treatment. proposal for proposal for
3. 381 MWSs have been 176 MWS 176 MWS will
treated under EAPs and will be be prepared
CSS and remaining 462 prepared for for financing
MWS will be treated. Out financing 3. Approved
of which 286 MWSs are projects under
being treated under EAPs EAPs and
and CSS and 176 MWS will CSS for 176
be taken up for treatment MWS will be
from 2023-24. implemented

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
15.3b Conservation of watersheds (number) 286 286 300 462

continued
15.3c Reclaim flooded and other degraded land 1.0 2.5 3.5 8.0
(in 000 ha)
15.3d Number of watersheds undergone adaptation practices for soil and water stress 82 110 286 462
management
15.3e Conservation of rivulets and river banks through bioengineering (km) 26.45 67.00 70.00 75.00
15.3f Increase tree/forest cover in degraded area (Hectare) 2481 3500 4500 5200
Target 15.4 By 2030, ensure the conservation of mountain ecosystems, including their biodiversity,
in order to enhance their capacity to provide benefits that are essential for sustainable
development
Conservation of mountain ecosystems, including their biodiversity
15.4a Potentially dangerous glacial lakes (%)
15.4b Mountain ecosystems covered by the protected areas (%) 20% 20% 20% 20%
15.4c Restoration of waterbodies/streams in mountain areas
15.4 d I mprovement of local livelihood (increase in (%))(Livelihood will be generated - 0.5% 0.5% of total 0.5% of total
indirectly, not through department) of total population population
population
15.4 e Increase in per capita income of mountain dwellers 0 0 0 0
Target 15.5 Take urgent and significant action to reduce the degradation of natural habitats, halt
the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect and prevent the extinction of threatened
species
Prevent the extinction of threatened species
15.5a Threatened flora (medicinal and aromatic plants) (%)
15.5b hreatened fauna (mammals, birds, reptiles, amphibians, fishes, insects, platyhel-
T * 4 2%
minths, molluscs, etc.) (%)
15.5 c Wild tigers (number) 340 350 370 390
15.5 d Blackbucks(number) - - - -
15.5 e Red list Index - - - -
15.5 f Number of endangered species
15.5 g Construction of Water Holes (numbers) 49 180 420 840
ANNEXURES | 337

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
15.5 h Removal of lantana (ha) 1640 6000 14000 28000

15.5 i Patrolling for protection (Number) 513 1500 3500 7000
15.5 j Maintenance of Fire lines (Km) 49524 49524 49524 49524
15.5 k Control burning (Ha) 159993 160000 160000 160000
15.5 l Fire watcher (number) 7251 8000 8000 8000
15.5 m Strengthening of Check Posts (number) 36 36 36 36
15.5 n Construction/maintenance of Boundary Pillars (Number) 895 3000 7000 14000
15.5 o Creation of large water bodies for elephant 2 12 28 56
Target 15.6 Ensure fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising from the utilization of genetic
resources and promote appropriate access to such resources
15.6a Poaching of tigers and other wild life prevented to curb the wildlife
15.6b Community led anti-poaching units mobilized (number) Institute community
management of protected
areas
Target 15.7 Take urgent action to end poaching and trafficking of protected species of flora and
fauna and address both the demand and supply sides of illegal wildlife products
Poach- 15.7a Number of poaching cases prevented to curb the wildlife trfficking Forest Circles 33 No target can be fixed since aim of the
ing and department is to minimise poaching or stop
Trafficking poaching
of wild
15.7b Community led anti-poaching units mobilized (number) - 3 7 14
life and
endangered 15.7c Number of detection and prevention of traded wildlife that was
species poached or illicitly trafficked
of flora &
fauna
Target 15.8 By 2020, introduce measures to prevent the introduction and significantly reduce the
impact of invasive alien species on land and water ecosystems and control or eradicate
the priority species
15.8a Percentage change in prevention and control of invasive alien species
15.8.b Nationwide surveys and research on invasive alien plant species (number)
Target 15.9 By 2020, integrate ecosystem and biodiversity values into national and local planning,
development processes, poverty reduction strategies and accounts
15.9a Plant (floral) species under conservation plans (number)

Source/ 2016-17 2017-18 to 2017-18 to 2017-18 to
Notes Baseline 2019-2020 2023-24 2030-31
15.9b Animal (faunal) species under conservation plans (number) 03(Tiger, 03 (Tiger, 03(Tiger, 03(Tiger,
Elephant Elephant Elephant Elephant & Snow
& Snow & Snow & Snow Leopard)
Leopard) Leopard) Leopard)
15.9c umber of department identified covered under the biodiversity programmes
N
directly/indirectly
15.9d Number of schemes identified covered under the biodiversity programmes di-
rectly/indirectly
15.9e Total direct/indirect budgetary allocation under the biodiversity programmes
over the total budget
15.9f Total expenditure(%) against the allocation
15.9g Increase in biodiversity Index
15.9 h1 Ecotourism-- Development of awareness center, information center/ Picnic spots MPR 3 12 28 60
15.9 h2 Ecotourism-- Maintenance of Zoos MPR 3 3 3 3
15.9 h3 Ecotourism-- Strengthening of FRH MPR 1 45 105 175
15.9 h4 Ecotourism-- Maintenance of Van Chetna Kendra MPR 9 20 20 20
15.9 h5 Ecotourism-- Construction of Zoos (Number) MPR 2 3 3 3
15.9 i1 Infrastructure--Strengthening of Forest Roads (Km) MPR 17 roads 375 875 1750
15. 9 i2 Infrastructure--Maintenance of Forest Roads(Km) MPR 487 800 1600 3000
15. 9 i3 Infrastructure-- Maintenance of Bridle Paths (Km) MPR LS 1800 4200 8400
15. 9 i4 Infrastructure-- Construction of Buildings(Number) MPR 2 Part 120 280 560
15. 9 i5 Infrastructure-- Maintenance of Buildings (number) MPR 49 1200 2800 5600
15. 9 i6 Infrastructure-- Construction/Maintenance of Pul/Pulias (Number) MPR - 60 140 280
* Source: "Threatened Birds of Uttarakhand" by Asan r. Rahmani & Dhananjai mohan, and "Indian mammals a field Guide" by Vivek Mohan, Wildlife(Protection)Act 1972.
ANNEXURES | 339
ANNEXURE 15
SDG 16: Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development,
provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable
and inclusive institutions at all levels

Notes 2020 24 31
Target 16.1 Significantly reduce all forms of violence and related death rates everywhere
16.1a Crime against body^ per 100,000 population NCRB* 25.3 Reduce from
baseline
16.1b Crime against women ^^ per 100,000 population NCRB* 28.2 Reduce from
baseline
16.1c Crime against Scheduled Castes per 100,000 population NCRB* 4.9 Reduce from
baseline
16.1d Crime against Scheduled Tribe per 100,000 population NCRB* 2.1 Reduce from
baseline
Target 16.2 End abuse, exploitation, trafficking and all forms of violence against and torture of
children
16.2a Child labour (% of children age 5-17 years)
16.2b Crime against children^^ôver total crime NCRB* 16.5 Arrest/reduce
from baseline
16.2c Number of child abuse/trafficking cases
Target 16.3 Promote the rule of law at the national and international levels and ensure equal
access to justice for all
Target 16.4 By 2030, significantly reduce illicit financial and arms flows, strengthen the recovery
and return of stolen assets and combat all forms of organized crime
Target 16.5 Substantially reduce corruption and bribery in all their forms
16.5a Number of corruption /bribery cases
16.5b Number of trial against corruption/bribery
Target 16.6 Develop effective, accountable and transparent institutions at all levels
16.6a Number of Common Service Centres State Govt 4000 7950
Target 16.7 Ensure responsive, inclusive, participatory and representative decision-making at
all levels
16.7a Voter turnout (%) Media reports 68

Notes 2020 24 31
Target 16.8 Broaden and strengthen the participation of developing countries in the institutions
of global governance
Target 16.9 By 2030, provide legal identity for all, including birth registration
16.9a Percentage of births registered (%)$ Outcome budget 100 100 100 100
Health Dept
16.9b Registration of mothers under ICDS (number) State Govt 1312450 Additional Additional 1 lakh Attain 90%
1 lakh
16.9c Marriage certificate by gender and social groups
16.9d Number of PAN cards issued
16.9e Number of AADHAR cards issued
Target 16.10 Ensure public access to information and protect fundamental freedoms, in
accordance with national legislation and international agreements
*Source: National Crime Record Bureau. The baseline data refer to 2015.
^ Murder, attempt to commit murder, culpable homicide not amounting to murder, attempt to commit culpable homicide, kidnapping and abduction, grievous hurt, causing death by negligence,
causing injury due to rash driving/road rage, dowry death and human trafficking.
^^ Rape, Assault on women with intent to outrage her modesty, Insult to the modesty of women, Cruelty by husband or relatives.
^^^ Foeticide, Infanticide, Procreation of minors, Murder, Exposure and abandonment, Offences under the POCSO Act, the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act etc.
$ The birth registration of children whose births are reported registered under ICDS are 1905085 in number. This is proposed to be increased to 90% by 2030.
References
Acharya, S. (2016). Wages of Unskilled Workers. Paper presented at the Indian Society for Labour Economics,
Guwahati.
Ahluwalia, M., Gupta, H., & Stern, N. (2016). A more sustainable energy strategy of India. Grantham Research Institute for
Climate Change. Retrieved from http://www.lse.ac.uk/GranthamInstitute/wpcontent/uploads/2016/07/A
hluwalia-Gupta-and-Stern-policy-paper-3.pdf
Ahmed, S. (2004). Gender issues in agriculture and rural livelihoods. Kerala Agricultural University and M. S.
Swaminathan Research Foundation. Retrieved from http://59.160.153.185/library/sites/default/files/
Gender%20issues%20in%20agri%20%26%20rural%20livelihood.pdf.
Awasthi, I. C. (2012). Livelihood diversities in mountain economy: Constraints and opportunities. New Delhi: Concept
Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
Banerjee, A; Thomas, P. (2004). Top India Income, 1922-2000. The World Bank Economic Review, 19(1), 1-20.
Bora, R. S. (1996). Himalayan out-migration. New Delhi: Sage Publication.
Brusle, T. (2008). Choosing a destination and work: Migration strategies of Nepalese workers in Uttarakhand, Northern India.
Mountain Research and Development, 28 (3/4), 240-247.
Census of India. (2013). Annual Health Survey 2012-2013 . Uttarakhand: Retrieved from http://www.censusindia.
gov.in/ vital_statistics/ AHSBulletins/ AHS_ Factsheets_201213/FACTSHEET-Uttarakhand.pdf
Central Leprosy Division. (2015). National Leprosy Eradication Programme (NLEP)-monthly progress report 2014-15.
Retrieved from nlep.nic.in/pdf /Progress%20report%2031st%20March%202014-15%20-.pdf
Central Statistics Office (CSO). (2017). Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, Government of India:
Retrieved from http://www.mospi. gov.in/c entral-statistics-office-cso-0
Centre for Health and the Global Environment, Harvard School of Public Health. (2017). Climate Change and
Biodiversity Loss. Retrieved from http://www. chgeharvard. org/topic/threats-biodiversity-and-ecosystems
Committee on Biological Diversity (CBD). (2004). Guidelines on Biodiversity and Tourism Development. Montreal: CBD.
Department of Economics and Statistics. (2014). Uttarakhand at a glance 2013-2014. Dehradun. Government of
Uttarakhand, Dehradun.
Directorate of Economics and Statistics. (2016). Statistical Diary, Uttarakhand, (2014‐15). (Dehradun)
Endow, T., Sekher, T. V., & Lahiri, A. (2015). Cash transfers for children: Experiences of states in India. Paper presented
at the UNICEF and Institute for Human Development, New Delhi.
Envis newletter. (2015). Accessed at http://utrenvis.nic.in/newsletter.html
FAO. (2011). Climate Smart Agriculture: Managing Ecosystems for Sustainable Livelihoods. Retrieved from fao.org/
docrep/015/an177e /an177e00.pdf
FAO. (2016). Livestock and climate change. Retrieved from www.fao.org/cl imate- change
Fordham, M. (2006). Disaster and Development Research and Practice: A Necessary Eclecticism. In H. Rodriguez,
E. L. Quarantelli & R. Dynes (Eds.), Handbook of Disaster Research. New York: Springer.
Geethalakshmi, V., Tesfal, M., Lakshmanan, A., Borrell, A, Nagothu, U.S, Arasu, M. S., Senthilraja, K., and Sumathi,
S. (2015) System of rice intensification: Climate-smart cultivation system to mitigate climate change impacts in India.
In U. S. Nagothu (Ed.), Climate change and agricultural development: Improving resilience through climate smart
agriculture, agroecology and conservation. London: Routledge.
Ghosh, N., Kar, S., & and Sharma, S. (2007). Inequalities of Income Opportunity in a Hilly State: A study of Uttarakhand.
Delhi: Institute of Economic Growth, Delhi University Enclave.
Government of Uttarakhand. (2014). Annual plan-state Planning Commission 2013-14. Retrieved from http://
planningcommission.gov.in/plans/stateplan/Presen tations1314/uttarakh and_2013_14.pdf
Government of Uttarakhand. (2014). State Planning Commission. Retrieved from http://planningcommission.gov.
in/plans/stateplan/Presentations13_14/utta rakhand_2013_14.pdf
Government of Uttarakhand. (2014). Uttarakhand Action plan for Climate Change. Retrieved from http://www.moef.
gov.in/sites/default/files/Uttarakhand %20SAPCC.pdf
Government of Uttarakhand. (2016). Uttarakhand socio-economic mirror.
Himanshu. (2015). Inequality in India. Retrieved from https://www .wider.unu.edu/sites/default/files/Events/
PDF/Slides/Himanshu_seminar_inequality.pdf
Hull, K. (2009). Economic growth, employment and poverty reduction, report on ‘Promoting pro-poor growth: Employment.
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD). Retrieved from https://www. oecd.org/
dac/povertyre duction/43514554.pdf
PB
UTTARAKHAND VISION 2030
ILO. (2015). Decent work. Retrieved from http://www.ilo.org/glo bal/ topics/decent-work /lang--en/index.htm
Integrated Natural Resources Management et al. (2016). Climate change risks and opportunities in Uttarakhand, India.
Retrieved from http://sccc-uk.org/report s/pu blish3r2.pdf
International Institute for Population Sciences. (2006). National family health survey round 3 fact sheet. Mumbai:
Government of India.
Jha, S. N., Vishwakarma R.K., .Ahmad T., & Rai ,A and. Dixit, A.K. (2015). Assessment of quantitative harvest and post-
harvest losses of major crops and commodities in India. Ludhiana.: ICAR All India.
Joshi, M. C. (2007). Hydropower Potential in Uttarakhand. Paper presented at the International Conference on Small
Hydropower - Hydro Sri Lanka.
Joshi, S. (2009). IT and ITES as an engine of growth: An exploration into the Indian experience. New Delhi: Institute of
Economic Growth, University of Delhi Enclave.
Kumar, N., Matthew, H., & Selim, R. Panda,S, (2016). Strategies for achieving the Sustainable Development Goals
(SDGs) in South Asia: Lessons from policy simulations. Retrieved from http://www.unescap.org/sites/default /
files /20160825_SDG%20PolicyStrategies%20South%20Asia_SSWA_DP_1601_final_for%20upload.pdf
Malhotra, M., Chen, Y., Criscuolo, A., Fan, Q., Hamel, I. I., & Savchenko, Y. (2007). Expanding access to finance: Good
practices and policies for micro, small and medium enterprise. Washington DC: World Bank Institute (WBI) Learning
Resources Series, World Bank. Retrieved from https://openknowledge.worldbank. org/handle/10986/6621
Mamgain, R. P. (2007). Growth, Poverty and Employment in Uttarakhand. New Delhi: Institute for Human Development
(IHD). Retrieved from http://www.ihdin dia.org/Working%20Ppaers/2010-2005/pdf%20files/39%20RP%20
Mamga in.pdf.
Mamgain, R. P., & Reddy, D. N. (2016). Out-migration from the hill region of Uttarakhand: Magnitude, challenges and
policy options . Lucknow: Giri Institute of Development Studies (GIDS). Retrieved from http://www.gids.org.
in/Do wnloadMaterial s/WP%20218.pdf
Meadows L. D, Renders, J., & and III Behrens W. W. (1972). Limits to growth. Paper presented at the United Nations
Conference on the Human Environment, Stockholm. Retrieved from http://www. donellameadows.org/wp-
content/ userfiles/Limits-to-Growth-digital-scan-version.pdf
Mehta, M. (1994). The transformation of subsistence agriculture and emerging gender inequities in a central Himalayan
valley, Tehri Garhwal, Uttar Pradesh, India. (dissertation, Boston university).
Mehta, M. (2008). Gender assessment of Uttarakahnd liveihoods improvement project in the Himalayas”. Retrieved
from https://ugvs.org/Download%20Data/ Knowledge%20Managment/aajeevika%202/Gender%20
Assessment%20study.pdf
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare (MOHFW). (2013). A strategic approach to reproductive, maternal, new-born,
child and adolescent health (RMNCH+A) in India: For healthy mother and child. Government of India.
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare and International Institute for Population Sciences. National family health
survey round 4 fact sheet (2015-16). Mumbai: Government of India.
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. (2016). National framework for malaria elimination in India 2016-2030.
Government of India. Retrieved from nvbdcp.gov.in/.../National-framework-for-malaria-elimination-in-
India-2016–2030.p...
Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. (2017). Annual tuberculosis (TB) report of India: National tuberculosis
control programme-annual status report. Government of India. Retrieved from https://tbcindia.gov.in/index1.
php?lang=1 &level =1&sublinkid= 4160&lid=2807
Ministry of Tourism. (2016). Annual report 2015-16. Government of India. Retrieved from http://tourism.gov.in/
sites/default/files/Annual%20 Rreport%202015-16.pdf
OECD. (2012). Linking Renewable Energy to Rural Development. France.: Public Governance and Territorial
Development Directorate. Retrieved from https://www.oecd.org/regional/regional-policy/Renewable-
rural-energysu m mary.pdf
Paroda, R., Dasgupta, S., Mal, B., Ghosh, S. P., & Pareek, S. K. (2014). Expert consultation on promotion of medicinal
and aromatic plants in the Asia-Pacific region. Paper presented at the Bangkok, Thailand.
Planning Commission. (2013). Press note on Poverty Estimates, 2011-12.
Raha, S. (2012). State legislation on right to time-bound delivery of service: An overview. New Delhi: Centre for Policy
Research.
Reddy, D. N. (2016). Outmigration from hill region of Uttarakhand: Magnitude, challenges and policy options. Retrieved
from http://www.nird.org.in/nird _docs/ srsc/srscrr261016-3.pdf
Reddy, K. K., Tesfai, M., Borrell, A., Reddy, K. S., & Reddy, K. S. (2016). Climate smart rice production systems. In U. S.
Nagothu (Ed.), Climate change and agricultural development: Improving resilience through climate smart agriculture,
342
REFERENCES
agroecology and conservation. London: Routledge.

Singh, S. P., & Rastogi, S. K. (2006). Development of small Hydroelectric Projects by UJVNL. Paper presented at the
Himalayan Small Hydropower Summit, Dehradun, Uttarakhand.
United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD). (2015). Climate change and land degradation:
Bridging knowledge and stakeholders. Paper presented at the 3rd Scientific Conference, Mexico. Retrieved from
http://www.unccd.int/Lists/SiteDocumentLibrary/Publications/2015_Climate_LD_Outcomes_CST_Conf_
ENG.pdf,
United Nations Development Programme. (2014). Human Development Report.
United Nations Development Programme. (2016). Human Development Report. Retrieved from http://hdr.undp.
org/en/countries/profiles/IND
Uttarakhand Gramya Vikas Samiti (UGVS) & Uttarakhand Parvatiya Aajeevika Sanvardhan Company (UPASAC).
(2010). Uttarakhand Livelihoods Imrpovement project for the Himalayas- Annual Progress Report. Retrieved from
www.keggfarms.com/.../KF%20Uttarakhand%20project%20-%20Livelihood s%20imp...
Walker, B., Salt, D., & Reid, W. (2006). In resilience thinking: Sustaining people and ecosystems in a changing world.
Washington DC: Island Press.
World Bank. (2007). World Development Report 2008: Agriculture for Development”. World Bank. Washington DC:
Retrieved from https://siteres ources.worldbank.org/INTWDR2008/Resources/WDR_00_book.pdf
World Health Organisation. (2013). Global leprosy update: Reducing disease burden. Retrieved from http://www.
searo.who.int/entity/global_leprosy_program me /dat a/en/.
World Health Organisation. (2015). Non-Communicable Diseases (NCD). Retrieved from http://www.who.int/
nmh/publications/ncd-progress-monitor-2015/ en/
World Resources Institute. (2014). Wetting and drying: Reducing greenhouse gas emissions and saving water from rice
production. Retrieved from http://www.wri.org/sites/default/files/wetting-drying-reducing-greenhouse-
gas-emissions-saving-water-rice-production.pdf
343
PB

Uttarakhand Vision 2030

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uttarakhand Vision 2030

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uttarakhand Vision 2030

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the overall vision for Uttarakhand by 2030?

What is the overall vision for Uttarakhand by 2030?

What are some of the challenges faced by the Uttarakhand economy?

What are some of the challenges faced by the Uttarakhand economy?

Department of Planning

UTTARAKHAND Vision 2030

Printed at: Chauhan Offsets

ISBN No: 978-81-88315-59-8

Chapter 2: Sustainable Livelihoods 39

Appendix 2.3.1: Vision for Targets Under SDG 8 116

Chapter 3: Human Development 127

Chapter 4: Social Development 171

Appendix 4.2.3: Schemes Related to SDG 10 203

Chapter 5: Environmental Sustainability 207

Chapter 6: Resource Mobilisation for Attaining Vision 2030 271

14 May, 2018 Alakh N. Sharma

Overall Guidance and Advice Background Chapter Contributors

Other Theme Contributors

Support and Advisory Team at Department of Planning

Dr. Ranjit Sinha Dr. Manoj Kumar Pant

Shri Ashish Joshi Shri K.K. Pant

DMs District Magistrates

JNNSM Jawaharlal Nehru National Solar Mission

NSSO National Sample Survey Organization

SECC Socio Economic Caste Census

UNWTO United Nations World Tourism Organization

5.8 Strategies to Attain Emission-Related Targets 246

1.1 Per Capita Income Uttarkhand and India 27

2.21 IT Initiatives in Uttarakhand 102

1.1 Evolution of the Concept of Sustainable Development 34

Education: The access to schooling is good, especially The Challenges

Figure E4: Sector-wise Year-on-year Growth Rate (%) in GSDP (at

Figure E5: Framework of Uttarakhand Vision 2030

Focus Areas Aim for 2030

Improve connectivity Improve access in a hilly state by better connectivity

Urban development sector must anticipate and

Enhance human • Provide quality education in schools

A. Horticulture Sector basic inventory of land resources, especially in the

Figure E6: Strategy for Creating Sustainable Livelihoods for Uttarakhand

Education Financial allocation: Cost of education delivery

sources of energy such as small hydro-power, solar Resource Mobilization for

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand Today - Indicators

Uttarakhand 2030 - Indicators

Uttarakhand 2030 - Indicators

Uttarakhand 2030 - Indicators

Uttarakhand 2030 - Indicators

1. Annual Plan 2013-14, State Planning Commission, Government of Uttarakhand.

Table 1.1: Gross State Domestic Product 2011–12 to 2017–18

Figure 1.2: Growth (%) in GDP (at constant 2011-12 prices)

Source: Government of Uttarakhand

3. Manufacturing 40.29 41.07 39.00 39.04 39.60 39.36

Secondary 52.13 52.01 50.59 50.52 50.99 50.40

Industry 53.84 53.67 53.14 52.10 52.44 51.89

Tertiary 33.88 33.91 35.54 37.19 37.47 38.41